Walker's manly exercises; containing rowing, sailing, riding, driving, racing, hunting, shooting, and other manly sports

I

BOHH'S STANDARD LIBRAE

^ Fast 8ro., Elegantly Pr\»ted, and bound in Cloth, at Si.

\<5

><1 1 THE MISCELLANEOUS WORKS AND REMAINS OF THE REV. ROBERT
(J HALL, wit!.

&f 2 & 3. ROSCOE'S LIFE AND PONTIFICATE OF LEO X

i nts, Stc In l- V'olv Portraits.

4- SCHLEGELS LECTURES ON THE PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY. Translated
u the German, with a Memoir by J. li. ROBERTSON, Esq. Portrait.

6 fit 6. SISMONDI'S HISTORY OF "HE LITERATURE OF THE SOUTH OF
EUROPE. Translated by RUSCOK. In 2 Vola. Portraits.

7. ROSCOE'S LIFE OF LORENZO DE MEDICI, with the Copyright Notes, kc.

8. SCHLEGEUS LECTURES ON DRAMATIC LITERATURE. Portrait.

9 &. 11. BECKMANN'S HISTORY OF INVENTIONS, DISCOVERIES, AND
ORIGINS. ' Portraits.

10. SCHILLEfi'S HISTORY OF THE THIRTY YEARS' WAR AND REVOLT
OF THE NETHERLANDS. Translated by A. J. W. Moiuusorr.

12. SCHILLER'S WORKS. Vol.11. [Conclusion of "The Revolt < uids;"

" \V - <:[>;" "The Picco'omini;" "The Death <

'.."'] With Portrait of H'tllenstei*.

13. MEMOIRS OF THE LIFE OF COLONEL HUTCHINSON. By his Widow:

i "Account of the Siege of Luthom House." Portrait.

14. MEMOIRS OF BENVENUTO CELLINI, by HIMSELF. By Rosr

16, 18, &. 22. COKE'S HISTORY OF THE HOUSE OF AUSTRIA, from the

foundation of the Monarchy, 1218—1792. Complete in 3 vola. Por,

10, 19, & 23. LANZIS HISTORY OF PAINTING. By ROSCOK. InSVols. Portraits.

17. OCKLEY'S HISTORY OF THE SARACENS, Revised and Completed. Portrait.

20. SCHILLER'S WORKS. Vol. III. [" Don Carlos," "Mary iid of

;id " Bride of Messina."] Frontispiece.

21, 26, & 33. LAMARTJNE'S HISTORY OF THE GIRONDISTS; or, Memoirs of

the French Kuvo'uuou, fr -d sources. In 3 Vols. Portraits.

24. MACHIAVELLIS HISTORY OF FLORENCE, PRINCE, &c. Portrait.

25 SCHLEGEL'S LECTURES ON THE PHILOSOPHY OF LIFE AND THE
PHILOSOPHY OF LANGUAGE.

27, 32, £ 36. RANK.E'S HISTORY OF THE POPES. Translated 1.;.
\ oia. Portraits. (".

'28, 30, &. 34. COXE'S MEMOIRS OF THE DUKE OF MARLCOROUGH In

. Portraits.

««« ATI.A*, of 2n fine larire Maps and Plans of Marlhorough'i Campai.{n8, (being all thos«
pttblished in the original edition at £l.' 12s.) 4to. .

29. SHERIDAN'S DRAMATIC WORKS AND LIFE. Portrait.

31. GOETHE'S WORKS. -trait.

35. WHEATLEY ON THE COMMON PRAYER, t

37, 39. 40, 81, & 86. MILTON'S PROSE WORKS. 1" Index

!

38,41, & 45. MENZEL'S HISTORY OF GERMANY. C r trait.

42. SCHLEGELS /ESTHETIC AND MISCELLANEOUS

43. GOETHE'S WORKS.

44. SCHILLER S WORK

In'r

BOHN'S STANDARD LIBRARY.

-.0

46. SCHLEGELS LECTURES ON MODERN HISTORY.

47. LAMARTINES HISTORY OF ^HE FRENCH REVOLUTION OF o48
48 St 50. JUNIUS'S LETTERS, with Notes, Additions, Essay, Index, fcc. 1 > _K».

49, 55, CO, (55, 71. VASARI'S LIVES OF THE MOST CELEBRATED PAIN

SCULPTORS, AND ARCHITECTS. Translated by MKS. Jb'osxEJt, with Notes.
, with Index.

61. TAYLORS (JEREMY) HOLY LIVING AND DYING. Portrait.

62. GOETHE'S WORKS. Vol. III. ["Faust," "Iphigenu," "Torquato Tasso,"

and " y Miss SvAMWICK. With " Goetz vou l*«r-

h'chiiu -d by SIB. WALTKII SCOTT.

63. 50, 58. 61, 60, 67, 75, & 82. NEANDER'S CHURCH HISTORY. Carefully

; Kiev. A. J. W. MORRISON. 8 Vols. See Io6, IS?.

64. NEANDEfTS LIFE OF CHRIST.

67, 64. NEANDER'S PLANTING OF CHRISTIANITY, & .AN I IGNOS71KUS,
* Voli.

69. GREGORY'S (DR.) LETTERS ON THE CHRISTIAN RELIGION.

62 & 63. JAMES' (G. P. R.) LOUIS XIV. Complete in 2 Vols. Portraits.

68 & 70. SIR JOSHUA REYNOLDS' LITERARY WORKS, with Memoir, 2 Vols. Port.

69. ANDREW FULLER'S PRINCIPAL WORKS. Portrait.

72. BUTLER'S ANALOGY OF RELIGION, AND SERMONS, with Notes, fcc.

73. MISS BREMER'S WORKS. Translated hy MAKT HOWTTT. N< . -vised.

Vol.1. ours," and other Titles.] Post 8vo. Portrait. 8s. 6d.

74. NEANDER'S MEMORIALS OF CHRISTIAN LIFE IN THE EARLY AND

MIDDLE AGES (including his " Light in Dark Places"). Post 8vo. 3j. 6</.

76. MISS BREMER'S WORKS, by MARY 110WITT. Vol. II. "The President's
rait.

77 ic 80. JOHN FOSTER'S LIFE AND CORRESPONDENCE, edited by j; E.
B.TLAND. In 3 Volumes. Portrait.

78. BACON'S ESSAYS, APOPHTHEGMS, WISDOM OF THE ANCIENTS,

NEW ATALANTIS, AND HENRY VII., with JJiss.- Notes.

trait.

79. GUIZOT'S HISTORY OF REPRESENTATIVE GOVERNMENT, translated

us. With Index.

83. MISS BREMER'S WORKS, by MAKY HOWITT. Vol. III. "The Home, and

84. DE LOLME ON THE CONSTITUTION OF ENGLAND, or, Account of the

•'es, by JOHN MACGRKOOU, M.P.

85. HISTORY OF THE HOUSE OF AUSTRIA, from 1792 to the present time; in

Continuation of COXE. Portrait / the present JKmperur.

87 &, 88. FOSTER'S LECTURES, edited h; ;.. 2 vols.

89- MISS BREMER'S WORKS, by MAKY HOWITT, V<.1 ]v. •• A Diary ; Tho

H -r; Aid and Anna; aud a Letter

abo

90. SMITK -^HEORY OF MORAL SENTIMENTS: and " Esstj ou

n \ 11 r.

01, 95, CO, 99, 102, 103, 105, Be. 106. COWPER S COMPLETE WO

kis 1'ofims, I -., with

;*• on Steel. Complete iu 8 vols.

BOHN'S STANDARD LIBRARY,

92. DANUBIAN PROVINCES.— RANKE'S Hislory of Servia, Servian Revolution
Insurrection in Bosnia, and The Slave Provinces of Turkey. Trans, by Mus. KKKU

03. GOETHE'S ELECTIVE AFFINITIES, SORROWS OF WERTHER, GERMAN
EMIGRANTS, GOOD WOMEN; and A NOUVELETTE,

94. THE CARAFAS OF MADDALONI; Naples under Spanish Dominion. Trans-
lated from the German of ALIKED DK ROUMOHT. Porhait of Mcuauiello.

97, 109, &, 112. CONDE'S HISTORY OF THE ARABS IN SPAIN. Translated

from the Spanish by Mas. FOSTEK. In 3 vols. with copious Index.
98 &. 104. LOCKE'S PHILOSOPHICAL WORKS, containing the Essay on the

Human Understanding, the Conduct of the Understanding, &c., with .Notes by

J. A. ST. JOHN, Esq. General Index and a Portrait. In 2 Vols.
00. HUNGARY; ITS HISTORY AND REVOLUTIONS. With a Copious Memoir

of KOSSUTH, from new and authentic sources. Portrait of Kossnth.
101 &, 113. HISTORY OF RUSSIA to the present time, compiled from K

TOOKE, and SKHUR, by W. K. KKLLY. In 2 vols. with Index, Portraits of Catherine

the Stcond, Nicholas, and Meutschikopf.
107 &. 108. JAMES'S (G. P. R.) LIFE OF RICHARD CCEUR DE LION. Portraits

of Richard and Philip Augustus. Complete in 2 vols.
110 &. 111. SMYTH'S LECTURES ON MODERN HISTORY. New Edition, with

the Author's last corrections, and a General Index. 2 vols.

114. GOETHE'S WILHELM MEISTER S APPRENTICESHIP. Complete.

115. BEAUMONT AND FLETCHER, in a popular form, by LEIGH HUNT.

116. 117. SMYTH'S LECTURES ON THE HISTORY OF THE FRENCH REVO-

LUTION. New edition, with the Author's last corrections, an additional Lecture
and a General Index. Complete in 2 vols.

118. MIGNETS HISTORY OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION, from 1789 to 1814.

119. GUIZOTS HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH REVOLUTION OF 1640-

With a Preliminary Essay on its causes and success. Translated by W. HAZLITT.

120. 121, &. 122. GUIZOTS HISTORY OF CIVILIZATION, from the 1

Roman Empire to the French Revolution. Translated by W. HAZLITT. luo vols.

With Index, and Portraits of M. Guizot, Charlemagne, and Louis IX.
123 & 124. THIERRYS HISTORY OF THE CONQUEST OF ENGLAND BY

THE NORMANS. Translated by W. HAZLITT. In 2 vols. Portraits.
125 &. 126. FOSTER'S CRITICAL ESSAYS. Edited by J. E. RTLAMD. In 2 vols.

127. LUTHER'S TABLE-TALK; With Life by A. CHALMERS. Portrait.

128, 129, 130 &. 131. LAMARTINES HISTORY OF THE RESTORATION.
4 vols. post 8vo., new Edition, with a General Index, and 5 additional Portraits,
viz., Laruartine, Talleyrand, Lafayette, Ney, and Louis XVII. Cloth.

132. CARREL'S COUNTER-REVOLUTION IN ENGLAND— FOX'S HISTORY OF

JAMES II.— And LORD LONSDALE'S MEMOIR OF JAMES II. Pur.

133. STURM'S MORNING COMMUNINGS WITH GOD, or Devotional Medita-

tions for Every Day in the Year.
134- FOSTERIANA: THOUGHTS, REFLECTIONS, and CRITICISMS of the late

JOHN FOSTER, (Author of Essays of Decision of Character, Popular Ignorance,

Sec.), selected from periodical papers not hitherto published in a collective form,

and edited liv HENRY G. UOIIN. (Nearly 600 pages), os.

LIFE AND LETTERS OF JOHN LOCKE; with Extracts from his Letters an !

Common-Place Books, by LORD KING. New Edition, with general Index.
136 8c 137. NEANDER'S CHURCH HISTORY, translated from the German.

Vol. IX., which completes the work. With a general Index to the mne volumes.

In two parts, oj. C>d. each.
138 &. 139. NEANDER'S HISTORY OF CHRISTIAN DOGMAS. Translated from

the German, by J. E. RVJ.AND. Complete in -2 vols.

140. THIERRY'S HISTORY OF THE TIERS ETAT, or Third Estate, in France.

2 vols. in 1. i>s.

141. SCH^EGEL'S LECTURES ON THE HISTORY OF LITERATURE, Ancient

and Modern. Completely translated, with a General Index.

142. MICHELET'S HISTORY OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION,'^ the FlMit of

the King in l?Jl (tiifi pages.)

BONN'S SCHOOL AND COLLEGE SERIES.

* 1. THE NEW TESTAMENT IN GREEK- Gricsbach's text, with the various n-auin -
of Mill and.- •, and i'arallel References ill the margin ; alst> -

2 Critical Introduction and Chronological Tables. By an Eminent Scholar, With rr.' '••','

5 Manuscripts. Post 8vo. (650 pages] cloth, :>.y. Gd. Or, ST '.',/'•'

^ with a complete Greek and English Lexicon to the New" Testament (250 pages f.' '*>

additional), is. *?•' \;

UNIFORM WITH THE STAKDARD LIBRARY, ip

-SAULD'S (MRS.) SELECTIONS FROM THE SPECTATOR, TATLER, §C*>''v
GUARDIAN, AND FREEHOLDER. In 2 Vols. 3*. Gd. per Volume. ^^

BRITISH POETS. fr»m MILTON to KIKKK WHITK, Cabinet Edition, comprising, in a
very small but remarkalily clear type, as much matter as the sixty volumes of
Johnson's i'oets. Complete in 4 Vols. Frontispieces. 145.

^g GARY'S TRANSLATION OF DANTE. Extra cloth. It. Gd.

$2 CATTERMOLE'S EVENINGS AT HADDON HALL, 24 exquisite Engraringa on

, i'rom Designs by himself. Post 8vo. Is. Gd.

& CHILLINGWORTH S RELIGION OF PROTESTANTS. 3*. Gd.

K§ CLASSIC TALES; comprising the Vicar of Wakefield, Elizabeth, Paul and Virginia,

.'(3 Gulliver's Travels, Sterne's Sentimental Journey, Sorrows of \Verter, Theodosius

and Constaiitia, Castle of Otranto, and Rasselas. 12iuo. 7 Portraits. 3s. Gd.
Q DEMOSTHENES. Translated by LELAND. Portrait. 3s.
| DiCKSON AND MOWBRAY ON POULTRY, Edited by MRS. LOUDON, Illustra-

;iy HAUVKY, (including the Cochin-China Fowl), os.

:;f HORACE'S ODES AND EPODES, translated literally and rhythmically by the RCT.
\V. SEWKI.L. :>j. Gd.

^ IRVING'S (WASHINGTON) WORKS. Complete in 10 Vols. II las., or 3*. Gd. per vol.

3 JOYCES INTRODUCTION TO THE ARTS AND SCIENCES. 3*. Gd.
;& LAMARTINES THREE MONTHS IN POWER. Sewed, 2s.

*3 LAMARTINE'S POETICAL MEDITATIONS AND RELIGIOUS HARMONIES,
|>liieal Sketch. Puriralt. Cloth, 3j. Gd.

| LAWRENCE'S LECTURES ON COMPARATIVE ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY,
••* ZOOLOGY, AND THE NATURAL HISTORY OF MAN. Plates, as.

£ LILLY'S INTRODUCTION TO ASTROLOGY. A New and Improved Edition, by
•*» ZADKIF.L, with his Grammar of Astrology, and Tables of Nativities, os.

I LO'JDON'S (MRS.) ENTERTAINING NATURALIST; a Description of more than
Hundred Animals, with Indexes of Scientific and Popular Names. With
vjjtcai-ds uf idi> Undents, by BtwicK, HAKVJI, Sec, Is. Gd.

'•% 'rfiLLER'S PHILOSOPHY OF HISTORY. Third Edition, 4, vols., 3*. Gd. each.
& MITFORD'S (MISS) OUR VILLAGE- New Edition, with Woodcuts, and beautiful

\\ cloth. 2 Vols., each os.

'0| PARKES' CHEMICAL CATECHISM. New Edition, with Woodcuts, Zs.Gd,
lAKSPEARE'S PLAYS AND POEMS, by CHALMKKS, in 1 Vol., 3^. Gd.

the lame, with 40 Steel Engravings, cloth, gilt edges, 5j.

^STANDARD LIBRARY CYCLOPEDIA OF POLITICAL, CONSTITUTIONAL,
STATISTICAL, AND FORENSIC KNOWLEDGE. 4 Vols., 85. Gd. each.

by Mr. Charles Knij'nt, under the title of Political Dictionary, at jr;i IGs. 'J'lie Compiler,
MR. 0 , is one of the most competent Scholar! of the day.

•® UNCLE TOM'S CABIN, with Introductory Remarks by the RKV. J. SHERMAN,
-d in a large clear type, with head-lines of Content?). 2s. Gd.

u iine paper, with 8 new Illustrations by LEECH and GILKKET,

and a beatiti, - •• by 11 INCHI.IFK. ?,s. Gd.

^THE WIDE. WIDE WORLD, by KU/.ABKTII WETIIEKKLL. Complete iu 1 Volume
r.^ with Frunlisflect, gik edges, oj. Gd.

'rg The satae. inth 9 highly finished Engravings on Steel, 5s.

T3I N 56

mmmm

BOHNS SCIENTIFIC LIBRARY.

Uniform with the STANDARD LIBRARY, price 5*., excepting tkost marked otherwise.

1. STAUNTON'S CHESS PLAYER'S HAND-BOOK, vith

2. LECTURES ON PAINTING, i>y THE HOYAL ACADEMICIANS.

-3, 4, 8, & 15. HUMBOLDT'S COSMOS; or, f ! Description of

, by E. C. OITK. In 4 Vols., vith fine
\ (though pii w a price) is

tli the text, llumboldt's an

••-.), arc included; and comprehensive
!u me.

5. STAUNTON'b CHESS PLAYER'S COMPANION, comprising a New Treatise on
Odds, B, See.

0. HAND-BOOK OF GAMES, by VARIOUS AMATEURS and PROFESSORS.
7. HUMBOLDTS VIEWS OF NATURE, vi.lt cvlmred «Vv .-••/, j-c.

9. RICHARDSON'S GEOLOGY, AND PAL/tONTCLOGY, Rcrised by Dr. WRIGHT,

vith uptcardt of 400 Illustrations on II

10. STOCKHARDT'S PRINCIPLES OF CHEMISTRY, Exemplified in Simple Expe-
riments, v-i!h up i's of 270 I II tu trail

ill. DR. C. A. MANTELL'S PETRIFACTIONS AND THEIR TEACHINGS; A
. ••-•-?. 6*.

. 12. AGASSIZ AND GOULD'S COMPARATIVE PHYSIOLOGY. >"ew a*d K.i
Illustration*.

;is, 19. &. 28. HUMSO'LDTS PERSONAL NARRATIVE OF HIS TRAVELS IN
AMERICA. \Villi G,-neral Index.

14. PYE SMITHS GEOLOGY AND SCRIPTURE. ' Fifth Edition, with Memoir.
16 OERSTEDS SOUL IN NATURE, &c. 1'
17. STAUNTONS CHESS TOURNAMENT .;ni.

18 & 20. BRIDGEWATER TREATISES. KIRK- ;fory, Habits and

Animals; Editi-d hy T. Rvn KR JOMCS. In 2 Vols. Mann

21. BRIDGEWATER TREATISES. Krou On the Adaptation of ]\

Nature to the 1'liy

22. BRIDGEWATER TREATISES. WHK-.VEM.'S' Astronomy and Genera! Phvsics

with reference to Natural Theoloirv. Portrait of the Earl of
Jlridgeu-attr. o*. r»l.

23. SCHOUW'S EARTH, PLANTS, AND MAN, and KOBELL'S SK^TCHFS

FROM THE MINERAL KINGDOM, Translated by A. HK.>FRKY K K -

24. BRIDGEWATER TREATISES. CHALMKKS on the Adaptation of External

Moral and Intellectual Congtitution of Man, wivL the Autuo,
. ml Biographical Sketch by the REV. Du. CUMMIMG

25' BCon??efe w^N^i^-^D^Y tfj ADVANCEMENT OF LEARNING.
26 &. 27. HUMPHREY'S COIN COLLECTOR'S MANUAL: a popular introduction
highly

29. COMTE'S PHILOSOPHY OF THE SCIENCES, Edited from the « Cours de

30. MANTELL'S (1'K.) GEOLOGICAL EXCURSIONS, including THE I«LE OF

WIGHT. New Edition, by T. RuPKRTJoNKs. ,/ Hap

81. HUNT'S POETRY OF SCIENCE: ical Phenomena of

32 & 33. ENNEMOSER'S HISTORY OF MAGIC. Translated from the German by

[•J-T In 2 Vois

34. HUNTS ELEMENTARY PHYSIC •-</*.

35. HANDBOOK OF DOMESTIC MEDICi ?

36. STANLEYS CLASSIFIED SYNOPSIS of Dutcli

87. BRIDGEWATER TREATISES i -7) and th

38. JOYCE'S SCIENTIFIC DIALOGUES. . -^mpletcd m

. uie of kiiov...

SCIENTIFIC LIB::

A 39. STOCKHARDTS AGRICULTURAL CHEMISTRY, Addressed to Farmer*.

BLAIR'S CHRONOLOGICAL TABLES, EKVISKU ANT, r .M .- 1; c • n : compre-
;.ml History of tlie ' , llossB,

*5 41. BOLLEY'S MANUAL OF TECHNICAL ANALYSIS; a (J«i«lc for the Testing of

d Substances, by B. II. PA;
'? 42&47. MANTELL'S WONDERS OF' GEOLOGY; 7th edit.

g. Coloured G

^ 4S&46. CARPENTER'S ZOOLOGY; revised acd comphUd to the present time.

-.each. With many hundre . .'.vinj:i.

9 44. CARPENTER'S CHEMICAL PHILOSOPHY, ASTRONOMY &. HOROLOGY.

With 181 Illustrations.

•^ 45 &. 54- INDEX OF DATES, comprehending the principal Facts in the ChromU^ and

• to the present time. By J. AV. KossK,
l!J •.rininy i/ne very th:

••£ 48 & 49. MANTELL'S MEDALS OF CREATION ; or lirst Lessoni in Geology and
;Q| :-nic Remains. 2 v</- -nits. Ibs.

& 50. HUM CO LOTS COSMOS. Vol. V. Terrestrial Phenomena, Volcanoes,
^3| quakes, Springs, !ci

| 61. CARPENTER'S VEGETABLE PHYSIOLOGY AND SYSTEMATIC BOTANY-

Ne»' ! ravings. GJ.

* 62. DEJUSSIEU'S ELEMENTS OF BOTANY. By J. H. WILSON. 750 woodcuts.
£ 63. CARPENTER'S ANIMAL PHYSIOLOGY. With 300 Illustrations. 6s.
'^» 55. CHEVREUL ON COLOUR : its Harmony, Contrast and Application. By CUAKLES

MARTKI.. ion which gives" the entire work.) Plates, 5$.~

•75 Or, with the addition of 16 coloured plates, 7s. G</.

:2 66. MORPHY'S GAMES OF CHESS. By J. LOWKNTHAI,. Portrait and Memoir.
•"2 57. STAUNTON'S CHESS PRAXIS; A SUPPLEMENT TO THE CHESS
PLAYER'S HANDBOOK; containing a revised Code of Chesa Laws and
Jlorphy's Games, bs.

BONN'S ILLUSTRATED LIBRARY.

' . ;iu LiBUARY, al as. p:r illume.
1 to 8. LODGE'S PORTRAITS OF ILLUSTRIOUS PERSONAGES OF GREAT

3

9. CRUIKSHANK'S THREE COURSES AND DESSERT, with 50 Utitxti^dons.
3 10- PICKERING'S RACES OF MAN. With numerous Portraits, (or c
» 11, KITTO'S SCRIPTURE LANDS, AND BIBLICAL ATLAS, with 2

. 6/.

' 12. WHITE'S SELBORNE, by Sin WJLLIAM JARDI.NE and E.JESSE. 40 fins
A Enijr r, coloured, 7^- d/.

I 13. DIDRON'S CHRISTIAN ICONOGRAPHY. With 150 Engravings. Vol. I.

REDDING ON WINES. New sunl Revised Edition, wi/A 20 bcmiiifi'l li'u^-.icnts.
.1 15 & 16. ALLEN'S BATTLES OF THE BRITISH NAVY. New Edition, i
Qj by th Vols.

a 17 8c 18. ROME IN THE NINETEENTH CENTURY. Fifth Edition, in 2 Vols.,

j 19. MAXWELLS VICTORIES O' WELLINGTON AND THE BRITISH ARMIES,\

with

•^ 20. LIFE OF WELLINGTON, by " A \ R," compiled from the materials of

. •

* 21. MARY AND WM. HOWITTS STORIES OF ENGLISH AND FOREIGN LIFE,

* 22. BECHSTEINS CA^, MBER BIRDS, including Swrtr't, Warblers.
'< 23. NORWAY AND ITS SCENERY,

•iy, price 2«.

•^l££

BOHN'S ILLUSTRATED LIBRARY.

^^^^^r^~~ ^~ ,^V~N/V~^~V-»~X~~N~^~V~~ '

24. CHINA: PICTORIAL, DESCRIPTIVE, AND HISTORICAL, with some account f

of Avsi and the l{urmr«rp Main and Aiiam. lllmtntted In/ lc

25. PICTORIAL HANDBOOK OF LONDON. With 20

26. MARY HOWITT'S PICTORIAL CALENDAR OF THE SEASONS.

27. DANTE, translated into English Verse by I. C. WEIGHT, M.A. Third

carefully revised. Portrait, and :U Illustrations on Steel, after FI,A\
28 &. 29. MUDIE'S BRITISH BIRDS- 2 Vols., with oZfywet

(Or, vitk the Plates Coloured, Is. C>J. per Vol.) •&

30. TASSO'S JERUSALEM DELIVERED, translated into English Verse, by J. II. £

WIFTE*. 4th Edition. 11 Engravings on Wood, and

31. INDIA: PICTORIAL, DESCRIPTIVE, AND HISTORJCAL, from the En;

Times to the Present. Map and upward* of 100 Enyrarintjs on

32. NICOLINI'S HISTORY OF THE JESUITS. Portraits of Loyola, Lainez, Xavier,

Borgia, Acquaviva, 1'rre la Chai»e. Kirci, and Pope Ganganelli.

33. ROBINSON CRUSOE, with lllustratipiis by STOTHAED aud HABVBY, 12 Icautiful

£ngratings on ttecl, and 74 on Wood.

34. WALKER'S MANLY EXERCISES; containing Skating, Riding, Driving E

Sailing, Rowing, Svrimming,-2tc. Tenth Edition, revised, with numerous Plates.

35. MILLER'S HISTORY OF^ THE ANGLO-SAXONS, on the basis of SHAROW

TLR.IKR. Portrait of Alfred, Map, and 12 Engravings on Steel after Harvey.

36. MICHAEL ANGELO AND RAPHAEL. By J)UPPA and QI-ATRKMERK DE

QUINCT. Vv'ith 18 lu'glily-finished Engravings, including the Cartoons.

37. WALTON'S COMPLETE ANGLER ; with Notes, practical and historical. Edited

by HD. in**K and HENRY G. BOHN. Embellished with 203 Engravings on Wood,
priceSf.; — or with the addition of 26 Engravings on Steel, 7*. »!</.

38. MARRYAT'S MASTERMAN READY; with 93 Engravings on Wood.

39- TALES OF THE GEN 1 1. With numerous Wood cuts and 12 Steel Engravings.
40. GUIDE TO THE KNOWLEDGE OF POTTERY AND PORCELAIN: torn-

prising the BERNAL CATALOGUE, wil ^ames; an Introducto

the knosrii Mnrk-* and M»: ii. G. J3onx.

44. POPE'S HOMER'S ODYSSEY. With the Battle of Frogs and Mice, Hymns, &c., p:
by other Translators, including CHAPMAN. With Flaxman's Des

45 &. 50. POPE'S POETICAL WORKS, edited by UOBKST CARRUTHKXS. New *
Edition, revised. With numerous Engravings on Wood. In 2 volumes.

£

^
"

c

46. STUART AND REVETTS ATHENS and other MONUMENTS OK GREECE.

71 Plates and numerous Woodcut Capitals. To which is added a Gl>
47- LINDSAY'S (LORD) LETTERS ON EGYPT AND THE HOLY LAND. Fifth

Edition, with additions, and oC Wood Engravings and Maps.
48 & 52. ARIOSTO'S ORLANDO FURIOSO, in English Verse, by W. S. HOSE.

With Portrait and 12 tine Engravings on Steel. Complete in 2 vols.
49. KRUMMACHER'S PARABLES. 40 Illustrations by CLAYTON and PAT./IKL.
51. LEIGH HUNT'S BOOK FOR A CORNER, 80 Wood Engravm-s.
53. HOLBEIN'S DANCE OF DEATH, AND BIBLE CUTS; upwards of 150 wood

engravings. x> vols. in 1. 7*. 6rf.

5s— Or, wi-

54. JESSE'S ANECDOTES OF DOGS, with Additions and Woodcuts

the addition of 34 gteel Engravings, 7*. 6rf.

55. STARLING'S (MISS) NOfi'LE DEEDS OF WOMAN. 14 steel Engravings.

56. BUTLER'S HUDIBRAS, with variorum n

woodcuts, 6*.— Or, with 62 Portraits. Bound in 2 vols. 10*.

57. THE YOUNG SPORTSMAN'S MANUAL; OR RECREATIONS IN

SHOOTING. By CRAVEN. With I ;-. on Wood, and (jc;

58. PETRARCH'S SONNETS, TRIUMPHS, and other POEMS.
THOMAS CAMPBELL. 16 1

59. THE YOUNG LADY'S BOOK: a Manual of Elegant Recreations, Arts,

and Accomplish)!!! .

60. PARIS AND iTS ENVIRONS, H.

61. CATTERMOLE'S HADDON HALL 21-engrav;

62. GIL BLAS. with 34 en SlIlBKE and < C.N-.

63. THE RELIQUES OF FATHER PROUTS. With 21 K. 7*. 6d.

64. MARRYAT'S MISSION, or SCENES in AF1UCA. AVith en-ravings.

WALKER'S

MANLY EXERCISES

AND

RURAL SPORTS.

EDITED BY « CKAVEN."

[LING. ROW:

DRIVING, RIDING, HUNTING,
[KG/SWIMMING,

mma V.\ , CLIMBING,

RUNNING,

WALKER'S
MANLY EXERCISES;

COSTAIXING

Kctoing, failing. Kitting, Bribing, t-vacing, fijuuttng,
Sfloottng.

AND OTHER MANLY SPORTS.
THE WHOLE CAREFULLY KEVISED, OK WK1TTEN,

BY "CRAVEN."

TENTH EDITION.

LONDON:

H. G. BOHN, YORK STREET, COVENT GARDEN.
1860.

EDITOR'S PREFACE.

THE publishers of the present Edition of this popular little
volume had a double purpose in entering upon the undertak-
ing,— namely, to offer a carefully-revised copy of WALKER'S
MANLY EXERCISES, and an outline of RURAL SPORTS, to which
they serve as the best elementary introduction. As the exe-
cution of that design was committed to me, I can only allude
to the nature of the task, and hope that I have not quite failed
in the enterprise. This I may be permitted to say, — that if
the publishers' desire to make the work a source of instructive
and rational amusement be realized, even to the tithe of its
extent and earnestness, the labour of his Editor will not have
been wholly without success.

CRAYEN.

vn* CONTENTS.

*AOE

LEAPING ...... .42

The High Leap . . . . . . . 42

Feats in High Leaping .... .44

The Long Leap . . . . . . . 4-1

Feats in Long1 Leaping .... .43

The Deep Leap . . . . . . . 46

The Deep Leap backwards from a rest on the hands . . 46

VAULTING . ... 48

Oblique Vaulting . . ... 48

Straight-forward Vaulting . . . . . . 4f

Leaping with a Pole ..... .50

The High Leap with a Pole . . . 50

The Long Leap with a Pole .... .54

The Deep Leap with a Pole . . . 5 3

BALANCING . ..... .56

Position and Action in Balancing . . . i7

Turns in Balancing ..... .57

CARRYING WEIGHT . . . €0

THROWING THE Discus .... .62

CLIMBING, in all its divisions . . . 64
SKATING ... ... 69

Construction of the Skate . . . 6s

Dress of the Skater .... .72

Preliminary and General Directions . . 72

The Ordinary Run, or Inside Edge Forward . . .73

The Forward Roll, or Outside Edge . . 75

Figure of Three, or Inside Edge Backward . .76

Outside Edge Backward . . . . . . 77

The Back Roll ..... ?s

Dangers of Skating . . . . . . 80

Treatment of Drowned Persons ... .80

AQUATIC EXERCISES.

SWIMMING . . . . . 82

Preparatory Instructions ..... 8:5

Place and time for Swimming . . . . . ;-.>

Dress ...... .80

Aids . . . . . . . . 86

Cramp ...... .87

Entering the Water . . . . 88

Buoyancy in the Water . .88

Attitude and Action in the Water . . . 91

Respiration in Swimming .... .91

CONTENTS. IX

MM

Coming out of the Water . . . .92

Upright Swimming . . , . . 92

Treading Water . . .95

Hack Swimming . . . 95

Floating . . . . .90

Side Swimming . . . 97

Plunging . . 97

Diving . . . . 98

Thrusting . 99

Springing- . . . 99
One-arm Swimming1 .... 100

Feats in Swimming . . . 100

ROWING, in all its kinds . . . .101
SAILING, with notices of the Yacht Clubs, and General Directions . 106

RIDING.

The Horse and Equipments . . . 122

Mounting and Dismounting . . . 126

The Seat . . . . .129

The Balance . . . 131

The Rein Hold . . . .152

The Correspondence . . . . . 134
The Action . ... 135

The Hand . . . 135

The Aids . . . . .158

Animations, Soothings, and Corrections . . . 142

The Walk . . . . .144

The Trot . . . 147

Road Riding . . . . .150

The Gallop . . . 152
Leaping ..... 156

Critical Situations . . . . 159

Treatment of the Horse . . . .165

Driving . . . . 170

The Road . . . . .175

Cam . . . . . 176

Coach Horses . . 118

Harness . 185

Relative Prices of Horses . 189

Coachmen . . . 193

Mounting and Dismounting . . .198

TheS-.it . . . 199

Stnrting . . . . .199

The 1 ... 200

i. CONTENTS.

**oa

The Time .... 201

The "Whip .... 202

Thoroughfares, Passing, &c. . . 207

Ascending and Descending Hills . . . 206

The Turnings . . . . .213

The Ranks in Town . . 214

Stops . . . . .215

Accidents to Horses . , . . 215
Accidents to Coaches .... 21"

Obstructions, Offences, and Injuries . . . 221

RACING . , • . .223

HUNTING . . • . . 239

SHOOTING « . '2K

LIST OF PLATES

FRONTISPIECE.

V'ONETTK.

PLATKS.

I. .

II. to VII. .
VIII. .
IX-

X. .

XI.

XII. & XIII.

XIV. & XV.

XVI. . .

XVII. .

XVIII. .

XIX. . .

XX. .
XXL .

XXII. . .

XXIII. .

XXIV. . .

XXV. . .

XXVI. .
XXVII.
XXVIII.

Position — Extension Motion.-.

Indian Club Exercises.

Walking.

Running.

Leaping.

Vaulting.

Pole Leaping.

Balancing.

Carrying Weight.

Throwing the Discus.

Climbing.

Skating.

Swimming— Atti iude.

„ Action of the Hando.

»» ft Feet.

Buoyancy in Water— Trending VVaur

,, Back Swimming.

., Side Swimming— Floating.

>, Plunging.

» Diving.

>. Thrusting.

Xll LIST OF PLATES.

PLATES.

XXIX. . . Rowing— Fig. I. Beginning of the Pull.

Fig. II. Middle of the PulJ.

XXX. . . „ Fig. I. End of the Pull.— Fig. II. Return of SculU

XXXI. . . Fig. I. Mariner's Compass.— Fig. II. Plan of a Vessel's Deck.

XXXII. . Fig. I. Parts of a Pleasure Boat at Anchor.

Fig. II. Boat before a Light Breeze.

XXXIII. . Fig. I. Boat with Breeze on Larboard Beam.

Fig. II. Boat close to the Wind on Starboard Tack.

XXXIV. . Horse Equipments.

XXXV. . Fig. I. Parts of the Horse.— Fig. II. First View of Mounting.

XXXVI. . Fig. I. Second View of Mounting.— Fig. II. The Seat.

XXXVII. . The Rein Hold.

XXXVIII. . Fig. I. The Walk.— Fig. II. The Stop.

XXXIX. . Fig. I. The Trot.— Fig. II. Road Riding.
XL. . . The Canter.

XLI. . . The Rise in Leaping.

XLII. . . The Fall in Leaping.

XLIII. . . Four Horse Harness.

XLIV. . The Rein Hold in Driving

IMPORTANCE OF PHYSICAL EXEECISES.

EDUCATION may be divided into two parts, physical and
mental. Of the former. EXERCISES or GYMNASTICS are the
most extensive and the earliest portion.

THEIR EXTENT is learnt by an enumeration of them, viz.,
Walking, Running. Leaping, Vaulting, Pole-leaping, Balancing,
Skating, Carrying, Climbing, and Swimming. We have added
Throwing the Diseus; and, in a course of British Exercises,
we think Rowing, Sailing, Riding, and Driving, \vould be vt-rv
improperly omitted.

The object of these Exercises is to strengthen the muscular
system, by subjecting it to a regular process of training, and to
teach the means of employing it most advantageously. The
expediency of theij early acquisition is rendered evident by the

n

2 IMPORTANCE OV PHYSICAL EXEUCISES.

first tendency of youth being directed to them, by the rapid
progress made in them, and by the delight derived from them,
at a period when the body is incapable, with real or solid ad-
vantage, of higher acquirements.

Their general utility will be questioned only by those whc
are not aware that the health and vigour of all the bodily organs
depend on the proportioned exercise of each. In active exer-
tion, the member exercised swells with the more frequent anc
more copious flow of blood, and heat is developed in it witl
greater abundance; and if we repeat the same motions man)
times after intervals of repose, all the muscles exercised become
permanently developed; a perfection of action ensues in the
member exercised, which it did not previously possess, any de-
formity by which it is affected is corrected, and strength ant
activity are acquired. That man, therefore, gains the most
strength who engages in muscular exercises that require the
application of much power, but which are sufficiently separatee
by intervals of repose.

It must be remembered, however, that, in exercising parti-
cular muscles only, the others become weak. The strength oi
Marshal Saxe wras sufficiently great to stop a chariot drawn al
speed by four horses, by merely seizing the wheel : he bent
pieces of silver with his fingers, made them into boats as he
would with paper, and presented them to the ladies. Counl
Orloff, a Russian general, broke the shoe of a carriage horse ir
the same manner; and there are innumerable examples oi
similar feats of extraordinary strength.

Active exercises, at the same time, confer beauty of form ;
and they even contribute to impart an elegant air and graceful
manners. If the exercise of a limb be continued for some time,
the member swells, a painful sensation is experienced, which is
termed lassitude, and a difficulty of contraction, which is the
result of it. If the motion has been excessive, and the organic
elements in the member have been acted upon beyond all phy-
siological laws, inflammation would take place, and its functions
be performed with great difficulty, if at all.

IMPORTANCE OK PHYSICAL EXKKCISKS. iJ

Such are the effects of exercise on the locomotive system, to
all the functions of animated beings, so long as they are exer-
cised with moderation, equality, and at due intervals, working
for their own preservation. Of course, the general effect of
active exercises is marked in proportion to the number of parts
that share in the motion, or are brought into energetic action.
In general exercise, the increase of organic action is not con-
fined solely to the parts which are the seat of muscular con-
traction, but is repeated throughout all parts of the economy,
and influences all the functions.

Thus, as to the vital or nutritive system, exercises taken when
digestion is not going on, excite the digestive faculty: taken
during its progress, they disorder that function. The arterial
and venous circulations become more rapid by active exerevise,
which concludes by giving greater force to the tissue ot the
heart. It is the same with respiration and calorification. The
same takes place with regard to nutrition, a function which ex-
ercise increases, not only in the muscles in movement, as we
have just seen, but also in the bones, ligaments, vessels, and
nerves.

By inducing cutaneous exhalation, it promotes the expulsion
of injurious agents, produces a fresh colour in persons who may
have become pale through a sedentary life, and, to a certain ex-
tent, renders the human constitution, by means of habit, proof
against the action of surrounding objects. The local effects of
excessive action, or those which take place in the members
themselves, are, as before observed, inflammation of the muscles,
rheumatism, like that arising from cold, and inflammation of the
serous articular membranes. The general effects of excessive
exercise may, in the same manner as all physical and moral
stimulants, exhaust the vital faculties too quickly, communicate
too much rigidity to the fibres, render the vessels varicose, bring
on chronic rheumatism, destroy the freshness of the skin, blight
i ! <• flower of youth, and produce old age and death before the
time- ordained by nature.

Ancient writers inform us that it was a rare thing to meet

4 IMPORTANCE OF PHYSICAL EXERCISES.

with athletes, who, having signalized themselves from thei
earliest youth in gymnastic combats, were of so excellent a con
stitution as to be able, when they had reached a more advancec
age, to acquire the same honours on contending for the priz<
with grown men. Aristotle assures us, that amongst the con
querors in the Olympic Games, not more than two or three a
the most could be found to whom nature had granted such ai
advantage.

In relation to the mental or thinking system, " every move
rnent," says Cabanis, " becomes in its turn the principle o:
occasion of new impressions, of which the frequent repetitioi
and the varied character must increase more and more the circh
of our judgments, or tend unceasingly to rectify them. It henc<
follows that labour, giving to this word the most general signi
fication, cannot but have an influence infinitely useful on th(
habits of the understanding, and consequently also on those o
the will." This argument is evidently applicable to varied ex-
ercise. On the contrary, " the great division of labour, so favour-
able to the perfecting of the arts, contracts more and more tht
understanding of workmen." Exercises, moreover, inspire con-
fidence in difficult situations, and suggest resources in danger
Their consequent influence upon the moral conduct of man is
such, that, by a courage which is well founded, because it springs
from a perfect knowledge of his own powers, he is often enablec
to render the most important services to others.

Although the direct effect of exercise is not only to confei
power on the muscular and other organs, but to multiply ex-
ternal impressions, and to occupy with them all the senses ai
once ; still minds thus disposed, in general occupy themselves
rather with objects of imagination and sentiment, than witli
those which demand more complicated operation. The sense oJ
muscular power impresses determinations which, carrying man
perpetually out of himself, scarcely permit him to dwell upon
impressions transmitted to his brain. The only action of that
organ, during these exercises, seems to be limited to ordering
the movements.

IMPORTANCE OF PHYSICAL EXKHCISES. 5

Hence, exercise, especially taken in the open air. amidst new
and varied objects of sight, is not favourable to reflection — to
labours which demand the assemblage and concentration of all
the powers of the mind. It is, on the contrary, in the absence
of external impressions, that we become more capable of seizing
many relations, and of following a long train of purely abstract
reasoning. As life spent chiefly in active muscular exercises
would leave in a state of repose those central organs that are
subservient to the moral qualities and intellectual faculties, I
agree with Seneca and Camper, in proscribing all such exer-
cises, or such degrees of exercise, as would exhaust the mind,
and render man incapable of aptitude in science, polite litera-
ture, and art.

The cultivation of bodily strength, in preference to every
thing else, would establish only the right of the strongest, as it
is found to exist in the origin of society. To cultivate the
faculties of the mind exclusively, would produce only the weak-
ness of sentiment or excess of passion. There is, for every indi-
vidual, a means of making all these dispositions act in harmony;
and the due blending of physical and moral education alone can
produce it. Let it be remembered that young persons will
much more easily be withdrawn from the application they ought
to pay to the study of the sciences, by insipid recreations and
trifling games, than by the fatiguing exercises necessary for their
developement and the preservation of their health, which, how-
ever, habit soon renders easy and delightful. To what vices
do not a sedentary life and the practice of gaming give rise ?
— whilst well-regulated exercises excite ambition to excel, and
energy in the performance of every duty.

The philosophers of antiquity, such as Aristotle and Plato,
regarded gymnastic exercises as of vast importance, and con-
sidered a state defective and badly organized where these exer-
cises were not instituted. Colleges, called Gymnasia, were there-
fore established everywhere, and superintended by distinguished
masters. Accordingly, the illustrious men of the Grecian and
;;n republic, even those who shone in literature and the

6 GENERAL DIRECTIONS.

fine arts, received the same physical education. The gymnastic
exercises which are here recommended are not intended to pro-
duce athletes, but to strengthen the human constitution. One
exercise gives solidity, another address ; and we may even say
that the various kinds of exercise are sometimes opposed to
each other. The strongest peasant is far from being the best
runner ; and the most vigorous dancer would probably be defi-
cient in strength. There is, however, a mean to be found in
the disposition of every individual to preserve both skill and
strength, and this is what ought to be sought. For this pur-
pose, it will suffice to practise young persons a few hours every
day, sometimes at one exercise, and sometimes at another.

GENERAL DIRECTIONS.

It only remains for us to give a few directions as to the time,
place, and circumstances of exercise. The best time for the
elementary exercises is when the air is cool, as, even in summer,
it is early in the morning, or after the sun has declined j and
they should never immediately follow a meal. The best place
for these elementary exercises is a smooth grass-plat, or a firm
sandy sea-beach. Chasms, stones, and stakes, are always dan-
gerous. At the commencement, the coat and all unnecessary
clothes should be laid aside; and all hard or sharp things should
be taken from the pockets of the remaining dress. A very light
covering on the head, as a straw hat, is best ; the shirt-coUar
should be open, the breast being either exposed or thinly
covered ; the waistband of the trousers should not be tight, and
the boots or shoes should have no iron about them.

As sudden transitions are always bad, exercise should begin
gently, and should terminate in the same manner. The left
hand and arm being commonly weaker than the right, they
should be exercised till they become as strong. This custom is
advantageous, not only for all military and mechanical gymnastic
exercises, but also for all their operations. The being cooled
too quickly is injurious. Therefore, drinking when very hot, or

GENERAL DIRECTIONS. 7

lying down on the cold ground, should be carefully avoided.
No exertion should be carried to excess, as that only exhausts
and enfeebles the body. Therefore, whenever the gymnast feels
tired, or falls behind his usual mark, he should resume his
clothes, and walk home. The moment exercise is finished, the
clothes should always be put on, and the usual precautions
adopted to prevent taking cold.

The necessary fittings-up of an exercising ground are a leap-
ing stand, a vaulting horse, a balancing bar, a climbing stand,
with ladders, poles, and ropes, which may be seen united as
simply and economically as possible, in a subsequent sketch —
(PlateXVIIICLiMBiNG.)

In most exercises, a belt or cincture is of utility; and it seems,
in all ages, to have been naturally employed. The weakest
savage, who could not follow others in the course without pant-
ing, would find, by placing his hand over his abdomen, and
supporting the liver and other organs which descend into that
cavity, that he was aided in running, and breathed more easily ;
and thence he would make for himself a belt. United in socie-
ties, men would still preserve their belt, though it might not
seem particularly advantageous, except to those whose active
mode of life approached a primitive state, such as travellers,
couriers, and porters.

The Greeks put on their belts before they commenced
wrestling; and many physicians, both ancient and modern,
recommend the use of belts, as being to the whole of the body,
and to the parts over which they are placed, what the exterior
sheaths or aponeuroses are to the muscles — bands which em-
brace and keep firm the parts over which they are placed. The
common belt has leathern straps, and buckles to fasten it, an
iron ring and a pocket. A double cincture for wrestling forms
a very strong girth, which is put on by pupils who are very
strong, when they wrestle. These belts may be made of dif-
ferent sizes, for youths of different ages : of five or six inches
for tall youths and men, and of eight or ten inches for wrestlers.
Their length is in proportion to the size of the person who uses

8 TRAINING.

them. These belts are very useful in strengthening the abdominal
region in running and leaping. Riders., also, should furnish
themselves with belts before getting on horseback, to prevent
too violent motion of the viscera of the abdomen, and the dis-
orders which may result from it. The use, indeed, of belts will
by degrees prove their utility, and they will probably be worn
even externally, without reference to physical exercises. They
deserve this the more, because they give an air of lightness and
elegance to the shape, and develope the chest.

The most useful thing in existence is dangerous, if improperly
applied. In very young persons, the chest and abdomen have
been compressed by fastening the belt too tight, or making it
too wide ; and disorders of digestion and respiration have con-
sequently been caused by pushing in the false ribs. This is an
imprudence that should be avoided. If the belt be too low, it
may press too much on the lower part of the belly ; if too high,
it may disorder the chest. It must therefore be placed on the
loins, so as to pass over the navel ; and, as said before, it must
not be too tight. Having given these ideas of the utility of
belts, and the manner of using them, it remains only to explain
the triple use of those adopted for exercises : 1st, they fulfil, by
their size and other circumstances, all the conditions which
render them useful ; 2nd, a pocket serves to inclose the articles
that may be wanted, according to the class of exercises per-
forming ; 3rd, an iron ring is intended to suspend, by means of
hooks, any thing we wish to carry, so as to leave the hands at
liberty.

TRAINING.

This is important in relation to various exercises to be de-
scribed. The art of training for athletic exercises, or laborious
exertions, consists in purifying the body and strengthening its
powers, by certain processes, which are now to be described.
The advantages of ir, however, are not confined to pedestrians,

TUAINIXG. .(>

wrestlers, or pugilists ; they extend to every one : for, were
training generally introduced, instead of medicine, for the pre-
vention and cure of diseases, its beneficial consequences would
assuredly prolong life, and promote its happiness. Every phy-
siologist knows that all the parts which compose the human
body — solids as well as liquids — are successively absorbed and
deposited. Hence ensues a perpetual renovation of them, regu-
lated by the nature of our food and general habits. The health
of all the parts, and the soundness of their structure, depend
on this perpetual absorption and renovation. Now, nothing so
effectually as exercise excites at once absorption and secretion.
It accordingly promotes all the vital functions without hurrying
them, renovates all the parts, and preserves them apt and fit
for their offices.

It follows, then, that health, vigour, and activity, chiefly de-
pend upon exercise and regimen j or, in other words, upon the
observance of those rules which constitute the theory of training.
The effect has accordingly corresponded with the cause assigned
in this view of the subject, in every instance where it has been
adopted ; and, although not commonly resorted to as the means
of restoring invalids to health, there is every reason to believe
that it would prove effectual in curing many obstinate diseases,
such as bilious complaints, obesity, gout, and rheumatism.

The Ancients entertained this opinion. They were, says a
popular writer on medicine, by no means unacquainted with or
inattentive to these instruments of medicine, although modern
practitioners appear to have no idea of removing disease, or re-
storing health, but by pouring drugs into the stomach. Hero-
ditus is said to have been the first who applied the exercises
and regimen of the Gymnasium to the removal of disease, or
the maintenance of health. Among the Romans, Asclepiades
carried this so far, that he is said, by Celsus, almost to have
banished the use of internal remedies from his practice. He was
the inventor of various modes of exercise and gestation, in Rome.
In his own person, he afforded an excellent example of the
wisdom of his rules, and the propriety of his rc^iiren. Phny

TRAINING.

tells us that, in early life, he made a public profession, that he
would agree to forfeit all pretensions to the name of a physician,
should he ever suffer from sickness, or die but of old age ; and,
what is extraordinary, he fulfilled his promise, for he lived up-
wards of a century, and at last was killed by a fall down stairs.

As to the locomotive system, modern experience sufficiently
proves that exercise is the most powerful strengthener of the
muscles, and of every part on which activity depends. In its
operation on the vital system, training always appears to benefit
the state of the lungs. Indeed, one of its most striking effects
is to improve the wind : that is, to enable a man to draw a larger
inspiration, and to hold his breath longer. As to the intellectual
system, Sir J. Sinclair observes, that, by training, the mental
faculties are also improved; the attention being more ready,
and the perception more acute, owing probably to the clearness
of the stomach, and better digestion.

It must, therefore, be admitted, that the most beneficial con-
sequences to general health arise from training. The simplicity
of the rules for it is assuredly a great recommendation to a trial
of the experiment. The whole process may be resolved into
the following principles: — 1st, the evacuating, which cleanses
the stomach and intestines ; 2nd, the sweating, which takes off
the superfluities of fat and humours ; 3rd, the daily course of
exercise, which improves the wind and strengthens the muscles ;
and, lastly, the regimen, which nourishes and invigorates the
body. To those who are to engage in corporeal exercises be-
yond their ordinary powers, it is indispensably necessary. Peck s-
trians, therefore, who are matched either against others or
against time, and pugilists who engage to fight, must undergo
the training process before they contend. The issue of the
contest, if their powers be nearly equal, will, in a great measure,
depend upon their relative condition, as effected by training, at
the hour of trial.

Training was known to the ancients, who paid much atten-
tion to the means of augmenting corporeal vigour and activity.
Accordingly, among the Greeks and Romans, certain rules of

TRAINING. 11

exercise and regimen were prescribed to the candidates for
gymnastic celebrity. We are assured, that, among the Greeks,
previously to the solemn contests at the public games, the
strictest temperance, sobriety, and regularity in living, were in-
dispensably requisite. The candidates were, at the same time,
subjected to daily exercise in the Gymnasium, which continued
during ten months, and which, with the prescribed regimen,
constituted the preparatory- training adopted by the athletrc of
Greece. Among the Romans, the exercises of the palaestra
degenerated from the rank of a liberal art, and became a pro-
fession, which was embraced only by the lowest of mankind;
the exhibitions of the gladiators being bloody and ferocious
spectacles, which evinced the barbarous taste of the people.
The combatants, however, were regularly trained by proper
exercise, and a strict observance of regimen. Pure and salubri-
ous air was deemed a chief requisite. Accordingly, the principal
schools of their athletae were established at Capua and Ravenna,
the most healthy places in Italy ; and previous to entering on
this regimen, the men were subjected to the evacuating process,
by means of emetics, which they preferred to purgatives.

In the more early stages of training, their diet consisted of
dried figs, new cheese, and boiled grain. Afterwards animal
food was introduced as a part of the athletic regimen, and pork
was preferred to any other. Galen, indeed, asserts, that pork
contains more real nutriment than flesh of any other kind,
which is used as food by man. This fact, he adds, is decidedly
proved by the example of the athletse, who, if they live but for
one day on any other kind of food, find their vigour manifestly
impaired the next. The preference given to pork by the ancients,
however, does not correspond with the practice of modern
trainers, who entirely reject it ; but in the manner of preparing
the food, they exactly agree — roasting or broiling being by both
preferred to boiling, and bread unfermented to that prepared by
leaven. A very small quantity of liquid was allowed to the
athletic, and this was principally water. They exercised in the
open air, and became familiarized by habit to every change of

12

TRAINING.

the weather, the vicissitudes of which soon ceased to affect
them.

To exercise their patience, and accustom them to bear pain
without flinching, they were occasionally flogged on the back
with the branches of a kind of rhododendron, till the blood
flowed. By diminishing the quantity of the circulating liquid,
this rough kind of cupping was also considered salutary ! as ob-
viating the tendency to plethora or redundancy of blood, to
which they were peculiarly liable — a proof, if true, of the nou-
rishing qualities of their food.

When the daily exercises of the athletse were finished, they
were refreshed by immersion in a tepid bath, where the per-
spiration and sordes — scurf, pustules, or filthy adhesions — were
carefully removed from the surface of the body by the use of
the strygil.* The skin was then diligently rubbed dry, and
again anointed with oil. If thirsty, they were permitted to
-drink a small quantity of warm water. They then took their
principal repast, after \vhich they used no more exercise that
day. They occasionally also went into the cold bath in the
morning. They were permitted to sleep as many hours as they
•chose; and great increase of vigour, as well as of bulk, was
supposed to be derived from long-continued and sound repose.f
The sexual intercourse was strictly prohibited.

The manner of training among the ancients bears some re-
semblance to that practised by the moderns. Perhaps it is
because their mode of living and general habits were somewhat
different from those of the present age, that a difference of
treatment is now required to produce the same effects. The
great object of training for running or boxing matches, is to
"increase the muscular strength, and to improve the free action
of the lungs, or wind, of the person subjected to the process.
Seeing that the human body is so capable of being altered and

* For this instrument, rough coarse cloths are adopted, but not with ad-
vantage.
t Little sleep is now prescribed; but its quantity should depend upon cir-

•rumstan res of fatigue, &c.

TRAINING. 13

renovated, it is not surprising that the art of training should be
carried to a degree of perfection almost incredible; and that, by
certain processes, the muscular power, the breath (or wind), and
the courage of man, should be so greatly improved as to enable
him to perform the most severe or laborious undertakings.

That such effects have been produced is unquestionable : they
are fully exemplified in the astonishing exploits of our most
celebrated pedestrians and pugilists, which are the infallible re-
sults of such preparatory discipline. The skilful trainer attends
to the state of the bowels, the lungs, and the skin; and he uses
such means as will reduce the fat, and at the same time invigo-
rate the muscular fibre. The patient is purged by drastic medi-
cines ; he is sweated by walking under a load of clothes, and by
lying between feather beds ; and his limbs are roughly rubbed.
His diet is beef or mutton : his drink strong ale. He is gradu-
ally inured to exercise, by repeated trials in walking and running.
By extenuating the fat, emptying the cellular substance, harden-
ing the muscular fibre, and improving the breath, a man of the
ordinary frame may be made to fight for one hour, with the ut-
most exertion of strength and courage, or to go over one hun-
dred miles in twenty-four hours.

The most effectual process for training appears to be that
practiced by Captain Barclay, which has not only been sanctioned
by professional men, but has met with the unqualified approba-
tion of amateurs. We are here, therefore, almost entirely in-
debted to it for details. According to this method, the pedes-
trian, who may be supposed in tolerable condition, enters upon
his training with a regular course of physic, which consists of
three doses. Glauber's salts are generally preferred; and from
one ounce and a half to two ounces are taken each time, with
an interval of four days between each dose. After having gone
through the course of physic, he commences his regular exer-
cise, which is gradually increased as he proceeds in the training.

When the object in view is the accomplishment of a pedes-
trian match, his regular exercise may be from twenty to twenty-
four miles a day. He must rise at five in the morning, run half

14

TRAINING.

a mile at the top of his speed up-hill, and then walk six miles
at a moderate pace, coming in about seven to breakfast, which
should consist of beef-steaks or mutton-chops under-done, with
stule bread and old beer. After breakfast, he must again walk
six miles at a moderate pace, and at twelve lie down in bed,
without his clothes, for half an hour. On getting up, he must
walk four miles, and return by four to dinner, which should also
l)e beef-steaks or mutton-chops, with bread and beer, as at
breakfast. Immediately after dinner, he must resume his exer-
cise, by running half a mile at the top of his speed, and walking
six miles at a moderate pace. He takes no more exercise for
that day, but retires to bed about eight; and next morning he
proceeds in the same manner.

Animal diet, it will be observed, is, according to this system,
alone prescribed, and beef and mutton are preferred. All fat
and greasy substances are prohibited, as they induce bile, and
consequently injure the stomach. The lean of meat contains
more nourishment than the fat ; and, in every case, the most
substantial food is preferable to any other kind. Fresh meat is
the most wholesome and nourishing. Salt, spiceries, and all
kinds of seasonings, with the exception of vinegar, are prohi-
bited. The lean, then, of fat beef cooked in steaks, with very
little salt, is the best ; and it should be rather under-done than
otherwise. Mutton, being reckoned easy of digestion, may be
occasionally given, to vary the diet and gratify the taste. The
legs of fowls are also esteemed.

It is preferable to have the meat broiled, as much of its nutri-
tive quality is lost by roasting or boiling. It ought to be dressed
so as to remain tender and juicy ; for it is by these means that
it will be easily digested, and afford most nourishment. Biscuit
and stale bread are the only preparations of vegetable matter
which are permitted to be given; and every thing inducing
flatulency must be carefully avoided. In general, the quantity
of aliment is not limited by the trainer, but left entirely to the
discretion of the pedestrian, whose appetite should regulate him
in this respect.

TUA1XIXG. 15

Witli respect to liquors, they must be always taken cold ; and
home-brewed beer, old, but not bottled, is the best. A little
red wine, however, may be given to those who are not fond of
malt liquor ; but never more than half a pint after dinner. It is
an established rule to avoid liquids as much as possible; and no
more liquor of any kind is allowed to be taken than is requisite
to quench the thirst.

After having gone on in this regular course for three or four
weeks, the pedestrian must take a four-mile sweat, which is pro-
duced by running four miles in flannel, at the top of his speed.
Immediately on returning, a hot liquor is prescribed, in order to
promote the perspiration ; and of this he must drink one English
pint. It is termed the sweating liquor, and is composed of one
ounce of carraway seed, half an ounce of coriander seed, one
ounce of root-liquorice, and half an ounce of sugar-candy, mixed
with two bottles of cyder, and boiled down to one-half. He is
then put to bed in his flannels, and, being covered with six or
eight pair of blankets, and a feather bed, must remain in this
state from twenty-five to thirty minutes, when he is taken out,
and rubbed perfectly dry. Being then well wrapt in his great
•coat, he walks out gently for two miles, and returns to break-
fast, which, on such occasions, should consist of a roasted fowl.
He afterwards proceeds with his usual exercise.

These sweats are continued weekly, till within a few days of
the performance of the match; or, in other words, he must
undergo three or four of these operations. If the stomach of
the pedestrian be foul, an emetic or two must be given about a
week before the conclusion of the training. He is now sup-
posed to be in the highest condition.

Besides his usual or regular exercise, a person under training
ought to employ himself, in the intervals, in every kind of exer-
tion which tends to activity, such as golf, cricket, bowls, throw-
ing quoits, &c., so that, during the whole day, both body and
mind may be constantly occupied. Although the chief parts of
the system depend upon sweating, exercise, and feeding, yet the
object to be obtained by the pedestrian would be defeated, if

16 TRAINING.

these were not adjusted each to the other, and to his constitu-
tion. The trainer, before he proceeds to apply his theory, should
make himself acquainted with the constitution and hahits of his
patient, that he maybe able to judge how far he can, with safety,
carry on the different parts of the process. The nature of the
patient's disposition should also be known, that every cause of
irritation may be avoided ; for, as it requires great patience ami
perseverance to undergo training, every expedient to sooth and
encourage the mind should be adopted.

The skilful trainer will, moreover, constantly study the pro-
gress of his art, by observing the effect of its processes, sepa-
rately and in combination. If a man retain his health and spirits
during the process, improve in wind, and increase in strength,
it is certain that the object aimed at will be obtained; but, if
otherwise, it is to be apprehended that some defect exists,
through the unskilfulness or mismanagement of the trainer,
which ought instantly to be remedied by such alterations as the
circumstances of the case may demand. It is evident, there-
fore, that in many instances foe trainer must be guided by his
judgment, and that no fixed rules of management can, with
absolute certainty, be depended upon, for producing an invari-
able and determinate result. In general, however, it may be
calculated, that the known rules are adequate to the purpose, if
the pedestrian strictly adhere to them, and the trainer bestow a
moderate degree of attention to his state and condition during
the progress of training.

It is impossible to fix any precise period for the completion
of the training process, as it depends upon the previous condi-
tion of the pedestrian ; but from two to three months, in most
cases, will be sufficient, especially if he be in tolerable condition
at the commencement, and possessed of sufficient perseverance
and courage to submit cheerfully to the privations and hardships
to which he must unavoidably be subjected. The criterion by
which it may be known whether a man is in good condition — or,
what is the same thing, whether he has been properly trained —
is the state of the skin, which becomes smooth, elastic, and well-

TRAINING. 17

coloured, or transparent. The flesh is also firm; and the person
trained feels himself light, and full of spirits. In the progress
of the training, his condition may also be ascertained by the
effect of the sweats, which cease to reduce his weight ; and by
the manner in which he performs one mile at the top of his
speed. It is as difficult to run a mile at the top of one's speed
as to walk a hundred ; and therefore, if he performs this short
distance well, it may be concluded that his condition is perfect,
or that he has derived all the advantages which can possibly re-
sult from the training process.

A few words may be here added on the comparative strength
of different races of men. In order to procure some exact re-
sults on this point, Peron took with him on his voyage an in-
strument called a dynamometer, so constructed as to indicate
on a dial-plate the relative force of individuals submitted to ex-
periment. He directed his attention to the strength of the arms
and of the loins, making trial with several individuals of each of
the races among whom he then was, viz., twelve natives of Van
Diemen's Land, seventeen of New Holland, fifty-six of the Island
of Timor, seventeen Frenchmen belonging to the expedition, ami
fourteen Englishmen in the colony of New South Wales. The
following numbers express the mean result in each case, but all
the details are given in a tabular form in the original : —

Strength of the Arms. Strength of the Loins.
Kilogrammes. Mjriagnimmes.

1. Van Diemen's Land . . . 50.6

2. New Holland .... 50.8 10.2

3. Timor 58.7 11.6

4. French 69.2 15.2

5. English 71.4 16.3

The highest numbers in the first and second class were, re-
spectively, 60 and 62 ; the lowest in the English trials 63, and
the highest 83, for the strength of the arms. In the power of
the loins, the highest among the New Hollanders was 13; the
lowest of the English 12.7, and the highest 21.3. " These re-
sults," observes Mr. Lawrence, " offer the best answer to de-
clamations on the degeneracy of civilized man. The attribute

18 POSITION.

of superior physical strength, so boldly assumed by the eulogists
of the savage state, has never been questioned or doubted.
Although we have been consoled for this supposed inferiority by
an enumeration of the many precious benefits derived from
civilization, it has always been felt as a somewhat degrading dis-
advantage. Bodily strength is a concomitant of good health,
which is produced and supported by a regular supply of whole-
some and nutritious food, and by active occupation. The in-
dustrious and well-fed middle classes of a civilized community
may, therefore, be reasonably expected to surpass, in this en-
dowment, the miserable savages, who are never well-fed, and
too frequently depressed by absolute want and all other priva-
tions.

POSITION.

Before entering into a detail of exercises, it is necessary to
attend to what is termed position. — A standing position is the
action by which we keep ourselves up. Indeed, this state, in
which the body appears in repose, is itself an exercise, for it
consists in a continued effort of many muscles ; and the expla-
nation we shall give of it will much facilitate that of walking.

Every one has observed that during sleep, or a fainting fit,
the head inclines forward and falls upon the breast. In this
case, it is in accordance with the laws of gravity; for the
head, resting upon the vertebrae which support it at a point
of its basis wrhich is nearer the posterior than anterior part,
cannot remain in an upright position in standing, except by
an effort of the muscles at the back of the neck : it is the
cessation of this effort that causes it to fall forward. The
body also is unable to remain straight without fatigue. The
vertebral column being placed behind, all the viscera or parts
contained by the chest and belly are suspended in front of
it, and would force it to bend forward unless strong muscular
fibres held it back. A proof of this may be seen in pregnant

POSITION. 19

and dropsical women, who are compelled, in consequence of the
anterior part of the body being heavier than usual, to keep
the vertebral column more fixed, and even thrown backward.
The same observation may be made with regard to the pelvis,
basin, or lowest part of the trunk, which by its conformation
would bend upon the thighs, if not kept back by the great
mass of muscular fibres that form the hips. In front of the
thighs, again, are the muscles which, by keeping the kneepan
in position, are the means of preventing the leg from bending.
Lastly, the muscles forming the calves, by contracting, are the
means of preventing the leg from bending upon the foot.

Such is the general mechanism of the standing position. It
is, therefore, as we observed, a concurrence of efforts : almost
all the extending muscles are in a state of contraction all the
time that this position is maintained, and the consequence is,
a fatigue which cannot be endured for any great length of time.
Hence we see persons in a standing position rest -the weight of
their body, first on one foot, then on another, for the purpose
of procuring momentary ease to certain muscles. For this
reason, also, standing still is more fatiguing than walking, in
which the muscles are alternately contracted and extended.

A question of importance on this subject is, what position of
the feet affords the greatest solidity in standing ? We will not
enter into a detail of the numerous controversies by which some
have defended or repudiated the position with the toes turned
forward or outward : it will be sufficient to state the fact, that
the larger the base of support, the firmer and more solid will
the position be, and to adopt, as a fundamental one, the
military position, which has been found practically the best by
those who have nothing else to do but to walk. The equal
squareness of the shoulders and body to the front, is the first
great principle of position. The heels must be in a line, and
closed; the knees straight; the toes turned out, with the
Aiming an angle of sixty degrees; the arms hanging
close to the body ; the elbows turned in, and close to the
riil.-s; the hands open to the front, with the view of pre-

20 EXTENSION MOTIONS.

serving the elbow in the position above described : the little
fingers lightly touching the clothing of the limbs, with the
thumb close to the forefinger ; the belly rather drawn in, and
the breast advanced, but without constraint ; the body upright,
but inclining forward, so that the weight of it may principally
bear upon the fore part of the feet ; the head erect, and the eyes
straight to the front — (as in Plate I. fig. 1.)

To these brief directions I must add, that, in standing, the
whole figure should be in such a position that the ear, shoulder,
haunch, knee, and ankle are all in a line; that it must be
stretched as much as possible, by raising the back of the head,
drawing in the chin, straightening the spine, rising on the hips,
and extending the legs ; that the object of keeping the back
thus straight is to allow of standing longer without fatigue ; that
it is important to expand the chest, and to throw the shoulders
back, with the shoulder-blades, or scapulae, quite flat behind ;
and that though, in military instructions, the body is thus in-
clined forward in standing without arms, yet when these are
assumed, the body is immediately thrown about two inches
backward, into a nearly perpendicular position. This position,
therefore, will be modified in walking, and especially in ordinary
walking; but it is an excellent fundamental position, and it
cannot be too accurately acquired.

This is the amount of the drill-sergeant's instructions as to
position, though this last part is omitted in the Manual describing
the Field Exercise and Evolutions of the Army.

EXTENSION MOTIONS.

In order to supple the figure, open the chest, and give free-
dom to the muscles, the first three movements of the extension
motions, as laid down for the sword exercise, are ordered to be
practised. It is indeed, observed, that too many methods can-
not be used to improve the carriage, and banish a rustic air ;
but that the greatest care must be taken not to throw the
body backward instead of forward, as being contrary to every
true principle of movement. I accordingly here introduce these

EXTENSION MOTIONS. 21

extension motions, adding the fourth and fifth, and prefixing to
each the respective word of command, in order that they may
be the more distinctly and accurately executed.

Attention. — The body is to be erect, the heels close together,
and the hands hanging down on each side. First Extension
motion. — This serves as a caution, and the motions tend to ex-
pand the chest, raise the head, throw back the shoulders, and
strengthen the muscles of the back.

One — Bring the hands and arms to the front, the fingers
lightly touching at the points, and the nails downwards ; then
raise them in a circular direction well above the head, the ends
of the fingers still touching, the thumbs pointing to the rear,
the elbows pressed back, and shoulders kept down. (Plate I.
% 2.)

Two — Separate and extend the arms and fingers, forcing
them obliquely back, till they come extended on a line with the
shoulders ; and as they fall gradually from thence to the original
position of Attention, endeavour, as much as possible, to ele-
vate the neck and chest. These two motions should be fre-
quently practised, with the head turned as much as possible to
the right or left, and the body kept square to the front : this
tends very materially to supple the neck, &c.

Three — Turn the palms of the hands to the front, pressing
back the thumbs with the arms extended, and raise them to the
rear, till they meet above the head ; the fingers pointing up-
wards, with the ends of the thumbs touching.

Four — Keep the arms and knees straight, and bend over from
the hips till the hands touch the feet, the head being brought
down in the same direction. (Plate I. fig. 3.)

Five — With the arms flexible and easy from the shoulders,
raise the body gradually, so as to resume the position of Atten-
tion. The whole should be done very gradually, so as to feel
the exertion of the muscles throughout. To these extension
motions, drill-sergeants, in their instructions, add the following :

One — the forearms are bent upon the arms upward and to-
ward the body, having the elbows depressed, the shut hands

22 INDIAN CLUB EXERCISE.

touching on the little-finger sides, and the knuckles upward, the
latter being raised as high as the chin, and at the distance of
about a foot before it. (Plate I. fig. 4.)

Two — While the arras are thrown forcibly backward, the fore-
arms are as much as possible bent upon the arms, and the
palmar sides of the wrists are turned forward and outward
(Plate I. fig. 5.) The two motions are to be repeatedly and
rather quickly performed. A modification of the same move-
ment is performed as a separate extension motion, but may be
given in continuation, with the numbers following these, as
words of command.

Three — The arms are extended at full length in front, on a
level with the shoidder, the palms of the hands in contact.
(Plate I. fig. 6.)

Four — Thus extended, and the palms retaining their vertical
position, the arms are thrown forcibly backward, so that the
backs of the hands may approach each other as nearly as pos-
sible. These motions, also, are to be repeatedly and rather
quickly performed. Another extension motion, similarly added T
consists in swinging the right arm in a circle, in which, begin-
ning from the pendent position, the arm is carried upward in
front, by the side of the head, and downward behind, the object
being in the latter part of this course to throw it as directly
backward as possible. The same is then done with the left arm.
Lastly, both arms are thus exercised together. These motions
are performed quickly.

THE INDIAN CLUB EXERCISE.

THE PORTION ADOPTED IN THE ARMY.

1st. A club is held by the handle, pendent on each side
(Plate II. fig. 1); — that in the right hand is carried over the
head and left shoulder, until it hangs perpendicularly on the

INDIAN CLUB EXERCISE. 23

right side of the spine (Plate II. fig. 2); that in the left hand
is carried over the former, in exactly the opposite direction
(Plate II. fig. 2), until it hangs on the opposite side; holding
both clubs still pendent, the hands are raised somewhat
higher than the head (Plate II. fig. 3); with the clubs in the
same position, both arms are extended outward and backward
(Plate II. fig. 6) ; they are lastly dropped into the first position.
All this is done slowly.

2nd. Commencing from the same position, the ends of both
clubs are swung upward until they are held, vertically and side
by side, at arm's length in front of the body, the hands being as
high as the shoulders (Plate II . fig. 4) ; they are next carried
in the same position, at arm's length, and on the same level, as
far backward as possible (Plate II. fig. 5) ; each is then dropped
backward until it hangs vertically downward (Plate II. fig. 6) ;
and this exercise ends as the first. Previous, however, to
dropping the clubs backward, it greatly improves this exercise,
by a turn of the wrist upward and backward, to carry the clubs
into a horizontal position behind the shoulders, so that, if long
enough, their ends would touch (Platelll.fig. 1); next, by a
turn of the wrist outward and downward, to carry them hori-
zontally outward (Platelll.fig. 2); then by a turn of the wrist
upward and forward, to carry them into a horizontal position
before the breast (Platelll.fig. 3); again to carry them hori-
zontally outward; and finally to drop them backward as already
explained; and thence to the first position. All this is also
done slowly.

3rd. The clubs are to be swung by the sides, first sepa-
rately, and then together, exactly as the hands were in the last
extension motion.

THE NEW AND MORE BEAUTIFUL PORTION NOW ADDED
FROM THE INDIAN 1'RACTICE.

1st. A club is held forward and upright in each hand, the
fore-arm being placed horizontally, by the haunch on each side
(Plate IV. fig. 1) ; both are thrown in a circle upward, forward

24 INDIAN CLUB EXERCISE.

and, by a turn of the wrist, downward and backward, so as to
strike under the arms (Plate IV. fig. 2) ; by an opposite move-
ment, both are thrown back again in a similar circle, till they
swing over the shoulders (Plate IV. fig. 3) ; and this movement
is continued as long as agreeable.

2nd. The clubs are held obliquely upward in each hand,
lying on the front of the arms (Plate IV. fig. 4) ; that in the
right hand is allowed to fall backward (Plate IV. fig. 5), and
swings downward, forward to the extent of the arm, and as high
as the head (Plate IV. fig. 6) ; the moment this club begins to
return from this point, in precisely the same direction, to the
front of the arm, that in the left hand is allowed to drop back-
ward, and to perform the advancing portion of this course in
the time that the other performs the returning portion, so that
each is at the same time swinging in an opposite direction.

3rd. From either of the first positions now given, the clubs are,
by a turn of the body and extension of the arms, thrown up-
wards and laterally (Plate V. fig. 1); — make, at the extent
of the arms, and in front of the figure, a circle in which they
sweep downward by the feet and upward over the head (Plate
V. fig. 2), and fall in a more limited curve towards the side
on which they began (Plate V. fig. 3), in such a manner
that the outer one forming a circle around the shoulder and the
inner one round the head, (both passing swiftly through the
position in the last figure of the first exercise,) they return to
the first position ; — this is repeated to the other side ; — and so
on alternately.

4th. Beginning from either first position, the body being
turned laterally, — for example, to the left, the club in the right
hand is thrown upward in that direction at the full extent of the
arm (Plate VI. fig. 1), and makes the large circle in front and
curve behind as in the last exercise (Plate VI. fig. 2), while the
club in the left hand makes at the same time a smaller circle in
front of the head and behind the shoulders (Plate VI. figs, 1,
2, and 3), until crossing each other before the head (rather on
the right side), their movements are exactly reversed, the club

INDIAN CLUB EXERCISE. 25

in the right hand performing the small circle round the head,
while that in the left performs the large one, — and these con-
tinue to be repeated to each side alternately.

5th. The clubs being in either first position, the body is
turned to one side — the left for example, and the clubs being
thrown out in the same direction, make each, by a turn of the
wrist, a circle three times on the outer side of the outstretched
arms (Plate Vllfig. 1) : — when completing the third circle, the
clubs are thrown higher to the same side, sweeping together in
the large circle in front, as in the second exercise, the body
similarly turning to the right ; but, instead of forming the smaller
curve behind, both are thrown over the back (Plate Vllfig. 2) 5
— from this position the clubs are thrown in front, which is now
toward the opposite side, and the same movements are reversed;
— and so it proceeds alternately to each side.

6th. In this exercise, the clubs are reversed, both being pen-
dent in front, but the ends of their handles being upward on the
thumb sides of the hands. (Pi. VII fig. 3.) The exercise consists
chiefly in describing with the ends of the clubs two circles
placed obliquely to each other over the head. For this purpose,
the club in the right hand is, in a sweep to that side, first ele-
vated behind the head, and thence passing to the left (Plate VII.
fig. 4), the front, the right (Plate VII. fig. 5) behind, (where its
continuation is indicated in fig. 5, and completed in fig. 6),
thus forms its circle ; — meanwhile the club in the left hand,
commencing when that in the right was behind the head, has
passed on the back of its circle to the right, (Plate VII. fig. 5,)
while that in the right hand has passed on the front of its circle
to the same side (Plate VII. fig. 5, the parts performed in both
being marked by complete lines, and the parts to be done merely
indicated) ; — and they continue, that in the right hand by the
back, and that in the left hand by the front, toward the left
side (Plate VII. fig. 6), and so on at pleasure, circling over the
head.

[Although but two-thirds of the body, viz., from the loins
upward, are called into operation in this exercise, its importance

26

INDIAN CLUB EXERCISE.

must be estimated by the fact that they are precisely those
requiring constant artificial practice, being naturally most
exempted from exertion. As an adjunct to TRAINING^ there
is nothing in the whole round of gymnastic performances that
will be found of more essential service than this exercise with
the Indian clubs. It demands but little muscular exertion, and
such as it does require calls chiefly upon that portion of the
system which it finds in a state of comparative repose.]

LOCOMOTIVE EXERCISES.

IN Walking, the position is nearly the same as that already
described under the head POSITION.

The head should be upright, easy, and capable of free motion,
right, left, up, or down, without affecting the body. The body
must be kept erect and square to the front, having the breast
projected, and the stomach retracted, though not so as to injure
either freedom of respiration or ease of attitude. The shoulders
should be kept moderately and equally back and low ; and the
arms should hang unconstrainedly by the sides. The balance
on the limbs must be perfect. The knees straight, and the
toes turned out as described, the weight of the body should
be thrown forward, as this facilitates progression. The military
position in walking does not essentially differ from this, except
in points that exclusively regard the soldier ; as that the head

28 BALANCE STEP.

be kept well up, and straight to the front, and the eyes not
turned to the right or left ; the arms and hands kept perfectly
steady by the sides, and on no account suffered to move or
vibrate: care, however, being taken that the hand does not
cling to the thigh, or partake in the least degree of the move-
ment of the limb.

THE BALANCE STEP.

The object of this is to teach the free movement of the limbs,
preserving at the same time perfect squareness of the shoulders,
with the utmost steadiness of body ; and no labour is spared
to attain this first and most essential object, which forms, in-
deed, the very foundation of good walking. The instructor
must be careful that a habit be not contracted of drooping or
throwing back a shoulder at these motions, which are intended
practically to show the true principles of walking, and that
steadiness of body is compatible with perfect freedom in the
limbs.

1. — WITHOUT GAINING GROUND.

To insure precision, the military words of command are
prefixed.

Caution — Balance step without gaining ground, commencing
with the left foot. The left foot is brought gently forward with
the toe at the proper angle to the left, the foot about three
inches from the ground, the left heel in line with the toe of the
right foot.

Rear — When steady, the left foot is brought gently back
(without a jerk), the left knee a little bent, the left toe brought
close to the right heel. The left foot in this position will not
be so flat as to the front, as the toe will be a little depressed.

Front — When steady, the word Front will be given as above,
and repeated to the Rear three or four times.

WALKING. 29

Halt — To prevent fatigue, the word Halt will be given, when
the left foot, either advanced, or to the rear, will be brought to
the right. The instructor will afterwards cause the balance to be
made on the left foot, advancing and retiring the right in the
same manner.

2. — GAINING GROUND BY THE WORD " FORWARD."

Front — On the word Front, the left foot is brought gently to
the front, without a jerk ; the knee gradually straightened as
the foot is brought forward, the toe turned out a little to the
left, and remaining about three inches from the ground. This
posture is continued for a few seconds only in the first instance,
till practice gives steadiness in the position.

Forward — On this word of command, the left foot is brought
to the ground, at about thirty inches from heel to heel, while
the right foot is raised at the same moment, and continues ex-
tended to the rear. The body remains upright, but inclining
forward ; the head erect, and neither turned to the right nor
left.

Front — On the word Front, the right foot is brought forward,
and so on.

WALKING.

OP all exercises, this is the most simple and easy. The
weight of the body rests on one foot, while the other is ad-
vanced ; it is then thrown upon the advanced foot, while the
other is brought forward; and so on in succession. In this
mode of progression, the slowness and equal distribution of
motion is such, that many muscles are employed in a greater or
less degree ; each acts in unison with the rest ; and the whole
remains compact and united. Hence, the time of its move-
ments may be quicker or slower, without deranging the union
of the parts, or the equilibrium of thu whole. It is owing to

WALKING.

these circumstances, that walking displays so much of the
character ef the walker, — that it is light and gay in women and
children, steady and grave in men and elderly persons, irregular
in the nervous and irritable, measured in the affected and
formal, brisk in the sanguine, heavy in the phlegmatic, and
proud or humble, bold or timid, &c., in strict correspondence
with individual character.

The utility of walking exceeds that of all other modes of pro-
gression. While the able pedestrian is independent of stage
coaches and hired horses, he alone fully enjoys the scenes
through which he passes, and is free to dispose of his time as he
pleases. To counterbalance these advantages, greater fatigue
is doubtless attendant on walking : but this fatigue is really the
result of previous inactivity; for daily exercise, gradually in-
creased, by rendering walking more easy and agreeable, and
inducing its more frequent practice, diminishes fatigue in such
a degree, that very great distances may be accomplished with
pleasure, instead of painful exertion.

Moderate walking exercises the most agreeable influence over
all the functions. In relation to health, walking accelerates
respiration and circulation, increases the temperature and
cutaneous exhalation, and excites appetite and healthful nu-
trition. Hence, as an anonymous writer observes, the true
pedestrian, after a walk of twenty miles, comes in to breakfast
with freshness on his countenance, healthy blood coursing in
every vein, and vigour in every limb, while the indolent and in-
active man, having painfully crept over a mile or two, returns
to a dinner which he cannot digest. In all individuals, walking
is indispensably joined with the exercise of one or more of the
external senses. It receives from the cerebral faculties a
powerful influence, by which it is either accelerated or prolonged.
Walking upon soft even ground, at a moderate pace, is an ex-
ercise that may be taken without inconvenience, and even with
advantage, after a meal. It is adapted for convalescents, who
are not yet allowed to take stronger exercise. A firm, yet easy
and graceful walk, is by no means common. There are few

GENERAL MECHANISM OF WALKING. 31

men who walk well if they have not learnt to regulate their
motions by the lessons of a master, and this instruction is still
more necessary for ladies. Having, now, therefore, taken a
general view of the character and utility of walking, I subjoin
gome more particular remarks on the

GENERAL MECHANISM OF WALKING.

For the purpose of walking, we first bear upon one leg the
weight of the body, which pressed equally on both. The other
leg is then raised, and the foot quits the ground by rising from
the heel to the point. For that purpose, the leg must be bent
upon the thigh, and the thigh upon the pelvis : the foot is then
carried straight forward, at a sufficient height to clear the ground
without grazing it. To render it possible, however, to move
this foot, the haunch, which rested with its weight upon the
thigh, must turn forward and out. As soon as, by this move-
ment, this foot has passed the other, it must be extended on the
leg, and the leg upon the thigh, and in this manner, by the
lengthening of the whole member, and without being drawn
back, it reaches the ground at a distance in advance of the other
foot, which is more considerable according to the length of the
step, and it is placed so softly on the ground as not to jerk or
shake the body in the slightest degree. As soon as the foot
which has been placed on the ground becomes firm, the wreight
of the body is transported to the limb on that side, and the
other foot, by a similar mechanism, is brought forward in its
turn. In all walking, the most important circumstance is, that
the body incline forward, and that the movement of the leg
and thigh spring from the haunch, and be free and natural.
Viewed in this way, the feet have been well compared to the
spokes of a wheel : the weight of the body falling upon them
alternately.

This exercise puts in action the extensors and flexors of the
thighs and legs, a groat number of the muscles of the trunk,
and more or less those of the shoulder, according to the rapidity
of the pace, and the greater or less degree of projection com-

32 THE MODERATE AND THE QUICK PACE.

inunicated to the arm, which, in this exercise, acts as a balancer
of the body, the motion being exactly the reverse of that
of the corresponding leg. It draws the fluids more into the
inferior than superior members : it gives but little strength
to the latter. Walking may be performed in three different
times, — slow, moderate, or quick — which somewhat modify its
action.

THE SLOW WALK, OR MARCH.

In the march, the weight of the body is advanced from the
heel to the instep, and the toes are turned out. This being
done, one foot, the left for instance, is advanced, with the knee
straight, and the toe inclined to the ground, which, without
being drawn back, it touches before the heel, in such a manner,
however, that the sole, at the conclusion of the step, is nearly
parallel with the ground, which it next touches with its outer
edge ; the right foot is then immediately raised from the inner
edge of the toe, and similarly advanced, inclined, and brought
to the ground; and so on in succession. (Plate VIII. figs. 1
and 2.) Thus, in the march, the toe externally first touches,
and internally last leaves the ground ; and so marked is this
tendency, that, in the stage step, which is meant to be especially
dignified, — as the posterior foot acquires an awkward flexure
when the weight has been thrown on the anterior, — in order to
correct this, the former is for an instant extended, its toe even
turned backwards and outwards, and its tip internally alone
rested on the ground, previous to its being in its turn advanced.
Thus the toe's first touching and last leaving the ground, is
peculiarly marked in this grandest form of the march. This
pace should be practised until it can be firmly and gracefully
performed.

THE MODERATE AND THE QUICK PACE.

These will be best understood by a reference to the pace
which we have just described ; the principal difference between

THE MODERATE PACE. 33

them being as to the advance of the weight of the body, the
turning out of the toes, and the part of the foot which first
touches and last leaves the ground. We shall find that the
times of these two paces require a further advance of the weight,
and suffer successively less and less of turning out the toes, and
of this extended touching with the toe, and covering the ground
with the foot.

THE MODERATE PACE.

Here the weight of the body is advanced from the heel to the
ball of the foot; the toes are less turned out; and it is no longer
the toe, but the ball of the foot, which first touches and last
leaves the ground ; its outer edge, or the ball of the little toe,
first breaking the descent of the foot, and its inner edge, or the
ball of the great toe, last projecting the weight — (Plate VIII
figs. 3 and 4). Thus, in this step, less of the foot may be said
actively to cover the ground ; and this adoption of nearer and
stronger points of support and action is essential to the increased
quickness and exertion of the pace.

The mechanism of this pace has not been sufficiently attended
to. People pass from the march to the quick pace they know
not how ; and hence all the awkwardness and embarrassment of
their walk when their pace becomes moderate, and the misery
they endure when this pace has to be performed by them, un-
accompanied, up the middle of a long and well-lighted room,
where the eyes of a brilliant assembly are exclusively directed to
them. Let those who have felt this but attend to what we have
here said : the motion of the arms and of every other part de-
pends on it.

THE QUICK PACE.

Here, the weight of the body is advanced from the heel to
the toes ; the toes are least turned out ; and still nearer and
stronger points of support a»:d action are chosen. The outer
edge of the heel first touches the ground, and the sole of the
foot projects the weight. D

34 THE QUICK PACE.

These are essential to the increased quickness of this pace —
(Plate VEIL figs. 5 and 6); and it is important to remark, as
to all these paces, that the weight is successively more thrown
forward, and the toes are successively less turned out. In the
grandest form of the march, the toes, as we have seen, are, in
the posterior foot, though but for a moment, even thrown back-
wards ; in the moderate pace, they have an intermediate direc-
tion ; and in the quick pace, they are thrown more directly for-
ward, as in the six figures of Plate VIII.

It is this direction of the toes, and still more the nearer and
stronger points of support and action, namely, the heel and sole
of the foot, which are essential to the quick pace so universally
practised, but which, together with the great inclination of the
body, being ridiculously transferred to the moderate pace, make
unfortunate people look so awkward, as we shall now explain.
The time of the moderate pace is, as it were, filled up by the
more complicated process of the step — by the gradual and easy
breaking of the descent of the foot on its outer edge, or the ball
of the little toe, by the deliberate positing of the foot, by its
equally gradual and easy projection from its inner edge, or the
ball of the great toe. The quick pace, if its time be lengthened,
has no such filling up : the man stumps at once down on his
heel, and could rise instantly from his sole, but finds that, to
fill up his time, he must pause an instant ; he feels he should do
something, and does not know what ; his hands suffer the same
momentary paralysis as his feet ; he gradually becomes confused
and embarrassed : deeply sensible of this, he at last exhibit- it
externally ; a smile or a titter arises, though people do not well
know at what ; but, in short, the man has walked like a clown,
because the mechanism, of his step has not filled up its time, or
answered its purpose.

I trust that the mechanism and time of the three paces are
here simply, clearly, and impressively described. The following
is the more imperfect, but still useful, military description, with
its words of command : —

DOUBLE MARCH. 35

SLOW STEP.

March. — On the word March, the left foot is carried thirty
inches to the front, and, without being drawn back, is placed
softly on the ground, so as not to jerk or shake the body:
seventy-five of these steps to be taken in a minute. (The recruit
is ordered to be carefully trained, and thoroughly instructed in
this step, as an essential foundation for arriving at accuracy in
the paces of more celerity. This is the slowest step at which
troops are to move.)

QUICK STEP.

The cadence of the slow pace having become perfectly habitual,
a quick time is next taught, which is 108 steps in a minute, each
of thirty inches, making 270 feet in a minute.

Quick March. — The command Quick March being given with
a pause between them, the word Quick is to be considered as a
caution, and the whole to remain perfectly steady. On the word
March, the whole move off, conforming to the directions already
given. (This pace is applied generally to all movements by large
as well as small bodies of troops ; and therefore the recruit is
trained and thoroughly instructed in this essential part of his
duty.)

DOUBLE MARCH.

The directions for the march apply, in a great degree, to this
step, which is 150 steps in a minute, each of thirty-six inches,
making 450 feet in a minute.

Double March. — On the word Double March, the whole step
off together with the left feet, keeping the head erect, and the
shoulders square to the front ; the knees are a little bent ; the
body is more advanced than in the other marches ; the arms
liang with ease down the outside of the thighs. The person
inarching is carefully habituated to the full pace of thirty-six
inches, otherwise he gets into the habit of a short trot, which
defeats the obvious advantages of this degree of march. In the

36 FEATS IN WALKING.

army, great advantage attends the constant use of the plummet;
and the several lengths swinging the times of the different
marches in a minute, are as follow : —

In. Hun.

Slow time . . 75 steps in the minute . . . 24.96
Quick time . . 108 „ „ ... 12,03

Double march . 150 „ „ ... 6,26

A musket ball, suspended by a string which is not subject to
stretch, and on which are marked the different required lengths,
answers the above purpose, may be easily acquired, and is
directed to be frequently compared with an accurate standard in
the adjutant's possession. The length of the plummet is to be
measured from the point of suspension to the centre of the ball.
In practising all these paces, the pupils should also be accus-
tomed to march upon a narrow plane, where there is room for
only one foot, upon rough uneven ground, and on soft ground
which yields to the foot.

Walking exercises a greater influence over the economy when
it takes place on inclined planes than on a flat surface. In
ascending, the effort is made in a direction directly opposed to
the general tendency of heavy bodies : the body is strongly bent,
the upper part of the trunk in advance ; the action of the poste-
rior and anterior muscles of the thigh is considerable ; and cir-
culation and respiration are speedily accelerated by the violence
of the muscular contractions. In descending, on the contrary,
effort is requisite to keep up the body, which tends to obey the
laws of gravitation ; and to moderate the tendency of gravity to
project forward in the centre, the body is thrown back, the sacro-
spinal mass, and the posterior muscles of the neck, are strongly
contracted, the knees bent, and the steps much shorter. Men
with long flat feet, and the heel bone little projecting, are bad
walkers.

FEATS IN WALKING.

The power of walking great distances without fatigue is an
important matter, in which the English have of late excelled.
A good walker will do six miles an hour, for one hour, on a good

RUNNING. 37

road.* If in perfect training, he may even do twelve miles in
two hours. Eighteen miles in three hours is a much more
doubtful affair, though some are said to have achieved it.

A Cork paper, of recent date, describes a match of ten mile*
in 120 minutes, on the Mallow and Fermoy road, by Captain
John T. G. Campbell, of the 91st (Argyleshire) Regiment, ac-
coutred in heavy marching order of a private soldier, viz., with
knapsack and kit, great-coat and mess-tin, musket, bayonet,
and sixty rounds of ball cartridge : total, fifty pounds' weight.
Heavy bets were pending on the issue. The captain started at
eight o'clock, A.M., and performed this undertaking in the short
time of 107 minutes and a quarter, thus winning the match, and
having twelve minutes and three quarters to spare.

At the rate of five miles an hour, pedestrians of the first class
will do forty miles in eight hours, and perhaps fifty in ten.f At
the rate of four miles an hour, a man may walk any length of
time. Robert Skipper walked 1000 miles in 1000 successive
half-hours, on the same ground Captain Barclay walked 1000
miles in 1000 successive hours.

In the art of walking quickly, the circumstance perhaps most
important is, to keep the knees somewhat bent and springy.

RUNNING.

" Running," says one of our gymnasiarchs, " only differs from
walking by the rapidity of the movement." This is quite in-
correct. Running is precisely intermediate to walking and leap-
ing ; and, in order to pass into it from walking, the motion must
be changed. A series of leaps from each foot alternately must

* Seven miles in one hour are said to have been done by some.

t A clever writer in Blackwood's Magazine says, " There can be no doubt
that, out of the British army, on a war establishment, ten thousand men
nji^ht be chosen, by trial, who would compose a corps capable of marching
fifty miles a day, on actual service, for a whole week. The power of such a
corps is not to be calculated : it would far outgo cavalry."

38 POSITION AND ACTION IN RUNNING.

he performed, in order to constitute it; the foot which is left
behind quits the ground before the foot in advance is firmly
fixed, so that the centre of gravity remains uncertain in passing
from one leg to the other, which forms a series of leaps, and
renders a fall a common occurrence.

POSITION IN RUNNING.

The upper part of the body is slightly inclined forward ; the
head slighthr thrown backward, to counteract the gravity for-
ward : the breast is freely projected ; the shoulders are steady,
to give a fixed point to the auxiliary muscles of respiration : the
upper parts of the arms are kept near the sides ; the elbows are
bent, and each forms an acute angle ; the hands are shut, with
the nails turned inwards ; and the whole arms move but slightly,
in order that the muscles of respiration on the chest may be as
little as possible disturbed, and follow only the impulse com-
municated by other parts— (Plate IX. fig. 1). There exists,
in fact, during the whole time of running, a strong and perma-
nent contraction of the muscles of the shoulder and arm, which,
though very violent, is less serviceable to the extended move-
ments, than to keep the chest immoveable, toward which the
arms are brought close, the flexors and adductors of which are
especially contracted.

ACTION IN RUNNING.

At every step, the knees are stretched out ; the legs kept as
straight as possible; the feet almost graze the ground; the
tread is neither with the mere balls of the toes, nor with the
whole sole of the foot ; and the spring is made rapidly from one
foot to the other, so that they pass each other with great velo-
city—(Plate IX. fig. 2).

But the abdominal members are not the only ones in motion,
although it is in them that the greatest developement takes
place. Throughout the whole time of running, a strong and
permanent contraction of the muscles of the shoulder, arm, and
forearm takes place : this, though very violent, is less for the

RESPIRATION MODERATE RUNNING. 39

purpose of aiding motion than of preserving the immobility of
the thorax, which is pressed upon the whole thoracic member,
whose flexors and adductors are strongly contracted. The de-
gree of velocity, however, must be proportioned to the length of
the steps. Too slow and long, as well as too quick and short,
steps, may be equally injurious.

RESPIRATION.

Speed, and still more duration in running, are in proportion
to the developemcnt of the lungs, and consequently the volume
of oxygen and blood which they can combine in their parenchyma
at each respiratory movement. Thus, of two men, one having
the abdominal members developed, and the other possessing
good lungs, the former will run with the greatest speed for a
short distance, but if the distance be considerable, he will soon
be gained upon by the latter. A runner, after performing a cer-
tain space, is seized with a difficulty of breathing, long before
the repetition of the contractions has produced fatigue in the
abdominal members. To excel, therefore, in running, requires,
like walking and dancing, a peculiar exercise. As the muscular
-contractions depend, for their principle of excitement, on the
respiration, the chest should be firmly fixed, so as both to faci-
litate this, and to serve as a point of support for the efforts of
the lower members. The best runners are those who have the
best wind, and keep the breast dilated for the longest time.

During the whole time of running, long inspirations and slow
expirations are of the greatest importance ; and young persons
cannot be too early accustomed to them. To facilitate respira-
tion towards the end of the race, the upper part of the body
may be leant a little forward. Running should cease as soon as
the breath becomes very short, and a strong perspiration takes
place.

MODERATE RUNNING.

This is performed gently and in equal time, and may be ex-
tended to a considerable space. In practising this pace, it is

40 RAPID RUNNING.

necessary to fix the distance to be run ; and this should
be proportioned to the age and strength of the runners. This
exercise, more than all others, requires to be proceeded with in
a progressive manner. If, at the first trial, you run too fast or
too long a time, it may produce spitting of blood and headache,
or aneurisms of the heart and principal vessels, especially if the
weather be dry and cold.

A moderately cool day may accordingly be chosen, a distance
of three hundred feet measured, and the runners placed in a line
at one end. They may then start, trot at the rate of about seven
feet in a second to the opposite end, turn, and continue until
they reach the spot whence they started. Frequent repetition
of this is sufficient at first. Afterwards, they may run over this
space, two, three, or four times without stopping ; and the ex-
ercise may then be limited to this. It may, on subsequent days,
be extended to five, six, and seven times the distance.

Fatigue is then generally quite removed ; and the run may
either be continued farther, or the runners, if neither heated nor
winded, may accelerate their pace. They may next attempt a
mile in ten minutes ; and repeat this, till, being gradually less
and less heated, they can either extend the distance, or diminish
the time, in any measured proportion. At this pace, six miles
may afterwards be run in an hour.

RAPID RUNNING.

This is best applied to a short space in a little time. Thr^e
hundred feet upon an open plain will not generally be found too
great. At each end of this, a cross line may be drawn, and the
runners may arrange themselves on one line, while the umpire
is placed at the other. On the latter giving the signal, the
running commences, and he who first passes him gains the race.
It is extremely useful always to runt>eyond the line at a gentler
pace, as it gradually lowers the actions of the respiratory and
circulating systems.

Running is more easy on a level surface, but should be prac-
tised on ground of every variety : upon long, square, and circular

EFFECTS OF RUNNING. 41

plots of ground. The pupils should be accustomed to turn
promptly out of the direct line — a faculty not possessed by ani-
mals, and exceedingly useful when pursued. They should also
run up hill, and particularly down, as it is dangerous unless fre-
quently practised.

FEATS IN RUNNING.

The practice of running may be carried to a great degree of
perfection.

A quarter of a mile in a minute is good running ; and a mile
in four minutes, at four starts, is excellent.

The mile was perhaps never run in four minutes, but it has
been done in four minutes and a half.*

A mile in five minutes is good running. Two miles in ten
minutes is oftener failed in than accomplished. Four miles m
twenty is said to puzzle the cleverest.

Ten miles an hour is done by all the best runners. Fifteen
miles in an hour and a half has never perhaps been done.

It is reported that West ran forty miles in five hours and a
half. This, it is said, was done by one individual in four hours
and three quarters, or less.

As to great distances, Rainer failed in two attempts to accom-
plish 100 miles in eighteen hours. West is said to have accom-
plished this.

EFFECTS OF RUNNING.

In running, the mass of our organs is agitated by violent and
constant shocks, which succeed with rapidity; but the abdominal
members are not the only ones in motion, although they are
those in which the developement is most considerable. Running
devclopes not only the abdominal members, but has a strong
influence upon the respiratory parts. This exercise is particu-
larly suited to young persons, especially those of a lymphatic
temperament. It should not, however, be practised after meals.

* Half a mile was recently run in two minutes ; but it was down a fall A*
precipitous as a mountain's side, and the performer was blind in the last
twenty yards.— ED. Fifth Edition.

42 LEAPING.

LEAPING.

Leaping consists principally in the sudden straightening of
the articulations, performed by a strong arid instantaneous con-
traction of the extensors, by which the body is rapidly projected
from the ground.

The leaping-stand consists of two moveable posts, above six
feet high, having, above the second foot from the ground, holes
bored through them, at the distance of an inch from each other;
two iron pins to be placed in the holes at any height; a cord, at
least ten feet long, passed over these pins, and kept straight by
two sand-bags at its ends ; and weights upon the feet of the
posts, to prevent them from falling — (Plate X. fig. 1"). The
leap over the cord is made from the side of the stand towards
which the heads of the pegs are turned; so that, if the feet touch
the cord, it will easily and instantly fall.

In all kinds of leaping, it is of great importance to draw in
and retain the breath at the moment of the greatest effort, as it
gives the chest more solidity to support the rest of the members,
impels the blood into the muscular parts, and increases their
strength. The hands, also, should be shut, and the arms pendent.
The extent of the leap in height, or horizontally, is proportioned
to the power employed, and the practice acquired. As it is per-
formed with facility only in proportion to the strength exerted,
and the elasticity and suppleness of the articulations and muscles
of the lower extremities, much exercise is necessary to attain
that degree of perfection which lessens all obstacles, and supplies
the means of clearing them without danger. Lightness and firm-
ness are the qualities necessary for leaping : every thing should
be done to acquire these two qualifications, for without them
leaping is neither graceful nor safe.

THE HIGH LEAP.

Without a Run.

In this, the legs and feet are closed ; the knees are bent till
the calves nearly touch the thighs ; the upper part of the body.

THE HIGH LEAP. 43

kept straight, is inclined a little forward; and the arms thrown
in the direction of the leap, which increases the impulse, pre-
serves the balance, and may be useful in a fall. (Plate. X.
fig. 1.)

The vertebral column, and consequently the whole of the
trunk, being thus bent forward, a strong contraction of the
muscles preserves this bending till the moment when the leap
takes place ; then, by sudden contraction of the extensors, the
body stretches out like a bow when the string breaks, is thus
jerked forward, and remains suspended a longer or shorter time
in the air.

In descending, the person should be rather inclined forward ;
and the fall should take place on the fore part of the feet,
bending the knees and haunches, to deaden the shock and
descent ; for, the direct descent in this leap, if not thus broken,
would send its shock from the heels to the spine and head, and
might occasion injury. To perpendicularity in this leap, should
be added lightness, so that scarcely any noise from the leap
should be heard.

This leap, without a run, may be practised at the height,—

1. Of the knees. I 3. Of the hips.

2. Of the middle of the thighs. I 4. Of the lower ribs.

With a Run.

The run preceding the leap should never exceed ten paces,
the distance between the point of springing and the cord being
equal to half the cord's height from the ground. The view of
the leaper should be directed first to the spot whence he is to
spring ; and, the moment he has reached that, to the cord,
accustoming himself to spring from either foot, and from both
feet.

The instant the spring is made, or (if it be made with one
foot) immediately after, the feet should be closed, and the knees
tlrawn forcibly towards the chin. Thoughout, flexibility and

44 LEAPING.

skill, not violent exertion, should be displayed. This leap, with
a run, may oe practised at the height, —

1. Of the hips.

2. Of the lower ribs.

3. Of the pit of the stomach.

4. Of the breast.

5. Of the chin.

6. Of the eyes.

7. Of the crown of the head.

Feats in High Leaping.

A good high leaper will clear five feet ; a first-rate one, five
and a half; and an extraordinary one, six feet. Ireland is men-
tioned as having cleared an extended cord at the height of
fourteen feet. Another man, it is said, jumped to the height
of seventeen feet, which was three times the height of his own
body.*

THE LONG LEAP.

Without a Run.

This is generally performed upon straight firm ground, on
which there are marks, or parallel lines, at equal distances.
The first of these lines is the place to leap from. The leapers
succeed each other, and clear a greater number of lines accord-
ing to their strength and skill. Here the feet are closed ; the
whole weight rests upon the balls of the toes ; and the body is
inclined forward. Both arms are then swung forward, — back-
ward,— then drawn strongly forward, — and at the same instant
the limbs, having been bent, are extended with the utmost
possible force.

In performing this leap, the hands and body must be bent
forward, especially at the end of the movement, when the
leaper alights. On level ground twelve feet is a good standing
leap ; and fourteen is one of comparatively rare occurrence.

With a Run.
This leap is best executed with a run ; and we have there-

* The author means, with the aid of a spring-board.— ED. Fifth Edition.

THE LONG LEAP. 45

fore dwelt less upon the former. Here, also, the body must be
inclined forward.

The run should be made over a piece of firm, and not slip-
pery ground, to the extent of ten, fifteen, or twenty paces ;
should consist of small steps, increasing in quickness as they
approach the point of springing ; and these should be so calcu-
lated as to bring upon the point that foot with which the leaper
is accustomed to spring. The spring, as here implied, should
be performed with one foot, and the arms thrown forcibly to-
wards the place proposed to be reached. The height as well as
the length of the leap, must be calculated; for the leap is
shortened by not springing a proper height. (Plate X. fig. 2.)

In the descent, the feet are closed, the knees bent, the upper
part of the body inclined forward, and the toes first touch the
ground, at which moment, a light spring, and afterwards some
short steps, are made, in order to avoid any sudden check.
In a much extended leap, however, alighting on the toes is
impossible. A sort of horizontal swing is then achieved, by
which the leaper's head is little higher than his feet, and his
whole figure is almost parallel with the ground ; and, in this
case, to alight on the toes is impossible. Care must here be
taken not to throw the feet so much forward as to cause the
leaper to fall backward at the moment of descent. The ground
must be cleared, or the leap is imperfect and unfair.

This leap may be practised at, —

1. Double the length of the body.

2. Twice and a half that length.

3. Three times that length.

Feats in Long Leaping.

On level ground, twenty feet is a first-rate leap ; twenty-one
is extraordinary j and twenty-two is very rarely accomplished.*
With a run and a leap, on a slightly inclined plane, twenty-
three feet have been done.

* I have seen twenty-two feet covered forwards and backwards, by an Irish
tailor.— En. Fifth Edition.

46 LEAPING.

Of the various kinds of leaps, the first or simple leap, whir-h
is produced principally by the extension of the abdominal mem-
bers, which impel the body either straight upwards, in the
vertical leap, or obliquely upwards and forwards, in the hori-
zontal or rather parabolic leap, requires, in addition to the
contraction of the abdominal members, especially if the leap be
executed with the feet close together, a violent action of the
muscles of the abdomen, upper parts of the back, anterior parts
of the loins, and of the thorax and shoulders.

THE DEEP LEAP.

This may be made either with or without the hands. In
either wray, to avoid the shock, the body must be kept in a bent
position, and the fall be upon the balls of the toes. When the
hands are used, the leaper places them in front of the feet ; and
during the descent, the weight of the body is checked by the
former, and passes in a diminished .state to the latter ; so that
the shock is obviated.

A flight of steps serves the purpose of this exercise. The
leaper ascends a certain number ; leaps from the side ; gradually
increases the number ; and, by practising progressively higher,
finds it easy to leap from heights which at first appalled him.
He afterwards combines the long and deep leaps. For this
purpose, a rivulet, which has one bank high and the opposite
one low, is very favourable. Children can easily take a leap of
nine feet in descending.

THE DEEP LEAP BACKWARDS, FROM A REST ON THE
HANDS.

This exercise is first performed from platforms of various
heights, and from walls of various elevations. The object is to
lessen the shock that the legs and body experience in reaching
the ground at a depth of more than six or seven feet, and to
dimmish the distance if possible, at the same time that it
diminishes the violence and velocity of the fall. All this is
easily managed by observing the following rules.

THE DEEP LEAP BACKWARDS. 47

Suppose the pupil placed upon a platform of four or six feet
in height, he must first examine the place he is about to leap
to, so as to select the most favourable part, free from stones and
other obstacles. He will then approach the extremity of the
platform, with his back towards it, and bend his body, placing
his hands in the position shown in Plate X. fig. 3. Having
taken up this position securely, he will lean his head a little
forward, raise his toes from the platform, and remain for an
instant supported by the arms. The body then begins to ex-
tend, and the legs to lengthen downward and backwards ; the
arms follow this movement, bend, and support the body by the
hands, which have a secure resting-place on the edge of the
platform, as in Plate X fig. 4. This descending movement is
executed as slowly as possible : the arms stretch out to their
utmost length, till the body is sustained by the last phalanx of
the fingers, or touches the ground with the feet. If it does not
reach the ground, the pupil drops gently down on the tips of his
toes, bends himself, and recovers his upright position.

There is another mode of descending, when the last resting-
place for the hands is the top of a counterfort, or prop on a
wall without a counterfort. This consists (see Plate X. fig. 3)
in seizing the last hold with the right hand for instance, and in
hanging firmly by that hand, whilst the left, being at liberty, is
lowered and pushes back the body from the projecting stones in
the walls, to prevent injury in the descent. The impulse thus
given is, however, very trifling, and solely to avoid hurt, without
increasing the violence of the fall, which ought to be facilitated
on reaching the ground by the rules already given. By these
means, the height of a wall is relatively diminished, for a man
who hangs suspended by his arms, has six feet less to drop than
he who has his feet where he might put his hands.

The down leap, unless gradually practised, may produce
ruptures of the diaphragm. When, however, the elevation from
which the leap is taken is gradually increased, the eye becomes
accustomed to measure the most extensive distances fearlessly,
at the same time that by practice the abdominal members learn

48 VAULTING.

to bend properly under the weight of the trunk, and thereby
preserve the organs contained in it from serious injuries. In
this kind of leap, the shocks will be diminished by retaining the
air in the chest, which may be done by closing the glottis.

Persons who have long toes, powerful calves, and prominent
heels, are the best adapted for leaping.

VAULTING.

In vaulting, by a spring of the feet, the body is raised, and by
leaning the hands upon a fixed object, it at the same time re-
ceives, in oblique vaulting, a swing which facilitates the action.
As the inclination thus given to the body depends not merely
on the feet, but on the hands, we have the power to guide the
body in any direction.

This exercise is conveniently practised on the vaulting bar,
which rests upon two or three posts. It may be performed with
or without running. The beginner may at first be allowed a
run of a few paces, ending in a preparatory spring ; and he may
afterwards be allowed only a spring.

OBLIQUE VAULTING.

To mount, the vaulter must place himself in front of the bar ;
make a preparatory spring with the feet close ; fix at that mo-
ment both hands upon the bar ; heave himself up, and <swing
the right leg over. The body, supported by the hands, may
then easily descend into the riding position. To dismount, the
vaulter, supported by the hands, must extend the feet, make a
little swing forward, and a greater one backward, so as to heave
both feet behind over the bar, and spring to the ground with
them close.

To do this he must first clearly define to himself the place
where he intends to fall. Then, having placed both hands
upon the bar, he should first bend and then extend the joints,

\ i

[

STRAIGHT-FORWARD VAULTING. 49

so as to raise the body with all his strength, and throw his legs,
kept close, high over the bar. (Plate [XI. fig. 1.) When the
right hand (if he vault to the right) quits the bar. the left re-
mains, the feet reach the ground on the opposite side, and he
falls on both feet, with 'the knees projected, and the hands
ready, if necessary, to break the fall.

In vaulting to the right, the left foot passes in the space
which was between both the hands, the right hand quits the bar,
and the left guides the body in the descent. In vaulting to the
left, the right foot passes in the space wrhich was between both
hands, the left hand quits the bar, and the right guides the body
in its descent. As, however, it is difficult for beginners to vault
either way, this is not to be attempted until after sufficient
practice in the way which may be easiest. The vaulter may
then, with a preparatory spring, try the following heights, —

1. That of the pit of the stomach.

2. That of a middling-sized horse.

3. His own height or more.

STRAIGHT-FORWARD VAULTING.

For this purpose, both hands must be placed at such distance
on the bar as to give room for the feet between them ; the body
should be forcibly raised; the knees drawn up towards the
breast ; and the feet brought between the hands, without moving
them from their place. (Plate XL fig. 2.) This should be
practised until it can be done easily.

This straight-forward vault may have three different termina-
tions. When the feet are in the space between the hands, the
vaulter may stand upright. He may pass his feet to the op-
posite side, whilst he seats himself. He may continue the leap
over the seat, through the arms, letting both hands go at once
after the legs have passed.

52 LEAPING WITH A POLE.

the spring can take place only with one foot, and as this must
arrive correctly at the springing place, it is necessary that the
order of the steps should be arranged so as to effect this object.
If the leaper should be obliged to correct himself by making a
few steps, either longer or shorter, just before making the spring,
the leap is rendered difficult.

3. The fixing of the pole in the ground, and the spring, must
take place at the same instant, because by that means the upper
and lower members operate together, no power is lost, and the
swing is performed with the greatest facility. The place of the
pole, however, varies with the height of the leaps ; in leaps of
about four feet, the distance of one foot from the cord is suffi-
cient ; in higher leaps, it should be from one and a half to two
feet. The best plan is to have a small pit dug in front of the
cord (see Plate XII. figs. 2 and 3), and to remove the stand
from it, as the height of the leap increases; or the stand may
remain at a foot and a half from the pit, and the learner be
taught to make all the leaps from it. The spring is made with
one foot, at the distance of two, three, four, or five feet from
the plant of the pole. If the leaper keep the left hand lowest,
he must spring with the left foot, and vice versa.

4. The swing upward is effected by the force of the spring,
the support of the lower, and the pull of the upper hand ; but
principally by the propulsion of the run, which being sud-
denly modified by the fixing of the pole, has its horizontal
direction changed into a slanting ascent, and carries the body ">f
the leaper over the cord. The leaper must carefully observe
that the spring of the foot, and the plant of the pole, be in the
direction of the preparatory run.

5. The turning of the body during the swinging upward, is
necessary. When the leaper is going to spring, he has his face
turned towards the object of the leap, as in Plate XVII. fig. 1 ;
but as his feet swing, his body turns round the pole. When his
feet have passed over the other side of the cord, the head is still
considerably on this side : the leaper then appears as in fig. 2.
Speedily, the middle of his body is on the other side of the

THE HIGH LEAP WITH A POLK. fS

Cord, and he begins the descent, as in fig. 3. It would be im-
possible to descend in this position otherwise than with his face
directed to the place where the leap was commenced.

6. The quitting of the pole during the leap is effected by
giving it a push with one hand, at the moment of greatest
height, and this causes it to fall on the inner side of the cord.

7. The carrying of the pole over the cord is more difficult.
The leaper must then raise the pole a little from the ground at
the moment of beginning the descent, and instantly elevate the
lower part of it with the lowest hand, and depress the upper
part with the other ; the consequence being, that, at the descent,
the lower end of the pole will point upward, and the upper end
downward. This should be practised first in low leaps.

8. The descent depends entirely upon the manner in which
the leap is made : if the leap be perfect, the descent will be so.
The usual fault in descending is, that the leaper, having passed
the cord, falls to the ground almost perpendicularly instead of
obliquely. In the annexed figure, a is the place wrhence the
spring is made, c the section of the cord, b the position of the
leaper over it, d his right, and e his wrong descent. The latter

is faulty because it throws him so much out of balance, that in
order not to fall backward, he must run backward to d. If, on
the contrary, he descends in proper balance to the ground, he
moves not an inch from the spot where his feet alight ; and this
complete rest following the descent is the sign of a perfect leap.
The descent, as already explained, must take place upon the
balls of the toes, and with a sinking of the knees. The position

54 LEAPING WITH A POLE.

of the body is sufficiently explained by Plate XIL figs. 1, 2,
and 3; but many learn to swing the legs so well as to raise them,
during the highest part of the leap, considerably above the head.
Order of exercises in the high leap, to be very gradually at-
tempted : —

1. The height of the hips.

2. That of the pit of the stomach.

3. That of the chin.

4. That of the crown of the head.

5. That of the points of the fingers
—that is, as high as the latter can
reach.

In performing these leaps, the pole is parted with. As many
more may form a repetition of the preceding, with this difference,
that the leaper carries the pole over with him. A similar num-
ber may repeat the first, except that the leaper, between the
spring and descent, makes a complete turn round the pole, so
as again to bring his face in the direction of the leap. This en-
larged turn is rendered easier by leaping a little higher than the
cord requires.

THE LONG LEAP WITH A POLE.

This leap is the most useful, being applicable almost every-
where; and particularly in a country intersected with small
rivers, ditches, &c. It should be first practised over a ditch
about three feet deep, eight feet broad at one end, and about
twenty-one feet at the other, and of any convenient length. In
this exercise, the pole should be rather stronger and longer than
in the preceding one — depending, however, on the length of the
leap, and the height of the bank it is made from. The usual
length is from ten to thirteen feet.

The handling of the pole is the same as in the high leap. The
preparatory run is rapid, in proportion to the length of the leap.
The spring takes place as in the preceding exercise. The swing
is also the same, except that the curve of the leap is wider. The
turning of the body may likewise be similar, but it is convenient
to make only a quarter turn. In the descent, the hand presses
more upon the pole ; and the feet are stretched out to reach the

'

1

THE DEEP LEAP WITH A POLE.

55

opposite bank, as in Plate XIII. fig. 1, in which the leaper is
descending. Another method of leaping a river, is to force the
body up so high by the pressure of the hands (of which one rests
upon the end of the pole, or very near it), as to swing over the
top of the pole, and allow it to pass between the legs when de-
scending. (Plate XIII. fig. 2.)
Try the following : —

1. The leap of two lengths of the
body.

2. That of three lengths of the body.

3. That of four lengths of the body.

4. Persons of equal strength try to
outleap one another.

The lengths of 18, 20, 22, and 24 feet are frequently done by
practised leaper s.

THE DEEP LEAP WITH A POLE.

Here neither the preparatory run nor the spring occur : there
is nothing which requires the exertion of the lower members.
The use of the hands and arms, however, is peculiarly requisite,
as well as a little of the art of balancing. The leaper fixes the
pole, at a convenient distance from the place where he stands,
in a chasm, ditch, or river, having one bank high, and the oppo-
site one low. Seizing it with both hands in the usual way, he
slips along it lower and lower ; the whole weight of his body, at
last, resting upon it. Thus, if the depth is considerable, as two
lengths of the body, he may slide so far down upon it, that his
head appears slanting downward. In this position, he makes a
slight push against the bank, or merely quits it, with his feet,
which he swings by the side of the pole to the opposite bank.
Here, also, the descent is performed upon the balls of the toes,
with bending of the knees. The principal advantage in this leap
lies in the art of supporting the body, without tottering ; and
for this purpose, it is absolutely necessary that the feet should
be stretched out far from each other, in an angular form, other-
wise the balance might be lost. The best way of practising this
in an exercise ground, is by a flight of steps.

To the exercise 'of the abdominal members, these leaps units

56 BALANCING.

a strong action of the muscles of the thorax, arms, and fore-
arms, and even of those of the palms of the hand. The body is
only half impelled by the abdominal members; but this impulse
is rendered complete by considerable effort on the part of the
thoracic members. The latter, in the vertical leap, being sup-
ported by the narrow and moveable base afforded by the pole,
assist greatly in raising the body, and even keep it a moment
suspended for the legs to pass over (if the object to be cleared
is very high) before it allows the body to obey the force of
gravity which carries it down.

This exercise communicates what is termed great lightness to
the body, and great suppleness — that is to say, great relative
strength of the abdominal members ; and it also developes the
superior members. It is good for lymphatic temperaments and
young persons, but it should not be indulged in immediately
after meals. It may occasion accidents of the brain and spinal
marrow, unless all the articulations are bent on returning to the
ground.

BALANCING.

Balancing is the art of preserving the stability of the body
upon a narrow or a moving surface. The balancing bar consists
of a round and tapering pole, supported horizontally, about three
feet from the ground, by upright posts, one at its thicker ex-
tremity, and another about the middle, between the parts of
which it may be raised or lowered by means of an iron peg
passing through holes m their sides. The unsupported end of
the bar wavers, of course, when stepped upon — (Plate XIV.)

The upper surface of the bar being smooth in dry weather,
the soles of the shoes should be damped ; the ground about the
bar should consist of sand, and the exercises be cautiously per-
formed.

TURNS IN BALANCING.

POSITION AND ACTION IN BALANCING.

In this exercise, the head should be held up, the hody erect,
the shoulders back, the arms extended, the hands shut, and the
feet turned outwards. At first, the balancer may be assisted
along the bar ; but he must gradually receive less and less aid,
till at last the assistant only remains by his side.

The pole may be mounted either from the ground or from the
riding position on the beam. In the latter case, the balancer
may raise the right foot, place it flat on the beam, with the heel
near the upper part of the thigh, and rise on the point of the
foot, carrying the weight of the body before him. (Plate XIV.
fig.l.)

In this case, the beam must not be touched with the hands ;
the left leg must hang perpendicularly, with the toe towards the
ground, and the arms be stretched forward. After keeping the
balance for some minutes in this position, he must stretch the
left leg out before him, place his heel on the middle of the beam,
T*ith the toe well turned outward, and transfer the weight of
the body from the point of the right foot to the left heel —
(Plate XIV. fig. 2). These steps he must perform alternately,
till he reaches the end of the beam.

TURNS IN BALANCING.

When the balancer is able to walk firmly and in good position
along the bar, and to spring off whenever he may lose his
balance, he may attempt to turn round, first at the broad, then
at the narrow end, and to return. He may next try to go
backward.

In accomplishing this, it is no longer the heel, but the tip of
the toes, which receives the weight ; the leg which hangs being
stretched backward, with the hip, knee, and heel forming a right
angle, till the toes, by a transverse motion, are so placed on the
middle of the beam, that the balancer can safely transfer to them
the whole weight of the body.

58 BALANCING.

To acquire the art of passing an obstacle placed laterally, two
balancers may pass each other thus : — They must hold one an-
other fast by the arms, advance breast to breast, place each his
right foot close forward to that of his comrade, across the bar
(Plate XIV. fig. 3), and turn completely round each other, by
each stepping with his left foot round the right one of the other,
as in Plate XIV. fig. 4.

To acquire the art of passing an obstacle placed inferiorly, a
large stone may be laid upon the bar, or a stick may be held
before the balancer, about the height of the knee. (Plate XIV.
fig. 5.)

To pass over men placed upon a beam, the pupil or pupils
who are astride in front lie down on the beam, which they grasp
firmly by passing their arms round it. The pupil a (fig. 1, Plate
XX.) having to pass to the point on the beam marked b, places
his hands on the waistband of his comrade c : he then leans
upon his arms, and raises his body to pass forward over his
comrade, opening his legs widely, so as not to touch him, till he
places himself astride at c. He then extends his hands and
arms for a second movement, places them at b, and leans the
body well forward, as shown in fig. 2, Plate XV. Being thus
placed, he makes the last movement, raises his body upon the
arms to pass over his comrade's head without touching it, which
is the chief rule of this exercise, and places himself astride upon
the beam at 6, moving his hands immediately, and extending
them to rest at d. This movement being finished, he continues
advancing astride, along the beam, over the others, if there be
any ; raises himself to an upright position, and lies down in his
turn on the beam. This last attitude requires some care, be-
cause the head must incline either to the right or left of the
beam, as shown in the plates, and the pupil must hold tight
to the beam with the arms and thighs, which requires both skill
and strength.

The pupil may also pass as shown in fig. 3, Plate XV. This
method is very easy for the person passing, and indeed more so

q

TURNS IN BALANCING. 59

than any other ; but it is necessary that the pupil who is in the
position b should have learnt to raise himself up on the beam,
or know how to advance along it underneath, in a reversed
position.

It is impossible for any one who has not seen the carnivals of
Venice, and other towns in Italy, to form an idea of all the
difficulties that have been surmounted in the art of equilibrium.
To acquire the art of carrying any body, the balancer may at
first walk along the bar with his hands folded across his breast,
instead of using them to balance himself; and he may after-
wards carry bodies of various magnitudes.

To this notice of the rules by which the art of Balancing may
be best acquired, it will not be out of place to subjoin a slight
outline of its importance to all who desire to arrive at excellence
in any of the Manly Exercises. Motion — the source of them
all — if not absolutely dependent for existence upon equilibrium,
•without it would be but the infancy of action — movement
tottering, uncertain, powerless. The first effort of locomotion
— the walk, without it, possesses neither force nor decision : in
the same ratio that a higher degree of muscular exertion is de-
manded, increases the value and importance of the art which
teaches how best to apply the vital energies to its service.
What a wise economy is to the social, this art is to the physical
system : both serve to augment our resources, by instructing us
so to husband them that the term " necessity" be not known to
our vocabulary.

While in every instance equilibrium adds greatly to physical
power, in many it stands altogether in its stead. To the most
casual observer of our usual sports it will be manifest that this
is the case in Skating ; — the more attentive and competent will
have little difficulty in tracing its effects in Leaping, Vaulting,
Swimming, and through almost the whole catalogue. It is to
the later writers on horsemanship that we are indebted for the
knowledge of its vital service to the equestrian. The truth of

60 CARRYING WEIGHT.

their theory is proved by the fact that, where formerly scarce a
tithe of a hunting-field was found to ride to hounds, now
nine-tenths are ordinarily to be seen in good places.

• Scouring1 along,

In pleasing hurry and confusion toss'd,
Happy the man, who with uririvall'd speed
Can pass his fellows.

CARRYING WEIGHT.

The power of raising and carrying weight is of great import-
ance in a general view. Many advantages will be derived from
it; for besides strengthening the locomotive muscles, upon
which all our physical operations depend, it will fortify also all
the system and all the organs. All persons, moreover, may
find themselves under the necessity of raising and carrying a
wounded or fainting person, and may be glad to have cultivated
and acquired the power necessary to perform such an act.

In accustoming young persons to carry burdens, they should
be taught to support what is on the back first with one hand
and then with the other : by these means the muscles are equj^ly
exercised on each side, and acquire an equal developement.
These burdens, however, must not exceed their strength ; and
they should be taught not to carry on one side in preference,
for fear of deforming the limbs. There are several modes of
supporting weights, and of trying the amount of power pos-
sessed for this kind of exercise.

Fig. 1, Plate XVII. represents one method. It consists in
loading the shoulders with sacks full of articles whose weight
is previously known. The position of the arms and hands is such
that the pupil can support a great weight : but in this way he

CARRYING WEIGHT. ^|

can walk but very slowly ; and it is therefore, so far, disadvan-
tageous.

Fig. 2, in the same plate, supports a weight by means of a
hod. This is filled with balls or stones, of which the weight is
known.

The form of the weight is of consequence. A soldier now
carries with ease a knapsack full of articles, and additional
weight above it, because the flat shape that has been lately
adopted fits the body, and lies close to the back, as in fig. 3,
and the centre of gravity is thus very little deranged. But if
the knapsack were of the old shape, very projecting and very
round, as in fig. 4, the soldier would be forced to incline his
body forward, and would not be able to carry as great a weight,
nor march as long a time, in consequence of fatigue. It is for
this reason, among others, desirable to extend the knowledge of
the most simple rules of mechanics, because these rules are
serviceable in avoiding many dangers, and diminishing the
fatigue and the efforts that vacillation in the movements pro-
duces. We may make use of a hook to bear boxes or bags in
addition, with the weights marked, and thus learn the carrier'a
strength.

Milo, says history, first carried a calf immediately after its
birth, and continued to do so every day till it had reached its
full size. It was said by this means that he was able to carry
even the ox itself, and afterwards throw it on the ground and
kill it with his fist.

Augustus the Second, King of Poland, carried a man upon
his hand.

A man named Roussel, a labourer in the environs of Lisle,
who on a smaller scale (being but four feet ten inches in height),
was formed exactly like the Farnese Hercules, raised on his
shoulders a weight of eighteen hundred pounds. He cleared a
circle six feet in height with very little spring and one hundred-
weight in each hand. When seated on the ground, he rose up
without aid, carrying two men on his arms. Equally astonishing

62 THROWING THE DISCUS.

in the strength of his loins, he took up two hundred- weight
leaning backwards over a chair. " I have seen this remarkable
man," says Friedlander: "the whole of his family are very
strong : his sister and brother are equally remarkable in this
point." It is very striking to find in him the characteristic
traits with which antiquity depicted the ideal of bodily strength.

In the Encyclopaedia of Krumtz, vol. Ixxii., we find instances
of some men similar to Roussel, who lived at the commence-
ment of the last century. A man named Eckenberg raised a
cannon of two thousand five hundred pounds weight ; and two
strong men were unable to take from him a stick that he held
between his teeth.

In number 446 of the Bibliotheque Britannique, is to be
found a report of some trials made by a Mr. Shulze, in his
manufactory, of the strength of men of different heights.
These trials show what influence an elevated stature has upon
the vertical height to which a man can raise any weight. A
short man is, in his turn, capable of employing more force in
another direction.

THROWING THE DISCUS.

Among the Greeks, throwing the discus did not form part of
the games till the eighteenth Olympiad. This exercise consisted
in throwing, as far as possible, a mass of wood or stone, but
more commonly of iron or copper, of a lenticular form. From
the testimony of ancient authors, there was no mark or butt
fixed, except the spot where the discus thrown by the strong-
est of the discoboli alighted. Mercurial! has handed down to
us three engravings, in which the discus is not of the same shape.
The first engraving represents four discoboli in the act of throw-
ing with the right hand a discus which is as thick at the circuin-

—

>

THROWING THE DISCUS. £-j

ference as at the centre, which has heen bored. The second re-
presents the statue of a discobolus holding a discus apparently of
a spherical form, in the left hand. The third shows the arm of
an athlete with a flat discus. The discus in the last two en-
gravings now mentioned, covers the greater part of the front of
the forearm ; and all that the ancients have written respecting
this instrument, tends to show that it was of enormous size and
weight. Homer tells us, that the athletes threw the discus
either up into the air merely as a prelude to accustom their arms
to it, or horizontally when they were striving for the prize.

To perform this exercise properly, the thrower should not
only balance the discus wrell on the right arm, (supposing it to
be on that arm, as in Plate XVII. fig. 1) ; but at the moment
it leaves the hand, he should throw the whole of the right side
forward, so that the impulse may be assisted by the weight of
the whole bpdy.— (Plate XVII. fig. 2.) This exercise very
much strengthens the body, and developes, in a particular man-
ner, the limb by which the discus is thrown. It may be usefully
employed in cases where it is desirable to remedy weakness in
either of the arms; and it is well calculated to bring up the
power of the left arm to that of the right. The modern quoit
differs from the ancient discus only in this, that the instrument
so called is much smaller than the discus, that its use is a mere
idle pastime, and that the object is always to throw it as close as
possible to a fixed mark, requiring more skill than strength.

It is evident that the discus may be heaved from above the
shoulder as well as flung from below. — (See Plate XVII. fig. 3.)
No exercises can excel these for the acquirement of power.
They ought to be much practised with both hands. A man of
moderate strength will throw a pound weight of lead a distance
of UO feet, or thereabouts.

Silex l$ 126 feet.

Ditto | . H5

64 CLIMBING.

CLIMBING.

Climbing is the art of transporting the body in any direction,
by the aid, in general, both of the hands and feet. The climb-
ing-stand consists of two strong poles, abont fifteen feet high,
and from fifteen to twenty-five feet distant, which are firmly
fixed in the ground, and support a beam strongly fastened to
them. One pole is two inches and a half in diameter; the
other, which serves as a mast, should be considerably thicker ;
and both serve the purpose of climbing. To the beam are at-
tached other implements of climbing : viz. a ladder, an inclined
board, a mast, an inclined pole, a horizontal bar, a rope ladder,
an upright, an inclined, and a level rope. — (Plate XVIII.)

KINDS OF CLIMBING.

Climbing on fixed bodies should first be practised.

The Ladder.

Exercises on the ladder may be practised in the following
ways : —

1. By ascending and descending as J 3. Without using the hands,
usual. 4. Passing another on the front of

2. With one hand, carrying some- I the ladder, or swinging to the back,
thing in the other. I to let another pass.

The Inclined Board.

This should be rather rough, about two feet broad, and two
inches thick. To climb it, it is necessary to seize both sides
with the hands, and to place the feet flat in the middle, the in-
clination of the board being diminished with the progress of
the pupil.

At first, it may form with the ground an angle of about
thirty degrees ; and the climber should not go more than half-
way up. This angle may gradually be augmented to a right
angle, or the direction of the board may be made perpendicular.
When the board is thus little or not at all inclined, the body

KINDS OF CLIMBING. &"»

must be much curved inward, raid the legs thrust up, so that the
higher one is nearly even with the hand. In descending, small
and quick steps are necessary.

The Upright Pole.

The upright pole should be about two inches and a liali' in
diameter, perfectly smooth and free from splinters.

The position of the climber is shown in Plate XVIII. fig. 1,
where nothing touches the pole except the feet, legs, knees, and
hands. He grasps as high as possible with both hands, raises
himself by bending the body and drawing his legs up the pole,
holds fast by them, extends the body, again grasps higher up
with his hands, and continues the same use of the legs and
arms. The descent is performed by sliding down with the legs,
p. ml scarcely touching with the hands, as in Plate XVIII. fig. 2.

The Mast.

This is more difficult, as it cannot be grasped with the hands ;
and it consequently should not be practised until the climber is
expert in the previous exercises. The position of the legs is
the same as for the pole ; but, instead of grasping the mast, the
climber lays hold of his left arm with his right hand, or the re-
verse, and clings to the mast with the whole body, as in Plate
XVIII. fig 3.

The Slant Pole.

This must be at least three inches thick; and as, in this cx-
. the hands bear more of the weight than in climbing the
upright pole, it should not be attempted until expertness in the
otl.'.er is acquired.

The Horizontal, or Slightly Inclined Bar.

This may be about two inches wide at top, from ten to fifteen
feet long, and supported by two posts, respectively six and seven
feet high. The climber must grasp with both hands as high a
part of the bar as lie can reach, and, with arms extended, sup-
port his own weight as long as possible. He must next endea-
vour to bend the elbows so much, that one shoulder remains

V

66 CLIMBING.

close under the bar, as seen in PI XVIII. fig. 4. Or he may
place both hands on the same side, and draw himself up so far
as to see over it, keeping the legs and feet close and extended.

He may then hang with his hands fixed on both sides, near
to each other, having the elbows much bent, the upper parts of
the arms close to the body, and one shoulder close under the
bar ; may lower the head backwards, and may, at the same time,
raise the feet to touch each other over the bar. — (PI XVIII.
fig, 5.) In the last position, he may move the hands one before
the other, forward or backward, and may either slide the feet
along the bar. or alternately change them like the hands, and
retain a similar hold.

Hanging also by the hands alone, as in PI XVIII. fig. 6, he
moves them either forward or backward, keeping the arms firm,
and the feet close and extended. Or he may place himself in
front of the bar, hanging by both hands, and move laterally.
Being likewise in front of the bar, with his hands resting upon
it, as in PI XVIII. fig. 7, he may move along the bar either to
the right or left. In the position of PI XVIII. fig. 5, the
climber may endeavour to sit upon the bar, for instance, on the
right side, by taking hold with the right knee-joint, grasping
firmly with the right hand, and bringing the left armpit over
the bar. The riding position is thus easily obtained. From the
riding position, he may, by supporting himself with one thigh,
turn towards the front of the bar, allowing the leg of the other
side to hang down ; and he may then very easily move along the
bar sideways, by raising his body with his hands placed laterally

on the bar.

The Rope Ladder.

This should have several rundles to spread it out, and ought,
in all respects, to be so constructed, as not to twist and en-
tangle. The only difficulty here is that, as it hangs perpendicu-
larly, and is flexible, its steps are liable to be pushed forward,
and in that case, the body is thrown into an oblique position,
and the whole weight falls on the hands. To prevent this, the
climber must keep the body stretched out and upright. — (Plate
XVIII. fig. 8.)

THE OBLIQUE ROPE.

The Upright Rope.

In this exercise, the securing the rope may be effected in
various ways. In the first method, shown m PI XVIII.
fig. 9, the hands and feet alone are employed. The feet are
crossed ; the rope passes between them, and is held fast by
their pressure; the hands then grasp higher; the feet are
drawn up ; they are again applied to the rope ; and the
same process is repeated. In the second, which is the sailor's
method, shown at PI XVIII. fig. 10, the rope passes from the
hands, generally along the right thigh, just above the knee;
winds round the inside of the thigh, under the knee-joint, over
the outside of the leg, and across the instep, whence it hangs
loose ; and the climber, by treading with the left foot upon that
part of the rope where it crosses the right one, is firmly sup-
ported. This mode of climbing requires the right leg and foot
to be so managed that the rope keeps its proper winding when-
ever it is quitted by the left foot. In descending, to prevent
injury, the hands must be lowered alternately.

To rest upon the upright rope, shown in PI XVIII. fig. 1. 1,
the climber must swing the right foot round the rope, so as to
wind it three or four times round the leg ; must turn it, by
means of the left foot, once or twice round the right one, of
which the toes are to be bent upwards ; and must tread firmly
with the left foot upon the last winding. Or, to obtain a more
perfect rest he may lower his hands along the rope, as in Figure
11, hold with the right hand, stoop, grasp with the left the
part of the rope below the feet, raise it and himself again, and
wind it round his shoulders, &c., until he is firmly supported.

The Oblique Rope.

The climber must fix himself to the rope, as in PI XVIII.
fig. 12, and advance the hands along it, as already directed.
The feet may move along the rope alternately; or one leg,
hanging over the rope, may slide along it ; or, which is beat,

68

CLIMBING.

the sole of one foot may be laid upon the rope, and the other

leg across its instep, so that the friction is not felt.

The Level Rope.

Tliis may have its ends fastened to posts of equal heights ;
and the same exercises may he performed upon it.

Climbing Trees.

In attempting this exercise, the kind of the wood and strength
of the branches must be considered. Summer is the best time
for practising it, as •withered branches are then most easily
discerned; and even then it is best to climb low trees, until
some experience is acquired. As the surface of branches is
smooth, or moist and slippery, the hands must never for a
moment be relaxed.

,

SKATING.

SKATING is the art of balancing the body, while, by the im-
pulse of each foot alternately, it moves rapidly upon the ice.

CONSTRUCTION OF THE SKATE.

The wood of the skate should be slightly hollowed, so as to
adapt it to the ball of the foot ; and, as the heel of the boot
must be thick enough to admit the peg, it may be well to lower
the wood of the skate corresponding to the heel, so as to permit
the foot to regain that degree of horizontal position which it
would otherwise lose by the height of the heel; for the more of
the foot that is in contact with the skate, the more firmly will
these be attached. As the tread of the skate should correspond,
as nearly as possible, with that of the foot, the wood should be

/O SKATING.

of the same length as the boot or shoe ; the irons of good «leel,
and well secured in the wood.

These should pass beyond the screw at the heel, nearly as far
as the wood itself; but the bow of the iron should not project
much beyond the tread.

If the skate project much beyond the wood, the whole foot,
and more especially its hind part, must be raised considerably
from the ice when the front or bow of the skate is brought to
bear upon it; and, as the skater depends upon this part for the
power of his stroke, it is evident that that must be greatly dimi-
nished by the general distance of the foot from the ice. In short,
if the skate be too long, the stroke will be feeble, and the back
of the leg painfully cramped : if it be too short, the footing will
be proportionally unsteady and tottering.

As the position of the person in the act of skating is never
vertical, and is sometimes very much inclined, and as consider-
able exertion of the muscles of the leg is requisite to keep the
ankle stiff, this ought to be relieved bythelowness of the skates.
Seeing, then, that the closer the foot is to the ice, the less is
the strain on the ankle, it is clear that the foot ought to be
brought as near to the ice as possible, without danger of bring-
ing the sole of the shoe in contact with it, while traversing on
the edge of the skate. The best height is about three-quarters
of an inch, and the iron about a quarter of an inch thick.

The grooved or fluted skate, if ever useful, is of service only
to boys, or very light persons, whose weight is not sufficient to
catch the ice in a hard frost. It certainly should never be used
by a person who is heavier than a boy of thirteen or fourteen
years of age usually is, because the sharp edge too easily cuts
into the ice, and prevents figuring. Fluted skates, indeed, are
even dangerous : for the snow or ice cuttings are apt to collect
and consolidate in the grooves, till the skater is raised from the
edge of his skate, and thrown.

In the general inclination of the 'foot in skating, no edge can
have greater power than that of rectangular shape : the ten-
dency of its action is downwards, cutting through rather than

CONSTRUCTION OF THE SKATE. /I

sliding on the surface; and greater hold than this is unnecessary.
The irons of skates should be kept well and sharply ground.
This ought to be done across the stone, so as to give the bottom
of the skate so slight a concavity as to be imperceptible, which
insures an edge whose angle is not greater thnn right. Care
must be taken that one edge is not higher than the other ; so
that, when the skate is placed upon an even surface, it may
stand quite perpendicularly. The wrear of the iron not being
great with a beginner, one grinding will generally last him
through an ordinary winter's skating on clean ice.

The bottom of the iron should be a little curved; for, if per-
fectly straight, it would be capable of describing only a straight
line, whereas the skater's progress must be circular, because, in
order to bring the edge to bear, the body must be inclined, and
inclination can be preserved only in circular motion. This curve
of the iron should be part of a circle, whose radius is about two
feet. That shape enables the skater to turn his toe or heel out-
wards or inwards with facility.

A screw would have a firmer hold than a mere peg in the hole
of the boot; but, as it is less easily removed, skaters generally
prefer the peg. The skater should be careful not to bore a
larger hole in the heel than is sufficient to admit the peg. The
more simple the fastenings of the skate the better. The two
straps — namely, the cross strap over the toe, and the heel strap —
cannot be improved, unless perhaps by passing one strap through
the three bores, and so making it serve for both.

Before going on the ice, the young skater must learn to tie
on the skates, and may also learn to walk with them easily in a
room, balancing alternately on each foot.

72 SKATING.

DRESS OF THE SKATER.

A skater's dres>s should be as close and uniucumbered as
possible. Large skirts get entangled with his own limbs, or
those of the persons who pass near him ; and all fulness of
dress is exposed to the wind. Loose trousers, frocks, and more
especially great-coats, must be avoided ; and indeed, by wearing
additional under-clothing, they can always be dispensed with.

As the exercise of skating produces perspiration, flannel next
the chest, shoulders, and loins, is necessary to avoid the evils
produced by sudden chills in cold weather. The best dress is
what is called a dress-coat, buttoned, tight pantaloons, and
laced boots (having the heel no higher than is necessary for the
peg), which hold the foot tightly and steadily in its place, as
well as give the best support to the ankle ; for it is of no use to
draw the straps of the skate hard, if the boot or shoe be loose.

PRELIMINARY AND GENERAL DIRECTIONS.

Either very rough or very smooth ice should be avoided. The
person who for the first time attempts to skate, must not trust
to a stick. He may make a friend's hand his support, if he
require one ; but that should be soon relinquished, in order to
balance himself. He will probably scramble about for half an
hour or so, till he begins to find out where the edge of his
skate is.

The beginner must be fearless, but not violent ; nor even in
a hurry. He should not let his feet get far apart, and keep his
heels still nearer together. He must keep the ankle of the foot
on the ice quite firm ; not attempting to gain the edge of the
skate by bending it, because the right mode of getting to either
edge is by the inclination of the whole body in the direction
required ; and this inclination should be made fearlessly and
decisively.

The leg which is on the ice should be kept perfectly straight;
1'vT, though the knee must be somewhat bent at the time of

THE ORDINARY RUN. 73

striking, it must be straightened as quickly as possible without
any jerk. The leg which is off the ice should also be kept
.t, though not stiff, having an easy but slight play, the
toe pointing downwards, and the heel within from six to twelve
inches of the other.

The learner must not look down at the ice, nor at his feet, to
see how they perform. He may at first incline his body a little
forward, for safety, but hold his head up, and see where he
goes, his person erect, and his face rather elevated than other-
wise.

When once off, he must bring both feet up together, and
strike again, as soon as he finds himself steady enough, rarely
allowing both feet to be on the ice together. The position of
the arms should be easy and varied ; one being always more
raised than the other, this elevation being alternate, and the
change corresponding with that of the legs ; that is, the right
arm being raised as the right leg is put down, and vice versa,
so that the arm and leg of the same side may not be raised to-
gether.

The face must be always turned in the direction of the line
intended to be described. Hence, in backward skating, the
head will be inclined much over the shoulder; in forward
skating, but slightly. All sudden and violent action must be
avoided. Stopping may be caused by slightly bending the
knees, drawing the feet together, inclining the body forward,
and pressing on the heels. It may also be caused by turning
short to the right or left, the foot on the side to which we turn
being rather more advanced, and supporting part of the weight.

THE ORDINARY RUN, OR INSIDE EDGE FORWARD.

The first attempt of the beginner is to walk, and this walk
shortly becomes a sliding gait, done entirely on the inside edge
of the skate.

The first impulse is to be gained by pressing the inside edge
of one skate against the ice, and advancing with the opposite
foot. To effect this, the beginner must bring the feet nearly

74 SKATING.

together, turn the left somewhat out, place the right a little in
advance and at right angles with it, lean forward with the right
shoulder, and at the same time move the right foot onwards,
and press sharply, or strike the ice with the inside edge of the
left skate, — care being taken instantly to throw the weight on
the right foot. (Plate XIX. fig. 1.) While thus in motion,
the skater must bring up the left foot nearly to a level with
the other, and may for the present proceed a short way on both
feet.

He must next place the left foot in advance in its turn, bring
the left shoulder forward, inclining to that side, strike from the
inside edge of the right skate, and proceed as before.

Finally, this motion has only to be repeated on each foot
alternately, gradually keeping the foot from which he struck
longer off the ice, till he has gained sufficient command of
himself to keep it off altogether, and is able to strike directly
from one to the other, without at any time having them both on
the ice together. Having practised this till he has gained some
degree of firmness and power, and a command of his balance,
he may proceed to

THE FORWARD ROLL, OR OUTSIDE EDGE.

This is commonly reckoned the first step to figure skating, as,
when it is once effected, the rest follows with ease. The im-
pulse is gained in the same manner as for the ordinary run ;
but, to get on the outside edge of the right foot, the moment
that foot is in motion, the skater must advance the left
shoulder, throw the right arm back, look over the right
shoulder, and incline the whole person boldly and decisively on
that side, keeping the left foot suspended behind. (Plate XIX.
fig. 2.)

As he proceeds, he must bring the left foot past the inside of
the right, with a slight jerk, which produces an opposing balance
of the body ; the right foot must quickly press, first on the
outside of the heel, then on the inside, or its toe ; the left foot
must be placed down in front, before it is removed more than

THE CROSS ROLL. 7.0

about eight or ten inches from the other foot ; and, by striking
outside to the left, giving at the same moment a strong push
with the inside of the right toe, the skater passes from right to
left, inclining to the left side, in the same manner as he did to
the right. He then continues to change from left to right, and
from right to left, in the same manner. At first he should not
remain long upon one leg, nor scruple occasionally to put the
other down to assist ; and throughout he must keep himself
erect, leaning most on the heel.

The Dutch travelling roll is done on the outside edge for-
ward, in the manner just represented, except that there is
described a small segment of a very large circle, thus :

diverging from the straight line no more than is requisite to
keep the skate on its ec\ge.

The cross roll or figure 8 is also done on the outside edge
forward. This is only the completion of the circle on the out-
side edge ; and it is performed by crossing the legs, and striking
from the outside instead of the inside edge. In order to do
this, as the skater draws to the close of the stroke on his right
leg, he must throw the left quite across it, which will cause him
to press hard on the outside of the right skate, from which he
must immediately strike, at the same time throwing back the
left arm, and looking over the left shoulder, to bring him well
upon the outside of that skate. By completing the circle in
this manner on each leg, the 8 is formed :

each circle being small, complete, and well-formed, before the
foot is changed.

76 SKATING.

The Mercury figure is merely the outside and inside forward
succeeding each other on the same leg alternately, by which a
serpentine line is described, thus :

Outside. Inside. Outside.

This is skated with the force and rapidity gained by a run.
When the run is complete, and the skater on the outside edge,
his person becomes quiescent, in the attitude of Mercury, hav-
ing the right arm advanced and much raised, the face turned
over the right shoulder, and the left foot off the ice, a short
distance behind the other, turned out and pointed.

FIGURE OF THREE, OR INSIDE EDGE BACKWARDS.

This figure is formed by turning from the outside edge for-
ward to the inside edge backward on the same foot. The head
of the 3 is formed like the half circle, on the heel of the out-
side edge; but when the half circle is complete, the skater
leans suddenly forward, and rests on the same toe inside, and a
backward motion, making the tail of the 3, is the consequence.
The figure described by the right leg should be nearly in the
form of No. 1 ; and on the left leg should be reversed, and
resemble No. 2.

At first, the skater should not throw himself quite so hard as
hitherto on the outside forward, in order that he may be able
the more easily to change to the inside back. He may also be
for some time contented with much less than a semicircle be-
fore he turns. Having done this, and brought the left leg
nearly up to the other, he must not pass it on in advance, as
he would to complete a circle, but throw it gently cff sidewise,

OUTSIDE EDGE BACKWARDS. / /

nt the same moment turning the face from the right to the left
shoulder, and giving the whole person a slight inclination to the
left side. These motions throw the skater upon the inside of
his skate ; hut as the first impulse should still retain most of its
force, he continues to move on the inside back, in a direction
so little different, that his first impulse loses little by the change.
(Plate XIX. fig. 1.)

If unable to change the edge by this method, the skater may
assist himself by slightly and gently swinging the arm and leg
outward, so as to incline the person to a rotatory motion. This
swing, however, must be corrected as soon as the object is
attained ; and it must generally be observed that the change
from edge to edge is to be effected merely by the inclination of
the body, not by swinging.

When the skater is able to join the ends of the 3, so as to
form one side of a circle, then, by striking off in the same man-
ner, and completing another 3, with the left leg, the combina-
tion of the two 3's will form an 8. In the first attempts, the 3
should not be made above two feet long, which he will acquire
the power of doing almost imperceptibly. He may then
gradually extend the size as he advances in the art.

Though, in this section, backward skating is spoken of, the
term refers to the skate only, which in such case moves heel
foremost, but the person of the skater moves sidewise, the face
being always turned in the direction in which he is proceeding.

OUTSIDE EDGE BACKWARDS.

Here the skater, having completed the 3, and being carried
on by the first impulse, still continues his progress in the same
direction, but on the other foot, putting it down on its outside
edge, and continuing to go backwards slowly.

To accomplish this, the skater, after making the 3, and
placing the outside edge of his left foot on the ice, should !it
once turn his face over the right shoulder, raise his right foot
from the ice, and throwback his right arm and shoulder. (Plate
XIX . fig. 2.) If, for awhile, he is unable readily to raise that foot

78 SKATING.

•which has made the 3, and leave himself on the outside of the other
skate, he may keep both down for some distance, putting himself,
however, in attitude of being on the outside only of one skate,
and gradually lifting the other off the ice as he acquires ability.
When finishing any figure, this use of both feet backward
has great convenience and beauty.

Before venturing on the outside backward, the skater ought
to take care that the ice is clear of stones, reeds, &c., and also
be certain of the good quality of his irons. When going with
great force backward, the course may be deflected, so as to stop
by degrees ; and, when moving slowly, the suspended foot may
be put down in a cross direction to the path.

Such are the four movements of which alone the skate is
capable : namely, the inside edge forward ; the outside for-
ward ; the inside back ; and the outside back ; in which has
been seen how the impulse for the first two is gained, and how
the third flows from the second, and the fourth from the third.
By the combination of these elements of skating, and the varia-
tions with which they succeed each other, are formed all the
evolutions in this art.

The Double Three is that combination in which the skates
are brought from the inside back of the first three, to the
outside forward of the second. Here the skater, after having
completed one 3, and being on the inside back, must bring the
whole of the left side forward, particularly the leg, till it is
thrown almost across the right, on which he is skating. This
action brings him once more to the outside forward, from which
he again turns to the inside back. While he is still in motion
on the second inside back of the right leg, he must strike on
the left, and repeat the same on that.

It is at first enough to do two 3's perfectly and smoothly. Their
number from one impulse may be increased as the skater gains
steadiness and skill; the art of accomplishing this being to
touch as lightly as possible on each side of the skate successively,
so that the first impulse may be preserved and made the most of.
The Back Roll is a means of moving from one foot to another.

THE BACK ROLL. /.V

Suppose the skater to have put himself on the outside edge
back of the left leg, with considerable impulse, by means of
the 3 performed on the right, — not bearing hard on the edge, for
the object is to change it, and take up the motion on the right
loot. — tliis is effected by throwing the left arm and shoulder
hack, and turning the face to look over them ; when, having
brought the inside of his left skate to bear on the ice, he must
immediately strike from it to the outside back of the other, by
pressing it into the ice as forcibly as he can at the toe. Having
thus been brought to the backward roll on the right foot, he
repeats the same with it.

The Back Cross Roll is done by changing the balance of the
body, to move from one foot to the other, in the same manner
as for the back roll. The stroke is from the outside instead of
the inside edge of the skate ; the edge on which he is skating
not being changed, but the right foot, which is off the ice, being
crossed at the back of the left, and put down, and the stroke
taken at the same moment, from the outside edge of the left
skate, at the toe. As in the back roll of both forms, the strokes
are but feeble, the skater may, from time to time, renew his
impulse as he finds occasion, by commencing anew with the 3.

The large outside backward roll is attained by a run, when
the skater, having gained all the impulse he can, strikes on the
outside forward of the right leg, turns the 3, and immediately
put down the left on the outside back. He then, without fur-
ther effort, flies rapidly over the ice ; the left arm being raised,
the head turned over the right shoulder, and the right foot
turned out and pointed.

It must be evident, that the elements described may be com-
bined and varied infinitely. Hence waltz and quadrille skating,
&c., which may be described as combinations of 3's, outside
backwards, &c. These are left to the judgment of the skater,
and his skill in the art.

In the North it is common to travel in skates on the gulfs
and rivers ; and. with a favourable wind, they go faster than
vessels. It is a kind of flight, for they only touch the ground

TREATMENT OF DROWNED PERSONS.

in a very slight thin line. As to feats in skating, we are told,
that the Frieslamler, who is generally a skilful skater, often
goes for a long time at the rate of fifteen miles an hour. In
1801, two young women, going thirty miles in two hours, won
the prize in a skating race at Groningen. In 1821, a Lincoln-
shire man, for a wager of 100 guineas, skated one mile within
two seconds of three minutes.

BANGERS IN SKATING.

If the chest be irritable, it is neither salutary nor easy to
skate against the wind. In countries where these exercises are
general, inflammations of the chest are very common in winter.
Skating sometimes exposes to much danger. If the skater find
that he cannot get away from rotten ice, he must crawl over it
on his hands and knees, in order to reduce his weight on the
supporting points. If he fall oil it at length, he must roll away
from it towards ice more firm. If he fall into a hole, he must
extend his arms horizontally over the edges of the unbroken
ice, and only tread water, till a ladder or a plank is pushed
towards him, or a rope is thrown for his hold.

TREATMENT RECOMMENDED IX THE CASE OK DROWNED PERSONS.

CAUTIONS.—! . Lose no time. 2. Avoid all roujrh usage. 3. Never hold the
body up by the feet. 4. Nor roll the body on casks. 5. Nor rub the body
with salt or spirits. G. Nor inject tobacco-smoke or infusion of tobacco.

RESTORATIVE MEANS IF APPARENTLY DROWNED. — Send quickly for
medical assistance ; but do not delay the following means.

I. Convey the body carefully, with the head and shoulders supported in a
raised position, to the nearest house.

II. Strip the body, and rub it dry ; then wrap it in hot blankets, and place
it in a warm bed in a warm chamber.

III. Wipe and cleanse the mouth and nostrils.

IV. In order to restore the natural warmth of the body :

1. Move a heated covered warming-pan over the back and spine.

2. Put bladders or bottles of hot water, or heated bricks, to the pit of thr
stomach, the arm-pits, between the thighs, and to the soles of the feet.

TREATMENT OF DROWNED PERSONS. SL

3. Foment the body with hot flannels ; but, if possible,

i. Immerse the body in a warm bath, as hot as the hand can bear without
pain, as this is preferable to the other means for restoring warmth.

5. Rub the body briskly with the hand; do not, however, suspend the \...:-Q
i : the other means at the same time.

V. In order to restore breathing, introduce the pipe of a common bellows
(where the apparatus of the Society is not at hand) into one nostril, carefully
closing the other and the mouth : at the same time draw downwards and
push gently backwards the upper part of the windpipe, to allow a more free
admission of air : blow the bellows gently in order to inflate the lungs, till the
breast be a little raised : the mouth and nostrils should then be set free, and
a moderate pressure should be made with the hand upon the chest. Repeat
this process till life appears.

VI. Electricity should be employed early by a medical assistant.

VII. Inject into the stomach, by means of an elastic tube and syringe, half
a pint of warm brandy and water, or wine and water.

VIII. Apply sal-volatile or hartshorn to the nostrils.

IF APPARENTLY DEAD FROM INTENSE COLD.— Rub the body With SHOW,

u:e, or cold water. Restore warmth by slow degrees ; and after some time,
it' necessary, employ the means recommended for the drowned. In these
accidents, it is highly dangerous to apply heat too early.

SWIMMING.

SWIMMING, considered with regard to the movements that,
it requires, is useful in promoting great muscular strength ;
but the good effects are not solely the result of the exercise
that the muscles receive, but partly of the medium in which
the body is moved. Both the considerable increase of general
force, and the tranquillizing of the nervous system produced
by swimming, arise chiefly from this, that the movements, in
consequence of the cold and dense medium in which they take
place, occasion no loss.* It is easy to conceive of what utility
swimming must be, where the very high state of the atmo-

* The expression " loss" here, is used as the result produced by increased
evaporation from the pores, consequent upon violent bodily exertion.

PREPARATORY INSTRUCTIONS. 83

spheric temperature requires inactivity in consequence of the
<ive loss caused by the slightest movement. It then
;es an exceedingly valuable resource, the only one, in-
ured, by which muscular weakness can be remedied, and the
i-iK-rjry of the vital functions maintained. We must therefore
i swimming as one of the most beneficial exercises that
can be taken in summer.

The ancients, particularly the Athenians, regarded swimming
as indispensable ; and when they wished to designate a man
who was fit for nothing, they used to say, " he cannot even
swim," or " he can neither read nor swim." At many seaports,
the art of swimming is almost indispensable ; and the sailors*
children are as familiar with the water as with the air. Copen-
hagen is perhaps the only place where sailors are trained by
rules of art ; and there, this exercise is more general and in
greater perfection than elsewhere. It may here be observed,
that it is not fear alone that prevents a man swimming. Swim-
ming is an art that must be learnt ; and fear is only an obstacle
to the learning.

PREPARATORY INSTRUCTIONS AS TO ATTITUDE AND ACTION
IN SWIMMING.

As it is on the movements of the limbs, and a certain attitude
of the body, that the power of swimming depends, its first
principles may evidently be acquired out of the water.

Attitude.

The head must be drawn back, and the chin elevated, the
breast projected, and the back hollowed and kept steady. (Plate
XX. figs. 1 and 2.) The head can scarcely be thrown too
much back, or the back too much hollowed. Those who dn
otherwise, swim with their feet near the surface of the water,
instead of having them two or three feet deep.

Action of Me Hands.

In the proper position of the hands, the fingers must be kept
close, with the thumbs by the edge of the fore-fingers ; and the

84 SWIMMING.

hands made concave on the inside, though not so ranch as to
diminish their size and power in swimming. The hands, thus
formed, should be placed just before the breast, the wrist
touching- it, and the fingers pointing forward. (Plate XXL
fig. 1.)

fche first elevation is formed by raising the ends of the
fingers three or four inches higher than the rest of the hands.
The second, by raising the outer edge of the hand two or three
inches higher than the inner edge.

The formation of the hands, their first position, and their
two modes of elevation, being clearly understood, the for-
ward stroke is next made, by projecting them in that direc-
tion to their utmost extent, employing therein their first eleva-
tion, in order to produce buoyancy, but taking care the fingers
do not break the surface of the water. (Plate XXL fig. 2.)
In the outward stroke of the hands, the second elevation
must be employed ; and, in it, they must sweep downward and
outward as low as, but at a distance from, the hips, both laterally
and anteriorly. (Plate XXL figs. 3 and 4.)

The retraction of the hands is effected by bringing the arms
closer to the sides, bending the elbow joints upwards and the
wrists downwards, so that the hands hang down, while the
arms are raising them to the first position, the action of the
hands being gentle and easy. In the three movements just
described, one arm may be exercised at a time, until each is
accustomed to the action.

Action of the Feet.

In drawing up the legs, the knees must be inclined inward,
and the soles of the feet outward. (Plate XXII. fig. 1.) The
throwing out the feet should be to the extent of the legs,
as widely from each other as possible. (Plate XXII. fig. 2.)
The bringing down the legs must be done briskly, until
they come close together. In drawing up the legs, there is
a loss of power ; in throwing out the legs, there is a gain

TIME AND PLACE OF SWIMMING. 85

equal to that loss ; and in bringing down the legs, there is an
evident gain.

The arms and legs should act alternately ; the arms dcscend-
\lule the legs are rising — (Plate XXII. fig. 3); and, op-
positely, the arms rising while the legs are descending. (Plate
XXII. fig. 4.) Thus the action of both is unceasingly inter-
changed ; and, until great facility in this interchange is effected,
no one can swim smoothly, or keep the body in one con-
tinued progressive motion. In practising the action of the
legs, one hand may rest on the top of a chair, while the
opposite leg is exercised. When both the arms and the legs
are separately accustomed to the action, the arm and leg of
the same side may be exercised together.

PLACE AND TIME OF SWIMMING.
Place.

Of all places for swimming, the sea is the best ; running
waters next; and ponds the worst. In these a particular
spot should be chosen, where there is not much stream, and
which is known to be safe.

The swimmer should make sure that the bottom is not out
of his depth; and, on this subject, he cannot be too cautious
when he has no one with him who knows the place. If
capable of diving, he should ascertain if the water be suffi-
ciently deep for that purpose, otherwise, he may injure himself
against the bottom. The bottom should be of gravel, or
smooth stones, and free from holes, so that he may be in
no danger of sinking in the mud or wounding the feet. Of
Aveeds he must beware; for if his feet get entangled among
them, no aid, even if near, may be able to extricate him.

Time.

The best season of the year for swimming is during the
months of May, June, July, and August. Morning before
breakfast — that is to say, from seven till eight o'clock — is the

8(5 SWIMMING.

time. In the evening, the hair is not perfectly dried, and coryza
is sometimes the consequence. Bathing during rain is bad. for
it chills the water, and, by wetting the clothes, endangers catch-
ing cold. Tn practising swimming during those hours of the
day when the heat of the sun is felt most sensibly, if the hair
be thick, it should be kept constantly wet ; if the head be bald,
it must be covered with a handkerchief, and frequently wetted.

It is advisable not to enter the water before digestion is
finished. The danger in this case arises less from the violent
movements which generally disorder digestion, than from the
impression produced by the medium in which these movements
are executed. It is not less so when very hot, or quite cold.
It is wrong to enter the water in a perspiration, however trifling
it may be. After violent exercises, it is better to wash and em-
ploy friction than to bathe. Persons of plethoric temperament,
who are subject to periodical evacuations, such as hemorrhoids,
or even to cutaneous eruptions, will do well to abstain from
swimming during the appearance of these affections.

Dress.

Every swimmer should use short drawers, and might, in par-
ticular places, use canvass slippers. It is even of great import-
ance to be able to swim in jacket and trousers.

Aids.

The aid of the hand is much preferable to corks or bladders,
because it can be withdrawn gradually and insensibly. With
this view, a grown-up person may take the learner in his arms,
carry him into the water breast high, place him nearly flat upon
it, support him by one hand under the breast, and direct him as
to attitude and action. If the support of the hand be very gra-
dually withdrawn, the swimmer will, in the course of the first
ten days, find it quite unnecessary. When the aid of the hand
cannot be obtained, inflated membranes or corks may be em-
ployed. The only argument for their use is, that attitude and
action may be perfected while the body is thus supported; and

CiiA.MI'. flj"

that, with some contrivance, they also may gradually be laid
aude, though by no means so easily as the hand.

The best mode of employing corks is to choose a piece about
afoot long, and six or seven inches broad; .to fasten a band
across the middle of it; to place it on the back, so that the
upper end may come between the shoulder-blades, where the
edge may be rounded; and to tie the band over the breast.
Over this, several other pieces of cork, each smaller than the
preceding, may be fixed, so that, as the swimmer improves, he
may leave them off one by one. Even with all these aids, the
young swimmer should never venture out of his depth, if he
cannot swim without them.

Cramp.

As to cramp, those chiefly are liable to it who plunge into the
water when they are heated, who remain in it till they are be-
numbed with cold, or who exhaust themselves by violent exer-
cise. Persons subject to this affection must be careful with
regard to the selection of the place where they bathe, if they
are not sufficiently skilful in swimming to vary their attitudes,
and dispense instantly with the use of the limb attacked by
cramp. Even when this does occur, the skilful swimmer knows
how to reach the shore by the aid of the limbs which are un-
affected, while the uninstructed one is liable to be drowned.

If attacked in this way in the leg, the swimmer must strike
out the limb with all his strength, thrusting the heel downward
and drawing the toes upward, notwithstanding the momentary
pain it may occasion ; or he may immediately turn flat on his
back, and jerk out the affected limb in the air, taking care not
to elevate it so high as greatly to disturb the balance of the
body. If this does not succeed, he must paddle ashore with his
hands, or keep himself afloat by their aid, until assistance reach
him. Should he even be unable to float on his back, he must
put himself in the upright position, and keep his head above the
surface by men-ly striking the water dov.mvard with his hands
at the hips, without any assistance from the legs.

88 SWIMMING.

PROCEDURE WHEN IN THE WATER, AND USUAL MODE OP
FRONT SWIMMING.

Entering the Water.

Instructors should never force young swimmers reluctantly to
leap into the water. It would be advisable for delicate persons,
especially when they intend to plunge in, to put a little cotton
steeped in oil, and afterwards pressed, in their ears, before
entering the water. This precaution will prevent irritation of
the organ of hearing. In entering, the head should be wetted
first, either by plunging in head foremost, or by pouring water
on it, in order to prevent the pressure of the water driving up
the blood into it too quickly, and increasing congestion. The
swimmer should next advance, by a clear shelving shore or
bank, where he has ascertained the depth by plumbing or other-
wise, till the water reaches his breast ; should turn towards the
pi ace of entrance ; and, having inflated his breast, lay it upon
the water, suffering that to rise to his chin, the lips being closed.

Buoyancy in the Water.

The head alone is specifically heavier than salt water. Even
the legs and arms are specifically lighter ; and the trunk is still
more so. Thus the body cannot sink in salt water, even if the
lungs were idled, except owing to the excessive specific gravity
of the head.

Not only the head, but the legs and arms, are specifically
heavier than fresh water ; but still the hollowness of the trunk
renders the body altogether too light to sink wholly under water,
so that some part remains above until the lungs become filled.
In general, when the human body is immersed, one-eleventh of
its weight remains above the surface in fresh water, and one-
tenth in salt water.

In salt water, therefore, a person throwing himself on his
back, and extending his arms, may easily lie so as to keep his
mouth and nostrils free for breathing; and, by a small motion
of the hand, may prevent turning, if he perceive any tendency

BUOYANCY IN THE WATER. 89

to it. In fresh water, a man cannot long continue in that situ-
ation, except by the action of his hands ; and if no such action
be employed, the legs and lower part of the body will gradually
sink into an upright position, the hollow of the breast keeping
the head uppermost. If, however, in this position, the head be
kept upright above the shoulders, as in standing on the ground,
the immersion, owing to the weight of the part of the head out
of the water, will reach above the mouth and nostrils, perhaps a
little above the eyes. On the contrary, in the same position, if
the head be leaned back, so that the face is turned upwards, tht:
back part of the head has its weight supported by the water, and
the face will rise an inch higher at every inspiration, and will
sink as much at every expiration, but never so low that the water
can come over the mouth.

For all these reasons, though the impetus given by the fall of
the body into water occasions its sinking to a depth proportioned
to the force of the descent, its natural buoyancy soon impels it
again to the surface, where, after a few oscillations up and down,
it settles with the head free.

Unfortunately, ignorant people stretch the arms out to grasp
at anything or nothing, and thereby keep the head under ; for
the arms and head, together exceeding in weight one-tenth of
the body, cannot remain above the surface at the same time.
The buoyancy of the trunk, then and then only, occasions the
head and shoulders to sink, the ridge of the bent back becoming
the portion exposed ; and, in this attitude, water is swallowed,
by which the specific gravity is increased, and the body settles
to the bottom. It is, therefore, most important to the safety of
the inexperienced to be firmly convinced that the body naturally
floats.

To satisfy the beginner of the truth of this, Dr. Franklin ad-
vises him to choose a place where clear water deepens gradually,
to walk into it till it is up to his breast, to turn his face to the
shore, and to throw an egg into the water between him and it —
so deep that he cannot fetch it up but by diving. To encourage
him to take it up, he must reflect that his progress will be from

1* SWIMMING.

deep to shallow water, and that at any time he may, by bringing
his legs under him, and standing on the bottom, raise his head
far above the water. He must then plunge under it, having his
eyes open, before as well as after going under ; throw himself
towards the egg, and endeavour, by the action of his hands and
feet against the water, to get forward till within reach of it. In
this attempt, he will find that the water brings him up against
his inclination, that it is not so easy to sink as he imagined, and
that he cannot, but by force, get down to the egg. Thus he feels
the power of water to support him, and learns to confide in that
power ; while his endeavours to overcome it, and reach the egg,
teach him the manner of acting on the water with his feet and
hands, as he afterwards must in swimming, in order to support
his head higher above the water, or to go forward through it.

If, then, any person, however unacquainted with swimming,
will hold himself perfectly still and upright, as if standing with
his head somewhat thrown back so as to rest on the surface, his
face will remain above the water, and he will enjoy full freedom
of breathing. To do this most effectually, the head must be so
far thrown back that the chin is higher than the forehead, the
breast inflated, the back quite hollow, and the hands and arms
kept under water. If these directions be carefully observed, the
face will float above the water, and the body will settle in a dia-
gonal direction. (Plate XXIII. fig. 1.)

In this case, the only difficulty is to preserve the balance of
the body. This is secured, as described by Bernardi, by extend-
ing the arms laterally under the surface of the water, with the
legs separated, the one to the front and the other behind : thus
presenting resistance to any tendency of the body to incline to
either side, forward or backward. This posture may be pre-
served any length of time. (Plate XXIII. fig. 2.)

The Abbe Paul Moccia, who lived in Naples in 17^0, per-
ceived, at the age of fifty, that he could never entirely cover
himself in the water. He weighed three hundred pounds (Italian
weight), but being very fat, he lost at least thirty pounds in the
water. Robertson had just made his experiments on the specific

ATTITUDE — ACTION RESPIRATION. 91

weight of man; and everybody was then occupied with the Abbe,
who could walk in the water with nearly half his body out of it.

Attitude and Action in the Water.

The swimmer having, by all the preceding means, acquired
confidence, may now practise the instructions already given on
attitude and action in swimming : or he may first proceed with
the system of Bernardi, which immediately follows. As the
former have already been given in ample detail, there is nothing
new here to be added respecting them, except that, while the
attitude is correct, the limbs must be exercised calmly, and free
from all hurry and trepidation, the breath being held, and the
breast kept inflated, while a few strokes are made. In swim-
ming in the usual way, there is, first, extension, flexion, abduc-
tion and adduction of the members ; secondly, almost constant
dilation of the chest, to diminish the mobility of the point of
attachment of the muscles which are inserted in the elastic sides
of this cavity, and to render the body specifically lighter ;' thirdly,
constant action of the muscles of the back part of the neck, to
raise the head, which is relatively very heavy, and to allow the
air free entrance to the lungs.

Respiration in Sicimming.

If the breath is drawn at the moment when the swimmer
strikes out with the legs, instead of when the body is elevated
by the hands descending towards the hips, the head partially
sinks, the face is driven against the water, and the mouth be-
comes filled. If, on the contrary, the breath is drawn when the
body is elevated by the hands descending towards the hips, when
the progress of the body forward consequently ceases, when the
face is no longer driven against the water, but is elevated above
the surface, — then, not only cannot the water enter, but if the
mouth were at other times even with, or partly under the sur-
face, no water could enter it, as the air, at such times, driven
outward between the lips, would effectually prevent it. The
breath should accordingly be expired while the body, at the
next stroke, is sent forward bv the action of the legs.

92 SWIMMING.

Coming out of the Water.

Too much fatigue in the water weakens the strength and pre-
sence of mind necessary to avoid accidents. A person who is
fatigued, and remains there without motion, soon becomes weak
arid chilly. As soon as he feels fatigued, chill, or numbed, he
should quit the water, and dry and dress himself as quickly as
possible. Friction, previous to dressing, drives the blood over
every part of the body, creates an agreeable glow, and
strengthens the joints and muscles.

UPRIGHT SWIMMING.
Bernardi's System.

The principal reasons given by Bernardi for recommending the
upright position in swimming are — its conformity to the ac-
customed movement of the limbs ; the freedom it gives to the
hands and arms, by which any impediment may be removed, or
any offered aid readily laid hold of ; vision all around ; a much
greater facility of breathing; and lastly, that much less of the
body is exposed to the risk of being laid hold of by persoas
struggling in the water.

The less we alter our method of advancing in the water from
what is habitual to us on shore, the more easy do we find a
continued exercise of it. The most important consequence of
this is, that, though a person swimming in an upright posture
advances more slowly, he is able to continue his course much
longer ; and certainly nothing can be more beneficial to a sw!m-
mer than whatever tends to husband his strength, and to enable
him to remain long in the water with safety.

Bernardi's primary object is to enable the pupil to float in
an upright posture, and to feel confidence in the buoyancy
of his body. He accordingly supports the pupil under the
shoulders until he floats tranquilly with the head and part of
the neck above the surface, the arms being stretched out hori-
zontally under water. From time to time, the supporting arm
is removed, but again restored, so as never to suffer the head

BERNARDl'S SYSTEM. 9o

to sink, which would disturb the growing confidence, and give
rise to efforts destructive of the success of the lesson. In this
early stage, the unsteadiness of the body is the chief difficulty
to be overcome.

The head is the great regulator of our movements in water.
Its smallest inclination to either side instantly operates on the
whole body ; and, if not corrected, throws it into a horizontal
posture. The pupil must, therefore, restore any disturbance of
equilibrium by a cautious movement of the head alone in an
opposite direction. This first lesson being familiarized by prac-
tice, he is taught the use of the legs and arms for balancing the
body in the water. One leg being stretched forward, the other
backward, and the arms laterally, he soon finds himself steadily
sustained, and independent of further aid in floating.

When these first steps have been gained, the sweeping semi-
circular motion of the arms is shown. This is practised slowly,
without motion forwards, until attained with precision. After
this, a slight inclination of the body from the upright position
occasions its advancing. The motion of striking with the legs
is*added in the same measured manner ; so that the pupil is not
perplexed by the acquisition of more than one thing at a time.
In this method, the motions of both arms and legs differ from
those we have so carefully described, only in so far as they are
modified by a more upright position. It is optional, therefore, with
the reader, to practise either method. The general principles of
both are now before him.

The upright position a little inclined backwards, (which, like
every other change of posture, must be done deliberately, by
the corresponding movement of the head,) reversing in this case
the motion of the arms, and striking the flat part of the loot
down and a little forward, gives the motion backward, which is
performed with greater ease than when the body is laid hori-
zontally on the back. According to this system, Bernardi says,
a swimmer ought at every stroke to urge himself forward a dis-
tance equal to the length of his body. A good swimmer ought
to make about three miles an hour. A good day's journey may

94 SWIMMING.

thus be achieved, if the strength be used with due discretion,
and the swimmer be familiar with the various means by which
it may be recruited.

0 Of Bernardi's successful practice, he says, " Having been ap-
pointed to instruct the youths of the Royal Naval Academy of
"Naples in the art of swimming, a trial of the proficiency of the
pupils took place, under the inspection of a number of people
assembled on the shore for that purpose, on the tenth day of
their instruction. A twelve-oared boat attended the progress of
thy pupils, from motives of precaution. They swam so far out
in the bay, that at length the heads of the young men could
with difficulty be discerned with the naked eye ; and the Major
^General of Marine, Forteguerri, for whose inspection the exhi-
bition was intended, expressed serious apprehensions for their
safety. Upon their return to the shore, the young men, how-
ever, assured him that they felt so little exhausted as to be
willing immediately to repeat the exertion." An official report
on the subject has also been drawn up by commission (appointed
by the Neapolitan government), after devoting a month to the
investigation of Bernardi's plan ; and it states as follows :

" 1st. It has been established by the experience of more than
a hundred persons of different bodily constitutions, that the
human body is lighter than water, and consequently will float
by nature ; but that the art of swimming must be acquired, to
render that privilege useful.

"2dly. That Bernardi's system is new, in so far as it is
founded on the principle of husbanding the strength, and ren-
dering the power of recruiting it easy. The speed, according
to the new method, is no doubt diminished; but security is
much more important than speed; and the new plan is not
•exclusive of the old, when occasions require great effort.

" 3dly. That the new method is sooner learnt than the old.
to the extent of advancing a pupil in one day as far as a month's
instruction on the old plan."

BACK SVriMMINti. 95

Treading Water.

This differs little from the system just described. As in it,
the position is upright ; but progression is obtained by the action
of the legs alone. There is little power in this method of swim-
ming : but it may be very useful in rescuing drowning persons.

The arms should be folded across, below the breast, or com-
pressed against the hips, and the legs employed as in front
swimming, except as to time and extent. They should perform
their action in half the usual time, or two strokes should be
taken in the time of one ; because, acting perpendicularly, each
stroke would otherwise raise the swimmer too much, and he
would sink too low between the strokes, were they not quickly
to follow each other. They should also work in about two-
thirds of the usual space, preserving the upper or stronger, and
omitting the lower or weaker, part of the stroke.

There is, however, another mode of treading water, in which
the thighs are separated, and the legs slightly bent, or curved
together, as in a half-sitting posture. Here the legs are used
alternately, so that, while one remains more contracted, the
other, less so, describes a circle. By this method, the swimmer
does not seem to hop in the water, but remains nearly at the
same height. PI XXIII. f. 3 represents both these methods,
and shows their peculiar adaptation to relieve drowning persons.

BACK SWIMMING.

In swimming on the back, the action of the thoracic mem-
ber is weaker, because the swimmer can support himself on the
water without their assistance. The muscular contractions take
place principally in the muscles of the abdominal members, and in
those of the anterior part of the neck. Though little calculated
for progression, it is the easiest of all methods, because, much
of the head being immersed, little effort is required for support.
For this purpose, the swimmer must lie down gently upon the
water ; the body extended ; the head kept in a line with it, so
that the back and much of the upper part of the head may be

.96

SWIMMING.

immersed ; the head and breast must remain perfectly imagitated
by the action of the legs; the hand laid on the thighs (Plate
XXIV. fig. 1), and the legs employed as in front swimming,
care being taken that the knees do not rise out of the water. — •
(Plate XXIV. fig. 2.) The arms may, however, be used in
various ways in swimming on the back.

In the method called winging, the arms are extended till in a
line with each other; they must then be struck down to the
thighs, with the palms turned in that direction, and the thumbs
inclining downward to increase the buoyancy, (Plate XXIV.
fig. 3) ; the palms must then be moved edgewise, and the arms
elevated as before (Plate XXIV. fig. 4) ; and so on, repeating
the same actions. The legs should throughout make one
stroke as the arms are struck down, and another as they are
elevated. The other mode, called finning, differs from this only
in the stroke of the arms being shorter, and made in the same
time as that of the legs.

In back swimming, the body should be extended after each
stroke, and long pauses made between these. The act of passing
from front to back, or back to front swimming, must always be
performed immediately after throwing out the feet. To turn
from the breast to the back, the legs must be raised forward, and
the head thrown backward, until the body is in a right position.
To turn from the back to the breast, the legs must be dropped,
and the body thrown forward on the breast.

FLOATING.

Floating is properly a transition from swimming on the back.
To effect it, it is necessary, while the legs are gently exercising,
to extend the arms as far as possible beyond the head, equi-
distant from, and parallel with its sides, but never rising above
the surface ; to immerse the head rather deeply, and elevate
the chin more than the forehead; to inflate the chest while
taking this position, and so to keep it as much as possible ; and
to cease the action of the legs, and put the feet together. (Plate
XXV. fig. 1.) The swimmer will thus be able to float, rising

<,/"'

SIDE SWIMMING PLUNGING. 97

a little with every inspiration, and falling with every expiration.
Should the feet descend, the loins may be hollowed.

SIDE SWIMMING.

For this purpose, the hody may be turned either upon the
right or left side : the feet must perform their usual motions :
the arms also require peculiar guidance. In lowering the
left, and elevating the right side, the swimmer must strike
forward with the left hand, and sidewise with the right; the
back of the latter being front instead of upward, and the thumb
side of the hand downward to serve as an oar. In turning on
the right side, the swimmer must strike out with the right hand,
and use the left as an oar. In both cases, the lower arm
stretches itself out quickly, at the same time that the feet are
striking ; and the upper arm strikes at the same time that the
feet are impelling, the hand of the latter arm beginning its
stroke on a level with the head. While this hand is again
brought forward, and the feet are contracted, the lower hand is
drawn back towards the breast, rather tdfcsustain than to impel,
(Plate XXV. fig. 2.) As side swimming presents to the water
a smaller surface than front swimming, it is preferable when
rapidity is necessary. But. though generally adopted when it
is required to pass over a short distance with rapidity, it is
much more fatiguing than the preceding methods.

In the leap to plunge, the legs must be kept together, the
arms close, and the plunge made either with the feet or the
head foremost. With the feet foremost they must be kept
together, and the body inclined backwards. With the head
foremost, the methods vary.

In the deep plunge, which is used where it is known that
there is depth of water, the swimmer has his arms outstretched,
his knees bent, and his body leant forwards (Plate XXVI.
fig. 1,) till the head descends nearly to the feet, when the spine

H

98 SWIMMING.

and knees are extended. This plunge may be made without
the slightest noise. When the swimmer rises to the surface,
he must not open his mouth before previously repelling the
water.

In the flat plunge, which is used in shallow water, or where
the depth is unknown, and which can be made only from a
small height, the swimmer must fling himself forwards, in order
to extend the line of the plunge as much as possible under
the surface of the water; and, as soon as he touches it, he
must keep his head up, his back hollow, and his hands stretched
forward, flat and inclined upward. He will thus dart forwards
a considerable way close under the surface, so that his head
will reach it before the impulse ceases to operate. (Plate
XXVI. fig. 2.)

DIVING.

The swimmer may prepare for diving by taking a slow and
full inspiration, letting himself sink gently into the water,
and expelling the b«ath by degrees, when the heart begins
to beat strongly. In order to descend in diving, the head
must be bent forward upon the breast ; the back made round ;
and the legs thrown out with greater vigour than usual ; but
the arms and hands, instead of being struck forward as in
swimming, must move rather backward, or come out lower,
and pass more behind. (Plate XXVII. fig. 1.) The eyes
should, meanwhile, be kept open, as, if the water be clear, it
enables the diver to ascertain its depth, and see whatever lies at
the bottom ; and, when he has obtained a perpendicular position,
he should extend his hands like feelers.

To move forward, the head must be raised, and the back
straightened a little. Still, in swimming between top and bot-
tom, the head must be kept a little downward, and the feet be
thrown out a little higher than when swimming on the surface
(Plate XXVII. fig. 2) ; and if the swimmer thinks that he ap-
proaches too near the surface, he must press the palms upwards.

^

THRUSTING SPRINGING. 99

To ascend, the chin must be held up, the back made concave,
the hands struck out high, and brought briskly down. (Plate

XXVII. fig. 3.)

THRUSTING.

This is a transition from front swimming, in which the atti-
tude and motions of the feet are still the same, but those of the
hands very different. One arm, the right for instance, is lifted
entirely out of the water, thrust forward as much as possible,
and, when at the utmost stretch, let fall, with the hand hollowed,
into the water, which it grasps or pulls towards the swimmer in
its return transversely towards the opposite arm-pit. While the
right arm is thus stretched forth, the left, with the hand ex-
panded, describes a small circle to sustain the body (Plate

XXVIII. fig. 1) ; and, while the right arm pulls towards the
swimmer, the left, in a widely-described circle, is carried rapidly
under the breast, towards the hip. (Plate XXVIII. fig. 2.)

When the left arm has completed these movements, it, in its
turn, is lifted from the water, stretched forward, and pulled
back, — the right arm describing first the smaller, then the larger
circle. The feet make their movements during the describing
of the larger circle. The thrust requires much practice ; but,
when well acquired, it not only relieves the swimmer, but en-
ables him to make great advance in the water, and is applicable
to cases where rapidity is required for a short distance.

SPRINGING.

Some swimmers, at every stroke, raise not only their neck and
shoulders, but breast and body, out of the water. This, when
habitual, exhausts without any useful purpose. As an occa-
sional effort, however, it may be useful in seizing objects above;
and it may then best be performed by the swimmer drawing his
feet as close as possible under his body, stretching his hands
forward, and, with both feet and hands, striking the water
strongly, so as to throw himself out of it as high as the hips.

100 SWIMMING.

ONE-ARM SWIMMING.

Here the swimmer must be more erect than usual, hold his
head more backward, and use the legs and arm more quickly
and powerfully. The arm, at its full extent, must be struck out
rather across the body, and brought down before, and the breast
kept inflated. This mode of swimming is best adapted for
assisting persons who are drowning, and should be frequently
practised — the learner carrying first under, then over the water,
a weight of a few pounds.

In assisting drowning persons, however, great care should be
taken to avoid being caught hold of by them. They should be
approached from behind, and driven before, or drawn after the
swimmer to the shore, by the intervention, if possible, of any-
thing that may be at hand, and if nothing be at hand, by means
of their hair ; and they should, if possible, be got on their backs.
Should they attempt to seize the swimmer, he must cast them
loose immediately j and, if seized, drop them to the bottom,
when they will endeavour to rise to the surface.

Two swimmers treading water may assist a drowning person
\>y seizing him, one under each arm, and carrying him along
with his head above water, and his body and limbs stretched
out and motionless.

FEATS IN SWIMMING.

Men have been known to swim in their clothes a distance of
4000 feet.

Others have performed 2200 feet in twenty-nine minutes.

Some learn to dive and bring out of the water burdens as
heavy as a man.

[This art, however, has made little if any progress from the
earliest records that we possess of it. Leander's feat of passing
from Abydos to Sestos was the crack performance of antiquity ;
and it was the ultra achievement of Lord Byron, probably one
of the best swimmers of our day. — ED. Fifth Edition.]

ROWING. 101

ROWING.

RIVER ROWING,* WITH TWO SCULLS.
THE BOAT.

It may be laid down as a general rule, that, in calm weather,
a iir;ht and sharp boat is preferable ; and, in rough weather, a
heavier and broader one. The learner, however, should not at
'first begin in too light a boat, nor should he practise in rough
weather, until he gets acquainted with its management.

TO LEAVE THE LANDING-PLACE.

To leave the shore, the rower should, with the boat-hook,
shove the boat off, head upon tide, or opposite to the current.
To leave stairs, the rower must either shove the boat off with
the boat-hook, or place the blade of the scull forward, and per-
form what the London watermen call belaying the boat's head
out from the shore, accordingly as there is deep or shallow
water.

This being done, the rower sits down to his sculls. These
he puts in the rullocks, and turns the concave front, or filling of
the scull, towards the stern of the boat.

THE SEAT.

The rower must sit a-midships on the thwart or seat of the
boat, else she will heel to the side on which he is sitting, and
much of his labour will be lost. He should sit with ease to
himself, having his feet on the middle of the stretcher, and his
legs not quite extended ; but his knees, as he rows, should be
brought down, and his legs stretched.

THE PULL.

The rower should make long strokes in a heavy boat, and

* This should have the preference here, because the art is best learned on
-the smooth watei, and in the lighter boats, of rivers.-

102 ROWING.

shorter and quicker strokes in a light boat. At the beginning
of the pull, he must, in general, bend his body till his head is
over his knees, and extend his arras as far aft as convenient,
that the blades of the sculls may be thrown correspondingly for-
ward. Plate XXIX. f. 1. With regard to the back in particular,
some think that, if a short distance is to be rowed, it should be
bent ; and that, if a long distance, it is less fatiguing to keep it
straight. When the arms are extended as far aft, and the blades
of the sculls as far forward as convenient — which must never be
so far as to jam in the rullocks — (Plate XXIX. f. 1. the rower
must dip the sculls into the water, and pull towards him, by at
once bending the arms and the body.

When in the middle of the pull, if the sculls are not short
enough, or even if the head and body are slightly turned, one of
the hands will go higher than the other ; and, as the right is
generally the stronger, it may go above, and the left below. It
is often found difficult to keep one hand clear of the other in
pulling a pair of sculls. This is so much the case, indeed, that
the inexperienced frequently suffer more from the knocking
and rubbing of the backs and sides of the hands against each
other, than from the friction of the handles of the oars in the-
palms of the hands. This may be easily obviated by attending
to the following advice : —

Having seated yourself in the centre of the thwart, with your
feet close together against the centre of the stretcher, ship your
sculls, but, before pulling a stroke, move your body three or
four inches to the right hand, and still retain your feet in the
centre : thus you will be sitting rather obliquely ; this will throw
your right shoulder more forward, and consequently the right
hand; and thus the hands will work perfectly clear of each other.
This rule, however, must be modified by the circumstances of
river-rowing. A waterman writes us as follows : — " As to car-
rying one hand above the other, my way is, that if, for instance,
I go from Greenwich to Blackwall against tide, I keep down on
the Greenwich side, in general look toward the shore, and hav-
ins my face over the left shoulder, my right hand is then above*.

-
&0

'3

•2 '

THE TIDE OR CURRENT. 103

If I go from Greenwich to London, ray face is turned over the
right shoulder, and the left hand is then uppermost."

(The usual position in the middle of the pull is shown in
Plate XXIX. fig. 2.)

The end of the pull must not take place till the elbows have
approached the tops of the hips, the hands are brought towards
the chest, and the body is thrown well back. There would be
a loss of power, however, if the hands were brought too near
the chest ; and the body should not be thrown further back than
it may easily and quickly recover its first position for the next
stroke. — (Plate XXX. As the water is being delivered from
the sculls, the elbows sink, the wrists are bent up, and the backs
of the hands are turned towards the fore-arms, in order to
feather the sculls.— (Plate XXX. fig. 1.)

In the return of the sculls, the hands must remain turned up
until the sculls are put into the water. — ( Plate XXX f. 2 In the
middle of the return, if the sculls are not short, or if the head
and body be turned, one of the hands also goes higher than the
other.

As to the degree of the immersion of the sculls. — In the mid-
dle of the pull, the blades must be covered by the water. The
learner in general dips them very deep ; but that ought to be
avoided, especially in calm weather. In the wiiole of the return,
the tips should, in calm weather, be two or three inches above
the water ; and, in rough weather, they should be higher, in
order to clear it, as represented in the preceding Plates. The
head ought throughout to be very moveable — first to one side,
then to the other, but generally turned towards the shore when
against the tide. The same movements have only to be repeated,
throughout the course.

THE TIDE OR CURRENT.

In river-rowing, when the tide or current is with the rower,
a learner should in general take the middle of the stream. In
rowing with the tide, however, watermen generally cut off the
points, in order to keep a straight course. When the tide or

104 ROWING.

current is against the rower, he should take the sides, preferring
that side on which, owing to the course of the river, the current
is least. As there is an eddy under the points, watermen gene-
rally, when rounding them, shoot the water to the next point,
and so on.

TO TURN.

Back water with one scull, by putting the one on the side
you wish to turn to into the water, with its concave front or
filling towards you, and pushing against it ; and at the same
time pull strongly with the other scull, until the boat's head is
turned round.

MEETING OR PASSING.

In meeting, the boat which comes witli the tide must get out
of the wra3". In this case, both boats, if close, lay the blades of
their sculls flat on the water, lift them out of the rullocks, and
let them drift alongside. Each replaces them when the other
has passed. In passing a boat, the rower who passes must take
the outside, unless there is ample room within, and must also
keep clear of the other's sculls or oars. If one boat is crossing
the water, and another coming with the tide, the one coming
with tide must keep astern of the other, and have a good look-
out ahead.

TO LAND.

Give the boat its proper direction, and keep its head inclining
towards the tide, and its stern will turn up or down, as the tide
runs ; unship the sculls by the manoeuvre directed above ; but,
instead of letting them drift alongside, lay them in the boat, the
blades forward and the looms aft; seize the headfast; jump
ashore ; and take two half-hitches round the post or ring.

SEA-ROWING, OR ROWING IN A GALLEY ON THE RIVER.

In launching a boat from the sea-beach, when it is rough,
and there is a heavy surf, the two bowmen must get into the
boat with their oars run out ; and the other rowers follow the

SEA-ROWING. 105

boat quickly in her descent ; but they should not jump in till
she is quite afloat, lest their weight might fix her on the beach,
and she might ship a sea.

It may happen, that immediately on the boat floating, a sea
shall take the bow (before the rowers are sufficiently prepared
with their oars to keep her head out), and place her broadside
to the waves. In this situation, the boat is in danger of being
swamped, and the lives of those on board are in peril. When
thus situated, it is best for two of the rowers to go near the bow
of the boat, and immediately force each his boat-hook or oar
on the ground, on the shore side of the boat, as the most
effectual, safe, and expeditious method of bringing her head
again to the sea. Should there be more than a usual swell, both
the rowers and the sitter, or steersman, cannot be too particular
in keeping, throughout, the head of the boat to the swell, as
lying broadside to a heavy sea is extremely dangerous.

In rowing, each man has in general a single oar, and sits on
the opposite side of the galley from the rullock through which
his oar passes. The oar must consequently cross the boat, and
be held on its opposite side, so as to clear the back of the man
before.

It should be neither held nor pulled obliquely to the side by
twisting the body, as is practised by many, because the muscles
in that case act disadvantageously, and are sooner fatigued. The
stroke must be longer in sea than in river rowing. The oar
must be thrown out with a heave, caused by the simultaneous
extension of the body and the arms. It is still more essential
to feather in sea than in river rowing.

The oar must be drawn back with great power, caused by the
simultaneous contraction of the body and arms; time with
the other rowers being accurately kept, and distinctly marked.

"When the oars are delivered from the water, the time, until
they go into it again, may be counted, one, two, three, — when
they pass through the water. This time is kept by the strokes-
man, or sternmost man of the rowers.

In landing, the word is, " in bow," when the bowman or

10G SAILING.

foremost man gets the boat-hook ready to clear away for the
shore, or the stairs. The next word is from the coxwain,
"rowed off all," or "well rowed;" when all the oars are laid
in, with the blades forward, and the boat is made fast.

In landing on the sea-beach, when there is a surf, the rowers
may watch for a smooth, and then give good way ashore, when
the bowman should instantly jump out with the headfast or
penter, and pull her up, to avoid shipping a sea. The distances
run in this way are very great. We have known four men, in
a short galley, row thirty miles in four hours, namely, from
Dover to eight miles below Calais, or abreast of Gravelines, on
the opposite coast. In such a row, a London waterman would
have no skin left on his hands ; and a member of the Funny
Club would, we suppose, have no hands left on his arms !

SAILING.

BOATS, ETC.

Cutters, owing to their excellent sailing qualities, are much
employed as packets*, revenue cruisers, smugglers, privateers,
and in all cases requiring despatch. The boats commonly em-
ployed in parties of pleasure, &c., are also cutters.

On the size of these vessels, however, it is necessary to re-
mark, that a cutter under one hundred tons is sufficiently
handy ; but, when the size is equal to that of the larger yachts,
a strong crew is necessary, as the spars are very heavy, and a
number of men requisite to set or shorten sail. As a single-
masted vessel, in the event of springing a spar, becomes helpless,
even large cutters are used only in short voyages, or on the
coast ; for, in case of accident, they can always manage to reach
some harbour or anchorage to repair any damage they may

* In the packet line, since the general adoption of steam, cutters are seldom
if' ever met with.— ED. Fifth Edition.

BOATS, ETC. 107

sustain. The peculiar qualities of beating well to windward,
and working on short tacks, adapt cutters peculiarly for Channel
cruising.

Although, some years back, large cutters were confined prin-
cipally to the navy and revenue, the Royal Yacht Squadron, in
theirs, have exceeded these not only in size, but in beauty and
sailing qualities. Some of the finest and fastest cutters in the
world are the property of this national club; and two of them,
the Alarm (Mr. Weld's), and the Arundel*, (the Duke of Nor-
folk's, measure 193 and 188 tons. The inconvenient size, however,
of a cutter's boom and mainsail has caused the very general intro-
duction of a ketch rig, which, by the addition of a mizen, per-
mits the boom to be dispensed with, and reduces the mainsail
considerably. This rig, indeed, when the mizen stands well, is
elegant ; and, if a vessel is short-handed, it is very handy. A&
cutter-rigged vessels, instead of a regular mainsail, with its
boom and gaff, have sometimes a mere spritsail, it is necessary
we should observe, that the inferior convenience and safety of
these preclude our noticing them here. It is also necessary
that we should explain why, in the sequel, we do not even refer
to lugger-rigged vessels.

Luggers are more difficult to work or manoeuvre ; they re-
quire a greater number of men ; their spars are so heavy that
they require all hands to move them : their decks are inevitably
lumbered with spars, &c. ; their canvass gets rotted from ex-
posure ; and their expense is much greater than that of cutters.
They generally have two sets of lugs — large ones, which require
dipping every time they tack, and small working lugs, which do
not require dipping, the tack coming to the foot of the mast.
The latter are generally used, except in making long reaches
across the Channel, &c. A lugger, moreover, is seldom fit to
be altered to any thing but a schooner, not having breadth
enough for one mast, which, after all, is the best for beauty and
speed.

* The tonnage of the Arundcl is not given here according to the Royal
Yacht Squadron list : there it is stated to be 210 tons.— ED. Fifth Edition.

108

SAILING.

Sailing men, indeed, are now so perfectly aware of the inferior
speed of luggers, that we never see a lugger or schooner enter
against a cutter at all near its tonnage. At sea, luggers would
have a better chance ; though even there many would prefer
gutters, except in foul weather and a long reach. In short,
these vessels suit only a few noblemen and gentlemen who have
enough of patriotic ambition to desire to look like smugglers,
enough of delicacy to disregard the being thought dirty lubbers
by their own men — some of wrhom are not dirty from mere taste
•or choice, and enough of penetration not to discover, that on
their landing with filthy clothes and tarry hands, every old
sailor grins or laughs at their imagining, that it was they, and
not the man at the helm, who had kept the canvass from crack-
ing, or the sticks from going over the side. Our descriptions
apply, therefore, to cutters alone ; and the Plates at the end of
this article illustrate the various parts therein referred to.

Upon the Thames, the sailing clubs comprise the Royal
Sailing Society, the Royal Thames Yacht Club, the Loyal
Victoria Yacht Club, the Clarence, British, Royal Yacht, and
several minor associations. Several cups and prizes are
annually given during the season; and the spirited contests
between the beautiful small craft which form these fancy fleets,
are highly interesting. The sailing matches on the river are of
two sorts — one above, and the other below the bridges. The
smaller yachts, of from six to twenty-six tons, are commonly
entered for the former, and a larger class for the latter, which
take place between Greenwich and Gravesend. These national
amusements appear to be rapidly gaining the first place among
fashionable recreations, and now occupy the season, from the
period when hunting ends, till shooting begins.

The Royal Yacht Squadron has nearly six hundred persons
on its lists, of which above one hundred are members, and
about four hundred and fifty honorary members. The number
of yachts is one hundred and nine* ; of which eighty-seven are
* As the number is constantly fluctuating, we had better take the average at
a hundred, which will be found quite as high a one as we should be justified
in suggesting.

BOATS, ETC- 109

cutters, len schooners, three brigs, four yawls, two ships, two
ketches, and one lugger. The greater pare of these vessels
hail from Cowes or Southampton. The shipping belonging
to the club amounts to 7-50 tons. Now, a vessel of one
hundred tons seldom perhaps stands the owner in less than
from five to six thousand pounds, varying from that to ten,
according to the profusion of ornamental parts, the internal
fittings, and other contingencies. At this rate, the shipping
of the club would have cost more than three millions and
a half of money : but it is impossible to speak decisively on
this point, as the first cost of the yachts varies much, and the
numerous styles of rig are attended with expenses so widely
different. At a moderate computation, each vessel belonging
to the club carries ten men on an average : this gives the total
number employed 1090. During the summer months, then,
while regattas are celebrated, it may be said that the Royal
Yacht Squadron alone employs more than 1100 men. These, with
some few exceptions, are discharged on the approach of winter,
and the yachts are laid up for the season, retaining the master
and one man in pay. The crews thus discharged obtain em-
ployment in merchant-vessels, or otherwise, during the winter ;
and in the middle of spring, are generally re-shipped in the
yachts in which they have previously served. On these con-
ditions, active and industrious men of good character are gene-
rally sure of employment in the club; and many members
justly pride themselves on the high discipline, manly bearing,
•and crack appearance of their crewrs. The situation of master,
in particular, is one of much responsibility, and is on all ac-
counts respectably filled. In some of the largest craft, junior
officers of the navy are found to accept this office. The sailing
regulations of the Royal Yacht Squadron are as follow ;

First — Members entering their yachts must send the names
of them to the secretary one week previous to the day of sailing,
and pay two guineas entrance at the same time.

Second — All vessels starting or entering must be the bnnajide
property of members, as well as their spars, sails, boats, &c.

110

SAILING.

Third — Each member is allowed to enter one vessel only for
all prizes given by the club.

Fourth— Cutters may carry four sails only, viz., mainsail,
foresail, jib, and gaff top-sail ; yawls, luggers, schooners, and
all other vessels, in like proportion. No booming out allowed.

Fifth — No trimming with ballast, or shifting of ballast allowed ;
and all vessels to keep their platforms down, and bulkheads
standing.

Sixth — Vessels on the larboard tack must invariably give way
to those on the starboard tack ; and in all cases where a doubt
of the possibility of the vessel on the larboard tack weathering
the one on the starboard . tack shall exist, the vessel on the
larboard tack shall give way ; or, if the other vessel keep her
course, and run into her, the owner of the vessel on the lar-
board tack shall be compelled to pay all damages, and forfeit
his claim to the prize.

Seventh — Vessels running on shore shall be allowed to use
their own anchors and boats actually on board to get them off,
afterwards weighing anchor and hoisting the boat in ; but, upon
receiving assistance from any other vessel or vessels, boats, or
anchors, shall forfeit all claim to the prize.

Eighth — That nothing but the hand-line be used for sounding.

Ninth — Any deviation from these rules shall subject the
aggressor to forfeit all claim to the prize.

Tenth — If any objection be made with regard to the sailing
of any other vessel in the race, such objection must be made to
the stewards, within one hour after the vessel making the ob-
jection arrive at the starting-post.

Eleventh — No vessel shall be allowed to take in ballast, or
take out, for twenty-four hours previous to starting ; and no
ballast shall be thrown overboard.

Twelfth — Vessels shall start from moorings laid down at a
-cable-length distance, with their sails set ; and every vessel not
exceeding one hundred tons shall carry a boat not less than
ten feet long ; and vessels exceeding one hundred tons, a boat
not less than fourteen feet long.

COURSES, ETC. Ill

Thirteenth — There shall be a memher, or honorary member,
on board each vessel.

Fourteenth — The time of starting may be altered by the
stewards ; and all disputes that may arise are to be decided by
them, or such persons as they shall appoint.

The Northern Yacht Club is a highly interesting society,
although its plan is not so extensive as that of the Royal Club.
It contains about three hundred and fifty members. The docu-
ments for 1830 comprise ninety- two in the Scottish, and ninety
in the Irish division, with fifty-two honorary members, in ad-
dition to ninety-three members of the Cork Yacht Club, who
are also entered on the honorary lists. It had, in 1830, sixty
yachts, not equal in proportion to the tonnage of the Cowes
Club, as smaller vessels are admitted. Many R. Y. S. men are
found in the Northern Club. There are many fine vessels in
this club. Cutters, as usual, excel in number.

At the lowest computation, the number of vessels at present
employed for pleasure in this country cannot be less than from
three to four hundred, ranging in bulk from ten to three hun-
dred and fifty tons. These are variously distributed along our
shores, carrying their opulence into every port and harbour.
But there is another advantage arising from yacht clubs —
namely, that national spirit, which, to a maritime people, is
above all in worth. The yacht clubs keep alive this feeling in
an eminent degree.

COURSES, ETC.

Even in describing the elementary nautical operations which
such boats require, it is necessary to lay down a position for the
HARBOUR, direction for the WIND, and trip for the VESSEL.

Let us suppose, then, that the mouth of the harbour lies
towards the south ; that the wind blows from the north, with
a little inclination to east, and that we wish first to sail due
south to get out of the harbour, next direct our course east-

112

SAILING.

ward, then return westward till we get abreast the mouth of the
harbour, and lastly, northward, to enter the harbour and come
to our moorings.

These courses will, with variations in the force of the wind,
illustrate every common and useful manoeuvre.

GETTING UNDER WAY.

Ship* the tiller.f

Set the mainsail £; hoist the throat § nearly close up; and
half hoist the peak. ||

Bend^T and haul the jib out to the bowsprit end.

Bowse the bobstay** and bowsprit shrouds ff well taut.

Hoist the jib, and bowse it well up.

Get the topmast stayJJ, backstays §§, and rigging ||[j well
taut.

Hoist the foresail ready to cast^FIT her when the moorings
are let go.

Send a hand to the helm.***

* Fix in its proper place.

t The piece of Avood or beam put into the head of the rudder to move it.

± Unfurl it by casting the stops or gaskets off.

§ The foremost end of the gaff, or that end next the mast.

|| The outermost end of the gaff, or that farthest from the mast.

^[ Hook it to the traveller, or ring on the bowsprit.

** A rope or chain from the end of the bowsprit to half-way down the stem.

tt Ropes from the bowsprit end on each side to the bows.

±t A rope from the topmast head to the outer end of the bowsprit, where it
passes through a sheave or small block, comes in by the stem head, and is
belayed or made fast (done generally by winding several times backwards and
forwards in the manner of a figure 8), to its cleat or pin.

§§ Ropes from the after-part of the head of the topmast to the after-part of
the channels on each side.

(HI Or shouds— ropes from each side the top-mast head, through the cross-
tree arms, to the fore part of the channels, between the first and second lower
shroud. They are set up or hauled taut, as are the backstays, by means of a
small tackle, one block of which is hooked to the thimble spliced into the
lower end of the shroud or backstay, and the other to an eye-bolt in the
channels.

ff To turn her head in the most advantageous direction.

*** This term includes both the tiller and the wheel ; but, as the yawing
motion of a small light vessel is correspondingly light and feeble, though

BEFORE THE WIND. 113

Overhaul the main-sheet*, and the leef runner aiid tackle £ ;
lower the throat, and hoist the peak of the mainsail taut§ up.

Hoist the gaff topsail ||, keeping the tack^I to windward** of
the peak halyards tt> and hauling the slack of the sheet out
before you hoist the sail taut up.

Set the tack, and heave the sheet well taut.

With the Main Boom over to Slarboard.^

In managing the helm, be careful not to jibe the mainsail.
When a vessel is going large ||||, the helmsman should always
place himself on the weather side of the tiller, or the side opposite
to that which the main boom is over, as his view of the vessel's
head will then be unobstructed by the sails. The boat now
running before the wind, haul the tack of mainsail up. If the
wind come dead aft, you may flatten aft the jib and foresail
sheets ^I1F, or haul the foresail down to prevent chafing. If

much quicker than that of a large vessel, she is best without a wheel, which
is meant to gain power at the expense of time.

* A rope or tackle for regulating the horizontal position of the main boom.

f The leeward or lee-side is the opposite to windward.

± A compound tackle, used in cutter-rigged vessels, instead of a backstay to
the lower mast, on account of its easy removal allowing the main boom to go
forward, in going large.

§ The nautical way of pronouncing and writing tight.

r The sail above the mainsail. The sheet hauls out to a small block on the
outer end of the gaff.

«; Tack is the lowermost corner opposite to the sheet, in all fore-and-aft sails
.dding sails.

** The windward or weather side, is that side on which the wind blows.

if The rope by which the peak of the gaff or boom, to which the head of the
rv.ainsail is fastened, is hoisted. Halyards always signifies a rope by which a
sail is hoisted.

ii That is, going the same way the wind blows. Her course is then sixteen
points from the wind. (See Compass.)

§§ Starboard is the right, and larboard the left hand side, when looking
toward the head of the vessel.

|JH Or free, not close-hauled. Generally understood as having the wind
tbaft the beam, or that her course is then eight points from the wind.

\^ Ropes fast to the aftermost lower corner of the jib and foresail, to hold

I

114 SAILING.

the wind come at all round on the starboard quarter*, slnck
off the boom guy f ; haul in the main-sheet till you get the
boom a-midshipsj, or nearly so; port§ the helm, and jibe the
mainsail ; slack off the main-sheet again, and hook the guy on
the larboard side ; haul taut the starboard runner and tackle,
and overhaul the larboard one ; the same with the topping-lift [| ;
hoist the head sails If, and shift the sheets over.

N.B. If you are obliged to jibe as above, you must, in the
following directions for bringing the wind on your beam, read
larboard for starboard, and vice versa.

BRINGING THE VESSEL WITH THE WIND ON THE LARBOARD
BEAM.**

Supposing that you have not jibed, starboard the helm
a little, and let the vessel spring her luff ft with her head
to the northward. Slack the boom guy, and haul in the

them down. The jib has two ropes or sheets fast to its corner, one of which
comes on each side the forestay, for the convenience of tacking, &c. The
foresail has only one sheet, which is fast to the traveller, or ring on the horse
or bar of iron, which crosses from one gunwale to the other, just before the
mast.

* The point on either side where the side and stern meet.

t A small tackle, one end of which is hooked to the main boom, and the
other forward, to keep the boom from swinging.

t Midway between the sides of the vessel.

§ Instead of larboard, when speaking of the helm, port is the proper term,
in contrariety to starboard, used for the sake of distinctness in directing the
helmsman.

|| Stout ropes which lead, one from each side the main boom, near its outer
end, through a block on its respective side the mast, just under the cross-
trees, whence it descends about half-way, and is connected to the deck or
gunwale by a tackle.

^T Jib and foresail.

** That is, athwart or across the waist of the vessel, called a-beam, because
it is in the same direction that her beams lay, or at right angles with her
keel. Her head is then eight points from the wind. — The wind is said to be
abaft the beam, or before the beam, according as the vessel's head is more or
less than eight points from the wind.

tt Sail nearer to the wind.

CLOSE-HAULING THE VESSEL. 115

main-sheet. Haul aft * the jib-sheet, and bowline f the fcie-
sail.

If she come up fast, port the helm^ a little, and meet her.
then right § it when she lays her proper course.

Hook and haul taut the lee runner and tackle. You will now
find it necessary to carry the helm a little a-port or a-weather.

If, instead of directing our course eastward, we had preferred
doing so westward, we must have jibed previous to bringing
the wind on the beam, and then the preceding operations would
necessarily have been, to a corresponding extent, reversed.

CLOSE-HAULING THE VESSEL.])

To haul the vessel to the wind, ease the helm down^I a little.
Haul in the main-sheet upon the proper mark. Bowse the fore-
sheet, and haul the jib-sheet well aft. Bowse the runner and
tackle well taut.

The vessel is now on the wind, plies to windward, or is close-
hauled.**

Being now apt to gripe, or come up into the wind with a
sudden jerk, now and again, she will carry her helm mere or
less a-weather. The helmsman must watch the weather-leach
of the mainsail, to prevent the vessel getting her head in the
wind.

* That is, toward the hinder part or stern.

t A rope made fast to the foremost shroud, and passed through a thimble in
the after-leach of the foresail, then round the shroud again, and round the sheet.

t Always put the helm the contrary way to that which you want the
vessel's head to turn.

§ That is, bring it a-midships ; the same with steady.

|| To haul the sheets aboard, or more a-midships, by which means the
vessel's head will come closer to the point the wind blows from.

f To leeward.

** These terms all imply one thing, viz., that the vessel is sailing as near as
possible to the point whence the wind blows. No square-rigged vessel will
sail within less tlian six, and no fore-and-aft rigged vessel within less than
five, points of the wind, to have any head-way.

116 SAILING

TACKING."4

Having got abreast or opposite the mouth of the harbour,
haul the fore bowline. " Ready about."f Put your helm up,
or to windward a little, and let the vessel go rather off the wind,
to get good way on her ; then gently down or to leeward with
it, which is announced by the helmsman calling " Helm's a-lee."
Let fly the jib- sheet : this takes off the balance of wind from
her head, and acts in concert with the helm in sweeping her
stern to leeward, or rather in allowing her head to come quicker
up into the wind.

The man who attends the jib-sheet must carefully gather in
the slack £ of the one opposite to that which he let go. When
the jib comes over the larboard side of the stay§, haul the lar-
board jib-sheet well aft. When the mainsail is filled, let draw
the foresail. || Right the helm, and shift over the tack of the
mainsail.

One hand should attend the main-sheet, to gather in the

* To turn a vessel from one side to the other with her head toward the
wind. When a vessel is obliged to tack several times successively to <ret to
windward, she is said to be beating to windward ; when to get up or down a
harbour, channel, &c., beating up or down, &c. ; when trying to get off a lee
shore, clawing off.

A vessel's tacks are always to windward and forward ; and her sheets, to
leeward and aft ; whence the terms larboard or starboard tack, meaning that
she has her tacks aboard on the larboard or starboard side.

t A command that all hands are to be attentive, and at their stations for
tacking.

$ Or loose rope.

§ The fore-stay, or large rope from the lower mast head to the stem head,
to prevent the mast from springing when the vessel is sending deep, or fallen
into the hollow between two waves, after pitching.

U That is, let go the bowline which holds the sail to this, now weather
shroud. It was held there till now, that the wind might act upon it with
greater power to turn the vessel, from the time her head was about half-way
round. The expression is derived from its being necessary, in larger vessels
of a similar rig, to ease the rope gradually as the sail draws it. From the
time the jib-sheet is let fly, till the foresail is let draw, the vessel is said to be
in ttays.

REEFING, TAKING IN SAIL, ETC. 117

slack till the boom is a-midships, and then ease it off as the
sail fills, and the vessel lays over to port. When the vessel is
in stays, and it is doubtful whether she will come round, or, in
order to make her come round when she gathers stern-way,
shift the helm to the opposite side. She is now about upon
the starboard tack.

REEFING, TAKING IN SAIL, ETC.

Haul the fore-sheet up to windward ; bowline it there, and
heave her to. Keep the tiller shipped, and lash it a-lee. In gaff
topsail ; lower the halyards ; and haul down. Send a hand aloft
to unbend the sheet from the sail, and make it fast to the main
halyard bolt; and unlash the gaff topsail, and send it down.
Lower the main halyards and peak to the second reef cringle,
and reef the mainsail.

Hook the reef tackle* to the first earing f; haul upon it till
the cringle J is close down upon the boom ; and belay the tackle.
Pass a small gasket § through the tack and the first reef cringle,
and lash the two firmly together, taking care to gather in snug
the luff of the sail, so that the leach rope belonging to it forms a
sort of snake near the mast. Haul up the tack, and bowse upon
the weather peak line, keeping the other part fast a-midships of
the boom. This will hold the belly of the sail partly to wind-
ward, and make it easier to tie the reef-points. Observe to
keep the foot-rope outside and under the sail.

Let one man jump upon the boom to tie the outer points so

* A small tackle formed of two hook blocks, one of which is hooked to the
under part of the boom about one third from the mast, and the other farther
aft. The fall is belayed to a cleat under the boom.

t A stout rope, one end of which is made fast to the boom at the same
distance from the mast as the reef cringle to which it belongs. It ascends,
passes through the cringle, descends and passes through a sheave on the side
of the boom, then in board, and is stopped to the boom by means of its lan-
yard, or small line spliced into its end for the purpose. This lanyard is also to
make it fast when the sail is reefed, and you wish to remove the tackle.

t A short loop of rope with a thimble or small ring of iron inside it, spliced
to the leach of the sail.

£ A rope made by plaiting rope-yarns.

118 SAILING.

far that the rest can be tied on board. Let go the tack r.ml
peak line, always keeping the ends of this fast under the boom.
Hoist the sail taut up ; and set taut the tack tackle. Shift the
jib to No. 2. Overhaul the jib purchase ; let go the outhaul \
haul the jib down ; unhook the tack ; unbend the sheets ; and
send the sail down below.

You have now got one reef in the mainsail. If it come on
to blow harder, and you want a second reef, lower the sail, and
haul on the peak line as before ; nipper the first reef-earing so
as to hold it a short time ; let go the reef tackle, and unhook it
from the earing, which make fast with its lanyard round the
boom.

You have now got the tackle to use for the second reef. Pro-
ceed as for the first reef. Shift the jib to No. 3, and proceed
as before. If third, the same, after rigging the bowsprit. Take
the fid* or bolt out of the heel of the bowsprit, and rig the
bowsprit in about one fid hole. Haul taut the topmast stay and
bowsprit rigging. Bend and set the small jib in the same way
as any other.

You may want to stow the mainsail, set the trysail, and make
her otherwise snug in proportion. Sway away upon the top
rope ; lift the mast a little to let the man unfid it ; and lower
topmast down in the slings. Lower the fore halyards, and reef
the foresail. Gather the luff of the sail up ; make the fore-
most reef-earing cringle fast to the tack ; shift the sheet from
the clue of the sail to the after reef cringle ; and tie the points.
If the weather is very heavy, haul down the stay-sail, and tend
the vessel with a tackle upon the weather jib-sheet.

When it comes fine weather again, make sail in precisely the
reverse order to that in which you shorten it. Continue to
tack in the wind's eye till you are to windward of the harbour.

* A bar of wood or iron, which passes horizontally through a hole in each
bitt and the heel of the bowsprit, to secure it in its place, much in the same
way that a carriage pole is secured.

SAILING. 119

PASSING OTHER VESSELS.

All vessels sailing before the wind keep out of the way of
those upon the wind. In the river Thames, vessels which sail
with the larboard tack aboard, keep away for those with the
starboard tack aboard.

BRINGING THE VESSEL INTO HARBOUR.

Lower and haul down the gaff topsail. Let go the jib tack
orouthaul*; lower the jib; and pull on the down-hauler, to
bring the traveller in. Haul the tack of the mainsail up j and
lower the peak. Down foresail.

Let a small boat run away the wrap to the quay. Lower, and
stow the mainsail. Unbend the jib, and stow it below if dry
and not immediately wanted, and hook the halyards to the
traveller, close in by the stem. If otherwise, hoist upon the
halyards, and let it hang to dry if it require it, or stop it up
and down the foremost shroud. Haul the vessel to the moor-
ings, and moor properly, putting fenders over to keep her from
the quay.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XXXI.
Fig. 1.

The mariner's compass.

Fig. 2.
Plan of the deck, with the bowsprit rigged out, &c.

1. Bowsprit. 9. 9. Channels.

2. 2. Bowsprit shrouds. 10. Main hatchway.

3. Stem head. 11. Companion and binnacle.

4. Bowsprit bitts. 12. Tiller.

5. Fore hatchway. 13. Cabin skylight.

G. Windlass and bitts. 14. Rudder-head and case.

7. Fore-sheet horse. 15. Taffrail.

8. Place of the mast.

* A rope made fast to the traveller, to haul it out to the bowsprit end.

120 SAILING.

PLATE XXXII. fig. 1.

Pleasure boat, cutter-rigged, lying at anchor; foresail and
mainsail bent and stowed.

1. Vane and spindle. 16. Topmast stay.

2. Truck. 17. Runner and tackle.

3. Topmast. 18. Traveller.

4. Cap. 19. Channel.

5. Trussel trees. 20. Forestay with the foresail furled
G. Lower mast. to it.

7. 7. Cross trees. 21. Bobstay.

8. Bowsprit. 22. Topping-lifts.

9. Gaff, with mainsail furled. 23. Topping-lift block s.

0. Main boom. 24. Main-sheet.

11. Tiller. 25. 25. Peakhalyanis.

12. Rudder. 26. Jib halyards.

13. Stem. 27. Cable.

14. 14. Topmast shrouds. 28. Fore-sheet.

15. Topmast backstay.

PLATE XXXII. fig. 2.

The vessel going down the harbour with all sails set, steering
south, before a light breeze.

1. Gaff topsail. 10. 10. 10. Cringles.

2. Foresail. 11. Balance reef.

3. Mainsail. 12. Anchor stock.

4. Tack tricing line. 13. Windlass.

5. Peak line, or signal halyards. 14. Foresheet horse.
G. 7. S. The 1st, 2nd, and 3rd reefs. 15. Main hatch.

9. P. 0. Reef-earings. 16. Companion and binnacle

PLATE XXXIII. fig. 1.

The vessel outside the harbour, steering east, with a smut.
breeze on the larboard beam.

1. Jib. 3. Anchor.

2. Foresail. 4. Eyebolt of the bowsprit slirouds.

PLATE XXXIII. fig. 2.

The vessel trying for the harbour in a heavy gale, close to the
wind as she can lay, on the starboard tack, under a reefed main-
sail and foresail, bowsprit reefed, and topmast lowm-d.

II

.

a luvr/r on rlir Larboetrd

:<i( I tic Sr,v

.

// // ' ~~~"~ — C* *"'"'

/ t .-.

RIDING.

The general art of riding, sometimes called manege riding, to
distinguish it from its modifications in road-riding, hunting,
racing, &c., teaches us to place every part of the body so that it
can act upon the horse in every emergency, shows the effect of
all the aids or modes of guiding him, and enables us to render
him obedient to the slightest touch. By never suffering the
ascendancy to be transferred to the. horse, by in general pre-
venting him from making all his speed, and by exhausting him
the sooner the more he exerts himself without permission, it
bestows upon the rider perfect security.

An intimate knowledge of this method is necessary even to
our abandoning it when convenient, to our adopting the styles,
afterwards to be described, for more extended and rapid paces,
or for long continued riding, to our suffering the horse to take
more or less of ascendancy, and to our, when necessary, easily
recovering that superiority of the hand, of which those who are
ignorant of this fundamental method are less capable.

122 RIDING.

The recent practice has been to carry the foot rather more
forward than is represented in our Plates, approaching in this
respect, to the ancient position, as seen in the Elgin marbles, &c.

A Parisian bit, which is attached to the mouth of the horse,
without a headstall, has been lately used. It is, however, appli-
cable only to horses, on account of its being retained in the
mouth by means of the side tusks, which mares do not possess.
It is composed of a semicircular bar of iron, which goes under
the chin, to which its concavity applies; while a short bar, firmly
attached to one of its ends, passes nearly half-way through the
mouth. Through the other end of the semicircle is a hole, into
which, when the bit is on, must be screwed a bolt, similar to the
one just described. These two bolts, it is easily understood,
pass behind the tusks, and nearly meet in the centre of the
mouth.*

THE HORSE AND EQUIPMENTS.

Plates XXXI V. XXX V.f.l give better ideas of the horse and
his equipments than the longest and most detailed description.
The reader will therefore examine them in succession. "We have
here only to add those circumstances as to the equipment of the
horse, which could not be communicated by that otherwise
briefer and more impressive method.

The shoes of a horse have much to do with his, and conse-
quently with his rider's, comfort. It is therefore important to
know that he is properly shod. To effect this, the shoe should
be fitted to the foot, and not the foot to the shoe.

Neither heel nor frog should be pared more than merely to

take off what is ragged ; for no reproduction takes place here,

as in the case of the hoof. Farriers ruin nearly all horses by

*THE SADDLE (Fly. 1).— e, pommel; b, cantle ; c, panel ; d, flaps ; e, stirrup

leather ; /, girths.

BRIDLES (Fig. 2)— a, b, headstall with the cheekstraps ; c, do. of the curb ;
d, do. of the bridoon or snaffle passing through ;it over the poll ; e, nosetrap
(seldom found in any but military bridles) , /, throatlash. Fig. 3. A twisted
snaffle-bit. Fig. 4. A plain snaffle-bit. Fig. 5. A "Weymouth curb, with
chain and chainstrap (a) attached. Fig. 6. A common curb-bit, with the
upset in the mouthpiece.

t>f the ttot-k oi-

THE HORSE AND EQUIPMENTS. 123

doing otherwise. Indeed, they are not to be trusted with this
operation, which, after shoeing, any gentleman may perform
with his pocket-knife. The sole of the foot must not be hol-
lowed out, but only the outer wall pared flat or even with the
sole, and most at the toe. Nor, above all things, ought the
farrier's finishing rasp all round the edge of the horn immedi-
ately above the shoe to be permitted. Neither ought nails to
be driven far backward towards the heel, where the horn is softer
and more sensible, especially at the inner quarter. When a
horse has a high heel, the foot, except the frog, may be pared
flat, but not hollowed out or opened. When a horse has a low
heel, the foot should be pared only at the toes.

It is common to allow the fore part or toe of the hoof to grow-
long, thereby throwing the horse much on his heels. This posi-
tion is unnatural, because, were the horse in a state of nature,
without shoes, the toe, from constant contact with the ground,
would be worn down to its proper level with the heel. This
growth, then, of the fore part of the hoof, by throwing him on
his heels, renders them tender, and causes lameness : while the
foot, not being flat on the ground, also strains the ligaments of
the fetlock joint. These evils may be obviated by doing as
nature directs — by cutting away the toe to the proper level with
the heel, so as to allow the foot to bear flat upon the ground.
When a horse has a short pastern, he should have a short shoe,
because a long one would compel him to bring his heel more
backward than the unpliableness of his pastern would easily
admit.

The saddle should be proportioned to the size of the horse.
Before, the bearings should be clear of the plate bone ; behind,
they should not extend further than within four inches of the
hips; and their pressure should be equal on every part intended
to be touched. The closer the saddle then comes the better, if
neither the weight of the rider nor settling of the panel can
possibly injure the withers or chine. Before mounting, the
rider should examine whether the saddle, girths, straps, bits,
bridle, &c., are all good and well fixed.

124

RIDING.

When the saddle is on the horse, the lowest part of the seat
should rather be behind its centre, as it is there that the \veight
of the body should fall, and by that means the thighs can keep
their proper position. The best test of the adaptation of the
seat is, when the rider, without stirrups or effort, easily falls into
liis proper place in the saddle.

Stirrups should not be used until the pupil is capable of riding
without them. Their proper length is when the upper edge of
the horizontal bar reaches a finger's breadth below the inner
ankle-bone. When the feet are in the stirrups, the heels should
be about two inches lower than the toes. No more than the
natural weight of the limbs should be thrown upon them. It is
by an accurate position, and an easy play of the ankle and in-
step, that the stirrup is retained, so as to slip neither forward
nor backward, even if the toe be raised for a moment

The position on horseback with stirrups differs from that
without them only in this, that the thigh being, by the stirrup,
relieved from the weight of the leg and foot, the knee is slightly
bent, and rather before the lines which these form in the posi-
tion without stirrups. In hussar riding, hunting, &c., the breadth
of four fingers should intervene between the fork and the saddle
v, hen the rider stands up.

Spurs should never be used but by an accomplished rider.
When it is necessary to employ them, they should be applied a
few inches behind the girth, as low as possible, and with the
lightest touch capable of producing the effect.

As to the bridle, in order to give the greatest possible ease to
the snaffle, a large and polished bit is necessary. Most bits are
too small and long, bend back over the bars of the horse's jaw,
work like pincers, and cut his mouth.

To give the greatest degree of severity, the bit, while hot, is
twisted into a spiral form, so as to present to the jaw a rough
and sharp surface, capable of pressing the bars or lips with
greater or less severity. The degrees of punishment which this
fa it is capable of inflicting are generally sufficient for all the pur-
poses of correction. It is therefore best to ride with a snaffle.,

THE HORSE AM;- EQUIPMENTS. 125

and to use a curb only occasionally when absolutely necessary.
In all cases, the rider should observe that the horse is furnished
\vith a bit proper for him. If too light, it may have the eifect
already described. If too heavy, it may incline him to carry the
Lead low, or to rest upon the hand, which jockeys call " making
use of a fifth leg." The simplest and most useful of the curb
kind is the Weymouth bit, which consists of a strong plain
mouth-piece of uniform thickness, without any upset, but merely
a curve forwards, to give ease to the tongue.

The centre of the reins should be accurately marked ; and,
when both reins are held in one hand, and the near rein has to
pass under the little finger, and over the fore-finger, on the out-
side of the off-rein, the latter should be held about half an inch
shorter, and the centre should be brought proportionally towards
the left. In adjusting the bridle on the horse's head, the head-
stall, parallel to and above the cheekbone, must have its length
so regulated as to permit the mouth-piece of the curb to rest on
the bars, an inch above the lower tushes in horses, and about
two inches above the corner teeth in mares, which have no-
tushes. The nose-band, lying under the snaffle headstall, must
be buckled so loosely that a finger can pass freely under it and
over the horse's nose. The bit of the snaffle must be higher,
but not so much so as to wrinkle the corner of the mouth. The
throat-lash must be buckled rather loose. The mane is usually
cut close under the headstall ; the finger clears any par^ of the
foretop interfering with it; and the remainder, when combed
smooth, is put either over or under the front.

If the rider uses a curb, he should make it a rule to hook on
the chain himself; for the quietest horse may bring his rider
into danger, if the curb hurt him. The curb-chain must pass
under the snaffle. The rider should, therefore, put his right
hand under the snaffle reins to take hold of the curb-chain, and
introducing two fingers of hns left within the cheek of the bit,
and aiding these with his thumb, take hold of the curb hook. The
end links of the curb-chain being in his right hand, he should
turn the chain to the right and under, or as he would a screw, till

126 BIDING.

every link lies flat arid smooth, and then, without losing a half
turn, put that link on the hook which appears to be neither
tight nor slack. The finger should pass between the horse's
jaw and curb, which in this case hangs down upon his under
lip. It is necessary also to see how it operates. If the branch
has liberty to move forty-five degrees, or to a right angle, it is
the degree which is in general best. If, however, one link of
the chain confine it to thirty-five degrees, and if one link lower
give it fifty-five degrees, then the manner of the horse's carry-
ing his head must determine which is most proper : if the horse
naturally carry his nose high, the branch may have fifty-five, if
he bring his nose in, he should have thirty-five degrees. If
there be a chain-strap, it must be placed so high on the branch,
that when passed through the ring in the curb-chain, it may be
buckled tight enough to prevent the horse lodging the branch
on his teeth.

When a horse's head is steady, when he is light in hand, can
obey its motions with ease, and stop readily, the bit is properly
adjusted. On the contrary, if he open his mouth as if gagged,
writhe his jaws, draw his tongue above the mouth-piece, or
thrust it out sidewise ; if he fear the impression of the bit, have
no appuy, toss his head up and down, carry it low, and en-
deavour to force the hand, or refuse to go forward, or run back-
ward, the bit is not properly adjusted.

MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING.

In mounting, the rider, — presenting himself rather before the
horse's shoulder, with his left breast towards that shoulder,
and with his whip or switch in his left hand, — takes, with the
right hand, the snaffle reins in the centre j — introduces the little
finger of the left hand between them from before, the back of
that hand being towards the horse's head; — places the left
hand below the right on the neck of the horse, about twelve
inches from the saddle ; — draws with the right hand the reins
through the left, and shortens them, till the left has a light and
-equal feeling of both reins on the horse's mouth ; — throws, with

MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING. 127

the right hand, the reins to the off side ; — takes, with the same
hand, a lock of the mane, brings it through the left hand, and
turns it round the left thumb : — and closes the left hand firmly
on the mane and reins.

The right hand, after quitting the mane, lays hold of the left
stirrup, the fingers being behind, and the thumb in front of it ;
— the left foot is raised and put into the stirrup as far as the
ball of it, PI XXXV f 2 the right foot is then moved until the
rider's face is turned to the side of the horse, and looking across
the saddle ; while the right hand is placed on the cantle, the
left knee against the saddle on the surcingle, with the left heel
drawn back, to avoid touching the horse's side with the toe ; —
by a spring of the right foot from the instep, not by any pull
with the right hand, the rider raises himself in the stirrup, the
knees firm against the saddle, the heels together, but drawn
back a little, and the body erect, and partially supported by the
right handP XXXVI f 1 the right hand moves from the cantle to
the pommel, and supports the body ; — the right leg at the same
time passes clearly over the horse's quarters to the off side ; —
the right knee closes on the saddle ; the body comes gently into
it; — the left hand quits the mane, and the right the pommel.

The left, or bridle hand, with the wrist rounded outwards,
is placed opposite the centre of the body, and at three
inches' distance from it ; — the right hand is dropped by the side
of the thigh ; — the stirrup is taken instantly with the right foot,
without the help of hand or eye ; — the clothes are adjusted ; —
and the whip is exchanged from the left hand to the right,
being held with the lash upwards, but inclining a little towards
the left ear of the horse, and never leaving the right handy
except while mounting or dismounting, — (Plate XXX VI. f. 2.)

The horse is to be accustomed to stand till the rider request
him to move. The habit of unsteadiness is acquired from
grooms, who, on going out to water and exercise, throw them-
selves over a horse from some elevation, and give a kick to the
animal even before being fairly upon it. If a groom attend at

128

RIDING.

mounting, he ought not to be suffered to touch the reins, but
only that part of the bridle which comes down the cheek.

In dismounting, the whip is to be returned into the l»ft
hand ; — the right hand takes hold of the rein above the left ; —
the right foot quits the stirrup ; — the left hand slides forward
on the rein, to about twelve inches from the saddle, feeling
the horse's mouth very lightly ; — the right hand, dropping the
reins to the off side, takes a lock of the mane, brings it through
the left, and twists it round the left thumb ; — the fingers of the
left hand close on it ; — the right hand is placed on the pommel ;
the body being kept erect. The body is supported with the
right hand and left foot ; — the right leg is, without touching
the horse's hind-quarters or the saddle, brought gently to the
near side, with the heels close, care being take not to bend the
right knee, lest the spur should touch the horse ; — the right
hand passes at the same time to the cantle, to preserve the
balance, as in the act of mounting ; — the body is gently lowered
until the right toe touches the ground ; — resting on the right
foot, the left stirrup is quitted, and the left foot placed in line
with the horse's hoofs ; — the hands remaining as in the former
motion. Both hands then quit their holds of the mane and
cantle ; — and the right hand lays hold of the snaffle rein near
the ring of the bit.

In mounting without stirrups, — after taking up the reins,
instead of seizing the mane, the rider lays hold of the pommel
and cantle, and, by a spring of both legs from the insteps,
raises the body to the centre of the saddle. By a second spring
of both arms, the right leg is carried over the horse, and the
rider enters his proper seat by closing the knees on the saddle,
and sliding gently into it.

In dismounting without stirrups, on either side of the horse,
the rider throws the weight of the body on the hands placed on
the pommel, and, by a spring, raises the body out of the sr.;l;ll3
before the leg is brought over the horse.

THE SEAT. 129

THE SEAT.

The seat must be understood in an extended sense as the
disposition of the various parts of the body, in conformity with
the action of the horse ; and its effect is the rider's being firm
in the saddle, when he might be otherwise thrown forward over
the horse's head, or backward over his tail.

The fundamental seat is that intermediate one of which all
others are modifications, and in which the rider sits when the
horse is going straight forward, without any bend in his posi-
tion. In describing this, it is first necessary to consider the
rider's relation to the horse. — He must sit on that part of the
animal's body which, as he springs in his paces, is the centre ox
motion : from which, of course, any weight would be most
difficultly shaken. The place of this seat is that part of the
saddle into which the rider's body would naturally slide were he
to ride without stirrups. This seat is to be preserved only by
a proper balance of his body, and its adaptation to even the
most violent counteractions of the horse. Turf jockeys neces-
sarily sit further back, that they may employ the pulls.

It is necessary to consider the horseman in various parts, and
to explain their different functions : 1st, the lower part, as be-
ing here the principal one, namely, the thighs, with the legs as
dependent on them ; 2dly, the upper part, namely, the body,
with the arms dependent on it. The thighs, from the fork to
the knees, are commonly called the immovable parts, and upon
them the whole attitude depends. They must not wriggle or
roll, so as either to disturb the horse, or render the seat loose ;
but they may be relaxed when the horse hesitates to advance.
The legs occasionally strengthen the hold of the thighs by a grasp
with the calves ; and they likewise aid, support, and chastise the
horse. The body, from the fork upwards, must always be in a
situation to take the corresponding motion, and preserve the
balance. The^position of the arms is dependent on that of the
body, but they also exercise new functions. K

130 HIDING.

As a good seat is the basis of all excellence in riding, we shall
consider these parts in detail.

In relation to the thighs, the rider, sitting in the middle of
the saddle, must rest chiefly upon their division, vulgarly called
the fork, and very slightly upon the hips. The thighs, turned
inward, must rest flat upon the sides of the saddle, without
grasping ; for the rider's weight gives sufficient hold, and the
pressure of the thighs on the saddle would only lift him above
it. The knees must be stretched down and kept back, so as to
place the thighs several degrees short of a perpendicular; but
no gripe must be made with them, unless there be danger of
losing all other hold. If the thighs are upon their inner or flat
side in the saddle, both the legs and the feet will be turned as
they ought to be. Thus turned, they must be on a line parallel
to that of the rider's body, and hang near the horse's sides, but
must not touch ; yet they may give an additional hold to the
seat, when necessary, and the calves must act in support of the
aids of the hands. The heels are to be sunk, and the toes to
be raised, and as near the horse as the heels, which prevents the
heel touching the horse.

As to the body. — The head must be firm, yet free. The
shoulders thrown back, and kept square, so that no pull of
the bridle may bring them forward. The chest must be advanced,
and the small of the back bent a little forward.

The upper parts of the arms must hang perpendicularly from
the shoulders, the lower parts at right angles with the upper, so
as to form a horizontal line from the elbow to the little finger.
The elbows must be lightly closed to the hips, and, without
stiffness, kept steady, or they destroy the hand. The wrist must
be rounded a little outwards. The hands should be about three
inches from the body, and from the pommel of the saddle, and
from four to six inches apart ; the thumbs and knuckles point-
ing towards each other, and the finger nails towards the body.*

When the rider is in the proper position on horseback with-

* When in motion round the manege, or the circle, the inward hand, or
ttmt towards which we turn, is to be a little lower than the outward one.

THE BALANCE. 131

out stirrups, his nose, breast, knee, and instep are nearly in a
line ; and, with stirrups, his nose, breast, knee, and toe, are in
a line. — (PI XXX VI. The man and the horse throughout are to
be of a piece. When the horse is at liberty, or disunited, as
it is termed, the rider sits at his ease ; and, as he collects and
unites his horse, so he collects and unites himself. There must,
however, be no stiffness of manner, more than in sitting on
a chair; for it is ease and elegance which distinguish the
gentleman.

THE BALANCE.

The balance in riding preserves the body from that inclination
to one side or the other which even the ordinary paces of the
horse, in the trot or gallop, would otherwise occasion. It ac-
companies and corresponds with every motion of the animal,
without any employment of strength, and consequently, the
rider sits so firmly that nothing can move his seat. His skill
consists essentially in balancing himself on the horse in such a
manner as not to fetter the animal's movements. To illustrate
this, if the horse work straight and upright on his legs, the
body must be in the same upright direction : as the horse moves
into a trot, the body must be inclined a little more back ; in the
gallop, also in leaping, or in any violent movements, the body
must chiefly be kept back ; and, when the horse bends and
leans, as he does when on a circle, or trotting briskly round a
corner, the body must lean similarly, or the balance will be
lost. Throughout the whole, the figure must be pliant to every
action of the horse ; for the balance can be maintained only by
as many different positions as he is capable of working in.

To help his balance, the rider must never take the slightest
assistance from the reins. Whatever the position of the body,
the hand must be fixed, and the reins of such a length as to
feel and support the horse, but never to hold on. To acquire
the balance, the practice on circles, or the longe, is useful ;
working equally to both hands, and not using stirrups till the
pupil has acquired the balance without them. Experience

132 RIDING.

proves that the body, if in the manege seat and fundamental
position, almost involuntarily takes the corresponding motion,
whether the horse stumbles, rears, springs forward, or kicks.

THE REIN-HOLD.

There are various methods of holding the reins, according
to the style of riding, the design of the rider, and the propen-
sities of horses.

In holding the snaffle-reins separately, one rein passes into
each hand, between the third and fourth fingers, and out of it
over the fore-finger, where it is held down by the thumb. —
(PI XXXVII f. 1.) When afterwards further advanced, the
reins are held in the left hand, as at first taken up ; the left
rein passing under the little finger, and the right under the
third finger, both lying smooth through the hand, the super-
fluous rein hanging over the first joint of the fore-finger, and
the thumb being placed upon it.*— (Plate XXXVII. fig. 2.)

Riders should not throw their right shoulders back, as they
are apt to do, when they first take the reins in one hand. The
right arm should hang by the side, with the hand by the side of
the thigh ; or, if holding the whip, it may be kept a little lower
than the left, in order not to obstruct the operation of the
bridle.

We have already said, that we think it best to ride with the
snaffle alone, and use the curb only occasionally. In this case,
the curb reins may have a slide upon them, and may hang on
the pommel of the saddle, or the horse's neck. When the rider,
however, holds the curb as well as the snaffle, having both, as
is most usual, in the left hand, — while the curb reins are placed
as above described of the snaffle reins, the snaffle reins are placed
within them ; that is, the left snaffle rein enters under the
second, and the right under the first finger, and both pass up

* Sometimes, however, the right rein is made to enter the hand from above
over the fore-finger, and crosses the left rein in the palm, where the fingers
close upon them, a loop or bow being formed of the residue between the
hand and body, whence it hangs down.— (Plate XXXVII. fig. 3.)

THE REIN-HOLD. 133

through the hand, and out of it, over the fore-finger, precisely
as do the curb reins, except that they lie at first above, then
within, and lastly, under them.— (Plate XXXVII. fig. 4.)

Shifting the reins should be done expertly, without stopping
the horse, altering the pace, breaking the time, or looking to
the hands. When the snaffle reins are held in one hand, the
method of shifting from the left hand is as follows : — Turn the
thumbs towards each other ; carry the right hand over the left ;
in place of the little finger of the left hand, put the fore-finger
of the right hand downwards between the reins ; lay the reins
smoothly down through the right hand, and place the thumb
upon the left rein between the first and second joint of the
fore-finger.— (PI XXXVII. f. 5.) To shift them again into the
left hand, it is only necessary to carry the left hand over the
right ; to put the little finger of the left hand downwards be-
tween the right and left reins ; to place them smoothly upward
through the hand, and to let the ends hang over the fore-finger,
as at first.— (Plate XXXVII. fig. 6.)

When both curb and snaffle reins are held in the usual
method, we shift them into the right hand in a similar manner,
by turning the thumbs toward each other ; carrying the right
hand over the left ; putting the fore-finger of the right hand
into the place of the little finger of the left ; the second finger
of the right into the place of the third finger of the left ; and
the third finger of the right into the place of the second finger
of the left ; and laying the reins smoothly down through the
right hand.— (Pi XXXVII. f./.) When we shift the reins
again to the left hand, we put the fingers of the left hand into
the places we took them from, and turn the reins smoothly
upward through the hand, and over the fore-finger. — (Plate
XXX VII. fig' 8.)

Separating the reins is sometimes necessary. When a horse
refuses obedience to one hand, we use two. It is seldom, how-
ever, necessary to take more than one rein in the right hand;
and this is the right rein of the snaffle only. For this purpose,
the rider turns the back of his right hand upwards, puts the

134 RIDING.

first three fingers over the snaffle rein, receives it between his
little and third fingers, lets the superfluous end hang over the
fore-finger, with the thumb upwards, as he does the bridle hand.
(Plate XXXVII. fig. 9.)

Adjusting the reins is shortening or lengthening them, wholly
or partially, as occasion may require. To adjust the whole, we
take the superfluous reins that hang over the fore-finger of the
left hand into the right, so that with that hand we support the
horse, and feel every step he takes; and we then open the
fingers of the left hand so as to slip it up and down the reins
smoothly and freely, and thereby adjust them to our pleasure.

To shorten the curb rein, and lengthen the snaffle, we take in
the right hand the centre of the curb rein, that hangs over the
fore-finger, slip the whole of the reins too long, pass the left
hand down them, and feel with the fingers whether both the
curb reins are of equal length, before we grasp with the left
hand, or quit with the right. Similarly, we shorten the snaffle,
and lengthen the curb, by taking in the right hand the centre of
the snaffle that hangs over the fore-finger, and proceeding in the
same way.

When any single rein wants shortening, we apply the right
hand to that part which hangs over the fore-finger, and draw it
tighter. When the reins are separate, or occupy both hands,
and want adjusting, we bring the hands together to assist each
other; remembering that the inner hand, or that which supports
the attitude the horse works in, is not to depart from its situa-
tion, so as to occasion any disorder, but that the outer hand is
to be brought to the inner, for the purpose of adjusting them.

THE CORRESPONDENCE.

To have a correct notion of the manner in which the hand
operates on the horse's mouth, it must be understood that the
reins, being held as described, are collected to such definite
length, that bracing the muscles of the hand would rein the
horse back, and easing them permit him freely to advance ; the
haud, for preserving a medium effect on the mouth, being only

THE ACTION. 135

half shut, and the knuckles near the wrist nearly open. The
hand, then, being connected to the reins, the reins to the bit,
the bit operating in the curb on the bars, and in the snaffle on
the lips, the rider cannot move the hand, and scarcely even a
finger, without the horse's mouth being more or less affected,
This is called the CORRESPONDENCE.

If, moreover, the hand be held steady, as the horse advances
in the trot, the lingers will feel, by the contraction of the reins,
a slight tug, occasioned by the cadence of every step ; and this
tug, by means of the correspondence, is reciprocally felt in the
horse's mouth. This is called the APPUY

While this relation is preserved between the hand and mouth,
the horse is in perfect obedience to the rider, and the hand
directs him, in any position or action, with such ease, that the
horse seems to work 'by the will of the rider rather than by the
power of his hand. This is called the SUPPORT.

Now, the correspondence or effective communication between
the hand and mouth, — the appuy, or strength of the operation
in the mouth, — the support, or aid, the hand gives in the posi-
tion or action, — are always maintained in the manege and all
united paces. Without these, a horse is under no immediate
control, as in the extended gallop, or at full speed, where it may
require a hundred yards to pull before we can stop him.

THE ACTION.

The degree of correspondence, appuy, and support, depends,
in horses otherwise similar, on the relative situation of the hand.
The act of raising the rider's hand increases his power; and
this, raising the horse's head, diminishes his power. The de-
pressing of the rider's hand, on the contrary, diminishes his
power; and this, depressing the horse's head, increases his power.
On these depend the unitedness or disunitedness in the action of
the horse.

A writer on this subject (Beranger, we believe) gives the fol-
lowing useful illustration : — " If a garter were placed across the
pupil's forehead, and a person behind him held the two ends in

136 RIDING.

a horizontal direction, the pupil, if he stood quite upright, could
not pull at the person's hand, nor endure the person's hand to
pull at him, without falling or running backwards." This is the
situation of a horse when united.

Accordingly, when the pupil felt the hand severe, or expected
it to pull, he would guard against it by bending the body, pro-
jecting the head, and planting one foot behind. This is the
situation of a horse when disunited, or defending himself against
the heaviness of the hand. Hence the perpetual pull of a timid
rider, or a heavy insensible hand, cannot keep a horse united,
because the horse cannot then bear its severity. Thus heavy
hands make hard-mouthed horses ; and hence it is in this con-
dition that we generally find horses, for the best broke become
so, if ridden a few times by an ignorant horseman. In such
cases, the horse makes the rider support the weight both of his
head and neck, or goes on his shoulders, and is apt to stumble.

If, then, the appuy be heavy, from the head being carried too
low, and the horse not sufficiently united, the rider must raise
the hand, and let the fingers, by moving, rather invite than
compel the head, or more properly the neck, to rise, for the
object is to bring in the head by raising the neck, the legs at
the same time pressing the haunches under. By these means,
the horse will be united, and the appuy will be lightened. Should
the hand, however, be too confining to the horse when united,
he may become so balanced on his haunches that he can neither
disunite himself nor advance one step; and, should the rider
then press him without yielding or dropping the hand, he would
compel him to rear.

Such are the two extremes, where the horse is disunited, and
where he is too much united. The intermediate effect of the
hand and heel must be acquired by practice.

THE HAND.

To a masterly hand, firmness, gentleness, and lightness, are
very properly described as being essentially necessary.

Firmness of the hand does not, however, do more than cor-

THE HAND. 137

respond exactly with the feeling in the horse's mouth, unless
the horse attempts to get the ascendancy, to abandon that deli-
cate correspondence producing the appuy, and keeping him
under the strictest obedience, and to make a dull or insensible
pull on the hand. To frustrate these attempts, the hand is kept
firm, and the fingers braced; and, should the horse plant his
head low to endure this, the fingers are moved, the reins shaken,
&c., to raise the head and divert him from his purpose; or, if
this be unavailing, the hand is yielded that the reins may become
slack, and a snatch is given in an upward direction, which will
not only make him raise his head, but will deter him from putting
it down again.

Gentleness of the hand relaxes a little of its firmness, and
mitigates the feeling between the hand and the horse's mouth,
without passing, however, from one extreme to another. Light-
ness of the hand lessens still more the feeling between the rider's
hand and the horse's mouth, and consists in a slight alternate
feeling and easing of the bridle, regulated by the motion of the
horse; for, if the appuy were always in the same degree, it
would heat the mouth, dull the feeling, and render the horse's
bars callous. The rider must also distinguish whether the horse
wishes to disengage himself from restriction, or wants a mo-
mentary liberty to cough, to move if cramped, to dislodge a
fly, &c.

The curb, if used, requires always a light hand to manage it ;
and the horse should never be put to do any thing in a curb at
which he is not perfectly ready. The curb is adapted for acting
in a direct line only : the snaffle should be used in all other
cases. Still, as to all these qualities, the transitions must be
gradual. Were the rider, passing over that degree of restraint
which is derived from the easy or gentle hand, to go at once
from a firm to a slack one, he would deprive his horse of the
support he trusted to, and precipitate him on his shoulders. On
the contrary, were he to pass from the slack to the tight rein all
at once, he would give a violent shock to the horse's mouth.

All the operations of the hand, then, should be firm, gentle,

138

RIDINC.

and light ; and in these, the fingers and wrist alone must act.
Certain liberties called descents of the hand, are also taken with
well-bred horses. These are made three different ways : — by
advancing the arm a little, but not the shoulder, still keeping
the usual length of rein, or by dropping the knuckles directly
and at once upon the horse's neck ; — by taking the reins in
the right hand, about four fingers' breadth above the left, and
letting them slide through the left, dropping the right hand at
the same time upon the horse's neck ; — and by taking the end
of the reins in the right hand, quitting them entirely with the
left, and letting the end of them fall upon the horse's neck.
These graceful freedoms must never be used but with great
caution, when the horse is quite together, and in hand ; and
the rider, by throwing back his body, must counterbalance the
weight of the horse upon his haunches.

There are still minuter rules belonging to this head ; for in-
stance, both snaffle reins being in one hand, and that in the
first position, — if we open the first and second fingers, we
slacken the right rein ; — if we open the little finger, we slacken
the left rein ; — if we shut the hand entirely, and immediately
open it again, we lessen the tension of both reins. By these
methods, we may relieve and freshen the two bars in which the
feeling and appuy resides. So also in the second descent of the
hand. While the right hand holds the reins, we may slide the
left hand up and down these in that degree of appuy which belongs
to the easy and slack hand : during which the horse will endea-
vour to preserve that mutual sensation between the mouth and
the hand, which makes him submit with pleasure to constraint.
By this play of the rein and movement of the bit to avoid
pressure in one continued way, the horse's head is kept high,
and his neck and crest are raised.

THE GUIDANCE OR AIDS.

The modes of guiding the horse are called aids, because they
not only direct, but assist him to execute. They also check

THE GUIDANCE OR AIDS. 139

him in acting contrarily. These aids are certain positions of
the hand, body, legs, and sometimes of the switch or whip. The
hand is so far the principal of these, that the others are some-
times called accompaniments, as only giving power and efficacy
to the hand.

Aids of the Hand.

A horse can move four different ways — forward, to the right,
to the left, and backward ; but he cannot perform these motions
unless the hand of the rider makes four corresponding motions.
There are accordingly five different positions for the hand, in-
cluding the general one from which the other four proceed.

The five Positions when one Rein is held in each Hand.

In the first position, the reins pass up between the third and
fourth fingers of each hand, their ends are thrown over the
fore-fingers, the Rhumbs are closed on them, and the fingers are
shut : — the hands being held as already described in treating
of the seat. The second position consists of a slight relaxation
of the preceding, and permits the horse to advance. The third
position shortens the right rein rather upward, and turns the
horse to the right. The fourth position shortens the left rein
rather upward, and turns the horse to the left ; and the fifth
position shortens both reins, and stops or reins the horse
backwards.

The five Positions when the Reins are held in one Hand.

The aids of the hand, as forming these positions, when the
reins are held in one hand, may be very simply given by a
little extending, or bending the wrist, to make the horse advance,
or go backward, — and by slightly carrying the hand to the
right or to the left, and in both cases rather upward, to make
the horse turn in these directions.

The Twistings of the Bridle Hand.

Several modifications of the rules already given occur. We
do not, however, approve of these positions, as they, in a great

140 RIDING.

measure, reverse and destroy the natural aids of the hand, by
leaving the right rein slack in the turn to the right, and the
left rein slack in the turn to the left. Indeed, they could not
possibly be obeyed by the horse, were it not that, on this point,
he seeras to have more understanding than his rider, and draws
his conclusions as to the latter's intentions, not from the incon-
sistent action of his hand, but from the more natural accom-
panying aids of his body and legs. Fortunately, however, these
twistings of the bridle hand, though always taught, are, we
believe, rarely practised.

•We give these positions here, only in compliance with custom.

In the first position the under surface of the fore-arm and
hand forms a horizontal line from the elbow to the joint of the
little finger ; the elbow is lightly closed to the hips ; the wrist
is rounded ; the knuckles are kept directly above the neck of
the horse, the hand being at three inches from the body, and as
much from the pommel of the saddle; the nails are turned
towards the body, the little finger being nearer to it than the
others ; the reins, in entering the hand, are separated by the
little finger ; and the thumb is placed flat upon them as they
pass out over the fore-finger.

In the second position the hand is yielded to the horse by
turning the nails downward, so as to carry the thumb nearer
the body, and the little finger further from it, yet somewhat
obliquely, for the thumb passes nearly into the place where the
knuckles were in the first position, the nails being now directly
above the horse's neck. This permits the horse to advance.

In the third position the hand, leaving the first, is turned
upside down, so that the thumb is carried out to the left, and
the little finger brought into the right. This carries the opera-
tion of the reins nearly three inches more to the right, by which
the left reins press the neck, the right reins are slack, and the
horse is turned to the right.

In the fourth position the hand, leaving the first, the back is
turned upward, so that the little finger is carried out to the left,
and the thumb brought in to the right. This carries the opera-

THE GUIDANCE OR AIDS. 141

tion of the reins to the left, by which the right reins press the
neck, the left reins are slack, and the horse is turned to the left.

In the fifth position, quitting the first, the wrist is rounded,
the nails turned upwards, and the knuckles towards the horse's
neck. This stops him, or compels him to go backward.

These aids, however, when the reins are held in one hand,
are not so effective as those where the reins are separate.

Aids of the Body.

To aid the second position of the hand, and cause the horse
to advance, the body may be thrown a little forward, but not
so as to press heavily on his fore-parts. To aid the third and
fourth positions of the hand, a mere turn of the body is suffi-
cient.— Thus, in entering an angle, it is only necessary to turn the
body imperceptibly toward the corner, just as if the rider intended
to go into it himself; his body then turning to the right or
left, his hand must necessarily turn likewise, and the leg of the
side on which he turns will infallibly press against the horse,
and aid him. In coming out of a corner, it is only necessary to
turn the body again, the hand will follow it, and the other leg,
approaching the horse, will put his croupe into the corner, in
such a manner that it will follow the shoulders, and be upon the
same line. — The same motion of the body is likewise necessary
to turn entirely to the right or left. To aid the fifth position
of the hand, and make the horse go backward, the body must
be thrown gently back, and the hand will go with it.

Aids of the Legs.

To aid the second position of the hand, and make the horse
advance, the legs must be closed. Even when a horse stands
still, the legs held near him will keep him on the watch, and
with the slightest upward motion of the bridle, he will raise his
head and show his forehead to advantage. To aid the third
position of the hand, and turn to the right, the right leg must
determine the croupe to the left, and facilitate the action of the
shoulder, which the hand had turned to the right. To aid the

142 RIDING.

fourth position of the hand, and turn to the left, the left leg
must determine the croupe to the right. In making a change
to the right, the left leg confines the croupe, so that it must
follow the shoulders. In changing again to the left, the right
leg acts similarly. To aid the fifth position of the hand, and
stop the horse, while he is held in, the legs must be gently
brought to the sides.

The aids of the legs have their degrees progressively increas-
ing, thus: — the leg being brought nearer the side is the
lightest ; placing the leg further back, with the toe turned out,
is the next ; a touch with the calf of the leg, is the third ; a
stroke with it, having the toe kept up firmly, that the muscles
of the leg may be hard, is the fourth ; and the strongest is the
scratch, which, when the legs are laid on hard without effect, is
given by dropping the toe, when, if the spur be properly placed,
the rowel will scratch the horse's side, and this is succeeded by
giving the spur sharply. Aids with the whip are also used to
give greater effect to the heel. These are gentle taps on the
hind quarters, and sometimes on the shoulders. When given
on the near side, the hand is either applied behind the back,
with the whip held by the fingers like a pen, the lash being
downwards, or across the bridle-hand before, the whip being
held with the lash upwards.

ANIMATIONS, SOOTHINGS, AND CORRECTIONS.

Animations proceed from the hand, the leg, the whip, or the
tongue ; those of the hand and of the legs have been described
among the aids. Animations of the whip are mild taps to
quicken the horse, or, if the lash is upwards, switching it in the
air. Those of the leg and whip threaten punishment ; and
accordingly, with sluggish horses, both may be necessary. The
animation of the tongue is produced by placing the tongue flat
against the roof of the mouth, and suddenly displacing the
posterior part of it by drawing the air laterally between
it and the palate. This noise is animating to the horse ;

ANIMATIONS, SOOTHINGS, AND CORRECTIONS. 143

but, if too much continued, or too frequent, its effect is
destroyed.

Sooth ings are the reverse of animations, and are used to
dispel the fears of horses, and to give them confidence. The
voice soothes hy soft and mild tones; the hand, by gentle
patting, or stroking : the body and legs, by relinquishing all
unnecessary firmness, and sitting easy. A horseman should
have perfect command of his temper, as well as invincible
patience and perseverance, to make the horse comprehend and
perform. He must demand but little the first time ; he will
be more readily obeyed the next; and he may increase his
demands as the horse improves in habit and temper.

Corrections are given either with the spurs or switch, or by
keeping the horse in a greater degree of subjection. In these
a good horseman endeavours rather to work upon the mind
than the body of the horse. The corrections which render a
horse most obedient, and yet dishearten him least, are not
severe, but rather oppose him by restraint, and make him do
directly the contrary. If, for example, he do not go off readily,
or if he be sluggish, make him go sidewise, sometimes to one
hand, sometimes the other, then drive him forward. — If he go
forward too fast, moderate the aids, and make him go back-
ward more or less according to his conduct. — If he be disorderly
and turbulent, walk him straight forward, with head in and
croupe out.

When correction is given with the wrhip, it should be with
strength ; the lash being upwards, the arm lifted high, and the
whip applied behind the girths round the belly : or it may be
given forward, over the shoulders, between the fore-legs.
Should the horse kick at the application of the whip to his
flank or quarter, the rider must instantly apply it smartly, and
must repeat it more sharply, should he kick at that. By this,
he may be made sensible of his fault.

To give a horse both spurs properly, the rider must change
the posture of his legs, and, bending his knee, strike him with
them at once, quickly and firmly. Some horses disregard the

144 RIDING.

/hip, but fly at the spurs ; others disregard the spurs, and are
rrified at the whip; the rider consequently will apply that
which is most likely to produce the desired effect. When,
however, the whip or spurs are applied two or three times
sharply to restive horses without effect, the rider must desist,
and try other methods.

THE WALK.

The rider should not suffer his horse to move till his clothes
are adjusted, and whip shifted, when, collecting his reins, and
taking one in his right hand, he must close his legs, to induce
the horse to move slowly forward in the walk. If he wish to
increase the pace, the pressure of the knees must be increased.
When the horse moves, the legs must resume their former posi-
tion,— the hands remain perfectly steady, — and the body yield
to the movement.

As to character, the walk is the pace performed with the least
exertion; only one leg at a time being off the ground, and
three on. In this pace, accordingly, four distinct beats are
marked, as each foot comes to the ground in the following
order : — first the off fore foot, next the near hind foot, then
the near fore foot, and lastly, the off hind foot.*

The perfection of the walk consists in its being an animated
quick step, measuring exact distances, and marking a regular
time, by putting the feet flat to the ground. Its excellence
depends on that uniting of the horse which supports his head
and raises his feet, without shortening or retarding the step ;
and that animation which quickens the step and sharpens the
beats without altering the tiirie or the action.

In performance, if the rider do not support the horse suffi-
ciently, his head will be low, and his walk slovenly : if he
support him too much, he will shorten his step so that he cannot

* The amble may perhaps be considered as a natural pace, as most foals,
following their dams, amble more or less to keep up with them. The difler-
«nce between the walk and the amble is, that two legs of a side are raised in
the latter at the same instant.

•

THE WALK. 145

walk freely. If the rider do not animate him, he will not exert
.f: if he animate him too much, he will trot. If the
horse trot when the rider designs him to walk, he will find
either his hand or the degree of animation communicated by
the whip, tongue, legs, or bracing of the body, too high, and
this he must instantly modify, as well as check the horse.
(Plate XXXVIII. fig 1.)

Turns in the Walk,

Turns in general should be made slowly ; and all the aids
should combine in producing them.

In performance, the hand to which we turn, or inner hand, is
to be a little below the outer one, and the inner rein held with
double the force of the outer one, which is to be exerted by the
little finger pulling gently upwards and towards the body,
while the outer hand retains a steady hold of the outer rein.
At the same time, the legs, by a slight pressure with the calves,
imi!<t support the horse, keep him up to the bridle, make him
bring his haunches under him, and obey the leading rein. The
pressure of the inward leg alone would make him throw his
haunches too much outwards. All this is to be done in pro-
portion to the effect meant to be produced ; and great precision
and delicacy are required in the execution.

"Wheels may also be briefly noticed here. A horse may wheel
or turn on his own ground, on three pivots, — on his centre, on
his fore feet, and on his hind feet. In all these, the hand
directs all before the horseman, and the heel all behind him. la
wheeling on centres, the hand and heel operate together — the
hand leading the shoulder round — the leg directing the croupe,
by which means, in going about, the fore feet describe one half-
circle, and the hind feet another. Here the aids of the hand,
body, and legs, must exactly* correspond ; and the degree of
appuy must be merely such as will carry its aid into effect ; for,
if the appuy is too weak, the horse will advance over his ground,
and if too strong, he will retire from it.

On terminating the wheel or quarter circle, the about cr

146 RIDING.

half-circle, or tlie about and about, or whole circle, the hand,
the body, and leg-, must instantly resume their proper position.
The wheel on the fore, and that on the hind feet, are still more
rarely of use in common, practice.

Stops in the Walk.

Horses and horsemen generally stop by a gradual cessation of
action, in a time and distance which depend on circumstances.
As to character, however, the stop, when properly performed,
is an instant cessation of advance, without any previous indi-
cation.

When the stop is properly performed, it shows the great
superiority of the rider's hand over the horse. It confirms him
in obedience, unites him, supples the haunches, and bends the
houghs. Much mischief, however, may occur from a too fre-
quent or injudicious practice of it. The perfection-of the stop
consists in the action ceasing at the finish of a cadence, without
breaking the previous time ; and in the horse being so balanced
on his haunches, and so animated, that, with liberty given, he
can advance with the same rapidity as before.

In performance, the time to be seized is when the first part of
the cadence is coming to the ground; so that its finish com-
pletes the stop. If this is not done, the cadence will be broken,
and the stop rendered irregular. At such a moment, the stop
is performed by the rider bracing his arms to his body, holding
both reins equally and firmly, drawing the fingers towards the
body, closing for an instant both legs, to press the horse up to
the bridle, and throwing the body back, with precisely such
strength of all the muscles as is proportioned to the effect ; all
this being done at the same instant, and making but one motion.
If the rider do not close his legs, the horse may not bring his
haunches under, the stop will be tm the shoulders, and its effect
will be destroyed.

If, in stopping, a horse toss up his nose, or force the hand, the
bridle hand must be kept low and firm, no liberty must be
given, his neck must be pressed with the right hand till he has

THE TROT. 147

brought down his nose, and immediately all his bridle may be
given him. (Plate XXXVIII. n fig. '2.) If the horse has
not readily obeyed, he should be made to go backwards, as a
proper punishment for the fault.

Going Backward in the Walk.

The action of the horse when he goes backward is to bend
his haunches, to have always one of his hinder legs under his
belly, on which to rest and balance himself, and to push his
croupe backward. In performance, the horse's head must be
steady and right, his body gathered up under him, he must be
upon his haunches, and his feet be even. To aid him in this,
there should be an equal and steady feeling of both reins ; the
hand must be held centrically, and kept from rising, with the
knuckles a little down, inviting the horse to back ; the body
bent a little forward, with the belly drawn in; and the legs
gently pressing the sides of the horse, in order to keep him up
to the bridle, and to prevent him from swerving.

The instant he yields to the hand, the body and hand yield to
the horse, that he may recover his balance ; and he may then
be pressed to back again. If either the deviation of the hand
from its centrical situation, or any other cause, make the croupe
go off the line in an opposite direction, the heel must support
and direct him. Thus, should the croupe traverse to the right,
the right leg must direct ; and, to assist, the hand must be
carried a little to the right ; but this must be done with delicacy,
lest the croupe be thrown too much to the left. Here the hand
and the heel change their functions; the hand compels the
action, and the heel directs it.

THE TROT.

As to the character of the trot, when we urge the horse to
proceed faster than he can by moving one leg after the other
in the walk, we oblige him to take up two at a time in the trot.
Here the off fore-foot and the near hind-foot give one beat;
and the near fore-foot and the off hind-foot give another ; so

148 RIDING.

that there are two legs crosswise off the ground, and two lega
on ; the beats being sharp and quick, in proportion to the degree
of animation and extension.

The perfection of the trot consists in its suppleness, giving
the horse a free use of his limbs ; in its union, distributing his
labour more equally, his fore legs having more to sustain than
the hind, especially when he is disunited, or on the shoulders ;
and in its action, which should be true and equal, the liberty
of the fore-quarters not exceeding the hind, nor the hind the
fore — the knee being up, the haunches bent, springy, and pliant,
the step measuring exact distances, and marking a regular time.
In the trot, there is a leading foot, either right or left, by which
the corresponding side is a little more advanced than the other.
This leading with either foot is valuable, as, in horses that have
not been thus suppled, if chance or fatigue makes them change
their leg for that which they are not accustomed to, the action
is stiff, confined, and irregular.

Kinds of Trot.

There are three kinds of trot — the extended, the supple, and
the even.

In the extended trot, the horse steps out without retaining
himself, being quite straight, and going directly forwards.

In the supple trot, at eveiy motion he bends and plays the
joints of his shoulders, knees, and feet.

In the even trot, he makes all his limbs and joints move so
equally and exactly, that his limbs never cover more ground one
than the other, nor at one time more than at another.

These three kinds of trot depend apon each other. "We can-
not pass a horse to the supple trot without having first worked
him to the extended trot ; and we can never arrive at the even
and equal trot without having practised the supple. To pass
from the extended to the supple trot, the horse must be gently
and by degrees held in. When, by exercise, he has attained
sufficient suppleness to manage his limbs readily, he must
insensibly be held in more and more, till he is led to the equal
trot.

THE TROT. 149

The Trot in particular.

In performance the rider must apply, for an instant,
both legs to his horse's sides ; and at the same time raise the
fore hand by drawing the lower finger on each side rather
upwards and towards the body, avoiding all jerks or sudden
motions.

During the trot he must sit close to the saddle, preserving
his seat by the balance of his body, and not by the pressure of
the knees ; he must neither rise nor stand in the stirrups ; his
body must incline a little backwards ; the whole figure must
partake of and accompany the movements of the horse ; and
he must keep the hands up in their proper situation, steady and
pliant, preserving a due correspondence, and just appuy. If
the action be too rapid, it must be checked by strengthening
the hand. If the action be too slow, it may be quickened by
easing the fingers, and giving more animation.

To give more animation, and encourage the horse to put his
foot out freely, the rider must support his fore hand up, and
his haunches under, by a touch of the fingers, the excitement
of the tongue, the switch of the whip, or the application of the
legs, varied so as not to lose their effect. If the action be not
sufficiently united, that also must be corrected.

To unite the horse, the reins must be collected, and the
head raised. By bringing his haunches under him, he may
be pressed up to the bridle by the aid of the legs; care being
taken that this is not done hastily or violently. He must
not, however, be confined in the hand, in expectation of
raising him, and fixing his head in a proper place, as by this
means his bars and mouth would soon grow callous.

The most certain sign of a horse's trotting well is, that
v.lu-n, in his trot, the rider presses him a little, he offers to
gallop. If the horse gallop when he ought not, the waist
should be pushed forwards toward the pommel of the saddle,
and a bend or hollow at the same time be made in the loins.

150 RIDING.

Turns, Stops, fyc. in the Trot.

As to turns, seeing that the operations directed to be per-
formed at the walk are to be practised in the trot, nothing
further need be said of them. As stops are required to coin-
cide with cadences, it must be observed, that the first part of the
cadence in the trot is performed by the two feet that lead ; and
that the conclusion of the cadence is performed by the two feet
that follow, and this should complete the stop. The rider should
occasionally alter the measure of the action, by strengthening
the hand, and at the same time keeping up a sufficient degree
of animation to prevent the horse from stopping. He may then
give him liberty, and proceed with the same spirit as before.
He may make a stop ; and may even rein him back two or
three steps ; in both cases keeping him so united and animated
that the instant the hand gives him liberty he advances as
rapidly as before. (Plate XXXIX. fig 1.)

ROAD RIDING.

Road riding is here introduced, because the trot is its most
appropriate pace.

The difference between manege and road riding, consists
chiefly in a shorter seat and a shorter stirrup being used in the
latter. A certain freedom and ease are also admissible. These,
however, must not exceed propriety, lead to neglect of the
horse, or risk security. The hand should keep its situation and
property, though the body be turned to any extreme for the
purpose of viewing or conversing ; and the body must not, by
any freedom it takes, throw itself out of balance, or take
liberties when it cannot be done with safety.

When the trot is extended to an unpleasant roughness, the
jolting may be eased by rising upward and slightly forward in
the stirrups. The faster the horse trots, the easier it is to rise ;
for it is the action of the horse, and not any effort of the rider,
that must raise him. The foot he leads with determines that
which the rider must rise to ; and, if the horse change his foot,

/)

ROAD RIDING. 151

he must change with him. lie must accordingly rise and fall
with the leading foot, rising when the leading foot is in the air,
and falling when it conies to the ground. The rise and fall of
the body are to be smooth, and as regular as the beats of the
feet.

Though this is called rising in the stirrups, no great stress or
dependence is to be put on them. Such improper use of the
stirrups causes many persons to be thrown, by the horse shying
or suddenly turning round. The rising of the body must not
be accompanied by any motion of the arms, or lifting of the
shoulders. The hand is to be held steady as well as low, to
prevent galloping (which the forwardness of the haunches
would render inevitable if the hand were either eased or lifted),
and the reins should be of that precise length which preserves
as much correspondence as possible between the hand and
inouth. The steadiness of the hand is also necessary for the
support of the horse.

The slight inclination of the body permitted in road riding
must not occasion any roundness in the back, which is invariably
to be hollow, not only for appearance sake but for safety. The
action of the body likewise must not cause the legs to move or
press the horse, which might cause him to gallop. In trotting,
the rider must pay the greatest attention to correct every pro-
pensity to lift, hitch, overrate, or gallop; and, whenever he
feels these propensities, he must check them with the greatest
nicety, in order not to retard the horse's speed.P XXXIX. f.2.
illustrates the Seat, &c., in Road Riding.*)

* In road riding, the rule of taking the right hand of all you pass is well
known ; but there are some exceptions, which are thus noticed by Mr.
Bunbury, in his ironical style : —

" In riding the road, should a man on horseback be in your way leading
another horse, always dash by the led one ; you might otherwise set the man's
horse capering, and perhaps throw him off; and you can get but a kick or
two by observing my instructions.— In passing a waggon, or any tremendous
equipage, should it run pretty near a bank, and there be but a ditch, and an
open country on the other side, if you are on business, and in a hurry, dash
up the bank without hesitation ; for, should you take the other side, and the

152 RIDING.

THE GALLOP.

As to the character of the gallop, when we press a horse in
the trot beyond his capacity^ or animate him with the legs while
we raise or retain him with the hand, we compel him to lift his
two fore-feet after each other, which commences the gallop.
The near fore-foot is first raised from the ground ; then the off
fore-foot, which, however, passes the other, and they come to
the ground in the same order, the near fore-foot making one
beat, and the off fore-foot another, that being the most advanced
or leading foot. The hind feet follow in the same manner ; the
near hind-foot marking a third beat, and the off hind-foot
passing forward, and marking a fourth beat. Thus, when this
pace is united and true, the feet mark a regular, sharp, and
quick time of one, two, three, four. The perfection of the gal-
lop consists in the suppleness of the limbs, the union of the
horse, the justness of the action, and the regularity of the
time.

The gallon is of three kinds — that of the racer, that of the
hunter, and**that of the pleasure horse, commonly called the
canter. The last of these is by far the most difficult, as it re-
quires skill to fore-shorten and throw the horse on his haunches.
In the gallop, as in the trot, there is a leading foot. On a
straight line, it is immaterial with which fore-leg the horse
leads, provided the hind-leg of the same side follows it. But to
lead always with the same leg is injurious. In galloping to the
right, the horse must lead with the inward or off fore-leg, fol-
lowed by the off hind- leg. This action is termed true or united.
— (Plate XL. * shows this in the canter.) In galloping to

horse shy at the carriage, you may be carried many hundred yards out of your
road ; whereas, by a little effort of courag-e, you need only graze the wheel,
fly up the bank, and by slipping or tumbling down into the road again, go
little or nothing out of your way."

* In galloping to the right, if the horse lead with the off fore-leg and near
hind-leg, or if he lead with the near fore-leg and off hind-leg, he is said to be
disunited. If, in galloping to the right, he lead with both near legs, he is
said to be false.

THE GALLOP. 153

the left, he must lead with the inward or near fore-leg, followed
by the near hind-leg. This also is termed true or united.*

The Canter in particular.

To put the horse to the canter from rest at any spot, or from
any pace, he must be pressed with the legs, or animated with
the tongue, and at the same time, by a motion of the fingers, and
a little raising of the hand, be invited to raise the fore-legs. If
he do not obey this, the animation must be increased, and the
hand kept more firm, to prevent his trotting : and this will con-
strain him to raise his fore-legs together. It is also necessary
to direct the foot he is to lead with. That of course is the inner,
which he will readily take by putting the croupe in, by means
of the opposite thigh, thereby enabling him to advance the
inner side.

As the position of the horse renders necessary a correspond-
ing position of the horseman, it will readily be seen that which-
ever side the horse leads with, the rider's thigh on that side
must be rather more turned in towards the saddle, and the hip
on that side brought more forward, and consequently that the
other thigh must be a little turned outward, and the hip brought
backward ; and all this more or less in proportion to the position
of the horse. This turn of the hip effects a turn of the body.
The hands are carried with it, and at the same time kept up, rather
above than below the elbow, and quite steady, that the cadence
of every step, and the support given by the hand, may be
felt. The rider's head is of course to be directed to the horse's
nose, his eye glancing on the ground the horse's fore-feet go over.

If the horse strike off with the wrong leg, false or disunited,
the rider, at the first corner, must endeavour, by an additional
feeling of the inward rein, and application of the outward leg,
to make him change, and lead with the proper one. When he

* In galloping to the left, if the horse lead with the near fore-leg and off
hind-leg, or if he lead with the off fore-leg and near hind-leg, he is said to be
disunited. If, m galloping to the left, he lead with both off legs, he is said
to be false

154 RIDING.

leads with the proper leg, the hand must resume its usual posi-
tion, the rider bending him a little inwards by shortening the
inward rein; the fingers slackened, if necessary, to let him
advance ; but the hand kept up, and every cadence felt of the
fore-feet coming to the ground.

There is far more skill displayed in keeping up an animated
action in the canter, at the rate of three miles an hour, than in
the gallop, at that of twelve or fifteen. If the animation fail,
or the action be not supported by the hand, the horse will
break into a trot, particularly as the gallop is shortened or
united. If the action is felt to be declining, it must be cor-
rected instantly, by an animating touch of the fingers, the leg,
or the tongue. The hand first discovers this declension, and is
the first to correct it.

When the rider can put his horse off to either hand with the
proper leg, and support the action, he must particularly attend
to its truth and union, and try to raise it to the highest anima-
tion, riding sometimes rapidly, sometimes slowly, yet always
united.

When the gallop is disunited and extended to speed, even
though the horse is supple and just on his legs, it loses its har-
mony and regularity of time. The fore-legs then measure less
space from each other, and so do the hind-legs, which makes
the beats quicker in each, and leaves a space between the beats
of the fore-legs and the beats of the hind. In these gallops, it
would be highly imprudent to circle or turn, but on a very large
scale.

Turns, Changes, Stops, #e. in the Gallop.

In turning the horse to the right and left, at a canter, his
fore-hand must be raised with the leading rein, and the haunches
pressed forward and under him : at the same time, the outward
rein must assist to steady him, and a pressure of the calf of
the outward leg keep the haunches from falling too much out.
If he is turned suddenly with the inward rein only, without
lifting the fore-hand, or applying the outward leg, he must turn

THE GALLOP. 155

on his shoulders, lose power to halt on his haunches, and being
twisted round unprepared, will change to the outer leg.

In changing, the operation must be performed smoothly and
evenly at the same instant ; so that, at the finish of the cadence,
the body, hands, thighs, and legs of the rider are reversed, for
the horse to commence his next cadence with the contrary
leg.

In stopping in the gallop, the rider must seize the time when
the horse's fore-feet are coming to the ground, which is the
beginning of the cadence : and he must take care that the hind
feet, coming up to their exact distance, and finishing the cadence,
complete the stop : leaving the horse so balanced that he can
readily set off again with the same rapidity as before. Besides
seizing the exact time, a due degree of power must thus be
exerted, conformably to the readiness, obedience, union, or
rapidity of the action ; for, should the power be deficient, the
stop would not be properly effected ; and if it be excessive, the
horse will be overbalanced on his haunches, and compelled con-
sequently to move his feet after the cadence is finished. Till
horses are ready and obedient to the stop, it should not be
attempted in violent and rapid gallops ; nor even then if they
are weak, or the rider heavy. — In these cases, the double arret
is used.

The double arret is the stop completed in two cadences of the
gallop, which is far less distressing both to man and horse.
The body being gently thrown back, will not make the action
instantaneously cease ; but the obedience of the horse makes
the effort which checks half his career in the first cadence ; and,
the body still being kept back, he completes it in the second.
However, till practised and made obedient to the stop, he will
not easily perform the double arret ; for, in the first instance,
he must be taught to stop by compulsion ; and it is only when
practice has brought him to obedience, that he readily stops at
the easy throwing back of the body.

The half stop is a pause in the gallop, or the action suspended
for half a second, and then resumed again. Here the body is

156 RIDING.

thrown baclc less deter minately, lest we should so overbalance
the horse that he cannot readily set off again after the finish of
the cadence, which no sooner occurs than the body is brought
forward, to permit the action to go on. Thus the half stop is
only a pause in the gallop, and it is mostly used to effect a
change from the right leg to the left, or the opposite. The
cadence of the stop should be no shorter than the readiness and
obedience of the horse will admit ; the half stop not quite so
short ; and the two arrets still more moderate.

LEAPING.

The moveable bar for leaping should be ten feet in length,
•which will admit of two horses leaping abreast ; at first from
one to two feet high ; and never very high.

As to the seat, it should be again observed that stirrups are
no security in any situation on horseback ; and those who can-
not forbear pressing a weight on them, had better have none
•when learning to leap. An accurate balance must prevent all dis-
turbance of the seat ; for the slightest, whether the rider is thrown
up from the saddle, or his body falls forward, or he gets out
of balance, is as disgraceful as falling to the ground. He should
sit so close as to carry a shilling under each thigh just above
the knee, one in each stirrup under the toe, and one under his
breech.

When any action of the horse tends to lift the rider from the
saddle, stirrups cannot keep him down. Bearing on the stirrup,
indeed, must lift the rider from the saddle, and would even
loosen any hold he might take with the thighs or legs. Nothing
but the weight of the body can press to the saddle. When the
action is violent, however, the pressure of the thighs may be
employed to hold it down ; and, when the hold of the thighs is
not sufficient, the legs may take a deeper, and stronger hold.
Leaps are taken standing or flying ; the first being most difficult
to sit, though always practised first, because the slow and steady
leaping of a properly managed horse gives the rider time aud

LEAPING. 157

recollection, and the riding-master an opportunity to direct, and
to prevent accidents.

Standing Leap.

In the standing leap, the horse first shortens, and then ex-
tends himsdf. Readiness in the hand of the rider is therefore
requisite to give the appropriate aids. These, if well timed,
: if otherwise, they check or embarrass him, and
endanger both the animal and his rider. (Plates XLI. XLII.
illustrate the Leap.)

The rider must therefore, by a ready and fearless yielding of
the bridle, leave the horse at liberty to extend himself, preserving
\ n equilibrium only by leaning forward, as the horse rises,
and backward as he alights. When he is brought to the bar,
the body is to be upright. The legs are to be applied to his
sides with such firmness as to keep the rider down to the saddle,
and in such a manner — viz., perpendicularly from the knee —
that the action of the body shall not loosen or disturb them.
The toes must be pulled up, to make the muscles firm, and to
prevent the spur from approaching too near the horse ; and, if
necessary, they may be turned out a little to strengthen the
hold. The hand must be kept in the centre, and quite low ;
and the reins not too short, but just by the pressure of the
fingers to feel the horse's mouth. When at the bar, the pres-
sure of the legs and fingers will invite the horse to rise ; and, as
he rises, the body comes forward and preserves its perpendicular.
The back must then be kept in, and the head firm.

As the horse springs from his hind legs, and proceeds in the
leap, the rider must slip his buttock under him, and let his body
go freely back, keeping his hands down, legs close, and body
back, till the horse's hind legs have come to the ground. The
propriety of applying the legs to hold firm in the saddle is obvi-
ous. The hand being kept low is essential ; and the bad con-
gees of raising it are numerous, as confining the horse,
ling the body going back, throwing the rider forward, &c.
The body coming forward to preserve its perpendicular as the

158 RIDING.

horse rises before, prevents the weight of the rider from hang-
ing on his mouth, and checking his leap, if not pulling him over
backwards. The back being hollow when the spring forward is
made, the body will of itself fall backward, if the hand be not
raised to prevent it ; and the head being firm may prevent a
wrench of the neck, or a bite of the tongue. Slipping the breech
under gives the body more liberty to lean back, and prevents
the shock of the horse's feet meeting the ground, from throwing
it forward.

While the seat is thus maintained, the hand must not be neg-
lected. In riding up to a leap, the rider should yield the bridle
to the horse, guiding him straight to the bar at an animated pace;
halt him with a light hand, and upon his haunches ; when he
rises, only feel the reins to prevent their becoming slack ; when
he springs forward, yield the hand without reserve ; and, when
his hind feet come to the ground, again firmly collect him, re-
sume his usual position, and move on at the former pace. If the
horse be too much collected previous to his leap, he will bound,
or buck over, as it is called. If not sufficiently collected or ani-
mated, he will probably not clear the leap. The degree in which
a horse should be collected and animated depends on the tem-
perament of the animal, and must be left to the judgment of
the rider.

Flying Leap.

The flying leap is distinguished from the standing leap by its
being made from any pace without a previous halt; and although
the action is quicker, it is much easier. The pace, however, at
which the rider goes at a flying leap, should always be moderate,
in order that the horse may not rise too soon or too late.

A horse who rises too far from the bar seldom clears his leap,
and risks straining by the effort to cover it ; one who rises too
near is likely to strike his knees against it, and throw his rider,
or hurt himself. If a horse be indolent, and require animation,
it is better to rouse his apathy by the spur just before his head
is turned towards the leap, than while he is running at it. If he
leap willingly, let him take his own pace to it, and he will spring

CRITICAL SITUATIONS. 159

from his proper distance, and give himself due velocity. Twelve
yards from the leap, the rider may turn his horse to it in a trot;
he will strike into a gallop ; and, by a stroke or two before he
springs, increase his velocity, if he perceive that the height he
has to cover requires that exertion.

The seat in the flying leap is exactly the same as in the stand-
ing one ; but, as the horse keeps a more horizontal position, it
is easier. The rider, however, must not bring his body forward
at the raising of the fore legs, because the spring from the hind
legs immediately follows, and the body not only might not get
back in time, but, if the horse did not come fair, or refused to
take his leap, and checked himself, the body, if forward, might
cause the rider to tumble over his head. He should therefore
keep his body upright ; take hold with his legs ; keep his hand
down ; and, as the horse springs forward, his body is sure to
take the corresponding action of leaning back, particularly if he,
at the instant, slip his breech under him, and bring his waist
forward with an exertion proportioned to the spring the horse
makes. He must also take care not to bring his body upright,
nor slacken the hold with his legs, till after the hind feet have
come to the ground.

In this leap, the horse requires but little support or assistance
from the hand till he is coming to the ground, when the hand
aids in bringing the body upright, and in supporting the horse.
The assisting and lifting a horse over leaps may be done only
by experienced riders, and even by them only when he leaps
freely and determinedly. "Whips should not be used when the
rider first practises leaping.

CRITICAL SITUATIONS.

When a horse is addicted to stumbling, rearing, kicking and
bolting, plunging, shying and restiveuess, the seat is maintained
! the arms are held firm to the body, the hands
kept up, and the reins separate, rather short than otherwise.
Bv these means, the horse's head being raised, he can with less
ease either rear or kick, because, for such purposes, he must

160 RIDING.

have his head at liberty. It is fortunate that horses which rear
high seldom kick, and vice versa.

On these occasions, the first operation of the rider is to sepa-
rate the reins, &c. The body must be kept upright, but flexible,
to repel every effort the horse may make ; the balance must be
preserved by the muscles of the thighs ; the legs are to be kept
near the horse, but not to grasp till absolutely necessary. When
he lifts his fore legs, the breech must be thrust out behind, by
which the rider is prepared if he rears. As the fore feet come
to the ground, the breech must be slipped under, which prepares
for his kicking or springing forward ; the legs being then in a
situation to grasp, and the hands to keep a firm hold. In all
displays of vice, the rider should first see that the saddle or
girths do not pinch the horse, that the bit does not hurt his lips
by being too high in his mouth, &c.

Stumbling.

By the rider pressing his legs to the horse's flanks, and keep-
ing up his head, he may be made to go light on his fore legs ;
and the same should be done if he actually stumble, so as to
afford him instant assistance. Hence it is evident that the bridle
should be of such length in the hand, that, in case of stumbling,
the rider mav be thus able to raise the horse's head by the
strength of his arms and the weight of his body thrown back-
ward. If the rein be too long, it is evident that, in effecting
this manoeuvre, the rider is in danger of falling backward as the
horse rises. By thus pressing the legs to the horse's sides, he
may be made to keep his haunches under him in going dc'vn
hill, or may be helped on the side of a bank.

Rearing.

The principal danger in rearing is the hazard of the horse's
falling backwards. When, therefore, he rises straight up, the
rider must throw his body forward, giving him all the bridle.
The weight of the body will oblige him to come down ; and the
moment that his fore feet are near the ground, and before he

CRITICAL SITUATIONS. 161

touches it, both the spurs must be given him as firmly and as
qtncK.lv as possible.

Another mode of subduing him is, whenever the rider is aware
of the horse's disposition to rear, to have the reins separated ;
and the instant he perceives him going to rise, to slack one hand
and bend him with the other, keeping the hand low. This com-
pels him to move a hind leg, and being thrown off his balance,
he necessarily comes down with his fore feet. He should then
be twisted round two or three times, to convince him of the
rider's superiority, which confuses, baffles, and deters him from
rearing to any dangerous height. To break horses of this dan-
gerous vice, it has been sometimes expedient to leap from them,
and pull them backwards. This so frightens them that they are
wary of giving the opportunity again. It is, however, an expe-
dient to be attempted only at a particular crisis, and by persons
perfectly collected, active, and agile.*

Kicking.

Horses apt to kick, either when they go forward or stand still,
must be kept much together, or held in closely. When this is

* On this subject, an anonymous writer, in answer to a query, says, " I would
advise you by no means to try the experiment in question, either as operator
yourself, or on your own horse. At all events, pray make trial first of the fol-
lowing prescription, which will in most cases be found an excellent preventive,
if not a total cure, of the propensity complained of, and which has the advan-
tage over the method respecting which you inquire, of being much easier and
safer in its application, and, I may perhaps add, surer in its effects, and less
expensive on the whole.

" Get a strong thick curb bit, with a good deep port reversed — that is, the
curve of the mouth-piece must project towards the outside of the horse's
mouth, and not inwardly towards his throat, as in the common port bit. The
thickness and exact curve of the bit should be calculated according to the
size, strength, and hardness of mouth of the animal for which it is intended.
For a very hard-mouthed horse, the bit should be made with a very deep port,
and as thin as possible, consistently with the strength requisite.

" In nine cases out often, 1 have found that confirmed rearers are tender-
nr.outhe'l, and the habit has been probably induced by their being bitted and
handled too severely A martingale will be found a useful addition to the bit
I hav. Its full efficacy can only be sufficiently appreciated by its

;ised several times, till the horse has become in some degree accus-
tomed to it."

162 RIDING.

attempted, the hands, though fixed, must not pull at the horse,
if he does not attempt to force the hand, and get his head, but
leave him at liberty to go forward. If, however, he attempt to
get his head down, which would enable him to kick with such
violence as to throw himself, he may have the head confined up.
This disarms him, and he makes a bolt from all-fours.

When a horse kicks, the rider must throw the body backward.
It is an effective punishment to twist him round a few times for
this fault. If this is done towards his weak or unprepared side
(for every horse has a favourite side), astonishment and confusion
will deter him from farther contention. In case of bolting, the
rider must not exert one continued pull, but make repeated pulls
until the horse obeys. Horses accustomed to be allowed to bear
on the bit would not understand the steady pull as a signal to
desist ; and some would so throw up their heads as to deprive
the rider of all power without dropping his hand, when the horse
would drop his head. In that case, a second pull would find his
mouth, and thus speedily his progress might be stopped.

Plunging.

In plunging, a horse gets his head down, cringes his tail be-
tween his quarters, sets his back up, swells his body to burst his
girths, and, in this position, kicks and plunges till his breath
can be held no longer — that is, till he makes six or eight plunges.
To sit these is to cure them ; and to do this, the rider must take
a firm hold with his legs, and be mindful that the horse, in
getting his head down, does not pull him forward. There is no
danger of his rearing ; and therefore the rider has only to keep
his body back, and hold firmly with his hands, to prevent him
throwing himself down.

Shying.

When a horse, either by shying or restiveness, springs to one
side, or turns short round, the rider's security depends on stiict
conformity to the rules already laid down, as to not bearing on
the stirrups ; keeping the legs near to the horse, to be ready on

CRITICAL SITUATIONS. 163

these auddenand unexpected occasions to lay hold; and yielding
the body to go with him.

\Vhen a horse is about to fly to one side, he may be stopped
by his rider's leg being pressed on the side he would fly to, and
by keeping his head high and straight forward, so as to prevent
his looking towards the object he starts at, unless indeed it be
something you desire to accustom him to the sight of, arid then,
whether you keep his face to it throughout, or avert it at first,
and turn it gently towards it at last, great steadiness is neces-
sary. When he curvets irregularly, and twists himself to and
fro, his head should be turned to one side, or both alternately,
without permitting him to move out of the track; and the rider's
leg should be pressed against the opposite side. In this case,
lie cannot spring on one side, because the pressure of the leg
prevents him, nor will he spring to the other, because his head
is turned that way, and a horse never starts to the side to which
he looks.

Moreover, he will not fly back from anything, but go forward,
if both legs be pressed against his sides. Thus he may be made
to pass a carriage or other object in a narrow road; and here
perseverance is especially necessary when the object is just
TV. ached, or partly passed, for if in the habit of going back and
timing round when frightened, he will certainly do so when, if,
by the hands slackening and legs failing to press, he discovers
tlu.t you are irresolute; and this he would probably do at the
most dangerous moment, when there was scarcely room for
him to turn, and the wheels might take him in the rear. To
touch his curb rein at such a moment would add to the confusion
and danger.

Resttvenett,

The horse generally commences his attack by stopping, turn-
ing short round, mostly to the right hand, as taking the rider
to the greatest disadvantage. He expects the rider will oppose
the opposite hand, designedly attacks the weakest, and is so
prepared against its efforts that it is vain to attempt them. It

164 RIDING.

must be the rider's rule never to contend with the horse on that
point on which he is prepared to resist.

Instead, therefore, of attempting to prevent the horse with
his loft hand, the rider must attack him with his right, turn him
completely round, so that his head is again presented the right
way, and then apply the whip. If he turns round again, the
rider must still attack his unguarded side, turn him two or three
times, and let the heel and spur, if necessary, assist the hand,
before he can arm or defend himself against it.

If he still refuse to go the right way, the rider must take care
that he go no other, and immediately change his attack, turning
him about and reining him backward, which the horse is easily
compelled to do when he sets himself against going forward. In
these contests, the rider must be collected, and have an eye to
the surrounding objects ; for restive horses try their utmost to
place their riders in awkward situations, by sidling to other
horses, carriages, the foot-pavement, the houses, &c.

In this case, the rider, instead of pulling him from the wall,
must bend his head to it, by which his side next the Avail is ren-
dered concave, and his utmost endeavours to do injury are pre-
vented. The instant, therefore, that the rider perceives his horse
sidling to any object, he must turn his head to that object, and
back him from it.

There are some horses who fix themselves like stocks, setting
all endeavours to move them at defiance. There, happily, their
defence can in no way endanger the rider. It must, however,
be converted to punishment. Let them stand, make no attempt
to move them, and in a short space — frequently less than a
minute — they will move of themselves.

"SYlien these various defences, however, are not powerfully set
up, the general rule is to push the horse forward ; and, for this
purpose, at first to make use of the switch, as it alarms him
least, for the spurs surprise a horse, abate his courage, and are
likely to make him restive. Indeed, the application of the whip
or spurs, except to shift the croupe, or give efficacy to the hands,
is of little use ; and to repeat either, to make a restive horse go

TREATMENT OF THE HORSE. 165

forward, is certainly wrong. When passion possesses the rider,
it prevents that concord and unit}- taking place which ever should
subsist between the rider and his horse. He should always be
disposed to amity, and never suffer the most obstinate resistance
of the horse to put him out of temper. If the contest dees not
demand his utmost exertion of strength, he should be able to
hum a tune, or converse with the same composure and indif-
ference as though his horse were all obedience. By these means,
the instant a horse finds himself foiled, he desists, having no
provocation to contend farther, and is abashed at his own weak-
ness. It is the absence of passion which, added to cool ob-
servation, makes the English the best riders and drivers in the
world.

TREATMENT OF THE HORSE.

Stables are generally too dark and too hot. They should be
kept quite cool, though without any draughts.

•• A way," says De Beranger, in Helps and Hints, " of making
the most of your horses, is to rise early in the summer, in order
to do half your day's work before the heat of the day; for lying
by the whole of the rest of the day, not only affords a traveller
time and opportunity for examining what is worthy of being
seen, but enables him to start with horses quite fresh, and to
finish the remaining stage after sunset : not only will your horses
go through their task with less labour in the cool of the even-
ing, but you will find them travel more freely towards a resting-
place, which darkness leads them to expect."

A horse ought not to be ridden a stage while in physic, nor on
the day of its coming off. If he be pushed at first setting out
on a journey, or be compelled to make long stages, or be de-
prived of his customary baits, he gets jaded, and every additional
mile adds to his uneasiness. Moreover, at setting out in the
morning, a well-kept horse is necessarily full of food, and con-
sequently, until his great gut be properly emptied, brisk action
occasions uneasiness or pain, which causes restlessness.

" When I travel oa horseback," says the same writer, " I make

166 RIDING.

it a rule to walk every seventh mile, be the roads ever so level :
it affords a wonderful relief both to man and horse, and, instead
of producing a loss of time, helps you on. When you dismount
for such ends, always slacken your girths, slightly lift up the
saddle to let a little air under it, and teach your horse (what he
soon will learn) to walk briskly by your side, and keep the step
with you, taking care to hold either of the reins lightly in your
hand, and without shifting it over the horse's head. Your steed
will soon give you demonstrations of his gratitude, for he will
be full of affectionate playfulness as he jogs along at your side,
only to be rivalled by his willingness to let you mount after you
have tightened the girths again. I need hardly tell you not to
put your arm or wrist through a rein whilst walking or running
by the side of a horse, for it is replete with danger. A good run
with one hand on the horse's withers is pleasant, and greatly
removes the stiffness of the joints so frequently occasioned by
much riding ; but the reins should be held between the fingers
only, and rather loosely."

Hence, it follows that, although expedition be indispensable,
the horse ought not to be put on his best pace at first, but con-
siderably within it. Even this pace should be for a short space
only ; the reins should be loosened ; the mouth played with ;
and if he do not evacuate, the pace may be repeated once more,
— unless, indeed, he sweat much with the first, which is a sign
of weakness, or that his dung is hard, and he requires purging.

While on the journey, the rider should be less attentive to
his horse's nice carriage of himself, than to his own encourage-
ment of him, and keeping him in good humour. Though gene-
rally he should raise his horse's head, yet when he flags in
consequence of a long day or hard work, he may indulge
him with bearing a little more upon the bit than he would in
taking a mere airing exercise, or afternoon's canter in the Park.
Keeping company with some other horseman facilitates a stage,
by the emulation it excites ; so that a dull animal, which one
can scarcely get seven miles an hour from, will do nine or ten
without fatigue when in company.

TREATMENT OF THE HORSE. 167

In road-riding, u picker is indispensable both in winter and
summer. In winter, it is necessary to relieve the sole when
snow accumulates there. When, however, the traveller knows
that snow is on the ground, he may avoid the trouble of dis-
mounting, by previously ordering his horse's soles to be payed
over with tar, or with tallow having no salt in it. At all times,
when the roads have received fresh dressings, a picker is indis-
hlc, because a loose stone is very liable to lodge in the
hollow of the foot, and is dangerously driven backwards between
the frog and the shoe, at every step the horse takes.

Pace and length of stage must be adapted to the heat of the
weather in summer, and to the depth of the roads in winter ;
both seasons having the effect of knocking up the horse. In
either case, a cordial promptly administered recovers him for
the prosecution of his journey. The cordial readiest provided,
and which should be kept at hand by the provident traveller, is
in the form of a ball, and composed of aniseeds, ginger, carra-
way, of each, powdered, half an ounce, and mixed up with treacle
and meal to the proper consistence. But good ale or porter,
from one pint to a quart, made warm, operates sooner, and,
upon emergency, is nearly as readily obtained as the ball.

Walking a horse the last mile, especially of a long stage, is
a practice highly beneficial. As, upon setting out, we should
not go off at the quickest pace, so upon coming in, we should
not dash into our quarters with the perspiration streaming from
each pore, in the mild season, nor covered over with dirt, in
consequence of the pace, in wet weather. Even in winter, the
perspiration flies from a strong horse, if in condition, upon
coming in more sheltered places, and the practices he is then
subjected to are commonly of such a nature as to cause disease
in one way or another, in embryo, if not immediately.

The rider is greatly to be blamed who stands quietly by, or
hides himself in the parlour, while his horse is brought in hot,
stripped of every thing, and led about to cool, in the draught of a
gateway, or has the dirt washed off by plunging him in a horse-
trough or pond, or his legs brushed in cold water in the open

168 RIDING.

yard, while pailfulls, at the same time, are thrown over them ;
the consequence of all which is cough or colic, bad eyes, swelled
legs, or inflammation of some vital part, which deprives the
animal of life.

The horse should have a large and comfortable stall, and
without any door behind him, a draught from which, by blowing
up his coat, might expose him to cold. On coming in, after
being coaxed to stale, he should undergo (in winter-time in
doors) a wisping all over with straw, beginning at the head,
and proceeding to the neck and fore-quarters. His eyes,
nostrils, &c., should also be cleansed with a sponge, and his
ears rubbed. He should, at the same time, have before him
a lock of sweet hay, in his rack, or a prickle, or the hand ; and
the rider should see whether he eats or not, whether he en-
joys the wisping, and whether he chiefly evince a desire to He
down or a craving for food.

The girths having been already loosened, but the saddle still
remaining on his back, his head should be turned to the
rack, and his hind-quarters, legs, and belly, sheath and fork,
wisped, and his feet picked clean and washed. After this, the
saddle should be removed by sliding it back over the croupe ;
and the dressing be extended to the withers, back, and so com-
pletely all over the carcass, until it is dry. The saddle should
be hung out, with the inside toward the sun ; and when the
pannels have been duly aired and dried, they should be slightly
beaten and well brushed.

If the horse refuse the first proffer of hay, the rider may con-
clude that he has been pushed too much, as to time or length.
If he still refuse his food, though the dressing be finished, he
may be assured that his stomach is disordered, and he must be
cordialled. In winter, a warm mash of malt is most eligible ;
but, if not at hand, a bran mash with an admixture of oatmeal,
and a quart of good ale, may be given. In summer, a cordial
ball will restore the tone of his stomach, without increasing the
heat of his body so much as a mash would. If he is not aged,
nor inured to cordialling, a small pail of stout water-gruel,

TREATMENT OF THE HORSE. 169

almost cold, excels all other cordials, and supersedes the neces-
sity of watering ; he will take his supper an hour or so after-
wards, with a relish.

The traveller ought to look to every particular himself. — In
the next place, let him see that his horse gets his allowance of
corn, that it be good, and that it contain no indications of hav-
ing been in a manger before ; for, in that case, he must wait by
him until all the food is devoured. Dry food is alone proper to
travel upon, and oats are the best; much hay being apt to
engender flatulencies. When, however, a very long stage is to
be taken, or it is cold, dreary, wet, or windy, a handful of
crushed beans sustains him admirably, staying by him, and im-
parting vigour for a long time. The horse should not be denied
water often ; though too mucti at one time should not be
given, nor, without its being chilled, any immediately after
being fed.

His feet and shoes should be looked to, to ascertain if
aught require repair, in order that it may be furnished as
soon as he has recovered from his fatigue. — His limbs, more-
over, should be examined all over, for cracks, pricked foot, &c.,
and the body, for saddle-galls, &c. Now, as ever, his dunging
should be looked to. Even if in full condition, having been
well and regularly fed, and as regularly worked, he will contract
a tendency to constipation ; the least ill consequence of which
is defective pace, or short step, arising from more laboured
action. As the inconvenience may be suffered to last, he sweats
immoderately at the least extra exertion, his eyes lose their
wonted brightness, his mouth becomes hot, and his manner is
languid. All these evils may be prevented by timely physicking,
whenever the dung is seen to fall upon the ground without the
pellets breaking. Even a little green food, or a day's mashing
with bran, thin oatmeal gruel, and the like, will soften the dung
considerably. It must be remembered that these things are
to be undertaken on blank days, when the traveller is certain
the horse will not be ridden a stage. The following allowance

170 DRIVING.

per week is generally enough to keep a horse in good con-
dition : —

Oats. Beans. Hiy.

For a horse of from ->
14} to 16 hands / 13 bushel; 2 quarterns; \\ truss.

For a horse under j 14burild. 14 quartern; 1 truss.
14i hands *

DRIVING.

Among the ancients, for more than one thousand years, the
greatest honour that could be bestowed upon a man was a
sprig of the wild olive tree entwined round his brow, for having
gained a victory in the chariot-race at the Olympic games of
Greece. This sprig of olive, moreover, was accompanied by
other marks of distinction : the wearer of it was not only
honoured with statues and inscriptions during his life-time, but
the immortal Pindar, or some other great poet, was called upon
to hand his name down to posterity in an ode. The Olympic
games were revived, as a religious ceremony, by Iphitus, an
Elean, about nine hundred years before Christ. They were
celebrated near Olympia, in the territory of Elis. Horse and
chariot races were considered their noblest sports. No one was
there prevented from driving his own chariot ; and kings were
often seen contending against kings.

The Greeks were the most enlightened of the ancients, and
then* taste in the arts has never been even rivalled. What they
did, therefore, on this occasion, could not be considered as in
bad taste; and, when we remember that the celebration of
these pastimes outlived the laws, customs, and liberty of their
country, we need not say more in their vindication. The
honours of victory were not even confined to the brave and
skilful man who won the race : even the horses were crowned

IMPORTANCE OF DRIVING, ETC. 171

amidst the applauses of the spectators ; and in one race, where
forty chariots were broken, the victorious one was preserved
in the temple of Apollo. Such being the havoc among the com-
petitors, it is not wonderful that Ovid should say, that the
honour of contending for the Olympic prize was almost equal to
the winning of it.

Sophocles modestly speaks of ten starting at the same time
in the race ; but Pindar, availing himself, perhaps, of poetic
licence, makes the number forty. Four horses driven abreast
was the usual number. The length* of the course on which
they ran did not exceed an English mile, and as they had to
make twenty-two turnings round the two pillars — generally,
we may suppose, at full speed — it is not difficult to imagine
what dreadful accidents must have happened.

Nothing indeed but the form of chariot used could have en-
sured safety to any one. From the representations on ancient
coins, it appears to have been very low, and only on two wheels,
somewhat resembling our curricle. It had of course no springs ;
and, as there was no seat for the charioteer, much of his
skill consisted in preserving his balance, and keeping upon
his legs.

According to Pausanias, the following was the method of
starting : — The chariots entered the course according to order,
previously settled by lot, and drew up in a line. They started
at a signal given, and to him who passed the pillar at the top of
the course twelve times, and that at the bottom ten times, in
the neatest manner, without touching it, or overturning his
chariot, was the reward given. — As, however, it was the aim of
every one who started to make for this pillar, as to a centre, we
i^ily imagine the confusion there must have been in forty,
twenty, or even ten chariots, all rushing to one given point,
amidst the clanging of trumpets, &c.

* The Circus Maximus at Rome, in which the Romans exhibited their
chariot-races, was an oval building of one thousand eight hundred feet in
length, and four hundred in breadth.

172 DRIVING.

The following translation of a description of a chariot-race,
from the Electra of Sophocles, is worthy of a place.

" When on the sacred day, in order next
Came on the contest of the rapid car,
As o'er the Phocian plain the orient sun
Shot his impurpled beams, the Pythic course
Orestes enter'd, circled with a troop
Of charioteers, his bold antagonists.
One from Achaia came ; from Sparta one ;
Two from the Lybian shores, well practised each
To rule the whirling car : with these the fifth,
Orestes, vaunting his Thessalian mares :
JEtolia sent a sixth, with youthful steeds
In native gold arrayed : the next in rank
From fair Magnesia sprang : of Thrace the eighth
His snow-white coursers from Thesprotia drove :
From heaven-built Athens the ninth hero came :
A huge Boeotian t'he tenth chariot filled.
These, when the judges of the games by lot
Had fix'd their order, and arranged their cars,
All, at the trumpet's signal, all at once
Burst from the barrier ; all together cheer'd
Their fiery steeds, and shook the floating reins.
Soon with the din of rattling cars was filled
The sounding hippodrome, and clouds of dust
Ascending, tainted the fresh breath of morn.
Now mix'd and press'd together, on they drove,
Nor spared the smarting lash ; impatient each
To clear his chariot, and outstrip the throng
Of dashing axles, and short-blowing steeds,
They panted on each other's necks, and threw
On each contiguous yoke the milky foam.

" But to the pillar as he nearer drew,
Orestes, reining-in the nearmost steed,
"While in a larger scope, with loosen'd reins,
And lash'd up to their speed, the others flew,
Turn'd swift around the goal his grazing wheel.

" As yet erect, upon their whirling orbs
Roll'd every chariot, till the hard-mouth'd steeds
That drew the Thracian car, unmaster'd, broke
With violence away, and turning short,
(When o'er the hippodrome with winged speed
They had completed now the seventh career),
Dash'd their wild foreheads 'gainst the Lybian car.
From this one luckless chance a train of ilia

IMPORTANCE OF DRIVING, ETC. 173

Succeeding, nidely on each other fell
Horses and charioteers, and soon was fill'd
With wrecks of shattor'd cars the Phocian plain.

" This seen, the Athenian, with consummate art,
His course obliquely veer'd, and, steering wide
With steady rein, the wild commotion pass'd
Of tumbling chariots and tumultuous steeds,
•md, though last, yet full of confidence
And hopes of victory, Orestes came ;
But when he saw of his antagonists
Him only now remaining, to his mares
Anxious he raised his stimulating voice.
And now with equal fronts abreast they drove,
Now with alternate momentary pride
Beyond each other push'd their stretching steeds.

" Erect Orestes, and erect his car,
Through all the number'd courses now had stood ;
But luckless in the last, as round the goal
The wheeling courser turn'd, the hither rein
Imprudent he relax'd, and on the stone
The shatter'd axle dashing, from the wheels
Fell headlong ; hamper'd in the tangling reins
The frighted mares flew diverse o'er the course.

"The throng'd assembly, when they saw the chief
Hurl'd from his chariot, with compassion moved,
His youth deplored; deplored him, glorious late
For mighty deeds, now doom'd to mighty woes ;
Now dragg'd along the dust, his feet in air :
Till, hasting to his aid, and scarce at length
The frantic mares restraining, from the reins
The charioteers released him, and convey'd,
With wounds and gore disfigured, to his friends.
The just Amphictyons on the Athenian steeds
The Delphic laurel solemnly conferr'd."

la a political view, these games were productive of local
advantages ; for, being sacred to Jupiter, they protected the
inhabitants of Elis against all the calamities of war. In an
economical point of view, they were of general use ; for, as
Greece was generally short of horses, nothing was so likely to
encourage the breeding of them as the emulation thus raised
among the different states. The circulation of money also was
not a trifling consideration ; for the olive crown was obtained
at great expense. By these games being celebrated at the

174 DRIVING.

beginning of every fifth year, the Greeks settled their chrono-
logy and dates ; and as they lasted a thousand years, a great
part of the traditional history of Greece rests upon their base.
That the honour of the prize was above all price, the following
anecdote shows : — A Spartan having gained the victory at the
Olympic games with much difficulty, was asked what he should
profit by it ? "I shall have the honour," said he, " of being
posted before my king in battle." As a further proof of the
value and the moral effect of these contentions for honour, it is
stated that, when a conqueror returned to his native city, he
made his entry through a breach in the wall — by which was
implied that cities inhabited by such men had no need of walls.

A senator of Rome, indeed, says Gibbon, " or even a citizen,
conscious of his dignity, would have blushed to expose his
person or his horses in a Roman circus. There, the reins were
abandoned to servile hands ; and, if the profits of a favourite
charioteer sometimes exceeded those of an advocate, they were
considered as the effect of popular extravagance, and the high
wages of a disgraceful profession," The Romans, with more
pride, were far less intellectual than the Greeks ; but it must
still be borne in mind, that, inconsistently enough, the interest
taken in the charioteers of Rome shook the very foundation
of the government.

In modern times, notwithstanding the sneers directed against
gentlemen-coachmen and driving-clubs, it is to them chiefly
that this country is indebted for the present excellent state of
the roads, and for safe and expeditious travelling. The. taste
for driving produced, between men of property and t^iose
connected with the road, an intercourse which has been pro-
ductive of the best results. Road-makers, and those who
have the care of roads, if they have not acted under the
immediate direction of these amateur drivers, have been greatly
benefited by their advice — doubly valuable, as proceeding
from knowledge of what a road ought to be. The intercourse
also that has lately been carried on between proprietors of
inns and of coaches, and gentlemen fond of driving, has

THE ROADS. 175

greatly tended to direct the attention of the former to the
accommodation and comfort of travellers. The improvement
m carriages — stage-coaches more especially — would never have
arrived at its present height, but for the attention and sug-
gestions of such persons.

Moreover, the notice taken by gentlemen of coachmen,
who are at once skilful and who conduct themselves well, has
worked the reformation which has been of late years witnessed
iu that useful part of society.

Gentleman-driving, however, has received a check, very few
four-in-hands being visible. The B. D. C., or Benson Driving
Club, which now holds its rendezvous at the Black Dog, Bed-
font, is the only survivor of those numerous driving associa-
tions whose processions used, some twenty years ago, to be
among the most imposing, as well as peculiar spectacles in and
about the metropolis.*

THE ROADS.

The excellence of our present mail-coach work reflects the
highest credit on the state of our roads. The hills on great
roads are now cut triangularly, so that drivers ascend nearly all
of them in a trot. Coachmen have found out that they are
gainers here, as, in the trot, every horse does his share, whereas,
very few teams are all at work together when walking.

As, however, dreadful accidents have occurred to coaches when

descending hills, a very simple expedient has been suggested,

by which these accidents may be avoided. It is merely a strip

of gravel, or broken stone, about one yard wide, and four

or five inches deep, left on the near side of the hill, and

siitFnvd to bind or diminish. This would afford that

additional friction (technically called a bite) to the two near-side

!>, so that the necessity of a drag-chain (never to be

said be done away with, and even in case of a hame-

»Thprpn<l'T willhoar in mind that this is many years after date. The
R.D.C., \\!:ich is now in the " Crescent," promises an ascendant of 110 mean
tffalgeuce.— ED. Fifth Edition.

176 DRIVING.

strap or pole-chain giving way, one wheel-horse would be able
to hold back a coach, however heavily laden. No inconvenience
to the road, it is observed, could arise from this precaution, as
carriages ascending the hills would never be required to touch
the loose gravel, it not being on their side of the road. This
has been objected to., because some of the loose stones might
find their way into the middle of the road. But, admitting
this might be the case, a trifling attention on the part of the
surveyor wonld obviate the objection. A man might be em-
ployed every second or third day to rake these stones back again.
At the same time, it is obvious that the neat appearance of i
road is not to be put in the scale against the limbs and lives of
the people. — Some more permanent contrivance than loose
stones even might be found.

CARRIAGES.

Of carriages, those with two wheels are the cheapest, lightest,
and most expeditious ; but, however sure-footed the horse, and
however skilful the driver, they are comparatively dangerous
vehicles.

As to gentlemen's carriages, in this country, it has justly been
observed, that the view at Hyde Park Corner, on any fine after-
noon, in the height of the London season, is enough to confound
any foreigner, from whatever part of the world he may come. He
may there see what no other country can show him. Let him
only sit on the rail, near the statue, and in the space of two
hours he will see a thousand well-appointed equipages pass before
him to the Mall, in all the pomp of aristocratic pride, in which
the horses themselves appear to partake. The stream of equi-
pages of all kinds, barouches, chariots, cabriolets, &c., and
almost all got up " regardless of expense," flows on unbroken
until it is half-past seven, and people at last begin to think of
what they still call dinner. Seneca tells us that such a blaze
of splendour was once to be seen on the Appiau Way. It might
be so — it is now to be seen nowhere but in London.

As to stage-coaches, their form seems to have arrived at

CARRIAGES. I//

perfection. It combines prodigious strength with almost in-
credible lightness; many of them not weighing more than about
IS c\vt., and being kept so much nearer the ground than for-
merly, they are of course considerably safer. Nothing, indeed,
can be more favourable to safety than the build of modern
coaches. The boots being let down between the springs, keep
the load, and consequently the centre of gravity, low; the
wheels of many of them are secured by patent boxes ; and in
every part of them the best materials are used. The cost of
coaches of this description is from <£130 to ^150 ; but they are
generally hired from the maker at 2hd. to 3d. per mile.

It is said to be the intention of Government* to substitute
light carriages with two horses for the present mail-coaches
drawn by four. On this, a writer in the Quarterly Review ob-
serves, that when the mail-coach of the present day starts from
London for Edinburgh, a man may safely bet a hundred to one
that she arrives to her time ; but let a light two-horse vehicle
set out on the rime errand, and the betting would strangely
niter. It is qu .. a mistaken notion that a carriage is less
liable to accidents for being light. On the contrary, she is more
liable to them than one that is laden in proportion to her sus-
taining powers. In the latter case, she runs steadily along,
and is but little disturbed by any obstacle or jerk she may
meet on the road : in the former, she is constantly on
" the jump," as coachmen call it, and her iron parts are very
liable to snap.

It may in this place be observed, that no stage-coach should
be permitted to travel the road with wheels secured only by the
common linchpin. It is in consequence of this that innumer-
able accidents have happened to coaches from wheels coming
off; and in these improving and fast times, such chances should
not be allowed to exist. It may not be uninteresting to the
uninitiated to learn from the same clever and experienced writer
how a coach is worked. Suppose a number of persons to enter

*Tlic era of rail-roads has however now arrived, and there remains no need
for such an experiment.— ED. Fifth Edition.

1/8 DRIVING.

into a contract to horse a coach eighty miles, each proprietor
having twenty miles ; in which case he is said to cover both
sides of the ground, or to and fro. At the expiration of twenty-
eight days a settlement takes place, and if the gross earnings of
the coach be <€10 per mile, there will be .£800 to divide between
the four proprietors, after the following charges have been de-
ducted, viz., tolls, duty to government, mileage (or hire of the
coach to the coach-makers), two coachmen's wages, porters'
wages, rent or charge of booking-offices at each end, and wash-
ing the coaches. These charges may amount to ^150, which
leaves .£650 to keep eighty horses, and to pay the horse-keepers
for a period of twenty-eight dajs, or nearly .€160 to each pro-
prietor for the expenses of his twenty horses, being £2 per week
per horse. Thus it appears that a fast coach properly appointed
cannot pay, unless its gross receipts amount to J?10 per double
mile ; and that even then the proprietor's profits depend on the
luck he has with his stock.

COACH-HORSES.

A great change has lately taken place as to the English
coach-horse ; and this is the foundation of many other accom-
panying changes. Fifty years ago, the putting a thorough-bred
horse into harness would have been deemed preposterous. In
the carriages of gentlemen, the long-tailed black, or Cleveland
bay — each one remove from the cart-horse — was the prevailing
sort ; and six miles an hour was the extent of the pace. Now,
however, this clumsy-barrelled, cloddy-shouldered, round-legged
animal, something between a coach and a dray horse, as fat as
an ox, and, with all his prancing at first starting, not capable of
more than six miles an hour, and rendered useless by a day's
hard work, is no more seen ; and, instead of him, we find a
horse as tall, deep-chested, rising in the withers, slanting in
the shoulders, flat in the legs, with more strength, and with
treble the speed.

The animal formerly in use cost from 307. to 507. — Two hun-
dred guineas is now an every-day price for a cabriolet horse : and

COACH-HORSES. 1/(J

150 guineas for a coach-horse, for a private gentleman's work.
A pair of handsome coach-horses, fit for London, and well
broken and bitted, cannot be purchased under 200 guineas ;
and even job-masters often give much more for them to let out
to their customers. The origin of this superior kind of coach-
horse is still, however, the Cleveland bay, confined principally
to Yorkshire and Durham, with perhaps Lincolnshire on one
side, and Northumberland on the other, but difficult to be met
with pure in either county. Cleveland indeed, and the Vale of
Pickering, in the East Riding of Yorkshire, are the best breed-
ing counties in England for coach-horses, hunters, and hackneys.

When the Cleveland mare is crossed by a three-fourth or
thorough-bred horse of sufficient substance and height, the pro-
duce is the coach-horse most in repute, with his arched crest
and high action. From the same mare and the thorough-bred
of sufficient height, but not of so much substance, we obtain
the four-in-hand, and superior curricle horse. From less
height and more substance, we derive the hunter, and better
sort of hackney. From the half-bred, we have the machiner,
the poster, and the common carriage-horse.

The best coach-horse is a tall, strong, over-sized hunter. The
hackney has many of the qualities of the hunter on a small scale.
There is some deception, however, even as to the best of these
improved coach-horses. They prance nobly through the streets,
and they are capable of more work than the old clumsy, sluggish
breed, but still they have not the endurance that is desirable j
and a pair of poor post-horses, at the end of the second day,
would beat them hollow.

In this carriage-horse, the bending of the upper joints, and
the consequent high lifting of the feet, are deemed an excellence,
because they add to the grandeur of his appearance ; but this is
necessarily accompanied by much wear and tear of the legs ,-uul
feet, the effect of which is very soon apparent. The most de-
sirable points in the coach-horse are — substance well placed, a
deep and well-proportioned body, bone under the knee, and
sound, open, tough feet.

180 DRIVING.

One part of the old system, however, remains — namely, that
although little horses, well bred, are the fashion, large horses
are still employed in heavy work. It must indeed be so. Horses
draw by their weight, and not by the force of their muscles,
although these, by carrying forward the centre of gravity, assist
the application of that weight. It is the weight of the animal
which produces the draught, and the power of the muscles serves
to direct it. The hind feet form the fulcrum of the lever by
which this weight acts against a load, and the power exerted is
in proportion to the length of the lever, if the weight remains
the same. Large animals, therefore, draw more than small ones,
though they may have less muscular power, and are unable to
earn' weight so well. Nothing can better show that horses draw
by their weight than the frequent occurrence that a horse is un-
able to draw a cart out of a slouch until a sack of corn is thrown
on his back, when he has little difficulty in doing it. Thus it is,
that what are technically called loltyng-goers take more weight
with them than horses of better action.

As the application of the weight or force proceeds from the
fulcrum formed by the hind feet, good hind legs and well-spread
gaskins are essential points in a coach-horse. We even some-
times see that a waggon-horse, when brought to pull, will not
touch the ground at all with his fore feet. Another reason why
little horses are unfit for heavy work is, that they will seldom
walk and draw at the same time ; for if they walk, they catch at
their collars, and do but little. They never take anything like
an even share of draught.

By calculations as to the mean strength of animals, it app ars
that a horse drawing horizontally, and at the rate of two miles
and a half in an hour, can work for eight hours in succession
against a resistance of 200 pounds. If that pace be quadrupled,
he finds an eighth part of the time sufficient. Thus we can
pretty nearly measure a horse's power in harness. Whether
we are carrying supposed improvement too far, and sacrificing
strength and endurance to speed, is a question not difficult to
be resolved.

COACH-HORSES. 181

A horse at a pull is enabled, by the power and direction of
his muscles, to throw a certain weight against the collar. If he
walk four miles in the hour, part of the muscular energy is ex-
pended in the act of walking; and consequently, the power of
drawing must be proportionally diminished. If he trot eight
miles in the hour, more of that energy is expended in the trot,
and less remains for the draught ; but the draught continues the
same, and, to enable him to accomplish his work, he must exert
his energies in a degree so severe and cruel, that it must speedily
wear him out. Hence, there is no truth so easily proved, or so
painfully felt by the postmaster, as that it is the pace that kills.
Moreover, many a horse used on our public roads is unable to
employ all his natural power, or to throw his weight into the
collar, in consequence of being tender-footed, or lame. Being
bought, however, at little price, he is worked on the brutal prin-
ciple that he may be " whipped sound !" — and so he is appa-
rently. At first he sadly halts; but, urged by the torture of the
lush, he acquires a peculiar mode of going. The faulty limb
iceeps pace with the others, but no stress or labour is thrown
upon it; and he gradually contrives to make the sound limbs
perform among them all the duties of the unsound one. Thus
he is barbarously " whipped sound," and cruelty is for the time
undeservedly rewarded. After all, however, what is done? Three
Jegs are made to do that which was almost too much for four.
Of course, they are most injuriously strained, and quickly Avorn
out; the general power of the animal is rapidly exhausted; and,
at no remote time, death releases him from his merciless perse-
cutors.

Happily, art is doing what humanity refuses. Railroads are
rendering draught comparatively easy. An instance has been
described of the power of a horse when assisted by art, as exhi-
bited near Croydon. The Surrey iron railway being completed,
a wager was laid that a common horse could draw thirty-six tons
for six miles along the road, drawing his weight from a dead pull,
and turning it round the occasional windings of the road. A
nniiKTOus party assembled near Merstham to sec this. Twelve

182 DRIVING.

waggons loaded with stones, each waggon weighing above three
tons, were chained together, and a horse taken promiscuously
from a timber cart, was yoked to the train. He started from a
house near Merstham, and drew the chain of waggons with ap-
parent ease almost to the turnpike at Croydon, a distance of six
miles, in one hour and forty-one minutes, which is nearly at the
rate of four miles an hour. In the course of the journey he
stopped four times, to show that it was not by any advantage of
descent that his power was facilitated ; and, after each stoppage,
he again drew off the chain of waggons with great ease. A person
who had wagered on the power of the horse then desired that
four more loaded waggons should be added to the cavalcade,
and with these the same horse set off again with undiminished
pace. Still further to show the effect of the railway in facili-
tating motion, the attending workmen, to the number of fifty,,
were directed to mount on the waggons, and the horse proceeded
without the least distress. Indeed, there appeared to be scarcely
any limit to the power of his draught. After this trial, the
waggons were taken to the weighing-machine, and it appeared-
that the whole weight was as follows : —

tor.§. cwt. qrs.

12 waggons first linked together . . . 38 4 2

4 ditto, afterwards attached . . . 13 2 0

Supposed weight of fifty labourers . .400

55 6 2

It is fortunate for breeders of horses that a perfect form is not
necessary to a good coach-horse. Some of those, indeed, which
the London dealers sell at high prices for gentlemen's work, are
such brutes, when out of harness, that no man would ride them
for their worth. The strong and lengthy shoulder, with well-
bent hind legs, are not absolutely necessary ; and a good head
and tail, with a little high action, are all that is essential.

The following are useful hints for purchasers of coach-horses :

No gentleman should purchase a horse without a good trial of

his mouth and temper. To be perfect in the first respect, he

should be what is called on the road " a cheek horse," — that is,.

COACH-HORSES. 183

should require very little curb, should always be at play with his
bit. and yet not afraid of it, and should have each side of his
mouth alike. To a gentleman's leader, a good mouth is most
essential, and then, the higher his courage, the safer he is to
drive. With stage-coach horses, mouth is not of so much con-
sequence, because they are always running home, and there is
no turning and twisting, as in gentlemen's work, which is often
in a crowd. A whistle, or a click with the tongue, should make
a gentleman's leader spring to his collar in an instant : one that
requires the whip should be discharged.

"With wheel horses which are steady, and hold well, a coach-
inan may almost set his leaders at defiance ; but if they are
otherwise, danger is at hand. It is not a bad plan to purchase
wheelers out of coaches, after they have been about six months
in regular work. For from sixty to eighty guineas, the best of
any man's stock may be picked; and a sound, well-broke coach-
horse is not dear at that price. The coach-horses of gentlemen
should be high in flesh, as it enhances their appearance, and is
no obstacle to pace. A sound five-year-old horse, with good legs
and feet, and driven only in harness, will last, on an average,
from six to ten years in gentlemen's work, and will afterwards
be very useful for other purposes.

The average price of horses for fast stages is about 231. Fancy
teams, and those working out of London, may be rated consider-
ably higher ; but, taking a hundred miles of ground, well horsed,
this is about the mark. The average period of each horse's ser-
vice does not exceed four years in a fast coach — perhaps scarcely
so much. In a slow one, it may extend to seven. In both cases,
horses are supposed to be put to the work at five or six years old.
The price named as the average may appear a low one; but
blemished horses find their way into coaches, as do those of bad
temper, &c. As no labour, while it lasts, is harder than that of
coach-horses in fast work, it is wrong to purchase those which
are infirm, as many proprietors do. Generally speaking, such
horses are out of their work half their time, and are certain to
die in their owner's debt. As the roads now are, blind horses

184 DRIVING.

are less objectionable than infirm ones. A blind horse that goes
up to his bit is both pleasanter and safer to drive than one with
good eyes that hangs away from his work. Blind horses, how-
ever, work best in the night.

Ahorse cannot be called a coach-horse unless he has good legs
and feet. As a wheel-horse, he is never to be depended upon
down hill, if he has not sound limbs. He cannot resist weight,
if he be weak in his joints. To bad legs and feet are owing
numerous accidents to coaches, many of which the public hear
nothing of. If horses, on the contrary, have good legs and feet,
they will last, even in the fastest work, many years, provided
they are shod with care, and well looked after. Proprietors of
coaches have at length found out that it is their interest to be
humane and liberal to their horses, because the hay and corn
market is not so expensive as the horse market. They have,
therefore, one horse in four always at rest; in other words, each
horse lies still on the fourth day. Generally considered, per-
haps, no animal toiling solely for the profit of man, leads so
comfortable a life as the English coach-horse : he is sumptuously
fed, kindly treated, and if he does suffer a little in his work, he
has mostly twenty-three hours in the twenty-four of perfect ease;
he is now almost a stranger to the lash, nor do we ever see him
with a broken skin. No horse lives so high as a coach-horse.
Hunters, in the hunting season, do not eat the quantity of corn
that coach-horses do; for the former are feverish after their
work, which is not the case with the latter, as they become
accustomed to this almost daily excitement. In the language of
the road, the coach-horse's stomach is the measure of his corn —
he is fed ad libitum.* The effect of this is that he soon gathers
flesh, even in this severe work, — for there is none more severe
while it lasts ; and good flesh is no obstacle to speed, but the
contrary.

It is not found, however, that (barring contagious diseases)

* Some coachmasters give their horses all manger-meat ; but this is wron£,
ss it often produces indigestion and disease. A certain portion of lon£ hay is
necessary.

HARNESS. 186

when- tlu-ir owners are good judges of condition, coach-horses
arc much subject to disease. After a hot summer, coach -horses
are most liable to derangement ; and the month of October is
the worst in the year for them, in consequence of it being their
moulting season. Coach-horses, indeed, are certain to sweat
three days out of four, which keeps their blood pure, and ren-
ders almost unnecessary medicine, of which, in general, they
have but a small portion — perhaps less than they should have.
It is a mistake, however, that fleshy horses cannot go fast in
harness ; they are more powerful in draught than thin ones ; and,
having only themselves to carry, flesh does not injure their legs,
as in riding. In a fast coach, then, a horse ought not to work
more than four days without rest, as he becomes leg-weary, and
wears out the sooner ; and he becomes also too highly excited.
A horse a mile, reckoning only one side of the ground, is about
the proportion. Thus we may suppose that ten horses work
the coach up and down a ten-mile stage, which gives eight at
work, and two at rest. Every horse, then, rests the fourth day.
In slow, heavy work, however, coach-horses will do their ground
every day, barring accidents or illness.

In slow work, the average duration of coaching stock may be
from six to seven years, provided they are at first fresh, and firm
on their legs. In fast work, their time may be from three to
four years, or scarcely perhaps so much. Coach proprietors on
a large scale should have a break for their young horses,
previous to going into regular work. The practice of putting a
young horse unaccustomed to harness into a coach laden with
passengers is most reprehensible; and when injury is sustained
by it, it should be visited by the severest penalties the law can
inflict.

HARNESS.

In the manufacture of harness we have arrived at a degree of
perfection, to which the invention of the patent shining leather
has mainly contributed. A handsome horse well harnessed is a
noble sight ; yet in no country, except England, is the art of

186 DRIVING.

putting a horse into harness at all understood. If, however,,
our road horses were put to their coaches in the loose awkward
fashion of the continental people, we could not travel at the
rate we do. It is the command given over the coach-horse that
enables us to do it.

In regard to mails, it should be observed that the proprietors
who horse them are not sufficiently attentive to the state of the-
harness on the ground worked by night ; whereas it should in
reality be the best. If anything break by daylight, it is in-
stantly observed ; but it is not so in the night, as lamp-light is
uncertain and treacherous. In speaking of particulars, it may
be observed, that bearing-reins are a relief to the arm of the
driver, but by no means to the horses. Indeed, they materially
lessen the power of horses in drawing, become insufferable to
them in a long journey, and fatigue them much sooner than
they would otherwise be. Not only do these reins by no means
serve to keep horses up ; but they prevent their rising after
having fallen.

When a wheel-horse has the habit of throwing up his- head,
which greatly annoys the mouth of the leader before him, a
nose-martingale should be used. This, however, is rarely suffi-
cient. Indeed, it is a bad custom to run the leader's reins
through terrets over the heads of the wheelers ; for then every
movement which the wheelers make with their heads, act'
powerfully on the mouths of the leaders, whether they be goo^
or bad. If the former, it is sometimes attended with danger :
thus, a wheeler throws up his head, suddenly and powerfully
shortens the rein of the leader, who is checked, and as the
wheeler goes on, he brings the bar with force against the hocks
of the leader, which instantly flies forward, and mischief ensues.

This, perhaps, does not last long ; but one evil only takes
the place of another : leaders soon learn to be, from custom,
equally heedless of this check and of their driver's hand : and
their mouths become steeled by the constant tossing of the
wheeler's heads. It is thus that we sometimes hear of leaders
choosing their own road in spite of the best efforts of good

HARNESS. 187

coachmen ; and so it will always be till terrets are totally
abolished. This may easily be done by conducting the leader's
rein through the rosette in which the wheeler's outside bearing-
rein, of which we have just disapproved, at present passes, and
thus supersede the terret.

Terrets, however, are supposed to look well, and to have the
advantage of keeping the head steady. To obviate their disad-
vantages, therefore, in some measure, rollers are placed in the
bottom of each terret, over which the rein passes. This, in
some degree, obviates the evil, as the rein no longer holds in the
terret, but slides easily, giving the wheeler's head more freedom.
In all kinds of work, a tool-box is a necessary appendage to the
coach. It should contain a strong screw-wrench, wheel and
spring clips, a spring shackle or two, with bolts and nuts, and
two chains — one for a trace, and the other shorter, with a ring
at one end and hook at the other, in case of a tug giving way.
In his pocket the coachman should have a short strap with a
buckle at each end, as in case of almost any part of the reins,
or indeed most parts of the harness breaking, it comes into use
in a moment.

The following are interesting extracts on this subject, from
an article in a late number of the Quarterly Review j and the
work quoted and referred to in the article is intitled Bubbles,
from the Brunnens of Nassau. " With regard to the manage-
ment of horses in harness, perhaps the most striking feature to
English eyes is, that the Germans intrust these sensible animals
with the free use of their eyes. ' As soon as, getting tired, or,
as we are often apt to term it, lazy, they see the postilion
threaten them with his whip, they know perfectly well the
limits of his patience, and that after eight, ten, or twelve threats,
there will come a blow. As they travel along, one eye is always
shrewdly watching the driver; the moment he begins his slow
operation of lighting his pipe, they immediately slacken their
pace, knowing as well as Archimedes could have proved, that he
cannot strike fire and them at the same time : every move-
ment in the carriage they remark; and to any accurate ob-

138 DRIVING.

server who meets a German vehicle, it must often be per-
fectly evident that the poor horses know and feel, even better
than himself, that they are drawing a coachman, three bulky
baronesses, their man and their maid, and that to do this on a
hot summer's day is no joke.'

" Now, what is our method ? ' In order to break-in the
animal to draught, we put a collar round his neck, a crupper
under his tail, a pad on his back, a strap round his belly, with
traces at his sides ; and, lest he should see that, though these
things tickle and pinch, they have not power to do more, the
poor intelligent creature is blinded with blinkers, and in this
fearful state of ignorance, with a groom or two at his head,
and another at his side, he is, without his knowledge, fixed
to the pole and splinter-bar of a carriage. If he kick, even
at a fly, he suddenly receives a heavy punishment which he
does not comprehend ; something has struck him, and has hurt
him severely ; but, as fear magnifies all danger, so, for aught
we know or care, he may fancy that the splinter-bar which has
cut him is some hostile animal, and expects, when the pole
bumps against his legs, to be again assailed in that direction.
Admitting that in time he gets accustomed to these phenomena
— becoming, what we term, steady in harness, still, to the last
hour of his existence, he does not clearly understand what it is
that is hampering him, or what is that rattling noise which
is always at his heels; — the sudden sting of the whip is a
pain with which he gets but too well acquainted, yet the unde
derivatw of the sensation he cannot explain — he neither knows
when it is coming, nor what it comes from. If any trifling
accident or even irregularity occurs — if any little harmless strap
which ought to rest upon his back happens to fall to his side,
the unfortunate animal, deprived of his eyesight, the natural
lanterns of the mind, is instantly alarmed; and, though from
constant heavy draught he may literally, without metaphor, be
on his last legs, yet if his blinkers should happen to fall off, the
sight of his own dozing master, of his own pretty mistress, and
of his own fine yellow chariot in motion, would scare him so

RELATIVE PLACES OF HORSES. 189

dreadfully, that off lie would probably start, and tbe more they
all pursued him the faster would he fly ! ' i:

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XLII.

1. Face-strap. 19. "Wheeler's rein.

2. Terret for the leader's rein. 20. Crupper.

3. Leader's rein. 21. Pad.

4. Head-piece. 22. Terret for wheeler's rein.

5. Hame-strap. 23. Belly-band.

6. Bearing-rein hook. 24. Trace-bearer.

7. Winker. 25. Trace-buckle.

8. Cheek-strap. 26. Trace.

9. Xose-strap. 27. False belly-band.

10. Rosette. 28. Bit.

11. Throat-lash. 29. Swirel-hook.

12. Bearing;- rein roller. 30. Pole-hook.

13. Front piece, or fore-top. 31. Pole-chain.

14. Bearing-rein. 32. Pole.

15. Hames. 33. Shackle or swing-bars.

16. Hame-tug. 34. Tug.

17. Collar. 35. Splinter-bar.

18. Hame-terret.

RELATIVE PLACES OF HORSES.

In placing horses in a team, we speak of near and off horses.
The term of " near " is probably a borrowed one. In a waggon,
the near horse is the one which is nearest the driver, who
always walks with the horses to his right hand ; and the other,
running abreast of him, is called the off or far horse, because
the farthest from the driver. This term indeed does not
refer to coaching so well as to waggoning, as the coachman
does not walk by the side of his horses ; but many of the terms
of coachmanship are drawn from the same source, and the ex-
pression " near " horse seems to be among the number.

The word " near " having been thus made use of in its ori-
ginal acceptation, has, in some counties, gradually superseded
the word left, in contradistinction to right; as we hear oc-
casionally of the " near side of the road,'* the " near wheel of
a carriage," the "near leg of ahorse ;" in short, it is substituted
for the word left. Or the term mav have arisen intermediately

190 DRIVING.

from this : that on the first introduction of carriages into this
country there was no driving on the box, hut on the saddle, and
that hence the term " near " was used to distinguish the saddle-
horse, and the term " off," of course, the other horse. These
erms were afterwards applied to the road, where, in meeting
carriages, according to the adage, "If you go to the left,
you are sure to go right; — if you go to the right you are
wrong."

Wheel-horses have the hardest place, as they are at work up
hill and down. Nevertheless, if favour be shown, it must be to
the leaders, because a tired wheeler may be dragged home ; but,
in the road phrase, if a leader cuts it, you are planted. It is a
rule always to put the freest leader on the near side, as he is
better in hand than on the other. If a leader be weak, and
cannot take his bar, the wheeler that follows him must be tied
up, and this will place him by the side of his partner. Leaders
should be fast trotters for fast coaches ; for, if they gallop, the
bars are never at rest, and consequently much of the draught is
lost in the angles described. To a coach-horse in fast work,
wind is almost as essential as to a hunter. Many high-blowers,
however, keep their time very well, with a little attention on
the art of the driver. If he see them distressed, he ought to
keep them off their collar, and let them only carry their harness
for a hundred yards or so, when they will recover, if their con-
dition be good. They work best as night-horses ; and, if driven
in the heat of the sun, they ought to be out of the throat-lash.
Indeed, a leader should never be throat-lashed in very hot
weather, if he can be driven without it. Many horses pull, and
ure unpleasant in it, but go temperately out of it.

In coach-horses, temper is much to be regarded. Some con-
tend that a horse should never know his place, — should go
either wheeler or leader, and on either side. If, however, a
horse working constantly in a coach prefer any place, he should
have it, and he will generally pay for the indulgence. Some
laorses, indeed, care not where they are put — working equally
well or ill in all places. As to the mode of putting young

RELATIVE PLACES OF HORSES. 191

horses in harness, the best way is to put one, for the first time,
with only one other, which ought to be steady, good-coilared,
and quick. A great deal of room should be given his head,
and he should be driven at the cheek of an easy bit, with his
pole-piece rather slack. There is great want of judgment in
throat-lashing a young horse — either wheeler or leader.

v horses go perfectly quiet as leaders, that would never
go as wheelers, because they will not bear being confined by
the pole-piece. All ought to have their sides frequently changed,
particularly young ones. As to horses' mouths, some will not
bear a curb-chain at all, while the bars and chins of others are
so hard, that it is difficult to make an impression upon them;
the latter being most prevalent.

It is difficult, however, to handle a coach-horse, particularly
a leader, whose mouth is very tender. A snaffle is not safe, as,
in case of his dropping or bolting, it has not sufficient power to
catch him up quickly, at such a distance from the driver's hand.
For a gig-horse, it may occasionally answer. The usual plan
then is to " cheek him," as it is technically called, that is, to
put his coupling-rein to the cheek instead of the bottom of the
bit. Should this be severe for him, and he swing his head too
much towards his partner, his draught-rein should be put down
to the bit, which will bring him straight. He should have
liberty in his bearing-rein, and his curb-chain should not be
tiirht. A check-rein to a nose-martingale is often of service in
this case, as it keeps his head steady, and makes him face his
work. Such horses in general work more pleasantly out of the
throat-lash.

Horses with very hard mouths require the bit with double
port, the Chiffhey bit, or the plan of putting the curb-chain
over the tongue instead of under the chin, which in some pre-
vents what is termed a dead mouth. Letting out the head of
the bridle in the middle of a stage, has also considerable effect,
us causing the bit and curb-chain to take hold in a fresh place.
A check-rein likewise is sometimes put to the middle link
of the curb-chain, to retain the bit in the middle of the

192 DRIVING.

mouth, and to keep it alive, as it is termed. In hard pullers,
moreover, putting the bearing-rein to the top, and the coupling-
rein to the lowest loop in the bit, creates a counter-action, not
only making the bit more severe, but keeping the mouth in
play. A hard puller is generally safest, and more in place be-
fore the bars than at wheel ; for, with a good pair of wheel-
horses, leaders are soon checked, and he pulls less with a free
than with a slack partner.

A coach-horse, if obedient to the hand, cannot well carry his
head too high, while a horse that goes with his head down has a
mean appearance in harness. The horse, however, that carries
his head higher than his partner, should have his coupling-rein
uppermost. A coach-horse should not be broken in a fast
coach, as in fast \vork there is no time to try his temper, and
to humour him. By being put at first into quick work, many
horses get into a habit of cantering, and never trot well after-
wards.

A kicking wheel-horse should be put on the near side, where
he is less liable to be touched by any thing that might annoy him ;
for, on the off side, throwing the reins on his back, or touching
his tail when getting any thing out of the boot, may set him off,
and cause mischief. — A kicking leader should have a ring on the
reins, for many accidents arise by a leader's getting a rein under
his tail, owing to the want of this. With first-rate coachmen,
however, this precaution is the less essential, that they generally
have their horses better in hand. With horses very fresh in
condition it sometimes happens, especially in a turn, that a
wheeler kicks over his trace, and an accident is sometimes t^e
consequence. A light hip-strap prevents this, by taking the
trace up with him when he rises. In London, this is particularly
useful ; for, when horses are turning short, or in a crowd, they
frequently have their traces slack, and therefore more easily
kicked over. The hip-strap looks slow, but it is safe.

COACHMEN. 192

COACHMEN.

Of late years, a superior class of men form our coachmen ; and
for this we are mainly indebted, first, to the driving clubs, and
the notice taken of coachmen by men of fortune ; and. secondly,
to the boxes being placed on springs. The latter renders it n
common practice for passengers to pay an extra smllins for *.he
box-place, whereas formerly a man would have given something
to be any where else. We are told that good coachmen are be-
coming, in proportion to their number, more scarce every year,
because, owing to the fine state of the roads, the condition of
the cattle, and the improved method of road-work, co.ich-
liorses are so above their work, that the assistance of the driver
is seldom required. When in town, says a writer in the Sport-
ing Magazine, " I sometimes take a peep at the mails coming
up to the Gloucester Coffee-house ; and such a set of spoons
are. I should hope, difficult to be found : they are all legs and
wings ; not one of them has his horses in hand ; and they sit
on their boxes — as if they were sitting on something else."

Certain it is that coach-work in perfection is not to be seen
a hundred miles from the metropolis — seldom so far. The
build of coaches, the manufacture of harness, and the stamp and
condition of horses are greatly inferior in the northern counties ;
and as to the coachmen, few that at all deserve the appellation.
There are few things in which knowledge of an art without
execution is of less value than in driving four-in-hand; for,
although a coachman may have knowledge, it is possible that,
from natural awkwardness, he may be unable to put it into
practical effect with a neat and appropriate movement of his
arms and hands ; and seldom is a certain propriety and neat-
ness more required than in handling the reins and whip. To
make a man a good driver, there is one requisite, and that is,
what are called on the roads " hands " — a nice faculty of touch.
No man with a hard, heavy hand can ever make a good horse-
man or driver. Neither will a nervous man ever be safe on a

o

194 DRIVING.

coach-box, for presence of mind and strong nerve are there very
often called into action.

The air and manner of a coachman have been cleverly de-
scribed by some periodical writers. Let us, say they, suppose
the horses put to their coach, all ready for a start — the reins
thrown across the off wheel-horse's loins, with the ends hanging
upon the middle terret of his pad, and the whip thrown across
the backs of the wheelers. — The coachman makes his appear-
ance. If he be a coachman, a judge will immediately perceive
it ; for, as a certain philosopher observes, " every situation in
life serves for formation of character," and none more so than
a coachman's. I was going to say — only let a judge see him
come out of his office, pulling on his glove ; but this I will say
— let one see him walk round his horses, alter a coupling-rein,
take up his whip and reins, and mount his box, and he will at
once pronounce him a neat, or an awkward one. — The moment
he has got his seat and made his start, you are struck with the
perfect mastership of his art — the hand just over his left thigh,
the arm without constraint, steady, and with a holding com-
mand, that keeps his horses like clockwork, yet, to a super-
ficial observer, with reins quite loose. So firm and compact
is he, that you seldom observe any shifting, except perhaps to
take a shorter purchase for a run down hill, which he accom-
plishes with confidence and skill untinctured with imprudence.

In a coachman, temper is also one of the essentials to a
good workman. — We are told of a great artist, that, having four
" rum ones " to deal with, and being unable to make them work
to please him, he threw the reins on the footboard, and ex •
claimed, " Now, d — n your eyes, divide it among you, for I will
be troubled with you no longer." The impertinences of pas-
sengers sometimes increase this irritability. In steam-vessels,
they adopt the plan of writing in large letters on the wheel
which directs the helm, " Do not talk to the helmsman." It
would be as well in some coaches to have the same rule adopted
— " Do not babble to the coachman."

It is not possible to obtain a better idea of a good coachman

COACHMEN. 195

ihan from tlic following account of one who is said to be the
first coachman in England for bad horses. " Having all his
life had moderate horses — some strong and heavy, some light
and blood-like, old hunters, old posters, — most of the teams
going and returning, — their work at the utmost stretch, always
overpowering, — having also had always, besides difference in
character, weak horses to nurse, — this ordeal has worn him
down to a pattern of patience. With these, and great weight
upon severe ground, he is steady, easy, very economical in
thong and cord, very light-handed and sometimes playful. — I
ooserved him closely, and discovered from his remarks, as well
as from what I saw, that his great secret of keeping his nags in
any thing like condition, and preserving them when apparently
worn out, is by putting them properly together, by constantly
shifting then* situations, and by the use of check -reins with re-
markable judgment — by which means he brings their powers
as near to equality as possible, besides preventing the evil of
boring. Indeed, his horses all go light and airy ; and though
at times his hold of necessity becomes powerful, yet, generally
speaking, he takes his load without a severe strain upon his
arms. — I own it is this particular knack which always wins me.
Both in driving and riding, give me the man who can accomplish
his object with a light hand."

The duty of a coachman is apt to injure the eyes — particularly
in cold blowing weather. He must keep his eye forward ; and
it is found that the sight cannot be fixed upon any thing be-
yond the head of the wheel-horses (not so far as this, in short
men,) without raising the eyelids, and consequently exposing
the eyes to the weather. Six parts of cold spring water, to one
of brandy, is a good lotion when the eyes suffer from this
ouuse. — Coachmen should also preserve their feet and bodies
from cold. In very cold weather, the chin should be protected
by a shawl, and the knees by thick cloth knee-caps. In very
severe weather, the breast should be protected ; for which pur-
pose hare-skins are now manufactured, and are getting into use
on the road.

196 DRIVING.

A coachman ought not to drive more than seventy miles a
day ; and, if this is done at two starts, so much the better.
The wearing of the frame, under daily excitement, must tend to
produce premature old age, and to shorten life ; and this excite-
ment must be very considerable when a man drives a fast coach
eighty or a hundred miles a day without a stop — particularly if
his coach be strongly opposed. Coachmen who wish to keep
ther selves light, take walking exercise in their hours of rest
from road-work.

A to amateur coachmen, it has been observed, that if a diet
were formed, before whom gentlemen-coachmen were to be
examined previous to their being considered safe, it would not
be amiss if they were put to the test of having the harness of
four horses taken to pieces, strap from strap, and then requested
to put it together again in the presence of the judges. There
would be no hesitation in pronouncing him safe who succeeded
in this, as his experience on the road must have been consider-
able. How these amateurs are trusted with the reins, coach-
men are now obliged to be careful, owing to the speed of coaches,
and the improved breed and condition of coach-horses. Hence,
we see fewer amateurs at work than formerly. It would indeed
be highly culpable in a coachman to trust the lives of pas-
sengers and his master's property to any one whom he did not
know to be safe, or even without reflecting that a man may be a
very safe coachman with horses he knows, and a very unsafe
one on some roads with horses to Avhich he is a stranger.

To gentlemen who wish to drive, and are really capable of
doing so, the following is recommended as not a very bad wa/
of doing business : — " When travelling with a coachman I do
not know," says an amateur, " I always adopt the following-
plan — that is, if I wish to work. In the first place, I never got
upon a coach-box yet with any thing like half-pay about me :
such as a black handkerchief around my neck, or in blue panta-
loons ; neither do I think I ever shall. I always take care to
have a good deal of drag about me : — a neat pair of boots, and
knee-caps, if cold weather: a good drab surtout — if not a

COACHMEN. 197

poodle ; a benjamin or two about the coach, and a little of the
spot, about the neck. For the first mile, I always observe a
-silence, unless broken by coachee ; but at this time he
generally runs mute. He is perhaps but just awake, or is con-
sidering about his way-bill — reckoning his passengers, thinking
what he has to do on the road, and, if a workman, looking over
his team to see if all is right. Leave him alone for a short time,
jii id when his mind is at ease, he will look you over as you sit
beside him. He will begin with your boots, proceeding up-
wards to the crown of your hat, and if he like you, and you
make a remark or two that please him, and show you to be a
judge of the art, the first time he stops he will say — ' Now, sir,
have you get your driving gloves on ; would you like to take
'em?' — I atn here alluding to country work, and not to the
roads near London."

Coachmen's expenses on the road being heavy, should be
taken into consideration by passengers. They have their horse-
keepers to pay every week, or they will not do their best for
them ; and the wear and tear of their clothes is a heavy tax on
their pockets. They are satisfied, however, with one shilling
under, and two shillings for anything over, thirty miles; and
they are well entitled to that sum — more especially when we
recollect that they are liable to have empty coaches. No man,
certainly, should give them less than a shilling, and if he often
travel the same road, his money is not ill bestowed. In re-
spectable coaches, no great difference is now made between the
fees given by in and outside passengers, as it often happens that
the latter are best able to pay.

Guards on mail coaches are necessary appendages to the
establishment ; and, that they may be equal to their duty, they
go only moderate distances — as from sixty to eighty miles,
when they are relieved by others. Those on the long stages,
however, are imposed upon by their masters; and, by being
made to do more than they are equal to — many of them two
nights up for one in bed, are half their time asleep. Some go
from London to Exeter, Shrewsbury, and other places equally

198 DBIVING.

distant, without stopping more than three quarters of an hour
on the road, which, in bad weather, is hard enough. Indeed, it
is wonderful how with their means they always contrive to live.
Guards are by no means useless appendages to stage coaches ;
for no coach, running a long distance and in the night, should
be without one ; but such guards should be provided with fire-
arms in good repair. Setting aside the idea of highway rob-
bery, it is impossible that, in the night, a coachman can see
to the luggage on his coach, — nor indeed, can the guard, if he
be asleep, and asleep he must be a great part of his time, if
worked in the way above stated. He should not go more than,
one hundred miles, and he should be paid by the proprietors.
But if the public should not be left to pay an armed guard, it
is monstrous that they should pay an unarmed one. As to
mail-guards, government allows them only a mere pittance of
a few shillings a week, leaving the public to pay them;
whereas the public have nothing to do with them, and it is the
most impudent imposition that these servants of government
should be paid by persons travelling. That they carry fire-
arms is true ; but it is to protect the letter-bags — property
which government is paid to protect — that they would use
these arms, and not on account of passengers. Strictly speaking,
they have nothing to do with the passengers, nor their lug-
gage ; their sole duty being to protect the mail. As, therefore,
government is paid for carrying the mails, government, and
not the public, should pay the persons who actually do protect
them.

MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING.

Before getting upon the box, a coachman should walk round
his horses' heads, to see that his curb-chains and coupling reins
are right, and, above all, that the tongues of his billet-buckles
are secure in their holes. Many accidents have arisen from
the want of this precaution. No man is a safe coachman
who does not see to these things. Of mounting and dismounting,,
there is nothing particular to be said ; except that, in the former,.

THE SEAT — STARTING. 199

the reins are to be taken in the right hand, and transferred to
the left as soon as the seat is reached.

THE SEAT.

The driver should sit in the middle of the box, quite straight
towards his horses, rather upright or backward, than forward,
with his knees nearly straight, and with his feet together, to-
ward the edge of the footboard. With the exception of a pliant
motion of his loins, on any jolting of the coach, his body
should be quite at rest, and particularly so when he hits a
horse. Independently of appearance, a firm seat on a box
is very necessary for safety to a coachman and his passengers,
for a trifle will otherwise displace him.

STARTING.

Before starting, four horses should stand clear, or at then
proper length from each other. They should have some notice
— a click, or a whistle given them to move. If the wmp is
used, the Avheclers should be touched, as generally the ablest
horses.

It is with coach-horses as with mankind — that where the
physical strength is in the governed, they must be humoured a
little. When starting, the coachman must not pull at their
heads, but feel their mouths lightly, or they may bolt, throw
themselves down, or break through their harness. If they are
old, and the stage commences with a descent, they should be
allowed to go a couple of hundred yards before they are put to
their usual pace. A young horse should be started very quietly,
making the old horse take collar first. This is especially ne-
cessary if the young one is inclined to be hot, as it will prevent
his plunging.

A young horse should first be started in a wide space, so that
he may get off without a check. If he be alarmed, and inclined
to bounce, he should not be held hard, and still less stopped ;
for, if so, he may not like, particularly if high mettled, to start
again. The old horse will prevent his running far. If a young

200 DRIVING.

horse be shy of his collar, he should not at first be pressed to
it ; as he may thereby take a dislike to it, and become a jibber.
A young horse, when first put to a coach, should be turned to
the pole very carefully, to prevent its touching his hind quarter,
which might make him kick. When he has been driven long
enough to be steady, he should be taken up in his bearing-rein,
put down lower on his bit, and driven in a wide circle, or figure
eight — keeping the inner horse well up to his collar and bit.
In breaking, he should be frequently stopped, but not held
after being pulled up, as, if high mettled, it will make him
restless, and if dull, he does not require it. If, on the contrary,
a young horse is heavy, and not ready to start when the com-
mand is given, he should be whipped till he answer it.

THE PACES.

These, in driving, must alwa}rs be a walk or a trot — never
a canter, which, owing to the draught, w^ould be equally in-
jurious to the horse and to the carriage. Either of these
paces, moreover, should be suited to the nature of the road.
Rapid driving, on the stones especially, exposes a carriage to
injury, both from shocks against others, and from those which
attend its own motion. However, it is sometimes for a moment
necessary, in order to get out of the way of carts, waggons, &c.

In public coaches, the pace is often too rapid ; and, should
any passenger plead for the horses, on the score of the excessive
heat, the coachman with the utmost sang froid replies that he
must keep his time, although the probability sometimes is, that
one or more of them may drop, by which considerable time
may be lost, as well as reduction in force ensue for the rest or
the stage. Horses should be more frequently watered during
hot weather than they generally are; increased perspiration
renders it necessary.

However well pleased thoughtless people may be at going at
an accelerated rate, it is certainly hard that other passengers
should be obliged to hazard their existence at the pleasure of a
reckless driver, who, in answer to all remonstrance, coolly
answers, lie must " keep his time." Something should certainly

THE TIME. 201

ie to prevent the cantering system* ; for no coach, be it

->> well built, can preserve its equilibrium so well when the

iii the canter or gallop, as when in the trot. At the

same time, it is to be borne in mind, that, at the rate our

s iu)\v travel, some slight degree of it may sometimes be

• idable, owing to horses trotting so variably, and its being

very uiilicult to obtain teams every individual of which shall be

able to trot through the distance at the required rate.

In driving four-in-hand, it is not every man who knows when

a coach-horse is at work, as a horse may keep a tight trace, and

doing little. There is, however, an increased tension of

the horse's frame when taking weight with him, which is the

surest test, and which never escapes a quick and experienced

eve. As already observed, those called lobbing-goers take greater

. r with them than horses of finer action, provided they are

equally close workers. Heavy draught shortens the stride of

horses, after they have been a few years at work. ,

THE TIME.

In short distances, to know precisely at what time it is neces-
sary to start, to arrive at any place at a certain hour, the driver
•ily to ascertain the distance, and to regulate the pace by
the following table : —

4 miles an hour, 1 mile in 15 minutes.

5 ditto ditto 12 ditto

6 ditto ditto 10 ditto

7 ditto ditto 8i ditto
ditto ditto 74 ditto

I> ditto ditto 64 ditto

10 ditto ditto G ditto

In the streets of London, ten minutes at least, in every hour,
must be allowed for stoppages.

* There is an act which requires that all four shall not gallop together ; and
many teams, especially in the neighbourhood of town, have one good trotter
to defeat the informer, known as the "Act of Parliament horse."— ED. Fifth
Edition.

202

DRIVING.

THE WHIP.

" We are too apt," said the late Lord Erskine, " to consider
animals under the domination of man in no view but that of
property. We should never forget that the animal over which
we exercise our power has all the organs which render it suscep-
tible of pleasure and pain. It sees, it hears, it smells, it tastes,
it feels with acuteness. How mercifully, then, ought we to ex-
ercise the dominion intrusted to our care ! "

Speaking to coach-horses from the box is now considered
slow, but it is not without its effect. Whipping, however, is
sometimes indispensable. The manufacture of four-horse whips
has arrived at great perfection, and affords employment to many
hundred hands.

llefined management of the whip is not of many years' birth ;
and even now there are but few who execute this effectually and
with grace. There are as many ways of whipping coach-horses,
says a clever writer in the Sporting Magazine, as there are horses
in the coach ; and, as there is a right and a wrong way of doing
most things, a young beginner may observe the following direc-
tions, beginning with the wheel-horses : —

Before a coachman hits a wheel-horse, he should twist his
thong three times round the crop of his whip, holding the crop
at that moment somewhat horizontally, by which means the
thong will twist towards the thin end of the crop, when the
thong, being doubled, will not exceed the length of a pair-horse
thong, and in some measure resemble it. Being double renders
it of course more severe, as it falls more heavily on the horse ;
and by the two ends of the thong not being spread, but close
together at the time of the blow, it falls with increased force.

When the off-side wheeler is struck, the coachman's right arm
should be put out from his body in the same position in which
he presents it to his tailor to measure him for a coat, but the
blow should proceed entirely from the wrist. The part on which
the horse should be struck is about four inches behind his false
belly-band, or somewhere near the short rib on his right side*

THE V.'IIIP. i£C)3

The stinging part of the blow is then felt under the belly ; and,
unless he is quite beaten, or of a sulky and bad disposition, he
seldom fails to answer it. If he do not answer it here, he must
'ick before the belly-band, when the blow falls just behind
re-arm, on a part on which the skin is very thin. In hitting
•.•-wheeler, the coachman brings his right hand exactly oppo-
site to his face, and, turning the crop three times around, as
before directed, he lets the thong fall sharply across the horse's
loins three times in succession, if he do not answer sooner, —
observing that, after the third blow, he draws the thong obliquely
across the horse's back, by which means his arm returns to a
state of rest, and the crop falls gently across his reins, just about
:r hand, the crop pointing a little upwards to prevent the
thong getting under or touching the near wheel-horse's tail.
Should the latter be the case, if the driver lower his crop, the
thong will almost always get released; but should it not, he must
let the thong loose, and draw it out from the point. When it
comes up from the tail, let the coachman throw back his crop a
little to his right hand, and the point of the thong will fall across
his fingers, when he catches it, and puts it back into his hand.
It must be observed, that, in striking the near wheel horse, the
wrist only, as in sword exercise, is at work : the body must be
quite at rest : and, after the whip is brought to bear, the arm.
must be quiet also, until the third blow is struck.

There is only one other method of hitting awheel-horse, which
is called pointing him. This is done by hitting him with the
point of the thong, when loose, just behind his shoulders, but it
is not considered neat execution. If there should be a free leader
before the bars it causes him to fret, and is only to be had re-
course to in emergencies — as, for instance, in turning round a
corner, or into a gateway, when a leader is to be hit, and before
the coachman can recover his thong a wheel-horse requires
whipping also.

If a wheel-horse show symptoms of vice, as a disposition to
kick, &c., or, in short, if he refuse to answer either of the other
calls upon his exertions, a blow with the double thong on his

204 DRIVING.

ears generally brings him to his senses. Without great neces-
sity, however, it is very reprehensible to strike a coach-horse
over the ears, the parts being very sensible.

It is generally supposed it is in whipping a leader that neat-
ness of execution is more especially displayed. It is, however,
quite a mistake to suppose that it is in the power of a coachman
to punish a leader with the single, as he can a wheel-horse with
the double thong. No doubt, however, the blow from the loose
thong falls very sharp, as it falls on a tender part — the inside of
the thigh.

As the off-leader presents himself more fully to the right hand
of the coachman than his partner does, the horse that is the less
free of the two is generally put on that side. There are but two
ways of hitting an off-leader: one, by letting the thong fall gently
over his neck, or just behind his pad, when his driver merely
wishes to refresh his memory, and let him know that he has a
whip in his hand ; and the other, when he wants to hit him
sharply, by striking him with the point of the thong just under
his bar. The hard hitters of the old school never conceived they
had done the latter effectually, unless they struck their horse
twice at least, if not three times, the last stroke always ending
in a draw.

As this word " draw" is peculiar to the road, it must be ex-
plained to such as may not exactly comprehend it. Suppose a
coachman to hit his off-leader three times. The first two blows
are given, as it were, under-handed — that is to say, the hand is
lowered so as to admit of the thong going under the bar the first
two strokes. When the third or last is given, the point of the
elbow is thrown outwards, so as to incline the thong inwards,
which brings it up to the coachman's hand after the stroke, it
generally falling across his breast, which would not be the case
were it not for the draw. Another advantage also attends the
draw : a thong so thrown very seldom hangs in the bars, and
nothing is more uncoachman-like than to hit a leader above his
bar. A horse's mouth should always be felt before his coachman
hits him.

THE WHIP. 2()J

Hitting the near leader with neatness and effect is the most
difficult part of the use of the whip. There are two ways of
doing it : one, by two common strokes and the dra\v ; and the
other by a sort of back-handed stroke, which is a very neat one,
and sufficiently severe, but it does not bring the thong so imme-
diately up to the coachman's hand as the drawn stroke does. In
the hack-handed stroke, the wrist describes an exact figure of
. and the arm cannot be kept, as before, quite still. In the
other method of hitting, the coachman's arm is brought about
opposite his chin, the first two blows proceeding from the wrist
alone ; but in the third, or the draw, the hand descends, tne
elbow is thrown outwards, and by two jerks of the arm, which it
is difficult to describe on paper, the draw is effected, and the
thong comes, as before stated, across the coachman's breast, so
as to enable him to catch it instantly.

There is one other way of hitting a leader ; and that is, by
what is called the chop. This is done by throwing out the right
arm rather forward, and with it, of course, the thong, and then
bringing it back sharply with the wrist inclined downwards. The-
thong falls severely on the horse's thigh, and comes up to the
hand again, as in the draw. This is a very useful blow in a
narrow confined place, or when it is necessary to lose no time
before a leader is hit ; and, when neatly done, has a very work-
man-like appearance. This blow generally falls above the bar,
particularly if a horse is not at work at the time.

It has been said that leaders should always be hit under their
bar. This, however, cannot always be done; for if a horse hang
back from his collar, his bar is so low that it may be difficult to
get under it. In this case, however, the blow is made to tell
smartly, as it is in the coachman's power to throw his whip into
the flank, which is a very sensible part. When a leader is well
up to his collar, he always can, and always should, be hit under
his bar.

Should the point of the thong catch, or, as they say on the
road, " get hanged," in the bars or the pole-pieces — neither of

206 DRIVING.

which it \vill do when properly drawn after the last stroke, as
the inclination of the hand in the act of drawing enables it to
clear them — no violence should be used to loosen it, or a broken
crop will be the consequence. On the contrary, the arm should
be thrown forward, and the thong lightly moved, when in a
minute or two it will shake out. If it be fast between the eye
of the main bar and the pole-hook, the leaders should be eased
a little, and it will get released. Sometimes, however, on a wet
day, a thong will lap round some of these things so fast as to
make it necessary for the guard or some person to get down to
untie it. This is technically called having a bite. The double
thong will also sometimes hitch in the ends of the wheelers'
traces, as also in the point of the false belly-band. To obviate
this, in gentlemen's harness, these parts are always covered, or
piped, as it is called.

A free leader should not be hit in a short turn, or he may
break his bar, perhaps the pole-hook, or even the main-bar.
Neither should leaders be hit in going over a small bridge which
is much raised, or when the pole points upwards, as their draught
on the end of it may snap it in the futchels. Some drivers per-
petually whip or fan their horses, which first irritates and after-
wards injures them, by rendering them insensible to the proper
aids or correction. It must be observed that the whip should
never be used but in case of necessity. Indeed, one of the best
proofs of a good coachman is to see his right arm still; and
although, for the safety of his coach, he ought to be able to
punish a horse when he requires punishment, yet he should, on
all accounts, be as sparing of it as he can. Horses ma} be
whipped till they become callous to whipping, and therefore
slow. In the condition in which coach-horses are now kept, a
pound of Nottingham whipcord will last a good coachman his
lifetime. The very act of throwing the point of the thong over
the leaders' heads, or letting it fall on their backs, as a fisher-
man throws his fly upon the stream, will set half the coach-horses
in England, in these days, into a gallop.

DRIVING. 207

THOROUGHFARES, PASSING, &C.

The driver should avoid passing through the great thorough-

:• the widest of the less frequented streets which

ran parallel to them. In London, he should never go into the

trough the Strand, Fleet-street, and Cheapside, between

twelve and live o'clock, if he can possibly avoid it, as these

- are then crowded with every kind of vehicle. He should

also avoid going into the City about mid-day, on Mondays and

Fridays, on account of the droves of oxen passing through the

principal streets.

The middle of the road is safest, especially for a loaded coach,
except under peculiar circumstances.

lu driving four horses, to keep them well iu hand is a most
material point, both as regards their work and for the safety of
the coach. The track made by a coach in descending a hill
shows whether the horses are properly held together or not.
Accidents from horses taking fright, and bolting across the road,
happen only to clumsy fellows, of whom the list is considerable.
The rules for passing and meeting carriages on the road have
already been given, yet there are times when they need not be
strictly adhered to, and a little accommodation becomes expe-
dient. Thus, if one coachman has the hill in his favour — that is,
if he be going down, and a loaded coach be coming up at the
same time — he who is descending, if he can do it with safety,
ought to give the hardest side of the road to the other coach-
man.

As to narrow spaces, it is evident that where the bars can go
the coach can go, as they are wider than the wheels ; and conse-
quently, if they are cleared, all is safe. The swing-bar is an
excellent invention, as a horse works in it from either shoulder,
and therefore quite at his ease. A sharp and experienced driver
may calculate exactly the space sufficient to pass between two
bodies at rest, and may therefore pass with confidence and at
ease. As, however, in streets, he must meet many carriages
<Iriven by inexperienced or intoxicated fellows, who do not for a

208 BAITING.

moment move in any direct line, he should allow them ample
room, and proceed •with the utmost caution. A driver must be
incessantly on the look-out, must watch every vehicle that ap-
proaches, and give it more room than it may seem to require.

ASCENDING AND DESCENDING.

In going up hill, it is in general best to trot up at first, and
to walk afterwards. In going down hill, it is best to keep the
wheelers tight in hand, to let the leaders just clear the bars,
and to come gently down. In the latter case, a turn of the
reins of the wheel-horses maybe made round the little finger.
(Plato XLIII. fig. 4.)

Although, however, it may be necessary to catch up wheel-
horses, and make them hold back their coach down hill, there is
nothing in which a light finger is 'more essential to safety. The
jnanner in which some persons haul at horses' mouths, when
descending with a load, considerably adds to the difficulty, by
trying the strength of the tackle. But this is not all : these
persons should be aware that all this force employed on their
horses' mouths is so much added to the pressure of the coach ;
in proportion to it is that pressure increased. The horses are
then drawing by their heads !

The objections to a locked wheel, with a top-heavy load, have
already been stated. If, however, -with a heavy load, and upon
a smooth hard road, a wheel must be locked, it should be that
.next a ditch, or other da?igerous part. In going down hill, a
coach always strikes on the side on which the wheel is not locked.
The coachman should therefore keep as much as possible on that
side of the road on which the wheel is locked : by crossing the
road, if he meet or have to pass any thing, the coach will not
strike; and by holding that way, at any time, it will prevent over-
turning. The coach naturally strikes in a direct line from the
perch-bolt.

The generality of passengers know not the danger of galloping
a coach, with three tons' weight in and out, down hill, at the
rate of twelve or fifteen inilcs an hour, with no wheel locked,

\

..

•::NI>IXI; AND DESCENDING. 209

of the wheel-horses depending on a small
leather strap and buckle at the top of the hames, — these coach-
men divining it beneath their dignity to drive with breechings.
thus, however, accidents would be much less frequent if
::ien took the precaution of pulling up their horses short,
-in the point of descending. In night-work, this is doubly
. because it often happens that a pole-chain is unhooked,
or a hame-strap gets loose, without being discernible by lamp or
moonlight.

ith wheel-horses that will hold back at all, I will be
bound," says ;>. clever writer and experienced coachman, " to
I loaded coach down most of the hills now met with on
our great roads, without a drag-chain, provided I am allowed to
puli up my horses at the top, and let them take it quietly the
first hundred yards. This, it may be said, would be losing time,
but, on the contrary, time would be gained by it ; for, as soon
as I perceived I was master of my coach, I should let her go,
and by letting my horses loose at the bottom, I could spring
them into a gallop, and cheat them out of half the hill, if there
were one (as frequently happens) on the next portion of road.
This advantage, it must be recollected, cannot be taken if the
chain be to be put on ; and I have therefore in my favour all the

required to put the chain on, and to take it off again."

There are, however, some horses which no man can make to

hold a loaded coach down hill. Of this description are, first,

the stiff-necked one, as he is called, who turns his head away

his partner, and shoulders the pole ; and, secondly, one

i he feels the weight pressing upon him, begins to

and jump, as coachmen term it; with these holding

back properly is out of the question. With such cattle, the

drag-chain must be had recourse to ; as well as when there is

the least reason to suspect the soundness of the harness. All

this confirms the necessity of checking the force of a coach

before descending a steep hill, and indeed in some cases — as

with bad holders — before coming upon a slight descent. The

term which coachmen have for this species of road, is "pushing

r

210 DRIVING.

ground;" and if the fall be long, it is astonishing how the
pressure of a loaded coach upon wheel horses is increased be-
fore getting to the bottom of it, and how difficult it would be,
with wheelers not of the very best stamp, to pull up short, if
any accident should happen.

Young coachmen, in descending a hill, should take care that
their leaders do not draw on the end of the pole, which many
free ones do when they find the coach coming quickly after
them ; for this not only increases the pressure of the coach on
the wheelers, but, should either of them stumble, it must assist
in bringing him down. The following good and characteristic
directions were given by a very experienced coachman, to a
gentleman who undertook to take his coach a journey for him,
but who, although he knew the road well, had never driven on it
before. " That middle twelve miles of ground," said he, " is a
punisher, and you must mind what you are at with this load.
You have two hills to go down, and three to go up, in the first
seven miles. Don't stop to put the chain on, as they'll hold
well, and the tackle is good ; and don't let them walk up the
hills, for they are bad hands at that — you will lose a horse's
draught by it, and perhaps get hung up on one of them. You
must take fifty minutes to do the first seven miles, and good
work too. When you get at the top of the last hill, get down
and put your near leader to the cheek, and they'll toddle you
over the last five miles in half an hour, with all the pleasure
alive."

The following observations on this subject from the number
of the Quarterly Review already quoted, are too interesting to
be omitted here.

" Many years have elapsed," he says, " since I first observed
that, somehow or other, the horses on the continent manage to
pull a heavy carriage up a steep hill, or even along a dead level,
with greater ease to themselves than our English horses. If any
unprejudiced person would only attentively remark with what
little apparent fatigue three small ill-conditioned horses will
draw, not only his own carriage, but very often that huge over-

ASCENDING AND DESCENDING. 211

grown vehicle the French diligence, or the German eilwagen, I
think he would agree with me ; but the whole equipment is so
unsightly — the rope harness is so rude — the horses without
blinkers look so wild — there is so much bluster with the postilion
— that, far from paying any compliment to the turn-out, one is
very much disposed at once to condemn the whole thing, and,
not caring a straw whether such horses be fatigued or not, to
make no other remark than that in England one would have
travelled at nearly twice the rate with one-tenth of the noise.
But neither the rate nor the noise is the point — our superiority
in the former, and our inferiority in the latter, cannot be doubted.
The thing to account for is, how such small, weak horses do
actually manage to draw a heavy carriage up hill with so much
ease to themselves. Now, in English, French, and German
harness, there exists, as it were, three degrees of comparison as
to the manner in which the head of the horse is treated ; for, in
England, it is elevated, or borne up, by what we call the bearing-
rein, — in France it is left as Nature placed it (there being to
common French harness no bearing-rein), — and, in Germany,
the head is tied down to the lower extremity of the collar, or else
the collar is so made that the animal is by it deprived of the
power of raising his head. Now, passing over for a moment the
French method, which is, in fact, the state of nature, let us for
a moment consider which is better — to bear a horse's head up,
as in England, or to pull it downwards, as in Germany."

Evidently fired with a favourite theme, he thus proceeds : —
" In a state of nature, the wild horse, as every body knows (?),
has two distinct gaits or attitudes. If man, or any still wilder
beast, come suddenly upon him, up goes his head ; and as he
first stalks and then trots gently away — with ears erect, snorting
with his nose, and proudly snuffing up the air, as if exulting in
his freedom — as one fore-leg darts before the other, we have
before us a picture of doubt, astonishment, and hesitation, all of
which feelings seem to rein him, like a troop-horse, on his
haunches ; but, attempt to pursue him, and the moment he
•lefk-s you — the moment, determining to escape, he shakes his

212 DRIVING.

head, and lays himself to his work — how completely does he
alter his attitude ! That instant down goes his head, and from
his ears to the tip of his tail there is in his vertebras an undulat-
ing action which seems to propel him, which works him along,
and which, it is evident, you could not deprive him of without
materially diminishing his speed. Now, in harness, the horse
has naturally the same two gaits or attitudes, and it is quite
true that he can start away with a carriage either in the one or
the other ; but the means by which he succeeds in this effort —
the physical powers which he calls into action, are essentially
different : — in the one case he works by his muscles, and in
the other by his own dead, or rather living, weight. In order to
grind corn, if any man were to erect a steam-engine over a fine,
strong, running stream, we should all say to him, ' Why do you
not allow your wheel to be turned by cold water instead of hot ?
Why do you not avail yourself of the weight of the water, in-
stead of expending your capital in converting it into the power
of steam ? In short, why do you not use the simple resource
tvhich Nature has presented ready-made to your hand?' In
the same way, the German might say to us, ' We acknowledge
a horse can drag a carriage by the power of his muscles, but
why do you not allow him to drag it by his weight ? '

" Let any one observe a pair of English post-horses dragging
a heavy weight up a hill, and he will at once see that the poor
creatures are working by their muscles, and that it is by sheer
strength that the resistance is overcome : but how can it be
otherwise ; their heads are higher than nature intended them to
be, even in walking in a state of liberty, carrying no weight but
themselves : the balance of their bodies is therefore absolutely
turned against, instead of leaning in favour of their draught ;
and if my reader will but pass his hands down the back sinews of
our stage-coach or post-chaise horses, he will soon feel (though
not so keenly as they do), what is the cruel and fatal conse-
quence. It is true, that in ascending a very steep hill an
English postilion will occasionally unhook his bearing-reins ;
but the jaded creatures, trained for years to work m a false

THE TURNINGS. 2 1 .'»

attitude, cannot in one moment get themselves into the scientific
position which the German horses are habitually encouraged to
adopt. Besides this, we are so sharp with our horses, — we keep
them so constantly on the qui vice, or, as we term it, in hand,
that we are always driving them from the use of their weight to
the application of their sinews. That the figure and attitude of
a horse working by his sinews are infinitely prouder than when
he is working by his weight, (there may exist, however, false
pride among horses as well as men), I most readily admit ; and
therefore, for carriages of luxury, where the weight bears little
proportion to the powers of the noble animals employed, I ac-
knowledge that the sinews are more than sufficient j but, to
bear up the head of a poor horse at plough, or at any slow,
heavy work, is, I conceive, a barbarous error, which ought not
to be persisted in.

" Whether there is most of the horse in a German, or of the
German in a horse, is a nice point, on which people might argue
a great deal : but the broad fact really is, that Germans live on
more amicable terms with their horses, and understand their
dispositions infinitely better, than the English ; in short, they
treat them as horses, while we act towards them and drill them
as if they were men ; and, in case any reader should doubt that
Germans are better horse-masters than we are, I beg to remind
him of what is perfectly well known to the British army, —
namely, that in the Peninsular war the cavalry horses of the
German Legion were absolutely fat, while those of our regiments
were skin and bone."

THE TURNINGS.

These must be regulated by the ground. A good driver
avoids all quick and sharp turnings. In town, it is much better
to drive on a little further, where another street may allow the
ample room requisite in turning. If a carriage do not pass
quite across a channel without turning, the perch must be
twisted according to the descent, because one wheel falls as that
opposite niip-le rises. By such a wrench, especially when

214 DRIVING.

going fast, the main or perch bolt is frequently broken, and
every part strained.

A loaded coach should never be turned short, even at a slow
pace, for the coach is never safe when there is not an even
bearing on the transom beds. If turned short, at a quick pace,
the higher and looser part of a coach must go over, because all
bodies put in motion by one power will proceed in a straight
line, unless compelled to change their course by some force
impressed. Hence a horse at full speed is with difficulty turned
to right or left ; and, if he turn suddenly, and of his own accord,
he puts his rider's horsemanship to the test. So with a coach,
a sudden turn to one side the road allows the body to swag
towards the other, and the centre of gravity is lost.

In a turn, a coachman must point his leaders well, that is,
take proper ground for them to make the turn, and let his
wheelers follow them. Moreover, as wheel-horses are always
in haste to make the turn, the driver must shoot them out on
the opposite side, just as he has pointed his leaders. Thus, if
the turn be to the right, he must catch up his near wheel rein,
and hit his off wheel-horse ; and vice versa. This will keep the
head of the pole (which he should have his eye upon) just be-
tween the leaders, and the wheelers will follow, as if they were
running on a straight road. This will also secure him against
danger, by clearing his coach of posts, gutters, &c. No man
can make a neat turn with four horses, unless he shoot his
wheelers, at the same time that he points his leaders. In turn-
ing, the wheelers must rather be kept up, and the leaders be
tight in hand, to avoid the corner ; for, if the wheelers flag, and
the leaders draw, the carriage must be brought against it.

THE RANKS IN TOWN.

These must never be broken, either in driving through crowded
streets, or in setting down at crowded places. As to admitting
others into the rank, every driver should do as he would be
done bv.

STOPS. 216

STOPS.

It is a good plan to use horses to stop by notice, as it may

ut accidents. In pulling up, the driver must pull the reins

equally, but rather those of the wheelers first. If this is attended

with ditticulty, take the wheelers' reins in the right hand, and

pull till they hang well on the breeching, or on the pole chains,

thus increasing the leaders' draught so much that they will

, be pulled up.

When a young coach-horse is stopped, it should be very
Lrradually — allowing at least ten yards to do it in ; for, if it be
attempted to stop him short, he will resist. A careful driver will
never keep his carriage standing in a great thoroughfare ; but
when obliged to stop in a crowded street, the driver should, if
possible, avoid the spot where another carriage is stopping;
should choose as much as possible the widest part of the street ;
and draw up close to the curb.

There is no part of stage-coach economy in which greater
alteration has been made than in changing horses. Unless
business is to be transacted — as taking fares for passengers,
setting down, getting out parcels, &c. — the average with fast
coaches is three minutes for each change.

ACCIDENTS, &C. TO HORSES.

A cantering leader, or one that frets, is generally mismanaged
by young coachmen. They are apt to pull him back, and en-
deavour to get him to trot, by the bit, which generally fails, or
makes him even worse, by bringing him back on his bar. The
right way is to pull him back by his harness ; that is, to keep
the wheelers back, so that he may feel his collar and bit at the
same time.

A horse that kicks ought to be taken very short in his pole-

(1 ; and, when he begins to kick, he should be

whipped on the cars — a punishment which should never be

inflicted but for vice. — Hallooing to a horse when he kicks, has

sometimes an effect. A hot leader is sometimes benefited

216 DRIVING.

by mopping. An experienced driver says, " I once bought a
capital coach-horse for twenty-six pounds, because no one could
drive him : and, as he had broken two carriages, he was the
terror of the neighbourhood. I mopped him, and could drive
hirn with the greatest safety, either leader or at wheel."

In the case of a horse falling, a periodical writer, replying
to another, states, " In one of his letters on ' the Road,' he
says, ' If the coachman be driving with the short wheel rein,
and a horse fall beyond recovery, he had better open his hand,
and let the reins fall out, than run the risk of being pulled o .1'
the box/ With all due deference to such authority, I cann >'
subscribe to this, as it frequently happens that a horse falls, is
dragged along the ground for a short distance, and recovers
himself the moment the coach stops, and then starts off at full
gallop, the other horses following his example. Now, if coachee
has opened his fist, and let the reins tumble out, and the
above occurrence should take place, I would certainly rather
be on the top of Cheviot than on the top of the said coach,
as the catastrophe would not be very difficult to foretell."

On many horses, hot weather has a singular effect; and,
therefore, it often happens that a good winter horse is an
indifferent summer one. Coach-horses are subject to • many
accidents, of which one is peculiar to them — namely, fracture
of the legs in trotting on level ground.* Fractures of the
foot in draught-horses and others are common; but fractures
of the leg in coach-horses when trotting over level ground,
are probably caused by over-tension of the limb in the net
of drawing. It is said that a coach-horse's leg is more fre-

* When driving one of the Birmingham fast coaches, just entering tlie
town of Dunstable, my near leader fell with her off hind-leg snapped clean in
two, held together merely by the skin. On pulling up to clear her from ti.e
coach, I found the cause of the accident; a piece of flint, shaped like a
hatchet, and with a blade as keen as a razor, still adhering to the bone,
against which it had either been whirled by a kick from one of the other three,
or had flown upwards from the tread of thi' mare herself.— ED. Fifth
Editi.ui.

ACCIDENTS TO COACHES, ETC. 217

cjuently broken, when, with a heavy load behind him, h<*
snatches at his collar in a turn of the road.

They are also subject to an affection known by the appellation
of the lick, which greatly injures their condition. In this state
they lick each other's skins, and gnaw their halters to pieces.
This probably proceeds from the state of the stomach, caused
by the excitement of high feeding and work. It may be re-
moved by opening or alterative medicines.

They are likewise subject to a kind of vertigo, which on
the road is called megrims. This, of which the immediate
cause is temporary pressure on the brain, is often brought
on l)v running in the face of a hot sun ; and, therefore, horses
subject to megrims ought to work at night. The attack ap-
pears to come on suddenly, though a snatching motion of the
head is sometimes observed to precede it. If not immediately
pulled up, the horse thus affected drops. Such horses should
have attention paid to the state of their bowels, and have fre-
quent antimonial alteratives. What is called " a megrim horse"
is always dangerous, especially near a precipice or ditch, as,
when seized, he rolls away from his partner, and, of course,
takes him with him.

ACCIDENTS TO COACHES, &C.

A necessary precaution in a gig is — never to sit with the feet
under the body, but always to have one, if not both, out before
it. " I had a passenger by the side of rne," says the driver who
gives this caution, " who was sitting with his feet under his
belly, and who was consequently thrown with much violence
into the road. I had five miles further to drive him, during
which he took care to have his feet before him."

In stage-coaches, accidents no doubt occur, and no one will
assert that the proprietors guard against them to the utmost of
their power. The great competition, however, which they have
to encounter, is a strong stimulant to their exertions on this
score. In some respects, also, the increase of pace has become
the traveller's security : coaches and harness must be of the

218 DRIVING.

best quality ; horses fresh and sound ; coachmen of skill and
respectability can alone be employed; and to this increased
pace is owing the improvement in these men's character.
They have not time now for drinking, and they come in colli-
sion with a class of persons superior to those who formerly
were stage-coach passengers, by whose example it has been
impossible for them not to profit. A coachman drunk on his
box is now a rarity — a coachman quite sober was, but a few
years ago, still more so. On the whole, however, travelling by
public conveyance was never so secure as it is at the present
time. Axle-trees and springs do not often break now ; and if
proprietors go to the expense, their wheels are made secure
against coming off.

The worst accidents, and those which, with the present struc-
ture of coaches, can never be entirely provided against, arise
from broken axle-trees, and wheels coming off on the road. The
guard, therefore, in whose department this lies, ought to examine
the axle-tree every time it is fresh greased. He should also re-
move it once in ten days, put a string through the bolt that
receives the linch-pin, and hang it up and cleanse it ; and he
should then strike it with a hammer, when, if uncracked and
sound, it will ring like a bell — the coachman attending to take
care that it be again properly screwed on.

Reins also break, though rarely, except in those parts which
run through the terrets, the rings of the throat-lash, or in the
billets ; and attention to these would make all safe, as far as
accidents from this cause are concerned.

Accidents happen also from want of attention to the security
of the bridles. The throat-lash, therefore — particularly of tiie
wheelers — should be as tight as can be allowed without injuring
respiration. There otherwise is always danger of the bridle being
pulled off. Accidents, moreover, happen from galloping coach-
horses down hill, or on even ground. If, indeed, a casualty then
happen, it must be a bad one. The goodness of a road is no
preservative against it : on the contrary, it is possible that if a
coach begin to swing, it may go over from the very circumstance

ACCIDENTS TO COACHES, ETC. 219

of the road being so level and so smooth that there is nothing
on its surface to hold the wheels to the ground. If, moreover,
there be two horses at wheel whose stride in their gallop differs
much as to extent, the unequal draught invariably sets the coach
rolling, and, unless the pace moderate, the fore-wheel passing-
over even a small stone, may, under such circumstances, cause
the coach to upset. In respect to lateral motion, however, much
depends upon the build of the carriage. In galloping coach-
horses, if the leaders lead off with two legs, the motion of the
coach is considerably truer, and the swing-bars are also much
more at rest, than when each horse uses the same leg.

It appears, then, that accidents to coaches are chiefly to be
attributed either to the want of proper skill and care in the
servants employed, or to what is still less pardonable, inatten-
tion on the part of their masters. Road-coachmen, fortunately,
are well aware that the law looks sharply after them ; and that
for neglect proved against them, they are equally answerable to
their employers, as these are to the public.

" If I were to go upon the road/' says an amateur, " I would
be a night coachman through a well-inhabited country. For six
months of the year, it is undoubtedly the pleasanter service ;
and I never found any difference betwreen taking rest by day or
by night." It is, however, calculated only for a man in the prime
of his days, as all his energies are required. The night coach-
man ought to know his line of road well. He must take rest
regularly, or he will be sure to become drowsy, if he do not go
to sleep. He must also keep himself sober ; keep a tight hand
on his horses ; keep the middle of the road ; and be sure to
keep time.

The night coachman must cast his eye well forward, and get
out of the way of carts and waggons in time. Although, by
looking perpendicularly from his box or at the hedges, if there
be any, he may always see if he be in the road, yet if he cannot
throw his eye some way before his leaders' heads, he is going at
random. He will often get close to things he may meet in the
road before he is aware of them; and therefore, as I have already

•220 DRIVING.

said, it is essential that he should be wide awake, and have his
horses well in hand.

Chains and springs on the bars are good things for night-
work, as they prevent the leaders' traces coming off. A narrow
road, sufficiently wide, of course, for carriages to pass with con-
venience— with no ditch on the side — is much the best for night-"
work. Unless \vhen the moon is very bright, a dark night is in
favour of safe travelling. When it is what coachmen term
" a clear dark/' the lamps give much better light than when
the darkness approaches to grey. In very wide roads, particu-
larly where there are no hedges to confine them, lamplight is
both weak and deceiving ; and moonlight is often glimmering
and doubtful, particularly when clouds are passing rapidly.
Lamplight is treacherous, both in fogs and when horses are
going at a moderate pace, with the wind just behind them ; for
then the steam arising from their bodies follows them, and ne-
cessarily obstructs the light. Sometimes, from driven rain or
snow, a coachman can scarcely open his eyes so as to see the
road to the extent of the light given by the lamps, in which case
a tight hand on the horses is especially necessary.

A heavy fog is the only thing which baffles the skill and in-
trepidity of our night coachmen. In this case, lamps are of no
avail as to showing light forward ; and, in the worst cases, the
only use that can be made of them is for the guard to hold one
in his hand behind the coach, by which he will be able to see
whether the horses are in the road or not. Lamps, however, are
always useful in case of accidents; and, except in very clear
moonlight, a night coach should never travel without them.

Accidents often occur from coachmen neglecting to light th^ir
lamps in going into a town. It often happens that, wrhen a coach
comes down the road in the morning, there may be no obstruc-
tion in the streets ; but rubbish from buildings, stones, or many
other things, may be thrown out by the time it comes up again
at night. When an accident happens to a coach, presence of
mind is much required. Outside passengers should never think
of quitting by jumping, from the fore part, at least, until she

OBSTRUCTIONS OFFENCES, ETC. 221

fill's to the ground. From the box, indeed, a man may get over
the roof into the guard's seat, and thence descend.

Among the various contrivances for dragging wheels, we may
mention a very ingenious one by Mr. Rapson. The drag is
applied to the nave of the wheel, with a chain attached, which
is fastened to the breeching, a small pin on each side going into
the bar of the drag. If one of these pins be taken out, the
wheel will be dragged, and if both are withdrawn, the wheels
are both acted upon during the descent, by the breech bearing
against the horse.

In the first of these diagrams we have a representation of the-
break attached to the wheel, but inoperative, the jointed circle
separating the chain, c, and bolt, b, from the nave. In the
second figure, the entire frame a, 6, c, is seen in direct colli-
sion with the nave, and by its friction retarding the locked
wheel. This, however, does not occur till the breeching of the
harness is drawn tight, by the pressure of the carriage upon it.

OBSTRUCTIONS, OFFENCES, AND INJURIES.

By the 1st Geo. I. c. 57, drivers of hackney coaches are ta
give way to gentlemen's carriages, under a penalty of 10s.

If a carriage be obstructed by disorderly persons, the driver
should take out his pocket-book, and let the persons guilty of
this see that he is taking a note of their number; and he should
then coolly tell them that he will summon them if they do not-
unmediately clear the way.

222 DRIVING.

If a carriage be injured by another running against it, the
driver should ascertain whose carriage has done the mischief,
and let his coachrnaker give an estimate of the charge for re-
pairing it; but, before he has it done, he should let the person
who injured it see the mischief, and pay the charge; or, as is the
-custom, let the repair be made by the coachmaker of the party
who committed the injury.

THE TURF.

IT ia singular that no portion of our domestic annals should
be so obscure as that which relates to the early history of our
first of National Sports. In the remotest ages of civilization (so
far at least as any existing records carry us back), a taste for
horse-racing was fostered and promoted as a social engine
peculiarly adapted to rural and political purposes. The Greeks
— the wisest and most polished people that the world has ever
seen — carried their estimate of its importance so far, that their
chiefs not only took part in the sports of the hippodrome, but
acted as officials in the regulation of its details. Philip of
Macedon thought it not unbecoming the imperial crown, that
he who wore it should discharge the office of judge at the
Pythian Games, and his son repaid in gold every line written

2L' 1 THE TURF.

by Pindar in honour of the chaplet of wild olive.* The verse
of Pindar, and the prose of Pausanias, have immortalized the
names of Olympia and Ehs. The latter has left us the minutest
particulars of the economy of racing in his day. He describes
the Olympian Hippodrome at Elis, and all its gorgeous display
of splendid embellishments and ingenious machinery, with a
care and prodigality of narrative that give assurance of the
importance which attached to the matter delineated. Of the
perfection to which, in that era, the science of the course had
attained, we need no better proof than the classification ob-
served in the Olympic Games — where horses were matched
according to their ages, and prizes instituted for races between
mares only (called Calpe). It is needless, however, to encumber
our subject with ancient lore, by continuing these classic refer-
ences. Enough has, perhaps, been already adduced to establish
this point — that we possess more knowledge of the condition of
racing three thousand years ago, than we do of the state it was
in three hundred years since in our native land.

But because we are in possession of such scanty materials, it
by no means follows that the little we do knowr should be with-
held. The reader will therefore have the courtesy to look back
with me to the tenth century, and I promise to bring him again
into the nineteenth with all convenient speed. As far back,
then, as the reign of Athelstan (925). we read that a present of
" running horses" was sent to that monarch from France, the
gift of Hugh Capet. As nothing however is known of the
character of those animals, we will pass on to the reign of
William, which affords better data. At that period a nobleman
(the Earl of Shrewsbury) appears to have imported se\eral
Spanish horses for his own use. Now, as the Moors had had
a footing in Spain for several centuries prior to the Norman
conquest, there is little doubt that the blood of the Bavb was, in
the eleventh century, extensively diffiu :::d through that country,
and that a highly improved breed of the horse was at the time
extant there. Here we have a reasonable era from which to
* The crown given to the victors in the Olympic games.

THE TURF. 225

date an amelioration of the indigenous race in our island. A
little more than a century later, in the reign of Henry the Second
(1154), we come to, as far as I have been able to discover, the
earliest mention of racing to be found in our national records.
This refers to a barbarous sort of running practised upon the
plain now occupied by Smithfield, which does not appear to
have been subjected to any regulations of time or method.
Smithfield, indeed, was then the great horse-mart, and very
probably the contests, exalted by their chronicler (Fitzstephen
the monk), to Olympic honours, were nothing more than ex-
hibitions, by rival horse-croupers, of the mettle, speed, and
action of their respective " palfreys, hackneys, and charging-
steeds."

Still, that horse-racing was about this time a popular pastime,
and one in which the nobles of the land were wont to take
pride, is fully established by the allusions to it that abound in
the many metrical legends, yet in existence, composed in honour
of Richard of the Lion Heart. These preserve the names of
the coursers, and speak of them as being valued at sums that,
allowing for the difference in the worth of money, quite exceed
any prices known in our day. The domestic troubles which
marked the reign of John, and the succession of wars in which
we were subsequently engaged, probably interrupted the pro-
gress of this sport materially — at all events, we do not find any
of our sovereigns giving their countenance to it from Richard
to the bluff Harry. Henry VIII. was constitutionally disposed
for manly occupations and amusements — of his moral tendencies
we speak not. We have it on the authority of Challoner that
he was much disposed to improve the breed of horses, for
which purpose he imported various descriptions from Spain and
Turkey. Fortune, too, enabled his daughter Elizabeth to do
much for our native breed ; the destruction of the Spanish
Armada having supplied us with many barbs and Spanish-bred
horses, their descendants, found in the vessels of that fleet which
fell into the hands of Lord Howard of Effingham.

226 THE TURK.

We now come to her successor, James I.,* who must be
considered as the founder of legitimate racing in this country.
He introduced the first Arab into England of which we have
any knowledge — that purchased by Mr. Markham, and known
as the Markham Arabian. The training system, which has
now reached such perfection, was then practised in its various
divisions of physic, work, sweating, and the etcetera of stable
economy ; and the weight to be carried for public prizes arranged
by authority. The Roodee, at Chester, was an established course
in this reign, one of the prizes being a silver bell, of the value
of ten pounds or thereabouts, run for in five-mile heats. Similar
prizes were also given at Theobald's on Enfield Chase, at
Croydon, and Gatherly, in Yorkshire, whence the popular term
" bearing the bell," no doubt, had its origin. His unfortunate
son Charles I. had little opportunity of forwarding the social
-concerns of himself or others. In his reign, however, the first
races on record at Newmarket were held, and, by a singular
fatality, to Newmarket was he borne a prisoner to the parlia-
mentary forces. The "civil dudgeon" of the Protectorate of course
was not friendly to the amusements of the turf, but, though sus-
pended, they were not lost sight of. Mr. Place, the stud-master
to Oliver Cromwell, imported the celebrated horse known as the
White Turk. He was also the owner of some very capital
t mares, one of which, during the search after Cromwell's pro-
perty at the Restoration, he saved from destruction by hiding
in a vault, whence she took the name of the " Coffin Mare."

With the Restoration came the palmy days of the Turf.
Regular meetings were established at Newmarket, and various
other parts of England; silver cups and bowls of the value of one
hundred pounds were presented as royal gifts, and, more than all,
the light of royal favour shone upon it in shape of Charles the
Debonair and Mistress Eleanor Gwynne. William III. had no

* The palace at Newmarket was built by this monarch for the purpose of
enjoying the diversion of hunting — no races having been held upon the heath
till the succeeding reign.

THE TURF. 227

taste for racing, and died by a fall from his horse. Prince
George of Denmark, on the other hand, was warmly attached
to the Turf, and promoted its interest by every means in his
power. We are indebted for many royal plates to his influence
with his consort Queen Anne. George I. was no sportsman; in
his reign, however, the alteration in the royal plates took place,
by which a sum of one hundred guineas was substituted in their
stead. Shortly after George II. ascended the throne, arose a
morbid yearning after legislating for the Turf. Some of the
acts enacted were mischievous ; very many were very silly ; one
was good : — " That no plate or prize of a less value than ^50
should be run for, under a penalty of .€200." It was during
this reign that the Darley and Godolphin Arabians were brought
into this country, — two horses from whom have descended all
the most celebrated racers that adorn the annals of our turf.
This is the period at which the genealogy of our unrivalled
thorough-bred horse then, was naturalized, and it is the date
whence I think it most convenient to begin my notice of English
racing.

Even a notice so confined as this is beset with obscurities
that few would conceive possible. As an instance, I will ad-
duce the case of an old and well-informed inhabitant of Epsom,
who some years ago published a very clever history of that
place. He starts somewhere about the Conquest, and never
halts for want of materials as he goes on, till he comes to the
great stumbling-block, concerning which he shall speak for
himself: — "When the races on Epsom Downs were first held
periodically, we have not been able to trace j but we find that
from the year 1730 they have been annually held in the months
of May or June, and about six weeks previous to which the
hunters' stakes are occasionally run for on the Epsom race
course, at one of which, in 1/30, the famous horse Madcap won
the prize, and proved the best plate-horse in England."

To return, however, to the reign of George II., though we
find little bearing on the business of the Turf to be gleaned from
its records, it introduces us to the great forefathers of our

228 THE TURF.

thorough blood, and stirs one of the most interesting questions
in our domestic natural history — thq problem of the seed or
origin of the English thorough-bred horse. A brief search
through the stud-book will convince the inquirer that, almost
•without exception, our great racers were and are descendants
of the Darley and Godolphin Arabians : I use the latter term
merely because its conventionality now identifies those celebrated
animals. They were both, as has been stated, imported in this
reign : the question that I would here investigate applies
equally to each, but, for the sake of simplifying it, I will treat
it with reference to the latter only. " That he was a genuine
Arabian," says the stud-book, ' ' his excellence as a sire is deemed
sufficient proof;" a little further on we read, " It is remarkable
that there is not a superior horse now on the Turf without a
cross of the Godolphin Arabian, neither has there been for
several years past." The probable date of his arrival in this
country was 1725, or thereabouts. Hundreds of Arabs had
preceded him as sires, their introduction for that purpose having
been a very general speculation from the tim.e of Charles I.
That the indigenous island breed had thereby been rendered
good service, there can be no doubt ; but that the Turf derived
any signal advantages from the importations is more than

roblematical.

Are our celebrated strains of racing blood derived at all from
an Arab source, and, if so descended, are they excellent conse-
quently, or of accident ? As regards the first moiety of the in-
quiry, a work has just appeared in Paris, the production of a
gentleman of some literary celebrity*, relating to the genealogy
of the horse so long known to us as the Godolphin Arabian.

His statements go to show that he was a pure Barb, presented,
with seven others, by the Bey of Tunis to Louis XV., about the
year 1/31. All the portraits I have ever seen of him certainly

go to strengthen this reading of his descent, and proclaim him

not of Asiatic origin. The date is an erroneous one, as he was
sire in England in the year in which he is said to have reached
* M. Eugene Sue.

THE TURF. 229

France; but v, c must be content with very vague data in all that
concerns our subject a century ago. As to the second division
of the question, after-time must furnish the means of replying
to it, if it be ever answered. My bias is to a belief that there
exist families of the horse in the East possessed of a perfection
infinitely surpassing any generically inherited. This I have at-
tempted to demonstrate in a work upon which I am at present
vd, some portion of which has been already published.*
The fact (of which I was made conscious by authority beyond
question) that the Imaum of Muscat, one of the most powerful
sovereign princes of India, expended ten years of active search,
backed by the enormous bribe of ten thousand pounds, before
he could procure a descendant of a line sufficiently pure to pre-
sent to King George IV., seems to establish the truth of the
theory to which I profess being inclined. All that we learn from
our knowledge of the almost religious veneration with which the
genealogy of the horse is treated in the East, goes to the like
confirmation. " It is remarkable that there is not a supei-ior
horse now on the turf without a cross of the Godolphin Arabian,'*
I leave the reader to interpret as his own reflections may lead
him.

Shall I venture, at the hazard of pursuing my theory " ultra
fines," to offer one more example in support of it ? That no
structural organization available to the eye, no individual excel-
lence in the parents, influence, in our raising stock, the per-
formances of their offspring, are truisms taught by every stud in
the kingdom. All that exist among us, descended from the great
forefather of the Turf, are capable of producing offspring of equal
pretension, as regards the root from which they are sprung.
Far different was the result in relation to the importations of
Tv.i-tern blood contemporary with the Godolphin, and the same
it has been with all more recently introduced. Enough, at all
events, has been adduced, if not to prove my position, to warrant
me, at least, in its assumption, as well as for offering it to the

* Annals of the British Turf, from the Introduction of Eastern blood to the
present Tnno. The first century concluded in the Old Rportinjr Magazine.

230 THE TURF.

consideration of those who hold the subject to which it relates
of sufficient interest to engage their attention.

From such speculations on the origin of the British race-
horse, we will turn to the annals of his exploits, — a theme more
generally attractive, though intrinsically less important. Here,
to begin with the early worthies of the turf, all is as obscure as
is the genealogical problem with which we have been already
engaged. Of the performances of Childers, detailed, as they are,
with all apparent microscopic observations of the seconds' hand,
I am convinced that we know rather worse than nothing. In a '
recent work of more than an ordinary character on the subject
to which it addresses itself (Lawrence's History of the Horse),
Childers — Flying Childers, as he was designated par excellence —
is stated to have been a chestnut, whereas he was a rich bay with
four white legs. The same slovenly style, no doubt, attaches to
the records of the early performances, as well as to the more
recent attempts of equestrian historians. Again, the only crite-
rion by which we can estimate them is, when wre can refer to a
timed race, because, knowing little of the principals, we cannot
be supposed to have a better knowledge of the pretensions of
their contemporaries. Now, even in our day, when all the
appliances for chronometrical accuracy are so vastly improved
and multiplied, we rarely hear of the time of a race being kept
at all, even accidentally : it is never done by authority, or on a
principle deserving of confidence.

We know that the taste, in the middle of the last century, in-
clined to long distances, and repeated exertion — six and eight-
mile heats being events of constant recurrence ; and yet we are
required to believe that there existed at and previous to that
time a flight of speed unknown to our degenerate days. More-
over, by far the greater portion of the early racers were under-
sized, Galloways as the old Calendars have them in every page;
and stride is, save in rare exceptions, indispensable to a high
degree of swiftness. In the absence of any actual data as to
speed, worthy being confided in, it may not be inconvenient to
relate a performance of one of the first-elms horses of that

THE TURF. 231

period ; and, by contrasting it with a match against time, done
by a contemporary hackney, some deduction may be drawn of the
qualities of the racers of that era.

Gimcrack, a grey horse bred in 1760, by Cripple out of Miss
Elliot, was considered one of the best of his day. In consequence
of his superiority, he was sent to France, where he was matched
for a large sum to do a certain distance against time. Whatever
it was, he was the winner, having accomplished twenty-three
miles in fifty-five minutes. This was probably in 1770' In 1778,
a foundered hackney, aged twenty-two, belonging to a Mr.
Hanks, did twenty-two miles within the hour, upon the high
road in the neighbourhood of London. Gimcrack carried eight
stone : the weight on the hackney is not given, but there is no
reason for believing it less than eight stone ; so that one of the
best race-horses of that day could only beat a broken-down hack
a mile and five minutes in an hour !

It is a conventional fallacy to attribute to past days virtues
superior to those in which we live. Every thing, from the sea-
sons to the flavour of home-brewed, was better, if we credit the
popular voice, " in the good old times." To examine the appli-
cation of this rule to the matter before us, I may perhaps be
permitted to borrow a leaf out of my own book, seeing that I
could scarce make my argument stronger in any other form of
words.

" After a careful examination of all the best authorities bearing
upon the condition of the Turf in that so emphatically called its
palmiest era — the middle of the last century — I find nothing to
warrant the belief that, as a species, the contemporaries of King
Herod, Imperator, Eclipse, Florizel, and Highflyer, possessed
either speed, power, or symmetry, unknown to the racer of our
day. At the very date to which this extraordinary excellence is
ascribed, we find the degeneracy of that particular breed the
subject of legislative consideration ; and in 1740 that an Act of
Parliament was passed, denouncing the Turf as the cause of the
growing debasement of the breed of horses all over the king-
dom, and fixing the weights to be carried in all plates and

232

THE TURF.

matches at ten stone for five-year-olds, eleven stone for six, and
twelve stone for seven-year-olds and upwards, on pain of a
penalty of ^200, and forfeiture of the horse. It is true that
this Act was repealed soon afterwards, through the intervention,
as it was believed, of the Duke of Cumberland ; nevertheless it
is manifest that there must have existed strong grounds for com-
plaint against the system of breeding and racing before the con-
sideration of its economy would be made a subject of Parlia-
mentary interference. Let us turn to the weights carried by
two-year-olds fifty years ago, and those common to the present
period, — the former averaging from six stone to six stone six
pounds, the latter from eight stone five pounds to eight stone
seven pounds, and what evidence of degeneracy does that fur-
nish?" Racing, wherever we meet it existing as a popular sport,
is the growth of a root indigenous to England. All the appli-
ances of civilization are carried to a higher degree of perfection
among us, in the present day, than at any former period of our
history: the Turf, and all its materiel, it cannot be doubted, has
attained a comparative condition of excellence.

In a nation peculiarly attached to rural sports, that, as matter
of course, becomes entitled to the place of honour which diffuses
tho greatest portion of enjoyment to the greatest number of
people. In this view, racing is well entitled to the pre-eminence
which it has so long claimed, and had conceded to it ; but it
prefers demands of a higher nature than its mere pleasurable
results. In a political sense, it is an engine of no mean im-
portance. A state must benefit largely from an agency which
exhibits its nobles promoting, at great individual cost, a sport in
which all classes can participate equally with themselves, ard
which brings together all the divisions of society for one end
and purpose — social recreation. Where shall we seek the great
moral of England's power and station? — In the wealth which
commerce pours upon her shctres ? — In her wooden walls ? — In
the skill, learning, and valour of her sons ? We can scarce study
it in a more impressive page than that yearly spread before us
at the great popular re-unions of Epsom, Ascot, and Doncaster.

THE TURF. 233

Let such as love such lore, then, search after it where the exa-
mination will surely reward their industry : we will take it up,
abstractedly, as a pastime, and in that character look into the
nature and influence of its present economy.

As a treasury of art, an assembly of learning, ingenuity, and
pleasure, our metropolis has many rivals — some superiors: in
our rural life we stand alone. Mainly this has been brought
about by — is the consequence of — a general taste for field sports.
Whether the cause of morality is served by horse-racing, it is not
our province to inquire. An inelegant but most apropos salt-
water axiom says, " every man to his post, and the cook to the
fore-sheet." Mankind, since the creation, has set its face against
all work and no play, and will do so to the end of the chapter.
~\Ve are of the disciples of Democritus ; and, feeling in the vein,
will just touch in here, merely in outline, a faint sketch of a
DERBY DAY.

Perhaps, with one exception alone, none of the realities ot
life come up to the anticipations of them ; and what, you ask, is
that singular deviation from the general rule? — It is a DERBY
DAY. Imagine a conglomeration of two millions of souls stirred
to its penetralia, shaken from its propriety, morally earthquaked,
because of the necessity which annually requires that a certain
portion of the mass (say a fortieth) should rendezvous in a
neighbourhood where certain horses are to contend some two
minutes and sundry seconds for certain monies, and you arrive
at a general idea of something by no means in the ordinary
course. The scene of this commotion is London, the majority
of the actors automata that make yearly one solitary diversion
(in both the word's interpretations) from the regular cycles of
their orbits. But such a Saturnalia demands a word anent its
note of preparation.

As soon as the month dawns, big with the catastrophe of
Epsom Races, straightway from Belgrave Square to Shoreditch,
from the Regent's Park to uttermost Rotherhithe, forth the
sackage goes that guts, from garret to cellar, every Pantechnicon,
Bazaar, and Repository of all and singular the wheeled conveni-

234 THE TURF.

ences and inconveniences peculiar to each. Anon the horse, in
all its infinite gradations, is had in requisition, from Newman's
choicest specimens of blood, that devour the Srwey highways,
to the living quadrupedal skeleton redeemed from the knacker/ s
knife at the last Smithfield show for fifteen shillings, and a
" drop o' summut for luck." The day arrives, and lo ! a mighty
chain of carriages, " in linked grumbling long drawn out," ex-
tends from the Elephant and Castle to the merry Downs of
Epsom, whitherwards we will suppose thy anxious way hath at
length been achieved. The moisture of travel encumbereth thy
brow : searchest thou for thy best Bandana to relieve thee of
the damp ? Luckless wight ! —

" That handkerchief

Did an Egyptian from thy pocket prig."

Is not the tide of humanity at the flood of spring ? Ten deep
do vehicles of all kinds, definite and undefinable, line the course.
Opposite and around the stand all is high-bred and aristocratic :
lower down, leading for Tattenham's classic corner, you haply
take your curious path. What lots of pretty girls you encounter
as you go ! — each so lady-like and bien mise, you would never
dream of their metropolitan whereabouts, were it not for those
awful mortalities that cluster around them ; brothers, cousins,
lovers it may be — pale shadows that haunt the glimpses of
Bow Church — horrible illusions from Ludgate Hill and the
Ward of Cheap, with prickly frills to their linen, swallow tails
to their coats, green velvet waistcoats, or, still more shocking,
similar habiliments of black satin, whereon the indecent chain
of Mosaic grins ghastly, like the gilding on a cofim ! — faugh '

Drawing near to the lines, hark ! from glass coach, britscha,
jarvey, phaeton, proceed various sounds of discontent. — " Cold
chickens, veal pie, lobsters and no salt." — " Half-a-dozen bottler
is all very fine, and never no corkscrew." — " Sir, I'll set that
right if you'll only accommodate us with the loan of a glass ;

really it's too provoking." Ascend the hill, approach the

Ring, and hear what sums are jeopardied on the coming event! —

THE TUKF. 235-

enough to purchase half- a-score of German principalities; but
the warren is open, and thither you are borne by the countless
thousands who throng for a glance of the coursers on whom
hang the hopes and fears of all.

No spot can be better adapted for the purpose to which it is
assigned than the so well-known warren ; but all that nature
has done man takes especial care to frustrate. Instead of 'its
cool quiet alleys being kept for the tranquil preparation of
animals peculiarly disposed to excitement (their most dangerous
foe at a moment when the entire possession of every faculty is
of such vital consequence), every "dingle, nook, and bosky
bourn" is invaded by a horde of ravenous, sight- seeing cockneys,
of all beasts of prey the most reckless and perverse. Amid this
restless crowd of babbling, cigar-smoking untameables, the
process of saddling is effected, and, with graceful steps, the
fiery-footed adversaries depart for the lists.

You reach the place of starting, and what awaits you there ?
Order, decorum, and all fitting arrangement for the important
ossay of which it is the arena ? A second chaos ! — all the
human elements thrown together in a moral whirlpool. A score
of men in buckram suits (blue linsey-wolsey), attempting to
dispose of twice as many thousands — something like barring
the gates of a beleagured town with boiled carrots ! They draw
together for the start — infinitely the most influential point in
the great game to be played. Here all is confusion worse con-
founded: the multitude opens its thousand throats of brass; the
steeds are frantic ; the jockeys (born and bred devils from their
cradle) practise every conceivable stratagem ever hatched in
Fiendom ; and there stands one nervous old man to front the
pitiless pelting, and produce from such materials a result with
which all are to be satisfied. "They are off!" and the old
gentleman, in his agony, pronounces " go," and the fatal signal
has gone forth. Over the hill, adown the fall, there is a
meteoric flash, as though a rainbow had borrowed the wings of
the lightning, and all is over !

The Derby is decided — the steeds turned round — the jockeys

iM'» THE TURF.

approach the scales — Holy Mother of Moses ! has it entered the
heart of man (even an Irishman) to conceive the tearing and
swearing, the howling and screeching, that instant rends the
empyrean ! Quick as thought a circle of bludgeons and
constables is formed, into which the horses as they arrive are
received, arid against which a roaring ocean of humanity is
dashing as fiercely as the vexed Atlantic. Look towards the
grand stand — behold whole acres of countenances uplifted to
the sky, wedged as closely as a crate of French eggs, and
resembling nothing as yet discovered but a monstrous dish of
opened oysters ! The round earth is shaken, and echo gives up
the ghost — the thunder hides its diminished head, as with the
bellowings of ten thousand volcanos myriads of furious lungs
crash forth, " WHO HAS WON ?" Thus whilom did I sing of
this scene ; and with better experience, save in the episodes of
flying voltigeurs, men " with never no back -bones at all, only
a slip of gristle to hold head and heels together," and epicures
in cutlery, " who swallow knives and forks for all the world like
gingerbread nuts," I can add nothing to the beau ideal of a
DERBY DAY.

How little can they, who first give existence to a principle,
foresee how it will operate, and what may be its results. The
pastime of horse-racing, fostered and promoted simply as a
channel of amusement by the gay and thoughtless Charles,
called into being the strongest impulse of man's nature —
emulation, and thus entailed upon this country a race of the
noblest of all existing animals, of a character apparently su-
perior to that originally destined by nature. This may be an
erroneous theory, but as yet we are unacquainted with any
variety of the horse comparable to the artificial stock known as
our thorough-blood. The very general efforts that were made
from that period by the nobles and great landed proprietors to
in1. prove by lavish outlay, and all the appliances which it can com-
7tmnd, the best strains of the recently imported Oriental blood,
towards the middle of the last century, seem to have carried the
race-horse as a species as near to perfection as his generic

THE TURF. Z37

organization will admit. True, every year produced some few
infinitely superior to their contemporaries, but they were pheno-
mena,— indebted to no individuality of parentage for their
excellence, and unpossessed of the faculty of endowing their
descendants with similar gifts. As a race, when opposed to
the indigenous horse of any quarter of the earth, the English
thorough-blood is universally victorious; among the various
families into which it is divided at home, no constant succession
of superiority has ever discovered itself.

I am aware that those who only take a superficial view of the
economy of our racing system will at once pronounce against
this position. They will adduce the sons and daughters of
King Herod, Eclipse, and Highflyer ; in our day, of Sultan and
Emilius, as far surpassing the ordinary run of their contempo-
raries. But they do not bear in mind that not only did and
does the progeny of these justly celebrated sires greatly out-
number that of their less favoured brothers, but that the best
mares of their respective eras were and are exclusively put to
them. Not to travel beyond our own day for proofs, did ex-
cellence ensure its like, what chance would have remained to
those who now and then breed a solitary nomination against
the gigantic studs of Hampton Court, Riddlesworth, or Underly ?'
To confine the question to the preseat year (1838), we had
evidence that not all the wealth, skilful training, Sybarite care
and treatment of the best of England's blood could produce
a match for the son of one of our indifferent racers, — the
despised of an Irish tenth-rate stable, — the wonderful and the
basely-abused Harkaway.* I may be told that he was defeated
here, and by second-raters, too, — but under what circumstances ?
"With ordinary care, without having been subjected to actual
ill-treatment, at weight for age there was nothing of the year
in England that could have stood any chance with him.

From these premises the deduction at which we arrive bearing

* This extraordinary animal is now (December 1838) advertised for snle,
hi*s price six thousand guineas, with this strange addition, "that his owner
(Mr. Ferguson) rides him hunting once or twice a week ! "

538 THE TURF.

upon the economy of the turf, its nature and influence is two-
fold, and admits of a very brief solution, — the first being that
the day is long passed since the means of winning upon the
race-course were to be obtained by breeding ; the second, that
the vast advantages still to be derived from a proper application
of our thorough-blood is most strangely neglected. Mr. Bowes
began his racing career by breeding a winner of the Derby,
while the late Duke of Leeds, the most extensive breeder of
blood stock in the north, toiled in vain for the Leger till he
won it with a colt bought from the tail of the plough. Lord
George Bentinck, the best winner on the turf of modern days, if
the Calendar be any criterion, regards breeding racers as ail
expedient no man in his senses should dream of, and, acting
upon his theory, has put money in his purse. A first-class racer,
a colt of extraordinary promise, are each productions of chance-
medley, only to be come at by being secured where and when
they can be found.

But if the Turf be thus restricted in further profiting, save as
matter of hazard, by the means which securely ministered to the
success of its first speculators, it furnishes materials from which
may be moulded other distinct races, as valuable, each in its
province, as the flying family of the modern race-course, now
the sole representatives of our thorough-blood. The ragged
regiment of cock-tails will, it is devoutly to be hoped, speedily
be disbanded ; the day soon arrive when no gentleman shall be
seen bestriding the mongrel of a base-bred hackney, scarce
worthy the shafts of a costermonger's trap. And first, as is be-
fitting, such reform must commence with its next of kin — THE
FIELD. Shall this, assuredly the second — nay, the twin-sport
of racing, in the esteem of Englishmen, long continue dependent
upon chance for a supply of horses for its service ? Impossible;
the period cannot be far distant in which the British thorough-
bred hunter will be as distinct a race, and of as high renown, as
his progenitors were the pride of the Turf.

HUNTING.

As the whole object of the Manly Exercises is not accomplished
in the attainment and practice of them, it was thought con-
venient that the business of their details should be succeeded
by a partial notice of some of those sports of which they form
the elementary process, and which may be regarded as their
ultimate " end and aim." It has been well said by my talented
friend, Ninirod, that all the writing in the world will not make
a sportsman. The pen of Pindar, and the pencil of Grant,
indeed, exhibit him in all perfection to our admiration; but,
could they both write for the education of the student whose
ambition is Olympic fame, they would not insure success. Like
the poet, he must be born, in a manner, to his cunning

The Exercises, upon which Mr. Walker has written, admitted

240 HUNTING.

of being inculcated by methodical rules, and acquired by a
systematic routine of practice. An acquaintance with them will be
found of service to youth, whatever the destination of its man-
hood may be ; while they are essential to the formation of a
frame and character fitted for the maturity likely to be devoted
to the wear and tear of our hardy Rural Sports. Driving and
Yachting, though neither of them strictly coming within the
pale of a course of physical exercises, still are not out of place
in a practical book devoted to the science of manly recreations,
because each is governed by certain rules, which may be taught
and acquired. It is not so with the subjects constituting the
matter on which we are at present engaged. A man may out-
study Zoroaster without being one whit the better qualified for
winning a fifty-pound plate, hitting oif the line of a fox that
has been headed, or bringing down his woodcock in cover ;
these are arts which, being decimated, leave one part to theory
and nine in favour of practice. For this cause I have made my
Article on the Turf of a character more suited to the purposes of
the general reader than those of the visionary theorist, who may
fondly hope to meet, on page traced by mortal hands, a recipe
for breeding, training, and managing an embryo winner of Derby
or Leger. The Chase, however, admits of a certain code of
general maxims : it has, if not limits, at all events courses better
defined than those of the Turf, and to the application of them
by practical men of modern experience we will at once proceed.
Assuming that a tolerable proficiency in horsemanship has
been attained before the young disciple of Diana ventures to
show at all with hounds, he will do well to dedicate the first
of his novitiate to hare-hunting, whether his future destination
be that of a M. F. H., or merely a partaker of the " light
from heaven," dispensed by the " noble science." As this little
treatise addresses itself more particularly to the latter, it will
be sufficient to point out what should be his aim in his early
lessons. Of these, the most essential to the formation of a good
sportsman, and the only one that will enable any man to live
to the end of a severe run, is, that lie cultivate the faculty of a

HUNTING. 241

quick eye to hounds. With harriers he will constantly have
practice in this task : the perpetual doubles to which nine
hares out of ten, when chased, resort, will soon convince him
of the necessity of keeping a wary look out for the line towards
which the leading hounds incline. He will have little difficulty
in deciding with which portion of the pack, or with which in-
dividual of it, the scent is, if he only observe closely when there
is any indication of a check. The instant a hound catches the
scent, he will see him drop his tail horizontally, and spring to
the front, the one who has lost it elevating his, as if engaged
in questing. Keeping his look-out always upon the leaders, and
leaving the body of the pack to follow a similar system, he
turns his horse as he sees the chase lean, and thus is going at
his ease inside the circle, around which others can hardly live
at the best their nags can accomplish. When a huntsman is
coming past with hounds, — particularly at check in a lane or
road, — get out of his way all you can ; the narrower the pass the
greater the necessity that you give room, or hounds must break
over the fence, and so run the risk of putting up, or crossing the
line of, another hare : moreover, horses on such occasions are
apt to strike out at hounds, and it is far from pleasant to be
constituted by such a casualty " the observed of all observers."
In the matter of riding at fences, with harriers you will be
more enabled to suit your practice to the individual case than
when you come to ride alongside fox-hounds. With the
former, when any thing very cramp crosses your line, you may
" look before you leap," and this is no bad maxim, whoever
may choose to sneer at it. Let this too be an axiom from
which you never depart, as far as regards the hounds : whea
you are out with the jolly dogs, "hear and see, and say no-
thing " — so shall you earn golden opinions from the field in
general, and prevent much out-pouring of wrath from the offi-
cials in particular. It will serve you to bear in mind that in
almost every difficulty of ground a horse can serve himself
better than you can assist him. I do not mean to say that in
heavy, deep galloping you should not hold him together, and if

242 HUNTING.

there be a furrow or path at hand, that you should not give him
the advantage of it. But in woodlands, for instance, where young
timber has been felled, and the surface is covered with live stubs,
give him his head : let him pick his own way ; never touch his
mouth with the bridle to guide him, and you will find how
rarely he will give a chance away. Thus in a rabbit warren the
difficulty is doubled by the nervous man who attempts to steer
his horse. The biped is looking at one hole, the quadruped at
another, and being diverted from the spot where he intended to
place his foot, puts it in where it was meant that he should
not. Still, however, you may attempt it : never charge ground
of this nature without using the precaution of slacking your
pace. I remember a well-known bruising rider, who thought
it impossible that he could be hurt, once trying the experiment
over a warren in the neighbourhood of Whitchurch, in Shrop-
shire, and being assured of the affirmative in the first hundred
yards by the fracture of his collar-bone, and the dislocation of a
shoulder.

With the common run of fences, where the grip is from you,
go faster at them than when it lies on the side you take off from.
When they consist of live thorns and quicks newly laid down,
take them, whenever the chance presents itself, aslant, rising
where the top of the thorn is laid, as being the least capable of
holding your horse's knees, should they catch in rising at it.
In your noviciate it is hardly necessary to offer you any advice
as to water. As a general rule, however, it may as well be said
here as elsewhere that, in brook -jumping, pace comes first and
then judgment. With a powerful impetus you get over ; should
your horse blunder, somehow — if with a fall at the other side,
no matter : less speed enables you to pick your ground better,
but it throws all the odds on the side of a cold-bath, should the
span be wider than you calculated on, or the bank be soft, and
let you in. Never take hold of your horse's head till you feel
that he is safely landed ; if there is a scramble for it, and you
pull at him but an ounce, it may turn the beam of his equipoise,
and in you go together.

HUNTING. 243

Young hands are prone to think that it is necessary to the
acquisition of the reputation of a sportsman that they show in
front throughout a run. Indeed I might have said this idea
seems to hold with many who ought to be wiser. The sooner
the youthful Nimrod discards this fallacy the better. The
chances are so multiplied and various against a good run that it
is next to a miracle how a real clipper ever occurs. From foil,
to which ground is every where exposed, down to an infant of
three years old that heads your quarry, on every side you are
beset with risk, even with a scent. Without it your difficulty
becomes almost an impossibility, and that is the time when
over-riding, more fatal than all other obstacles put together, is
to be seen in its superlative degree. There is your hard-rider,
par excellence, who will be first : the leader pulls up at a check
— the nuisance passes him, even with hounds at fault, without
a moment's care for the mischief he must do the chase, or what
he may do himself. Let such as this teach you that which you
should avoid : acquire in youth the way you should go, and in
your maturity you will not depart from it.

We now come to the matriculation of the " noble science,"
and consider the quondam novice entered to fox-hunting. It
would be bootless here to offer any eulogy upon a sport admitted,
by authorities allowing no question, to be, in a political as well as
a social view, a powerful moral engine. In a letter now before
me, which I lately received from a gallant general, himself a
master of fox-hounds, he ascribes to a taste for the chase that
characteristic manly daring which distinguishes the officers of
our service from those of any other. Of all field sports its
claims are the most general upon the properties of manhood.
The tiger-hunts of the East may appeal more directly to the
courage, but with activity and physical endurance they have
little or nothing to do. But see the qualities that must com-
bine to form the accomplished fox-hunter. He must be bold,
ready, decisive, capable of commanding and sustaining great
bodily exertion : he must join unity of purpose to promptness
of action ; capability of foreseeing events, that he may best turn

244 HUNTING.

them to advantage, with a frame and a spirit alike competent
to meet and oppose undauntedly difficulties and dangers, how and
when they may assail him. I would not have it supposed that
I claim for the chase a higher station for enterprise than any
other of the adventurous occupations in which we find mankind
employed. It would be absurd for an instant, for example, to
compare it with that most exciting and magnificent of all the
daring offices to which man has ever addressed himself — the
South Sea fishing. But as a sport, — an act to which pleasure
alone induces him, fox-hunting has nothing at all bearing com-
parison with it in modern days. To the present fashion of its
details we will now turn our consideration.

I do not think it necessary here to enter into any foreign
matter, such as the nature and economy of the establishment
with which the field may be taken with reference to the country
hunted, or the number of days weekly to be devoted to its
business. We will suppose our young Nimrod has completed
all such arrangements in a convenient fashion, and proceed to
the res gestce for which he has made preparation. In this hard-
riding era, it is regarded as a dashing style of going to cover, by
your aspiring tyro, to approach it as the crow would fly. If he
must go thither across country, let him, at all events, avoid
passing through, or riding too near any of the covers likely to
be drawn during the day. If they hold a good fox, it is sure
notice for him to quit, for he is ever on the qui vive. The re-
sult is, should the hounds be thrown in, they come upon a scent
some hours old — crawl upon it over probably the cream of the
country, never come on terms with him ; and a capital day's
sport is lost to a whole field by a selfish half-hour's lurk.
Arrived at the place of meeting, he should not address himself
to the master, if he hunt his own hounds ; or, in the other case,
to the huntsman, notwithstanding he may be on familiar terms
with them, beyond the mere exchange of a passing civility.
Even then, a man, bent upon showing a good day's sport, has
his mind sufficiently engaged on the business before him. He is
consulting temporary causes, by which to be directed as to the

HUNTING. 245

particular cover to begin with, and how it is to be drawn. The
point of wind, the nature of the day, the weather of the pre-
ceding week, — all must be weighed, and brought to assist his
judgment. A fox well found is always the most likely to be
well accounted for.

But if conversation with the master or huntsman be incon-
venient before hounds are thrown off, afterwards it becomes a
positive impertinence. It is no excuse for doing so that they
are not actually engaged at the moment. A huntsman, having
drawn without a find, is probably waiting for some of his
hounds; at the same time he is debating with himself what
cover he shall next try, and how to get to it, as the wind may
affect the best lying in it for his fox. He has also observed how
his hounds have behaved, and has orders to give to a whip as to
the conduct of some one prone to riot; or that a particular
corner of the cover about being drawn shall be carefully watched.
In short, success or failure are dependent on his management ;
and how can he deliberate if he is to stand a general catechism?
If it be a large cover, keep within hearing of the hounds and
huntsman. This can only be effected by being down wind, and
should be done without any reference to the distance round,
which it may impose. Of course, it is not intended that a man
should take any thing he can avoid out of his horse by galloping
round a cover, but let him keep on steadily opposite the hounds,
taking heed that he does not get so far forward as to endanger
heading back the fox, and so spoiling his own and his neigh-
bours' sport. This I only recommend where covers are very
large, and even then it may not be the best system. In all cases
where it is practicable, I never throw a chance away by losing
sight of hounds. I remember, some years ago, meeting Sir
Richard Puleston at Cresford village, whence we trotted to a
wood that skirts the high road to Chester. As we jogged for-
ward, a friend overtook me, accosting me with, " You need not
hurry yourself, for they'll find nothing where they're going: it
has been beaten within an hour by a party of coursers, who have
left nothing alive on four legs within it, you may rely." In ten

246 HUNTING.

minutes, the pack and field were streaming, best pace, after a
fox found in that same coppice, away for Shavington, over a
country like the cream of Leicestershire or Northampton.

In fox-hunting, depend solely upon yourself, and keep with
the pack. Even in going from cover to cover, he with them.
Circumstances frequently arise which induce a huntsman to
abandon trying a place upon which he may have previously
fixed j and how often has a fox jumped out of a hedge-row in
the centre of a pack trotting industriously away to look for a
chance probably half a dozen miles off ! In windy weather,
when hounds are in cover, unless you draw it with them, it is
two to one you never get away at all, and ten to one against a
good start. I have had some experience of horses in my day,
and have ever found, that, of all ways of beating them, the
surest is that of trying to catch hounds. Laying aside the ex-
citement and energy produced by the music, alongside of which
they go sailing away in wild delight, it must be remembered that
the pace of fox-hounds with a scent is equal to the best, if not
superior, that any first-class hunter possesses. What sort of a
nag then is it, that you can expect to catch them with ten
minutes' law ? In calm weather, also, the danger of losing sight
of hounds is by no means to be disregarded. There are some
days (those which invariably carry the best scent) when hounds
will find, and fly away like magic, not one in the pack attempting
to throw tongue. Here, if the cover be large, unless you have
them in your eye, the odds are you never get away ; and see
what you lose — the excellence of the scent has stopped the cry :
the faster hounds go, the less they say about it.

When in a large cover, with hounds unavoidably out of sight,
depend upon your ear much rather than upon the movements of
others. You will constantly find men riding straight on end,
merely because the hounds were running so when they entered,
while very probably the fox has turned short, and is already
away, with the pack at his brush, in an opposite direction. With
a little patience and attention, your ear will soon come to the
knack of detecting the line of hounds in cover : it is well worth

HUNTING. 247

your while to take pains to acquire this art. When you have
learnt it, you will speedily find out the advantage it will confer
upon your horse, and yourself too. It is by no means easy to
lay down rules for that which so mainly depends upon circum-
stances; but it maybe convenient to offer a few examples, upon
which you may found a system for general application. Sup-
pose, for instance, you have had a burst with your fox, and he
1ms reached a large cover, in which there are strong earths, or
beyond which lies a country too open for a blown fox to set his
head for. If the earths are open, in he goes, and there is an
end of him ; if stopped, he turns, or leans to the right or left.
During this time, brief as it may be, you have eased your horse ;
he gets his wind (a minute, in many cases, will put him right
after a very quick thing), and you are fresh, while your hard
rider has been going best pace beyond the hounds, and comes
toiling after you in vain. These points of practice, however, re-
quire good judgment, and great promptness of action. You
must know well how to distinguish between a cry that grows
faint and fainter, as a failing scent leads to a final check, and
one that, from a crash, at once becomes almost wholly lost, as
the pack flies to their fox with a view, or a scent breast-high.

You will, no doubt, at the commencement of your career, hear
a great deal about the influence the wind has upon the line of
chase. Do not take all such theory for gospel. I have tried my
hand at a few systems of the kind, but only found one that ad-
mitted general adoption. When a fox, on being found, takes up
wind at first, do not ride, though the pace be first-rate, so as to
take much out of your horse. Foxes constantly, after going a
mile or so up wind, turn and head back. This will let you in
with a good start, and a fresh nag ; and even should the chase
hold on up wind, you run little risk of being thrown out, as you
will have the cry to guide you, and the puff in, to enable you to
get to them when the first brush is over.

One good effect of the hard riding of modern days is, that
hounds are much less meddled with by strangers than they used
to be when first I remember fox-hunting. Indeed, I am not

248 HUNTING.

sure that too much etiquette does not now exist upon that
point. The total disappearance of the thong to the hunting-
whip seems like carrying a good thing rather too far. A fox
breaks probably under your horse's nose : out conies the pack,
none of the servants are at hand, and they run a field or two
from the cover before any one stops them, or their own mettle
allows them to turn : one crack of your whip would have saved
all that. One thing you can do without your thong, but you
should be very careful how you do it. I allude to hallooing a
fox away. Never attempt to lift up your voice till he is evi-
dently bent on going, and then give him at least a field's law,
or the odds are, back he goes, perhaps into the hounds' mouths.
When he is gone, then clap your hand behind your ear, and
give the " Tally-ho — away /" to the best of the lungs that are
in you. Should he merely show for a moment outside, and
then pop in again, give a " Tally-ho — back !" that it may be
known where he was seen, as well as that he is not away.
Another service in this latter halloo is, that all the points where
it is likely he will try to break will be left clear for him. If a
fox is seen crossing a ride or path, in cover, in front of you,
pull up ; and if hounds are at check, tally him., as it will serve
as a guide to the huntsman.

In drawing a cover you may give this signal, should any fox
cross you, but if you have run him in, be awake not to tally any
but the hunted one, or you will have few thanks for your
trouble. A little experience will easily teach you the difference
between one just unkennelled and that which has stood any
time before hounds. Not only will the former be sleek and
unstained, but the method of going be very dissimilar. A frosli
fox bounds off, throwing his hind legs clear from him, and his
whole frame, from the tip of his nose to that of his brush, as
straight as an arrow ; if hunted, and at all blown or beaten,
his action is laboured, like that of a rocking-horse, his back is
curved, his brush drooping, and the ears thrown back, all the
fire for which when found his eye is so remarkable, quenched,
and exchanged for an air of cunning and subdued resolution.

HUNTING. 249

I am far from any design of counselling you to interfere with
the business of a pack of fox-hounds that you may be either in
the habit of hunting with, or one that you may merely meet by
accident occasionally. Still there are instances in which to
withhold all assistance would be to put the chance of sport in
jeopardy, and in which the true lover of the chase ought to act
first and think afterwards. Should any casualty, for example,
so find you that, with hounds at fault, you catch a halloo that
the huntsman does not or cannot hear, contrive so to place
yourself between the halloo and the hounds that you may be
heard by huntsman or pack, and so lead them on the line that
the halloo proceeds from. I repeat, however, that these and
similar aids must be offered with due discretion. The halloo
may be a false one — true, but had you gone to make inquiries,
you, too, would have been out of hearing — the points of fox-
hunting require temporary and local adaptation, and a head-
piece to direct all. Mere physical endowments will never make
an accomplished fox-hunter — combined with judgment they are
very excellent subsidiaries : for him who would shine in the
chase

" Orandum est, ut sit mens sana in corpore sano."

In riding to hounds it will essentially serve you if you bear
in mind what ninety-nine out of a hundred seem never to give
a thought to, namely, that the pack only acts pro tanto upon
the line of country which a fox is likely to take. Independent
of the point which it is assumed he will make for, he has a
hundred other things to avoid, as well as the enemies baying on
his trail. He settles his point, but he must also get to it
unseen. Unless beaten and all but run into, he will give a wide
berth to any thing like the habitation of man as well as man
himself. Thus, by keeping your eye well before you, there is
a chance that the turn hounds will take may be so far antici-
pated, that you avoid riding outside of their circle. It has been
well said that when hounds are running, a man ought to consider
what, under the circumstances in which things happen to be, he

250

HUNTING.

would do were he the fox. I cannot offer you better counsel.
By adopting such a principle you will be enabled to foresee a
check should you detect any thing in the line that the chase is
taking, however far ahead — and if you have a knowledge of the
country, you will calculate such chances almost to a certainty.
In a district with which you are acquainted, the line a fox takes
when found, will enable you to judge whether he has been
before hunted, and if he has, the odds are he runs the same
again. Even in cover you may fairly assume that he is accus-
tomed to be stirred by the ring he takes, the points he tries, the
gaps he uses in the fences, and similar observations, which
should be the business on which you are intent from the mo-
ment the hounds are thrown in.

More than once it has been my good fortune to secure a
clipping run for a sporting field by keeping a clear look-out
upon the matter at issue, and nothing else, when a long series of
covers drawn blank, and such dampers, have sent one-half of
the morning's muster home, while the other had taken to tlie
dernier ressort of cigars and gossip. As an instance of this,
several years ago, with the Shropshire, when Mr. Cresset Pelham
had them, we had been at it from the hour of meeting till past
three, in November too, and no luck. Having trotted on to our
hist hope for the day, it was tried, and pronounced — blank!
Already twilight had commenced, the huntsman outside the
cover was blowing his horn, the pack mustered, and home was
the order of march. I had watched the gathering with care ;
and, as we were already trotting from the side of the spinny, it
struck me that an old and favourite bitch was missing. I called
the huntsman's attention to it. There was a pause — a fiiat
wimple was heard in the still valley — anon it opened into a
cry, " Hark to it !" — the pack flew to the challenge — there was
a mighty crash : in a minute a fox broke away in sight of every
man who had had the patience to await the last throw on the
dice. A burst of twenty minutes was the result, without a pull
from best pace j and we turned him up in the open just as the
parish lantern gave us notice to look out for squalls.

HUNTING. 251

There exists, in some masters of hounds, a disposition to keep
back such men as, when hounds are in chase, follow them
through the covers they take in their line. It is not my desire
to inculcate disobedience to the powers that be ; but certainly I
cannot second that principle, either with reference to those who
adopt it, or those to whom it is intended to apply. When a
hunted fox has reached a cover, not only is it the best way ta
cheer hounds to him, that they should not feel themselves alone,
but also the noise made by men following them is the most
likely way to make a fresh fox break, without any of the strag-
glers getting on him. I have seen a fox crawl into cover dead
beat, and already in the mouths of the pack. The huntsman
and a whip followed them — the " whoo-whoop " was given —
the master and the rest of the field waited on the outside. They
remained in patience till ten minutes had elapsed. " Surely,"
said an old hand at last, " they are doing more than baying him
with all that cry. Hark ! it has got to the opposite side of the
wood : — by heavens ! they're away with a fresh fox." And so
they were ; and they killed him at the end of forty minutes
without a check, and without a sight of them ever being caught,
save by the servants, who had followed to lift the fox that had
crawled dead beat into the cover.

I have thus attempted to sketch, for the young disciple of the
" noble science," a slight code of maxims of general application.
For the principles of practice to direct him in the constantly
occurring cases, which admit of no rule save that arising out of
individual circumstances, he must rely upon himself. Under
this general head of HUNTING, I have not thought it necessary
to enter upon any varieties of the chase, save those of the fox
and the hare. Stag-hunting, as a rural sport, is limited to a
very few districts ; and for its pursuit requires only a knowledge
of horsemanship, and a quick eye to a country. Fox-hunting
and hare-hunting I have treated with reference only to the points
of practice which apply to the convenience of those who select
them as appliances of recreation. This work, in its nature, is
rudimentary: it professes to deal with the elements of our manly

252

HUNTING.

exercises, and so far to treat of our national sports of RACING,
HUNTING, and SHOOTING. Its office is to instruct the be-
ginner, leaving the higher classes to volumes of more preten-
sion. With this view of its purpose, I have brought the subject
of the Chase to the limit which I designed for it. It is a truly
manly — a noble sport. Long may it be cherished and fostered
in our land ! The qualities which it calls into action are those
which confer honour on manhood, — courage, promptness, ac-
tivity, and decision. Surely these are rare properties in which
to exercise a youth, and these the Chase will engender and
nourish : while to such as require that a moral attach to every
occupation of life, it has this to recommend it, that, in riding to
hounds, this great truth is hourly inculcated — " Honesty is the
best policy."

SHOOTING.

IT is my purpose, in the present chapter, as in the two preced-
ing, to offer, as companion to the system of exercises described
in the first part of this work, certain practical rules upon another
of those popular field sports, a knowledge of which has in all
ages been considered, in this country, part oLa gentleman's
education. The perfection to which we have attained in the
manufacture of all the implements connected with this branch
of sporting, would make a dissertation on the materiel of shooting
a piece of useless information to those for whose service these
notices are intended. Instead, therefore, of filling these pages
with elaborate instructions for selecting his guns, gun-cases,
flasks, belts, and the whole catalogue of shooting gear, I present
my reader with one solitary golden maxim, which will ensure
to him the possession of a perfect apparatus, and that eventually

254 SHOOTING.

on the most economical terms : Let him go, for every article of
his equipment,, to the most celebrated artist in the item of which
he has need. It is true that, compared with the scale of prices
in the provinces, the charges of the first-rate London gun-
makers are startling things upon paper, and so are those made
by coachmakers of the same class. Indeed, the same may be
said of the rate of demand common to the leading dealers of
the metropolis; but he will find that finis coronat opus. An eco-
nomical friend of mine, who was recently quartered in Ireland,
ordered, of one of the most respectable firms in Dublin, a tra-
Telling chariot, the price, with the usual et ceteras, being two
hundred and fifty pounds : here it would have cost him three
hundred, or three hundred and twenty. Just as it was com-
pleted, he was ordered home ; and his new bargain broke down
with him fourteen times between Liverpool and London. As a
contrast to this : An old sporting associate, never particularly
distinguished for his thrift, recently showed me a pair of shooting
shoes, for which he paid Hoby two guineas, that he has had in
constant work for sixteen years ! No record has been preserved
of the number of times they have had new bottoms. The only
perishable portions of these cordwaining phenomena, however
are their soles : their bodies appear to be immortal.

To return to the appointments of the young aspirant to the
honours of the trigger. Although I set out with supposing him
equipped with the best double detonator that money can pro-
cure from a maker of known character, and all other mechanical
appliances for the field, a proper management and judicious
arrangement of them is by no means to be similarly obtained.
Upon the condition of those mechanical aids his succes; de-
pends, quite as much as the adroitness to which he may arrive in
the use of them. Whether that department be in the hands of
a gamekeeper fully competent to all its details, or there be an
actual necessity for the master's eye to direct it, a knowledge of
the most approved means will be found equally essential. Pro-
ficiency in any art or science requires an intimacy with the whole
machinery of its economy. It was this conviction that made an

SHOOTING. 255

emperor a labourer in a dockyard, and should induce every
sportsman to acquaint himself with the minutest particulars
bearing upon his craft. To this end I will give a few rules, de-
rived as well from personal experience as from some of the most
approved authorities on the subject that have appeared in print.
GUN-CLEANING. — Use cold water for the purpose of cleansing
the barrel, and finish by pouring in boiling water, taking care to
stop the touch-hole. Shake it up and down well, and drain it
from the muzzle, which \vill clear the chamber. The hot water
greatly aids the process of drying, — one of the most important
parts of gun-washing. After the washing is concluded, by
looking down the barrel with the touch-hole open, you will be
enabled to see into the chamber, and ascertain whether it be
effectually cleared out or otherwise. The foulness of the barrel
of course must be the criterion by which the person employed
in cleaning it will be decided. Should it require to be scoured,
to remove powder encrusted on its sides, very fine sand and hot
water should be used, and care taken to rinse it out thoroughly,
at the last, with boiling water, to clear the chamber of anything
that may have been driven into it by the washing-rod. The
material in ordinary use for gun-cleaning is tow, to which there
is the objection that particles are apt to become detached from
it, and lodge in the chambers. To prevent any chance of this
kind, I would recommend the substitution of cloth, which will
be found to answer the purpose quite as well, being at the same
time free from all such hazard. It is a bad habit to fall into,
that of laying by your gun loaded : let the charge be drawn
after the day's work. If you have had but a few shots, the less
trouble there will be in the cleaning : a mere hot- water rinse,
and a good drying, will be enough. Should your gun contain
an old charge when you go out, do not put your faith in it : the
odds are all in favour of its hanging fire. Squib it off, first draw-
ing the shot, and load again while the barrels are warm ; probe
your touch-holes; wipe your locks within and without; and if you
cannot command success afterwards, you will have the satisfaction
of knowing that you have taken the best course to ensure it.

256 SHOOTING.

Every time you load, observe whether your touch-hole be
free : it is but a moment's occupation, and a certain security
against a monstrous annoyance — missing fire, probably at one of
your best chances during the day. In all cases of hanging or
missing fire, the seat of disease is the touch-hole or chamber,
if your cap has exploded : to these apply the remedy. I speak
only with reference to detonators, as they have now become so
very universal : of course when a flint gun is used, the mischief
may be caused by a faulty flint. Your last act should be, when
the day's sport is over, before you enter the house, to let down
the springs of your locks : the less stress you keep upon them ,
the more power and elasticity they will retain. This is the plan
to make one lock wear out the best Damascus barrel.

POWDER. — The names of most of the great manufacturers of
gunpowder are now sufficient guarantee for the excellence of
the article bearing their signatures. Purchase your supply from
any respectable house, and you will be secure that it is genuine:
beyond the label you need not seek. Your care, then, must be
to preserve the original strength, by putting it into canisters
closely corked and sealed, after first having carefully dried it, —
a process for which Colonel Hawker gives this excellent recipe :
" Your powder should always be properly dried, in order to do
which make two or three plates very hot before the fire, and
(first taking care to wipe them well, lest any particle of cinder
should adhere to them) keep constantly shifting the powder from
one to the other, without allowing it to remain sufficiently long
in either to cool the plate. The powder will then be more
effectually aired, and more expeditiously dried, than by the
more common means of using only one plate, which the per. rder,
by lying on it, soon makes cold, and therefore the plate re-
quires to be two or three times heated." Nothing can be added
to this, save the admonition that the operation be performed at
such a distance from the fire as to prevent the possibility oV a
spark or cinder reaching you. The surest way is to dry yuer
powder in one room, and to heat your plates in another.

SHOT. — Here is a division of my subject much less easily dis-

SHOOTING. 257

posed of than the last. The selection of shot is a question upon
which many of the best Authorities are at issue. Some deal
with it only in reference to the game for which it is intended ;
others consider it merely as having relation to the length and
diameter of the barrel for which it is required. I recommend
the middle course, — media tutissimus ibis. Colonel Hawker tells
us that " it is not so much the magnitude of the pellet, as the
force with which it is driven, that does the execution." No one
can accord more cheerful fealty than I do to the generality of
that first-rate sportsman's opinions ; but I cannot allow my ad-
miration to dazzle my common sense, or to subscribe to this
hypothesis. With a swan-drop, you break the leg of wild-boar
or red-deer ; but could any force known to the science of pro-
jectiles accomplish it with a grain of number 9, or dust-shot?
The rule should be, to suit your number to your game — the ex-
ception, to your gun and its calibre. Taking the average size
at which fowling-pieces are now made, and the general character
of English sporting, I have no hesitation in saying that there
are very few instances in which number 7 will not be found
to answer the purposes of a day's shooting. It is not the power
to penetrate that fills the bag. Many a bird carries off a quarter
of an ounce of lead in his body ; but break his wing, and what
can he do then? The advocate of small shot urges the increased
space which it covers, and consequently the increased chances in
favour of its hitting; but to hit your bird, and to bring him
down, are two very different things. Catch him anywhere with
a good-sized pellet, and the odds are that he comes to bag; stuff
him with dust, and he flies away with a whole charge, unless it
has encountered a vital part. It is to be remembered that I am
not here addressing my observations to first-rate masters of the
trigger, — to such professors as Ross, Sutton, or Osbaldiston.
I have not deemed it necessary to go into the relative merits of
shot upon such minute niceties as the increased rotatory motion
of the larger pellets, and the like. In an epitomised treatise like
this, the length of my design only extends to offering the best
general hints that suggest themselves to me, as applicable to the

258 SHOOTING.

service of the novice. To such, then, I say, in all ordinary cases,
make use of number 7 : never go higher, for a jack-snipe
will often fly away with the full of a charger of number 9 in
his body. If, however, your sport lies exclusively in thick wood-
lands, or where only very long shots are likely to be had, supply
yourself with numbers 2 or 3 ; but at the same time take care
to provide a long and heavy gun, that will throw them even, and
not in lumps and clusters.

PERCUSSION CAPS. — Detonating guns have now been so
long in general use, that the familiarity thus produced with the
various properties and kinds of fulminating powders, ensures
the very general perfection to which these invaluable auxiliaries
of the shooter have attained. They are to be had, of an almost
uniform excellence, at all the respectable gunmakers in town
and country.

WADDING. — Here again is a matter on which you will find a
vast variety of opinion. Some get rid of it altogether by adopt-
ing the new system of cartridges. Upon this point I do not
wish to offer any of the results of my own limited experience.
I have shot with these, and with average success — a low average
I admit, for I have no pretensions to the name of a crack. They
are, however, worth the experiment of a trial, though I am dis-
posed to believe the success or failure of it will much depend
upon the accidental properties and effects of the materials sub-
mitted to the test. To return to the sort of wadding which may
best serve those who still adhere to the old system of mere
powder and shot. After enumerating the various claims of paper,,
hat, card, and leather, Colonel Hawker gives the preference to
punched pasteboard, — the thickness to increase in the ratij of
the diameter of the barrel. The best that have ever come under
my notice are Cherry's prepared waddings, suited to every calibre.
They are manufactured from felt which has undergone a process
that prevents the accumulation of damp after firing, and are to
be procured at any gunmaker's for the cost of the materials in
ordinary use. These I do recommend, and I am sure those who
accord them a trial will have no reason to regret it. They cover

SHOOTING. 259

the powder effectually, and offer but little resistance to the shot,
which is all that is required of wadding. Mr. Cherry would im-
prove upon his invention by piercing the waddings intended to
cover the shot, as it would facilitate the operation of loading, while
the shooter made the distinction by carrying those for the powder
in his loft-hand pocket, and those for the shot in his right.

TIIK POWDER-FLASK. — It is strange that, among the many
ingenious improvements effected in the implements of the
shooter, the powder-flask, certainly the most important of all,
should have been left in its present dangerous condition. I am
aware that an attempt, and a praiseworthy one, was made some
years ago by Mr. Egg, to reduce the chances of accident which
the present construction of the flask involves ; but I ask why
has not some contrivance, without any of the old leaven in it,
been suggested and effected ? In the shot-belt the charger is
wholly detached — where no risk, at all events, would follow,
were it otherwise — whereas, when loading with powder, the
charger, with the flask attached, is introduced into the muzzle
of the gun, so that should it, by any accident, become ignited,
an explosion (and most probably a fatal one) of the whole en-
sues as matter of consequence. However, to deal with it as you
find it, with proper precaution, when you fill your charger let
back the spring gradually, that no chance may be given away in
the event of a bit of flint, or any substance that might throw out
a spark, being struck by it. Never lose sight of the material
which your flask contains. Let nothing induce you to fire with
it in your hand. If a chance shot offer while you are loading a
discharged barrel, throw it behind you, if there is not time to
return it to your pocket.

LOADING. — I have not thought it necessary to occupy any of
my limited space with the shot-belt, because it is so simple, and
at the same time so excellent in construction, that the merest
novice cannot be astray in the use of it. Not so is it with the
important office — that of loading your gun aright, although it is
impossible to lay down any rules for it applicable to every case.
Experience alone will enable you so to proportion your charge

~?>0 SHOOTING.

that you shall come at the full powers of which your gun is
capable. The gauge, the length, the weight — all must be taken
into account, and provided for. For the ordinary run of fowling-
pieces, the following is a fair proportion : — A shot-charger that
holds an ounce and a half of shot may be filled to the brim with
powder, which will serve to load with, as also to prime : the
same measure filled up with shot will constitute your charge of
lead. By these proportions, you can thus regulate the chargers
of your belts and flasks. Against this system it is contended,
by the ultra-particular, that it is a bad one in reference to powder,
which is manufactured without regard to weight, only the pro-
jectile force being considered. These are minutiae, however, into
which I do not desire to introduce the learner. He will have
enough to do with the more immediate affairs of preparing his
nerves, forming a judgment upon sight and distance, and laying
a foundation upon a basis of right principle and prompt per-
formance, without which he will have little business upon that
arena to which I am about to introduce him, after a long but
still a necessary preface.

SHOOTING. THE FIELD. — Unless where some positive
mental or physical prohibition exists, a certain degree of excel-
lence and dexterity in every art and science is open to such as
seek with care and perseverance. Thus, although, from natural
causes, every man cannot aspire to the honour of becoming a
crack shot, there is scarcely any that may not acquire the art of
shooting tolerably well. The sooner the essay is made, the
better the chance of its success ; and as my pupil is supposed to
be in this condition, I proceed, without further introduction to
offer such practical rules and maxims as may best serve to pro-
mote the end he should have in view — that of becoming cautious
in the management, and steady in the use of his gun.

The first step, assuming the learner to be a complete novice,
will be to acquire the proper mode of putting his gun to his
shoulder, and of bringing the sight to bear upon a particular
object, — the latter only to be rightly accomplished with the
breech and sight on a level. Having attained this preliminary,

SHOOTING. 261

let him take n flint gun, with a piece of wjod substituted for the
flint, and practise at the object so situate-.l, always remembering
to pull the trigger the moment the sight is on the mark — a pre-
caution he will find the vast advantage of as he comes to apply
it to flying shots. After a practice so conducted till the eye
ceases to flinch when the trigger is drawn, he may begin to load
with half charges, and continue to practise at his object, occa-
sionally, without his knowledge, small charges of shot being
added, so that he shall strike his mark without the nervous ex-
citement of feeling that he is making the attempt.

The great point — that of steadiness combined with self-confi-
dence— being arrived at, he may now try his hand at small birds ;
but even after he has become adroit at these, he has still another
ordeal to go through. This is the tremour at the springing of
game, whether a pack of grouse, a covey of partridges, or a soli-
tary cock-pheasant, which, indeed, often makes as startling a
flight as either. In this case, it will serve him greatly to return
to the system he began with, and learn to cover his game with-
out the nervous apprehension of a miss. "While at this practice,
lie may begin to use himself to cover w^th both eyes open, the
advantage of which he will soon discover when he comes to quick
shooting.

Being tolerably au fait at these points of practice (for perfec-
tion can only result from long experience, whence come skill
and judgment), it will be necessary that he bear in mind those
rules for rightly effecting his purpose when his game is moving.
He must shoot before an object that crosses his point of sight;
high for a bird rising in its flight, or skimming the surface; be-
tween the ears of hares or rabbits running in a straight line from
him, — being guided, of course, in every case, by the distance
between him and the mark at which he aims. For example, if a
bird range forty yards from him, calculating the ordinary velo-
city of its speed of wing, he may safely aim six inches before it.
No fixed rules, however, can be laid down, where the casualties
of powder, a dull or lively-shooting gun, high winds, and fifty
other et ceteras, arc opposed to a system. One principle he

262 SHOOTING.

may always adopt with success, and that is, to fix his eyes on
the mark he has selected, and fire the instant the gun is brought
to bear upon it. It is very difficult to say at what distance a
bird may be which can be called a fair shot, because it rests with
so many contingencies. Forty yards are generally considered
as point-blank range, but it will often be found easier to bring
down game at fifty than at thirty yards. The wind, as in cross
shots, and various operating causes — all the result of temporary
accident — must be taken into account. You will always have a
better chance to kill long cross shots than those approaching or
flying from you. It is very hard to do execution upon birds
•with a stern-chaser, and in coming towards you they present a
surface off which shot is very apt to glance without penetrating.
I have said nothing about the hold of his gun most convenient
for the learner to accustom himself to, because, in whatever
manner it may be put into his hands at first, he is sure, ulti-
mately, to adopt a style of his own, arising from natural causes,
or habits almost as forcible. The nearer it is placed to the
guard, the less risk is run should a barrel burst. The grasp of
the stock more forward affords the greatest facility in bringing
the gun to bear upon 165 object, and more firmness of position.
While I am on the mechanical portion of the young shooter's
acquirements, or rather things to be acquired, I do not think a
better opportunity can be chosen to introduce a few hints upon
a more advanced state of practice, albeit some may, at the time
of perusing them, be unfit to receive what may be termed
finishing lessons. "When you are about taking a cross shot at a
long range, fire well before it, from one to three feet, according
to the speed with which the bird is flying, and let your gun be
thrown above the object. The same rule must direct you in
firing at hares or rabbits, whether it be a cross shot or one in a
right line. It is a most mischievous practice, as far as regards
your day's sport, to make much noise in the field, however
strong the provocation from the disobedience of your dogs, or
any cause whatever. Should your pointers prove incorrigible,
I would rather recommend you. when they have sprung a covey,

SHOOTING. 2()3

to cause them to be taken up, and then walk yourself as near as
you can to the spot where you saw it drop. Should the birds
rise singly or by the brace, continue to beat and shoot while you
think one remains.- it will be time enough to look after the slain
(that cannot abscond) when you make sure of the living. This
plan may also be successfully adopted when there is not scent
enough to prevent the staunchest dogs from running in upon
their game. In marking your covey down, remember they cannot
fall so long as they continue to skim : they cannot alight till
they stop themselves, and prepare for the pitch, by a flapping of
the wings.

I should not advise you to begin beating for partridges, even
in September, before nine o'clock, and then desist from it at
noon. From three till dusk is the golden division of the day, at
that season, for the partridge-shooter. If your ground happen
to lie in the vicinity of manors that have been shot over during
the day, you will be certain to meet the remnants of scattered
coveys, of all chances the most sure to fill your game-bag. "With
pheasants, however, when they are to be sought in strong covers
particularly, your system must be almost reversed. As the day
advances, these birds resort to the thickest and strongest lying
that the woodlands frequented by them afford. When beating,
in the early morning, after rain, you will generally find them in
the skirts of covers, or in the hedgerows adjacent. In such
cases, always contrive to place yourself between them and the
strong old woods : to these they are certain to fly, — instinct
teaching them that there they are most sheltered and secure.
In battue-shooting, all you have to attend to is the situation of
the best opens, and such sides of the covers intended to be
beaten, as the direction of the wind, and the ordinary resort of
the game, point out as the most judicious stations; but when
about to engage in a single-handed day's sport, you will require
a more skilful disposition, and closer attention to the manner of
your tactics. In this latter case, your best assistant will be a
steady old pointer : one that will range near you, work round
every piece of copse and underwood, and poke into every nook

264 SHOOTING.

and crevice ; well broke lie must be, so as to fall at shot, ami
crouch do\vn on bringing in his birds.

In a treatise such as this, it would be impossible to give even
the briefest epitome of directions for the various classes of game
and wild-fowl shooting. Before, however, I close my address to
the young disciple of the trigger, I will offer him a few familiar
hints on a division of his craft neither the least in importance or
interest, — namely, his relation to his best ally and friend, the
dog. T am not going to suggest the species best suited to
general shooting, as so very much depends upon the country to
be hunted, and the chance that may direct selection; but whether
pointer, setter, or spaniel, you will find your account in making
such as you intend for coadjutors in the field your ordinary asso-
ciates and companions. Try the experiment by committing one
puppy of a litter entirely to the breaker, and retaining another
(when the general rudiments of his education have been ac-
quired) constantly with yourself, and at every opportunity sub-
jected to gentle but firm discipline, and you will soon discover
which is the better plan. Adopt the same system with a per-
fectly-made hunter — a master of his business; and you will soon
find out the difference of being served by one who, from habit,
will be enabled to understand your looks, and another who,, at
best, will have to puzzle out your wishes, or require to have them
announced at the hazard of flushing half the game in the parish.

With this parting word on the social economy of shooting
closes the last of those notices of our FIELD SPORTS which the
publisher thought it convenient to appear in this volume, and
the treatment of which he confided to me. If his purpose has
been fulfilled, my desire will be accomplished, — the wish to
please being our unity of design. The little talent the writer
possesses, at all events will not have failed from lack of anxiety
to accomplish his task : what is writ is writ, —

" Would it were worthier ! "

INDEX.

Balance Step: its object to teach the
Free Movement of the Limbs and
Steady the Body in Walking, 28;
Exercises, 28, 29.

Balancing, 56; Position and Action,
57; Turns in, 57; its Importance in
all Manly Exercises and Sports, 59.

Belts, Utility of, and manner of Using,
7,8.

Beruardi's System of Swimming, 92.

Carriages : their Number and Variety
ia London, 176; Brilliancy in Hyde
Park, 17i;.

Carrying Weight, GO; Feats in, 61.

Chase, Hints on the, 240; Excitements
of the, 247, 248 ; Drawing a Cover,
248.

Chariot Race, Poetical Description of
a, 17-'.

Climbing, different kinds of, ex-
plained, 64 — Ga.

Coaches, Accidents to, 21".

Coach Horses: their Cost, 178; Best
Breeds, 179; Strength, 181 ; Treat-
ment, IHl, 182; Hints for Purchasers,
192; Harness of, 1U5; Management,
in Harness, 187.

Coachmen : their Qualifications and
Duties, 103-193; Hints for Night,
220.

Comparative Strength of different
llacos of Mca, 17-

Derby Day, Description of a, 233—233.
Dog, Familiar Hints for Young Sports-
men on the, 2G4.

Discus, Throwing the, C2.

Dragging Wheels, 221.

Driving, Historical Sketch of, 170—
175; Mounting and Dismounting,
198; the Seat, 1<)9; Starting, 199;
the Paces, 2W; the Time, 201:
the Whip, 2U2; Thoroughfares,
Passing, &c., in, 207; Ascending and
Descending, 208 ; Comparison of
English and German Modes of Har
nessing and, 211, 212; Turnings,
213; Slips, 215; Accidents in, 215—
217; Obstructions in, 221.

Drowned Persons, Treatment of appa-
rently, 80.

Epsom Races, Notice of, 227.
Extension Motions used in the Sword
Exercise, 20.

Fox Hunting, the Qualifications re-
quired in, 243 — 245; the Huntsman
not to be unnecessarily interrupted,
245; Keep with the Pack, 246; Rules
for finding the Hounds if out of
Sight, 247; the " Tally Ho!" 248;
Signal in Drawing a Cover, 248;
Movements of the Fox may be fore-
seen, 250; a Day with the Shrop-
shire, 250.

Gig, the Safest Posture when in a, 217.

Guards on Mail Coaches, 197.

Gun: Cleaning, 255; Loading, 259;

Management of the, in the Field,

HO.
Gymnasia of the Greeks and Romans, 5.

INDEX.

Harnessing, on English and German
Moties of, 211.

Head, Sir Francis, on Harnessing
Horses in England, 210— 212.

Horse, The, and Equipments, 122;
Animations, Soothings, and Correc-
tions, 142; Treatment of, 165;
Restivencss, 103; Relative Places of,
189; Accidents, &c., to, 215.

Hounds, Following, 241 ; " Quick Eye
to Hounds" essential in the Sports-
man, 241.

Hunting: how Proficiency may be
acquired, 239, 240; Riding at Fences
in, 241; Brook Jumping in, 242;
Drawing a Cover in, 248.

Indian Club Exercise, as practised in
the Army, 22 ; New Portion, from
Indian Practice, 23— 26.

Leaping : how performed, 42 ; Ma-
nagement of the Breath, 42; the
High Leap with a Run, 42; the
High Leap without a Run, 43; the
Long Leap, 44 ; the Deep Leap, 46 ;
General Instructions in Leaping, 43
—48; Feats in, 44,45.

Leaping with a Pole: the High Leap,
50; the Long Leap, 54; the Deep
Leap, 55.

Locomotive Exercises, 2 ; the best
Position of the Body in, 27.

Manly Exercises and Recreations: their
Utility in perfecting and maturing
the Frame, 240.

Mariner's Compass described, 119.

Olympic Games, 224.

Partridge Shooting, 263.

Percussion Caps, i>5».

Physical Exercises : their importance
in regard to Health, 1 — 5; a Medium
to be observed, 5; Opinion of Aristo-
tle and Plato on, 5; General Direc-
tions, 6; Belts useful in, 7«

Position of the Body in Standing, 13;
and of the Feet in Standing, 19.

Powder, Col. Hawker's Recipe for Dry-
ing, 256; Flask, the, 259.

Racing in the Reign of Athelstan, 224
a Popular Pastime in Reign o
Richard I. and Henry VIIL, 225
James I. the Founder of Legitimat
English, 226; the First Arabian in
troduccd into England, 226 ; th
Breed of Horses improved by, 236.

Race Course at Newmarket, 2-2(J.

Race Horse: Question of Origin dis
cussed, 223; derived from Arabian
229 ; Exploits of, 230—232.

Riding, best Position of the Body in
121; Horse and Equipments, 1L-2
Mounting and Dismounting, 12G
the Seat, 129; the Balance, 131
the Rein Hold, 132; the Corre
spondence, 134 ; the Action, 135
the Hand, 137; the Guidance, o
Aids, 138-142; the Walk, 144-
147; the Trot, 147— 150; lloa<
Riding, 150, 151 ; the Gallup, 152-
156; the Canter, 153; Leaping, 156
Critical Situations in, 159; at Fence
in Hunting, 241.

Roads, Hints for Improving, 176.

Rowing: to leave the Landing Place
101; the Pull, 101; the Tide o;
Current, 103; to Turn, Meet, Pass,
and Land, 104.

Royal Yacht Squadron, 109; its Sail
ing Regulations, 110.

Running, Position of the Body in, 37
38; Action in, 38; Respiration in
39; Moderate, 39; Rapid, 40; Feats
in, 41 ; Effects of, 41.

Rural Sports patronized by the En&
lish, 232.

Sailing Clubs upon the Thames, 108.

Sailing: General Directions, 111—115;
Tacking, 116; Reefing, &c., 117—119

Sea Rowing explained, 105.

Shooting Appointments, 25", 254 ; Gun
Cleaning, 255; Powder, 256; Wad-
ding, 250 ; Loading, 259.

Shot, Directions for Choosing, 257;
Size of, 257.

Skate, Construction of the, 69—71.

Skating, Instructions in, 72; Dress,
72; Dangers in, 80.

Stage Coaches, Cost and Method of
Working, 1/7, 178.

INDEX.

Strength, Comparative, of different
Races of Men, 17.

Swimming: its Utility, 82, 83; Pre-
paratory Instructions, 83; Action of
the Hands and Feet, 83, 84; Place
and Time. 85 ; Aids in, 86 ; Cramp,
87; Entering the Water, 88; Usual
Mode of Front, 88—91; Respiration
in, 91; Upright, 92; Back, 95; Side,
97 ; Floating, 96 ; Plunging, 97 ;
Diving, 98; Thrusting, 99; Spring-
ing, 99; with One Arm, 100; Feats
in, 100.

Sword Exercise, First Three Move-
ments of, 20.

Training : its Importance in relation to
Health, 9; Opinion of the Ancients,
9; Mental Powers improved by, 10;
Principles of, 10; Practice of the
Ancients, 10, 11; Modern Practice,
12—16; Time required in, 16.

I Turf, Historical Notices of the, 223—
232.

Vaulting explained, 48; Oblique, 48;

Straight forward, 49.
Vessel, Description of the various

Parts of a: the Deck, Rigging, Sails,

&c., 119, 120.

Wadding for Guns, 258.

Walking : its Utility as an Exercise,
29, 31 ; General Mechanism of, 31 ;
the Three different Times of— Slow,
32; Moderate, 33; Quick, 33; Feats
in, 36; Military Steps, 34—3(5; Use
of the Balance Step in, 211.

Weight, Carrying, 60 ; Feats in, 61.

Whip, Directions for Using the, in
Coach Driving, 202.

Yacht Club, Northern, 111.

Ji j&Jttt Cstatop of
NEW BOOKS AT SEDUCED PRICES,

PUBLISHED OB SOLD Bf

HENRY G. BOHN,

YORK STREET, COVENT GARDEN, LONDON.

HIS COMPLETE CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOKS AND REMAINDERS, IN 100 PAGES, MAI
BE HAD GRATIS.

*«* All the Hooks advertised in the present Catalogue are neatly boarded in cloth,
or bound.

FINE ARTS, ARCHITECTURE, SCULPTURE, PAINTING, HERALDRY
ANTIQUITIES, TOPOGRAPHY, SPORTING, PICTORIAL AND HIGHLY
ILLUSTRATED WORKS, ETC., ETC.

BARBER'S ISLE OF WIGHT. 42 fine Steel Plates, and Dr. MANTELLS' GEOLOGIC A :.

svo, gilt, cloth, 1UJ. 6d.

BARRINGTON'5 FAMILIAR INTRODUCTION TO HERALDRY, in a Scries of

Lectures ; illustrated by numerous Drawings of Armorial Bearings, Bailees, and other Devi,

Mates, containing several hundred subjects' fcap. Svo, gilt cloth (pub. at 7*- M-)> 3s.
_ ;;ie same, with the plates mostly coloured, gilt cloth (pub. at 10*. Gd.), Tt.

BULWER'S LEILA: or the Siege of Granada; and Calderon the Courtier, 8vo., ilhi?-
tr?ted by 10 beautiful line Engravings by CHARLES HEATH, cloth, gilt edges, (pub. at \l. Is.},
10. 5,1

-^—^ the same, morocco extra, gilt edges, II.

BILLINGTON'S ARCIHTECTURAL DIRECTOR, being an improved Guide to Archi-

Draughtsmen, Students, Builders, and Workmen, to which is added a History of the

.. and a Glossary of Architecture. New Edition, enlarged, Svo, 100 plates, cloth lettered

(pub. at II. 8s), 10s. Gd. ijjjg

BOOK OF BRITISH BALLADS, edited by S. C. HALL; every pa?e richly embellished
.y-finished Wood Engravin-rs, after Designs by CB.SSWJCK, GILBERT, FRANK-
LIN-, CORBOULD, &c., Imperial Svo, cloth gilt edges (pub. at 21. 2s), li. 5s.

BOOK OF COSTUME, from the earliest period to the present time. Upwards of 200
beautiful Engravings on Wood, by LJ.KTON. 8\o (pub. at 11. Is.), gilt cloth, gilt edges, 10*. &!.

1847

BOOK OF GEMS, OR THE POETS AND ARTISTS OF GREAT BRITAIN.

ro. 150 exquisite Line Engravings after TURNER, BONIXGTON, LANDSEER, ROBERTS
ADY, etc. etc.; also numerous Autographs (pub. at 4u 14s. 6ii.) Cloth elegantly gilt,
, or in uiorocco 31. 3i.

BCOK OF GEMS, OR THE MODERN POETS AND ARTISTS OF GREAT

h'UTAIN. Svo. 50 exquisitely beautiful Line Engravings after TCRXER, BOVZBOXOV, etc.
etc. (pub. at II. 11». 6rf.), cloth elegantly gilt, 15s., or morocco, 11. Is.

BLUNTS BEAUTY OF THE HEAVENS; a Pictorial Display of the Astronomical
Pnenomenaofthe Universe; with a Familiar Lecture on Astronomy, "illustrated bv 104 Plates,
many coloured Broad 8vo., cloth gilt, II. Jj. 1S5S

BOTTA AND FLANDIN'S GREAT WORK ON NINEVEH; published at the ex-
: the Fremh Government. MOXUMENS DF. NINIVE. decouvens ct dt'crits pnrP. E.
:)TTA. mesures et dessinos par E. FLANDIN. 5 vols. large folio, (in 90 livraisons), coi.tnirii- -
Cravings, (pub. at 9o/.), 361.

BCOK OF SHAKSPEARE GEMS. A Series of Landscape Illustrations of the most iate-
.(.calitics of Shakspeare's Dramas; willi Historical and Descriptive Account"), V,--
NGTON IRVIKO, JKSSE, W. HOWITT. WonnswoKTji, I N;; r.is, and others. 8vo. irjii
.ished Steel Engravings (pub. at li. Us. (k/.), gilt clotb, lis.

1?

CATALOGUE OP NEW BOOKS,

BOCK OF WAVERLEY GEMS. A Series of 64 highly-finished Line Engravings of the
most interesting Incidents and Scenes in Walter Scott's Novels, by HEATH, FIXDEN, ROLLS,
and others, after Pictures by LESLIE, STOTHARD, COOPER, HOWARD, &c., •with illustrative
letterpress, 8vo. (pub. at II. Us. Gci.), cloth, elegantly gilt, 15*.

SROCKEDON'S PASSES OF THE ALPS. 2 vols.mediunvlto. Containing 109 bcautifuJ
Engravings (pub. at loi. 10$. in boards), half-bound morocco, gilt-edges, 31. 13*. Cd.

SRITTON'S CATHEDRAL CHUTCH OF LINCOLN, 4to, 16 fine plates, by LE KEUX,
(pub. at 31. 3*.),, cloth, ll. as. Koyal 4to, Large Paper, cloth, II. Hi. Ccf.

This volume was published to complete Mr. Britton's Cathedrals, and is wanting in most ol
the sets.

BRYAN'S DICTIONARY OF PAINTERS AND ENGRAVERS. New Edit on, cor-
rected, greatly enlarged, and continued to the present time, by GEORGE STANLEY, Esq., com-
plete in one large volume, impl. 8vo, numerous plates of monograms, 2t. 2a.

EUNYAN'S PILGRIM'S PROGRESS, STOTHARD'S Illustrated Edition. 8vo, with 17
exquisitely beautiful illustrations alter this delightful Artist, executed on Steel by GOODALI
and others, also numerous woodcuts, cloth gilt (pub. at It. !».), 12*.

the same, INDIA PROOFS, cloth gilt (pub. at 21. 2s.), ll. li.

BURNETT'S ILLUSTRATED EDITION OF SIR JOSHUA REYNOLDS ON

PAINTING, 4to, 12 fine plates, cloth (pub at 21. 2t.), ll. It. 1845

— — - the same, large paper, royal 4to, proof impressions of Plates, cloth ' ;;ub. at ll. 4*.), 21. 2s.

BYRON'S TALES AND POEMS, FINDKM'S Illustrated Edition, wiJi i6 Engravings oa
Steel, 8vo, cloth extra, gilt edges (pub. at ll. It.), 10*. 6d.

C ANO V A'S WOR KS, engraved in outline by Moses, with Descriptions and a Biographical
Memoir by Cicognari. 3 vols., imp. Svo, 155 plates, and fine portrait by Worthing! :m, half-
bound morocco (pub. at G/. 12*.), 21. 5s.

CARTER'S ANCIENT ARCHITECTURE OF ENGLAND. Illustrated by 103 Copper-
plate Engravings, comprising upwards of Two thousand specimens. Edited by JOHN BRIT-
ION, Esq. Royal folio (pub. at i2l. 12s.), half-bound morocco, it. is.

CARTER'S ANCIENT SCULPTURE AND PAINTING NOW REMAINING

IN ENGLAND, from the Earliest Period to «,he Reign of Henry VIII. With Historical and
Critical Illustrations, by DOUCE, GOCGH, MEYRICK, DAWSON, TURNER, and BRITTON.
Royal folio, with l:>0 large Engravings, many of which are beautifully coloured and several
illuminated with gold (pub. at 15*. 15*.), half-bound morocco, 81. 8*.

CARTER'S GOTHIC ARCHITECTURE, and Ancient Buildings in England, with 12C
Views, etched by himself. 4 vols, squar* 12mo ( pub. at 21. 2s.), half morocco, 18*.

CATLIN'S NORTH-AMERICAN INDIANS. 2 vols. impl. Svo. 360 Engravings (pub. at
21. 12s. 6d.), cloth emblematically gilt, ll. 10*.

the same, with the Plates beautifully Coloured, of which only 12 Copies have been git up.

hf. bd. morocco extra, 8*. 8*.

CATTERMOLE'S ILLUSTRATED HISTORY OF THE GREAT CIVIL WAR Ol

THE TIMES OF CHARLES I. AND CROMWELL, with 30 highly- finished Engravings 01
Steel, after CATTERMOLE, by ROLLS, WILLMORE, and other first rate Artists, imperial Svo
cloth extra, gilt edges, ll. Is.

CHAMBERLAINE'S IMITATIONS OF DRAWINGS from the Great Masters in th<
Royal Collection, engraved by BARTOLOZZI and others, impl. fol., 70 Plates (pub. at 12/. :2s.)
half bound morocco, gilt edges, at. as.

CLAUDE'S LIBER VERITATIS. A Collection of 300 Engravings in imitation of thi
original Drawings of CLAUDE, by EARLOit. 3 vols. folio (pub. at 3il. 10*.), hall-bourn
morocco, gilt edges, 10*. 10*.

CLAUDE, BEAUTIES OF, 24 FINE ENGRAVINGS, containing sonio if his choice

Landscapes, be
in a portfolio (pu

utifully Engraved on Steel, folio, with descriptive letter-press, and Portrait
b. at 3*. 12*.), 1*. as.

CONSTABLE'S GRAPHIC WORKS, many of them now first published, comprising fort]
large and highly-finished Mezzotiuto Engravings on Steel, by DAVID LUCAS, with short de.
scriptive letter-press, extracted from LESLIE'S Life of Constable, folio, hall-bound nurocco
gilt edges, 31. 13*. 6d.

CONSTABLE, THE ARTIST, (Leslie's Memoirs of) including his Lectures, 2nd Edition
with 2 beautiful Portraits, and the plate of" Spring," demy 4to, oToth (pub. at It. Is.), li*.

COESVELT'S PICTURE GALLERY. With an introduction by MRS. JAMESON. Boy a
fto, 90 Plates beautifully engraved in outline. India Proofs (pub. at 51. as.), half-boune
morocco, extra, 31. 3s.

COOKES SHIPPING AND CRAFT. A series of 65 brilliant Etchings, r
picturesque, but^at the same time extremely accurate Representations. .Royal 4tu

PUBLISHED OR SOLD BY H. G. BO1IX.

COOKF. S PICTURESQUE SCENERY OF LONDON AND ITS VICINITY. 50 beau-

•. CAI.COTT, STANFIELD, PROUT, ROKBRTS, HARDING, STARK,
and COTMA.V. Koyal 4to. "Proofs (pub. at St.), gilt cloth, 21. 2t.

CONEYS FOREIGN CATHEDRALS, HOTELS DE VILLE, TOWN HALLS.

AM) OTHER REMARKABLE BUILDINGS IN FRANCE, HOLLAND, GERMANY;
AM) ITALY. 32 fine large Plates. Imperial folio (pub. at 10*. I0i.), ualf-morocco, (flit edges,
31. 13*. 6 J. 1812

CORONATION OF GEORGE THE FOURTH, by SIR GKOKQK NATLOE, in a Series of

above 40 magnificent Paintinsrs of the Procession, Ceremonial, and Banquet, comprehending
faithful portraits of many of the distinguished Individuals who were present; with historical
and descriptive letter-press, atlas folio (pub. at 521. I0a.), half- bound morocco, gill edges

COSTUME AND HISTORY OF THE CLANS, by JOHN SOBIESKTSTOLBERRSTUJRT,
and CHARLES EDWARD STUART, imperial foiio, comprising 240 pages of letter-press and 3G
finely executed Lithographs, crimson cloth boards (pub. at 6i. 6*.), 31. 3s. Ldin. 1815

- the same, with the Plates most beautifully Coloured, half-bound morocco extra, gilt

edges, «. 8*.

COTMAN'S SEPULCHRAL BRASSES IN NORFOLK AND SUFFOLK, tending to

illustrate the Ecclesiastical, Military, and Civil Costume of former ages, with letter- press

descriptions, etc., by DAWSOX TURNER, SIR S. MEYRICK, etc. 173 Plates. The enamelled

Brasses are splendid'ly illuminated, 2 vols. impl. 4to, half-bound morocco, gilt edges, 61. 6*. 1836

• the same, large paper, imperial folio, half morocco, gilt edges, 81. 8s.

COTMAN'S ETCHINGS OF ARCHITECTURAL REMAINS in various counties in
Ensr'.and, with Letter-press Descriptions by RICKMAN. 2 vols. imperial folio, containing 247
highly spirited Etchings (pub. at 24/.), half morocco, 8*. 8*. 1838

OANIELL'S ORIENTAL SCENERY AND ANTIQUITIES. The original magnificent
edition, 150 splendid coloured Views, on the largest scale, of the Architecture, Antiquities, and
Landscape Scenery of Hincioostan, (j vol*. in 3, elephant folio (pub. at 210/.), elegantly half-
bound morocco, 52*. 10s.

OANIELL'S ORIENTAL SCENERY, 6 vols. in 3, small folio, 150 Plates (pub. at
18.' l&j.), half-bound morocco, 61. C».
This is reduced from the preceding large work, and is uncoloured.

DANIELL'S ANIMATED NATURE, being Picturesque Delineations of the most inte-

resting Subjects from all Branches of Natural History, 125 Engravings, with Letter press
Descriptions, 2 vols. small folio (pub. at HI. 15s. ), half morocco (uniform with the Oriental
Scenery) 31. 3».

DON QUIXOTE, PICTORIAL EDITION. Translated by JARVTS, carefully revised.

With a copious original Memoir of Cervantes. Illustrated by upwards of 820 beautiful Wood
Engravings after the celebrated Designs of TONY JOHAJJNOT, including 16 new and beautiful
large Cuts, by ARMSTROKG, now first added. 2 vols. royal 8vo (pub. at 21. 10».), cloth gilt,
I/. 63.

DULWICH GALLERY, a Series of 50 beautifully Coloured Plates, from the most cele-

brated Pictures in this Remarkable Collection, executed by R. COCKBURS (Custodian.) All
mounted on Tinted Card-board in the manner of Drawings, imperial folio, including 4 very
large additional Plates, published separately at from 3 to 4 guineas each and not befort
included in the Series. In a handsome portfol'io, with morocco back (pub at 40/.), \U. 16*.

"This is one of the most splendid and interesting of the British Picture Galleries, and has
for some years been quite unattainable, even at the full price."

ECCLESTON'S INTRODUCTION TO ENGLISH ANTIQUITIES, thick 8vo, with
numerous woodcuts, cloth (pub. at II. It.), Qs.

EGYPT-PERRING'S FIFTY-EIGHT LARGE VIEWS AND ILLUSTRATIONS OF

THE PYRAMIDS OF GIZEH, ABOU ROASH, &c. Drawn from actual Survey and
Admeasurement. With Notes and References to Col. Vyse's great Work, also to Denon, the
great French Work on Egypt, Rosellini, Belzoni, Burck'hardt. Sir Gardner Wilkinson, Lane,
and others. 3 Parts, elephant folio, the size of the great French "Egypte" (pub. at la/. 15*.)
in printed wrappers, 31. 3t.; half bound morocco, 41. Hi. Gd. 1842

ENGLEFIELD'S ANCIENT VASES, drawn and engraved by H. MOST.S, imperial 8vo,
51 fine plates, 12 of which are no* first published, cloth iottered ("pub. at ll. \6s.), \2s.

ENGLEFIELD'S ISLE OF WIGHT. 4to. 50 large Plates, engraved by COOKE, and a Geo-
logical Map (pub. 71. •}!.), cloth, 21. Si. 1816

FLAXMAN'S HOMER. Seventy-five beautiful Compositions to the ILIAD and ODYSSEY,
engraved under r LAXMAN'S inspection, by PIROLI, MOSES, and BLAKE. 2 vols. oblong folio
(pub. at 5*. 5*.), boardi 21. Z». 1805

FLAXMAN'S /ESCHYLUS, Thirty-six beau? iful Compositions from. Oblong folio (pnb,

at 2i. I2t. 6c/.), board , U. 1 . K.iJ

B2

4 CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOKS,

FLAXMAN'S HESIOD. Thirty-seven beautiful Compositions from. Oblong Jclio (pub«

at 21. 12*. 6'7.). beards 11. in. ' 1817

" Flaxman's unequalled Compositions from Homer, ^Eschylus, and Hesiod, have lonj?
been the admiration of Europe; of their simplicity and beauty the pen is quite incapable of
conveying an adequate impression." — Sir Thomas Lawrence.

FLAXMAN'S ACTS OF MERCY. A Series of Eight Compositions, in the manner of
Ancient Sculpture, engraved in imitation of the original Drawings, by F. C. LEWIS. Oblong
folio (pub. at 21. 2i.), half-bound morocco, 16». 1S31

FROISSART, ILLUMINATED ILLUSTRATIONS OF. Seventy-four Plates, printedia

Gold and Colours. 2 vols super-royal 8vo, half- bound, uncut (pub. at4/. 10j.), 3/. 10*.
— — - the same, large paper, 2 vols. royal 4to, half-bound, uncut (pub. at 101. 10*.), 61. C*.

GALERIE DU PALAIS PITTI, in 100 livraisons, forming 4 thick vols. super-royal folio»
containing 500 fine Engravings, executed by the first Italian Artists, •with descriptive letter-
press in French (pub. at 50/.), 211. JYomw, 1837— 45

- the same, bound in 4 vols. half-morocco extra, gilt edges, 251.

-- the same, LARGE PAPER, PROOF BEFORE THE LETTERS, 100 livraisons, imperial folio
(pub. at loo/.), so/.

- the same, bound in 4 vols. half-morocco extra, gilt edges, 351.

CELL AND CANDY'S POMPEIANA, or the Topography, Edifices, and Ornaments of

Pompeii. Original Series, containing the Result of all the Excavations previous to 1819, new and
elegant edition, in one vol. royal 8vo, with upwards of 100 beautiful Line Engravings by
GOODALL, COOKE, HEATH, PYE, &c. cloth extra, II. Is.

GEMS OF ART. 36 FINE ENGRAVINGS, after REMBRANDT, CUYP, REYNOLDS,
POUSSIN, MURRILO, TENTERS, CORREGGIO, VAKBERVELDE, folio, proof impressions, in port-
folio (pub. at SI. Si.), 11. 11*. 6d.

GILLRAY'S CARICATURES, printed from the Original Plates, all engraved by himself
between 1779 and 1810, comprising the best Political and Humorous satires of the'Reign of
George the Third, in upwards of GOO highly-spirited Engravings. In 1 large vol. atlas folio
(exactly uniform with the original Hogarth, as sold by the advertiser), half-bound red morocco
extra, gilt edges, SI. Ss.

GILPIN'S PRACTICAL HINTS UPON LANDSCAPE GARDENING, with some
Remarks on Domestic Architecture. Royal 8vo, Plates, cloth (pub. at H.), 7».

GOETHE'S FAUST, ILLUSTRATED BYRETZSCH in 26 beautiful Outlines, royal 4to
(pub. at It. Is.), gilt cloth, 10*. Grf.
This edition contains a translation of the original poem, with historical and descriptive notes.

GOODWIN'S DOMESTIC ARCHITECTURE. A Series of New Designs for Mansions,
Villas, Rectory-Houses, Parsonage-Houses; Bailiff's, Gardener's, Gamekeeper's, and Park-
Gate Lodges; Cottages and other Residences, in the Grecian, Italian, and Old English Stvle
of Architecture; with Estimates. 2 vols. royal 4to, 96 Plates (pub. at 51. 5s.), cloth, 2i. 13*. Gd.

GRINDLAY'S (CAPT.) VIEWS IN INDIA, SCENERY, COSTUME, AND ARCW-

TECTURE; chiefly on the Western Side of India. Atlas 4to. Consisting of 36 most beauti-
fully coloured Plates, highly finished in imitation of Drawings; with descriptive Letter-press.
/Pub. at 12/. 12*.), half-bound morocco, gilt edges, 81. 8s. 1830

This is perhaps the most exquisitely-coloured volume of landscapes ever produced.

HAMILTON'S (LADY) ATTITUDES. 26 bold Outline Engravings, royal 4to, limp
cloth, lettered (pub. at It 11*. 6d.), 10*. Gd.

HANSARDS ILLUSTRATED BOOK OF ARCHERY. Being the complete History r.nd
Practice of the Art; interspersed with numerous Anecdotes; forming a complete Manual for
the Bowman. 8vo. Illustrated by 3S beautiful Line Engravings, exquisiteiy finished, by
ENGLEHEABT, PoRTBURY, etc. after Designs by STEPHAXOFI? (pub. at It. Us. 6d ),gilt cloih,
10s. 6(1.

HARRIS'S GAME AND WILD ANIMALS Of SOUTHERN AFRICA, Large imperial
folio. 30 beautifully coloured Engravings, with 30 Vignettes of Heads, Skins, &c. (pub. at
101. 10*.), half-morocco, 61. 61. 1814

HARRIS'S WILD SPORTS OF SOUTHERN AFRICA. Imperial 8vo. 26 beautifully
coloured Engravings, and a Map (pub. at 21. 2s.), gilt cloth, gilt edges, ll. is. 184'*

HEATH'S CARICATURE SCRAP BOOK, on 60 sheets, containing upwards of 1000
Comic Subjects, after SEYMOUR, CRUIKSHANK, PHIZ, and other eminent Caricaturists,

Comic Subjects, ater SEYMOUR, RUIK
oblong folio (pub. at 21. 2*.), cloth gilt, 15s.

PUBLISHED OR SOLD BY II. G. BOHN. «>

HERVEY'S (T. K.) ENGLISH HELICON; or POETS of the Nineteenth Century,
:::>.istrated with 12 beautiful Steel Engravings, cloth, gilt edges, (pub. at ll. !».), 9».

HOGARTH'S WORKS ENGRAVED BY HIMSELF. 153 fine Plates, (including; the two
well-known '-suppressed Plates,"; with elaborate Letter-press Descriptions, by J. NICHOLS.
Atlas folio (pub at SO/.), half-bound morocco, gilt back and edges, with a secret pocket for
suppressed plates, 7/. 7*.

HOLBEIN'S COURT OF HENRY THE EIGHTH. A Series of 80 exquisitely beautiful
Portraits, engraved by BARTOLOZZI, COOPER, and others, in imitation of the original
Drawings preserved in the Koyal Collection at Windsor; with Historical and Biographical
Letter-press by EDMUND LODGE, Esq. Published by JOHN CHAMBERLAINE. Imperial 4to,
(pub. at 15^. 15*.), half-bound morocco, full gilt back and edges, 5i. 15s. 6d. 1813

HOFLAND'S BRITISH ANGLER'S MANUAL; Edited by EDWARD JESSK, Esq.; or
the Art of Ansling in England, Scotland, Wales, and Ireland; including a Piscatorial Account
of the principal Rivers, Lakes, and Trout Streams; with Instructions in Fly Fishing, Trolling,
and Angling of every Description. With upwards of 80 exquisite Plates, many of which are
highly-finished Landscapes engraved on Steel, the remainder beautifully engraved on Wood.
8vo, elegant in gilt cloth, 12*.

HOPE'S COSTUME OF THE ANCIENTS. Illustrated in upwards of 320 beautifully-
engraved Plates, containing Representations of Egyptian, Greek, and Roman Habits and
Dresses. 2 vols. royal 8vo, New Edition, with nearly 20 additional Plates, boards, reduced
to 21. 5». 1841

HOWARD (FRANK) ON COLOUR, as a MEANS OF ART, being: an Adaptation of the
Experience of Professors to the practice of Amateurs, illustrated by 18 coloured Plates,
post 8vo, cloth gilt, 8s.

In this able volume are shown the ground colours in which the most celebrated painters
vcrked. It is very valuable to the connoisseur, as well as the student, in painting and
•water-colour drawing.

HOWARD'S (HENRY, R. A.) LECTURES ON PAINTING. Delivered at the Royal
Academy, with a Memoir, by his s>on, FRANK HOWARD, large post 8vo, cloth, 7>. Gd. 1848

HOWARD'S (FRANK) SPIRIT OF SHAKSPEARE. 483 fine Outline Plates, illustrative

of all the principal Incidents in the Dramas of our national Bard, 5 vols, 8vo, (pub. at 141. 8s.)

cloth, 21. 2>. 1827— 33

*** The 483 Plates may be had without the letter-press, for illustrating all 8vo. editions o(

Shakspeare, for ll. 11». 6d.

HOWITTS (MARY) LIVES OF THE BRITISH QUEENS: OR, ROYAL BOOK OF

BEAUTY. Illustrated with 28 splendid Portraits of the Queens of England, by. the first
Artists, engraved on Steel under the direction of CHARLES HEATH. Imperial 8vo, very richly
bound in crimson cloth, gilt edges, 11. 11s. 6d.

HUNT'S (LEIGH) STORIES FROM THE ITALIAN POETS (Dante, Ariosto, Boiardo,
Tasso, Pulci). with Lives of the Writers, '2 vols, post 8vo., cloth, (pub. at £1 4s.), 10s.

HUNT'S EXAMPLES OF TUDOR ARCHITECTURE ADAPTED TO MODERN

HABITATIONS. Royal 4to, 3? Plates (pub. at 21. '2s.), half morocco, 11. it.

HUNT'S DESIGNS FOR PARSONAGE-HOUSES. ALMS-HOUSES, ETC. Royal
•i'.o, 21 Plates (pub. at 11. Is.), half morocco, Us. 1841

HUNT'S DESIGNS FOR GATE LODGES, GAMEKEEPERS' COTTAGES, ETC.

Royal 4to., 13 Plates, (pub. at 11. !».), half morocco, 14j. 1841

HUNT'S ARCHITETTURA 'CAMPESTRE; on, DESIGNS FOR LODGES, GAR-
DENERS'HOUSES. ETC., IN THE ITALIAN STYLE. 12 Plates, royal 4to. (pub. at
ll. It.), half morocco, lls. 1827

ILLUMINATED BOOK OF CHRISTMAS CAROLS. Square 8vo. 24 Borders illumi-
nated in Gold and Colours, and 4 beautUul Miniatures, richly Ornamented Binding (pub. at
ll. 5f.), 15«. 1846

ILLUMINATED BOOK OF NEEDLEWORK. By Mrs. OWKN, with a History of Needle-
work, by the COUNTESS ol WILTON, Coloured Plates, post 8vo. (pub. at 18s.), gilt cloth, 5*. 18i?

ITAL.AN SCHOOL OF DESIGN. Consisting of 100 Plates, chiefly engraved by BAKTO-
LOZZI, after the original Pictures and Drawings of GUERCINO, MICHAEL ANGELO.DOMENI-
CHINO. ANNIBALE, LUDOVICO, and AGOSTINO CARACCI, PIETRO DA CORTONA, CARLO
MARATTI, and others, in the Collection of Her Majesty. Imperial 4to. (pub. at 101. 10i.), half
morocco, gilt edges, 31. 3j. 1812

JA?*1r.S' (G. P. R.) BOOK OF THE PASSIONS, royal 8vo, illustrated with 16 splendid

Line Engravings, after Drawing! by EDWARD COURBOULD, STEPHANOFF, CHALON, KENNY

MKABOWS, and JENKINS; engraved under the superintendence of CHARLES HEATH. New

improved edition (just published), elegant in gilt clotb, gi't edges (pub. it It. lit. U.),

CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOKS

JAMESON'S (MRS.) BEAUTIES OF THE COURT OF CHARLES THE SECOX3

with their Portraits alter SIR PETER LELY and other eminent Painters; illustrating the TviHris*
of PEI-YS, EVELYN, CLARENDON, &c A new edition, considerably enlarged, with an Inire-
ductorv Essay and additional Anecdotes. Imperial 8vo, illustrated by 21 beautiful Portrait*
comprising the whole of the celebrated suite of Paintings by LELY, preserved in the Windsoi
Gallerv, and several from the Devonshire, Grosvenor, and Althorp Galleries, extra gilt cloth,
11. 5*. "
the same, imperial 8vo, with India proof imprettiont, extra gi'.t cloth, gilt edges, V. 10s.

JACKSON'S HISTORY OF WOOD ENGRAVING. New and Enlarged Edition, with
several hundred Illustrations, upwards of One Hundred of which are now first added, beautifully
printed by Mr. C-ay. Imperial isvo, hi", bd. green morocco, uncut. 21. 5s. London, li>00

KINGSBOROUGH'S (LORD) ANTIQUITIES OF MEXICO, comprising Fac-similes

of Ancient Mexican Paintings and Hieroglyphics, preserved in the Royal Libraries of Paris,
Berlin, Dresden, Vienna; the Vatican and the Borgian Museum, at Rome; the Institute al
Bologna; the Bodleian Library at Oxford • and various others; the greater part inedited.
Also, the Monuments of New Spain, by M. DUPAIX, illustrated by upwards of 1000 elaborate
and highly interesting Plates, accurately copied from the originals, by A. AGLIO, 9 vols. impe-
rial folio, very neatly half bound morocco, gilt edges (pub. at 14(M.)f 3at.

- . the same, 9 vols. •WITH THE PLATES BEAUTIFULLY COLOURED, half bound morocco,

gilt edges, (pub. at 2104.), Ml.
. the two Additional Volumes, now first published, and forming the 8th and 9th of the

whole work, may be had separately, to complete the former seven, in red boards, as formerly

done up, 121. I2t.

KNIGHT'S (HENRY GALLY) ECCLESIASTICAL ARCHITECTURE OF ITALY,

FROM THE TIME OF CONSTANTI.VE TO THE FIFTEENTH CENTURY. With an
Introduction and Text. Imperial folio. First Series, containing 40 beautiful and highly inte-
resting Views of Ecclesiastical Buildings in Italy, several of which are expensively illuminated
in gold and colours, half-bound morocco, 51. 5s. 1843

Second and Concluding Series, containing 41 beautiful and highly interesting Views of Eccle-
siastical Buildings in Italy, arranged in Chronological Order; with Descripthe Letter-press.
Imperial folio, half-bound morocco, 54. 5s. ISii

KNIGHT'S PICTORIAL LONDON. 6 vols. boundin 3 thick handsome vols., imperial
Svo, illustrated by 650 Wood Engravings (pub. at 34. Zs.), cloth gilt) , 14. 18*. 1841-11

LANDSEER'S (SIR EDWIN) ETCHINGS OF CARNIVOROUS ANIMALS, Com-

prising 38 subjects, chiefly early works o this talented Artist, etched by his brother THOMAS
or his Father, (some hitherto unpublished), with letter-press Descriptions, royal 4to., cloth,

GRAPHIC AND

ments of the City and Suburbs of London and Westminster, e. g , Monasteries, Churches,
Charitable Foundations, Palaces, Halls, Courts, Processions, Places of eirly Amusements,
Theatres, and Old Houses. 2 vols. imperial 4to, containing 207 Copperplate Engravijjgs, with
Historical and Descriptive Letter-press (pub. at 261. Si.), half-bound morocco, 54. 5». 1819-2J

LOUDON'S EDITION OF REPTON ON LANDSCAPE GARDENING AND

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECTURE. New Edition, 250 Wood Cuts, Portrait, thick Svo, cloth
lettered (pub. at 14. 10*.), 15».

MARCENY DE GHUY, OZUVRES DE, cnntenant differens Morceaux d'Histoires, Por-
traits, Paysages, Batailles, etc., with above 50 remarkably fine Engravings, after Paintings by
Poussix, VAKDYCK, REMBRANDT, and others, including Portraits of Charles I., the Maid of
Orleans, &c. fine impressions. Imp. 4to, half bound morocco (pub. at 51. 5».), \l. 1C*. Paris, 1755

MARTIN'S CIVIL COSTUME OF ENGLAND, from the Conquest to the Present
Period, from Tapestry, MSS., &c. Royal 4to, 61 Plates, beautifully Illuminated in G-»ld and
Colours, cloth, gilt, 21. I2t. 6d. 1842

MEYRICK'S PAINTED ILLUSTRATIONS OF ANCIENT ARMS AND ARMOUR,

a Critical Inquiry into Ancient Armour as it existed in Europe, but particularlv in England,
from the Norman Conquest to the Reign of Charles II., with a Glossary, etc. by" SIR SAMUEL
RUSH MEYRICK, LL.D., F.S.A., etc., new and greatly improved Edition, corrected and en-
larged throughout by the Author himself, with the assistance of Literary and Antiquarian
Friends (ALBERT WAY, etc.) 3 vols. imperial 4to, illustrated by more than loo Plates,
•plendidly illuminated, mostly in gold and silver, exhibiting some of the finest Specimens
•listing in England; also a new Plate of the Tournament of Locks and Keys (pub. at 214.)
half-bound morocco, gilt edges, 104. 10s. 1814

SIR WALTER SCOTT justly describes this Collection as " THE IKCOSIPAXABLE ARMOURY. "
Edinburgh Review.

feJEYRICK'S ENGRAVED ILLUSTRATIONS OF ANCIENT ARMS &. ARMOUR,

in the Collection of Goodrich Court, 150 Engravings by Jos. SKELTON, 2 vols. folio (pulj
At 111 1 Is.), half morocco, to? «'lfes gilt, 44. Us. 6d.

LONDON. —WILKINSON'S LONDINA ILLUSTRATA; OK, GRAPHIC

HISTORICAL ILLUSTRATIONS of the most Interesting and Curious Architectural

PUBLISHED OR 50LD BX H. G. BOHN.

MILLINGEN'S ANCIENT UNEDITED MONUMENTS; comprising Painted Greek
Vases, Statues, Busts, I3as-Reliefs, and other Remains of Grecian Art. 62 large and beautiful
Engravings, mostly coloured, with Letter-press Descriptions, imperial 4to. (pub. at 9/. 9*.)
half morocco, il. Hi. 6d. 1822

MOSESS ANTIQUE VASES, CANDELABRA, LAMPS, TRIPODS, PATERA.

Tazzos, Tombs, Mausoleums, Sepulchral Chambers, Cinerary Urns, Sarcophagi, rippi, and
other Ornaments, 170 Plates, several of which are coloured, with Letter-press, by HOPE,
small 8vo. (pub. at 31. 3s.), cloth, II, St. 1814

MULLERS' ANCIENT ART AND ITS REMAINS, or a Manual of the Archaeology of
Art. By C. O. MULLER, author of "History and Antiquities of the Doric Race." New edition
by WELCKER, translated by JOHN LBITCH. Thick Svo. cloth lettered (pub. at 18s.), 12s.

MURPHY'S ARABIAN ANTIQUITIES OF SPAIN; representing, in 100 very highly
hed line Engravings, by LE KEUX, FIXDEX, LANDSEEH, G. COOKE, &c., the most
remarkable Remains of the Architecture, Scu'pU.re, Paintings, and Mosaics of the Spanish
Arabs now existing in the Peninsula, including ;he magnificent Palace of the Alhambra; the
celebrated .\.osque-and Bridge at Cordova; the Royal Villa of Generalise; and the Casade
Carbon : accompanied by Letter-press Descriptions, in 1 vol. atlas folio, original and brilliant
impressions of the Plates (pub. at42/), half morocco, 121. \2s. 1813

MURPHY'S ANCIENT CHURCH OF BATALHA, IN PORTUGAL, Plans, Eleva-
tions, Sections, and Views of the; with its History and Description, and an Introductory
Discourse on GOTHIC ARCHITECTURE, imperial folio, 27 fine Copper Plates, engraved
by LOWRY (pub. at 61. 6s.), half morocco, 21. 8s. 1793

NAPOLEON GALLERY ; or, Illustrations of the Life and Times of the Emperor, with
99 Etchings on Steel b. RKVELL, and other eminent Artists, in one thick volume, post Svo.
(pub. at II. \i.), gilt cl ;h, gilt edges, 10». 6d.

NICOLAS'S (SIR HAh *IS) HISTORY OF THE ORDERS OF KNIGHTHOOD

OF THE BRITISH t vIPIRE; with an Account of the Medals, Crosses, and Clasps which
have been conferred for Naval and Military Services; together with a History of the Order of
the Guelphs of Hanover. 4 vols. imperial 4to, splendidly printed and illustrated by numerous
fine Woodcuts of Badges, Crosses, Collars, Stars, Medals, Ribbands, Clasps, &c., and many
larjre Plates, illuminated in go'.d and colours, including full-length Portraits of Queen Victoria,
Prince Albert, the King of Hanover, and the Dukes of Cambridge and Sussex. (Pub. at
14/. 14*.), cloth, with morocco backs, 51. 15s. Cd. *** Complete to 1847

the same, with the Plates richly coloured, but not illuminated, and without the

extra portraits, 4 vols. royal 4to, cloth, 31. 13*. 6d.

" Sir Harris Nicolas has produced the first comprehensve History of the British Orders of
Knighthood ; and it is one of Ike moat elaborately prepared and splendidly printed works that ever
issued from the press. The Author appears to us to have neglected no sources of information,
and to have exhausted them, as far as regards the general scope and purpose of the inquiry.
The Graphical Illustrations are such as become a work of this character upon such a subject;
at, of course, a lavish cost. The resources of the recently revived art of wood-engraving have
been combined with the new art of printing in colours, so as to produce a rich eilect, almost
rivalling that of the monastic illuminations. Such a book is sure of a place in every (/mat library.
It contains matter calculated to interest extensive classes of readers, and we hope by our
specimen to excite their curiosity."— Quartei-iy Review.

NICHOLSON'S ARCHITECTURE; ITS PRINCIPLES AND PRACTICE. 218

Plates by LOWRY, new edition, revised by Jos. GWILT, Esq., one volume, royal Svo,
I/. 11». 6d. 1848

For classical Architecture, the text book of the Profession, the most useful Guide to the
Student, and the best Compendium for the Amateur. An eminent Architect has declared it to
be " not only the most useful book of the kind ever published, but absolutely indispensable to
the Student."

PICTORIAL HISTORY OF GERMANY DURING THE REIGN OF FREDERICK

THE GREAT; including a complete History of the Seven Years' War. By FRANCIS

i.. Illustrated by ADOLPH MEXZEL. Royal Svo, with above 500 Woodcuts (pub. at

U. &t.), cloth gilt, 12». 1845

PICTORIAL GALLERY OF RACE-HORSES. Containing Portraits of aU the Winning
Horses of the Derby, Oaks, and St. Le.Lier Stakes, during the last Thirteen Years, and a
History of the principal Operations of the Turf. By WILDRAKE (George Tattcrsall, Esq.).
Ro\ al Svo, containing 9i beautUnLEngravings or Horses, after Pictures by COOPER, HERRING,
HANCOCK, ALKEN, &c. Also full-length chaiacteristic Portraits of celebrated living Sports-
men (" Cracks of the Day"), by SEYMOUR ( , ul>. at 21. 2s), scarlet cloth, gilt, H. 10*.

PICTORIAL HISTORY OF FRANCE AND ITS REVOLUTIONS, (comprising the
^eriod 1789 to 181R), by GEORGE LONG, with fine Portraits, and numerous larjfe woodcuts,
after Designs by HARVEY. Large imperial 8vo, cloth (pub. at 11,) 12s.

PICTURESQUE TOUR OF THE RIVER THAMES, in its Western Course, including

ir Descriptions of Richmond, Windsor, and Hampton Court. By Jons FISHER
. . Illustrated by upwards of loo very highly-finished Wood Engravings by ORRIW

SMITH, BRAXSTOX, LAXIJELLS, Lixios, and other eminent Artists. Koval t-vo. ,'pub.

at U. 5?.), gilt cleth, 5*. 6rf. 1S45

The most beautiful volume of Topographical Liafnographs erer produced.

8 CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOKS,

PINELLI'S ETCHINGS OF ITALIAN MANNERS AND COSTUME, including hii
Carnival, Banditti, &c., 27 Plates, imperial 4to, half-bound morocco, 15*. Rome, 1840

PUGIN'S GLOSSARY OF ECCLESIASTICAL ORNAMENT AND COSTUME;

setting forth the Origin, History, and Signification of the various Emblems, Devices, and
Symbolical Colours, peculiar to Christian Designs of the Middle Ages. Illustrated by nearly
8u Plates, splendidly printed in gold and colours. Royal 4to, half morocco extra, top edges
gilt, 6/. 6>.

PUGIN'S ORNAMENTAL TIMBER GABLES, selected from Ancient Examples in
England and Normandy. Royal 4to, 30 Plates, cloth, 1*. It. 1830

PUGIN'S EXAMPLES OF GOTHIC ARCHITECTURE, selected from Ancient
Edifices in England; consisting of Plans, Elevations, Sections, and Parts at large, with
Historical and Descriptive letter-press, illustrated by 225 Engravings by LE K.EVX, 3 vols. 4to,
(pub. at 121. 12s.) cloth, 6*. Cs. 1839

PUGIN'S GOTHIC ORNAMENTS. 90 fine Plates, drawn on Stone by J.D. HAKDING
and others. Royal 4to, half morocco, 31. 3s. 1844

PUGIN'S NEW WORK ON FLORIATED ORNAMENT, with 30 Plates, splendidly
printed in Gold and Colours, royal 4to, elegantly bound in cloth, with rich gold ornaments,
(pub. at 3*. 3s.), 2l.5>.

RADCLIFFE'S NOBLE SCIENCE OF FOX-HUNTING, for the use of Sportsmen, royal
8v-o, nearly 40 beautiful Wood Cuts of Hunting, Hounds, &c. (pub. at 1*. 8s,), cloth gilt,
10*. 64. 1839

RiCAUTI'S SKETCHES FOR RUSTIC WORK, including Bridges, Park and Garden
Buildings, Seats and Furniture, with Descriptions and Estimates of the Buildings. Kew
Edition, royal 4to, 18 Plates, cloth lettered (pub. at 16s.), 12s.

RETZSCH'S OUTLINES TO SCHILLER'S "FIGHT WITH THE DRAGON."

Royal 4to, containing 10 Plates, engraved by MOSES, stiff covers, 7». 6d.

RETZSCH'S ILLUSTRATIONS TO SCHILLER'S " FRIDOLIN," Royal 4to, contain-
ing 8 Plates, engraved by MOSES, stiff covers, 4s. 6d.

REYNOLDS' (SIR JOSHUA) GRAPHIC WORKS. 300 beautiful Engravings (compris-
ing nearly 400 subjects, ) after this delightful painter, engraved on Steel by S. W. REYNOLDS .
3 vols, folio (pub. at 36*.), half bound morocco, gilt edges, 12*. 12*.

ROBINSON'S RURAL ARCHITECTURE; being a Series of Designs for Ornamental
Cottages, in 96 Plates, with Estimates. Fourth, greatly improved, Edition. Royal 4to
(pub. at 4*. 4*.), half morocco, 21. 5s.

ROBINSON'S NEW SERIES OF ORNAMENTAL COTTAGES AND VILLAS,

66 Plates by HARDING and ALLOM. Royal 4to, half morocco, 21. 2s.

ROBINSON'S ORNAMENTAL VILLAS. 9C Plates (pub. at 4/. 4«.) half morocco, 21. 5*.
ROBINSON'S FARM BUILDINGS. 56 Plates (pub. at 21. 2s.) half morocco, ll. Us. Gd

ROBINSON'S LODGES AND PARK ENTRANCES. 48 Plates (pub at <2l. 2s.), half
rnorocco, 1* 11*. <od.

ROBINSON'S VILLAGE ARCHITECTURE. Fourth Editiou, with additional Plate.
41 Plates (pub. at 1*. 16s), half bound uniform, 1*. 4s.

ROBINSON'S NEW VITRUVIUS BRITANNICUS; or, Views, Plans and Elevations
of English Mansions, viz., Woburn Abbey, Hatfield House, and Hardwicke Hail; also
Cassiobury House, by JOHN BRITTON, imperial folio, 50 fine Engravings, by LE KEUX
(pub. at 16*. 16s.), half morocco, gilt edges, 3*. 13». Cd. 1847

ROYAL VICTORIA GALLERY, comprising 33 beautiful Engravings, after Pictures at
BUCKINGHAM PALACE, particularly REMBRANDT, the OSTADES, TENIERS, GKRATID
Dorw, BOTH, CUYF, REYNOLDS, TITIAN, and RUBENS ; engraved by GREATKALH. S. H".
REYNOLDS, PRESBURY', BURNET, &c. ; with letter- press by LINNELL, royal 4to. (pub. at
ii. is.), halt morocco, 1*. 11s. 6d.

SCHOLA ITALICA ARTIS PICTORIXE, or Engravings of the finest Pictures in the Gal-
It'ries at. Rome, imperial folio, consisting of 40 beautiful Engravings after MICHAEL ANGELO,
RAPHAEL, TITIAN, CARACCI, GUIDO, PARMIGIANO, etc. by VOLPATO and others, line im-
pressions, half-bound morocco (pub. at 10*. 10s.), 21. 12s. 6d. Romae, 1806

SHAW'S SPECIMENS OF ANCIENT FURNITURE. 75 Plates, drawn from existing
authorities, with descriptions by SIR SAMUEL R. MEYRICK, K.H., medium 4to, plain (pub
at 2*. 2s.), 1*. 11s. 6c*.

' the same, with a portion of the plates coloured, medium 4to. (pub. at 41. is.), 2!. 12s. 6d.),
— the same, imperial iio, large paper, with all the Plates finely coloured, (pub. at 8/s. 8s.),

the name, imperial 4to. large paper, itli the whole of the I'lates extra finished in

tpub. at 10*. 10*.). Gi. (it.

PUBLISHED OR SOLD BY II. G. B01IX.

SHAW'S ILLUMINATED ORNAMENTS OF THE MIDDLE AGES, from the Cth to the

.tury, selected from manuscripts and early printed nooks, .9 Plates, caretuhy coloured
from the originate, with descriptions by SIR FREDERICK MADDE>-,K.HM in one vul.-ito (pub.
at U.

the same, large paper, highly-finished with opaque colours, and heightened with gold,

imperial 4to (pub. at rt/. 10*.), 8/. *>.

SHAWS ALPHABETS, NUMERALS, AND DEVICES OF THE MIDDLE AGES,

selected from the finest existing Specimens, 48 Plates (26 of them coloured) imperial Svo.
(pub. at2^. 2*.), II. lls. 6<1.

the same, large paper, imperial 4to, with the coloured plates highly-finished, and

.ed with gold (pub. at il. -is.), 31. 10*.

SHAW'S HAND-BOOK OF MEDI/EVAL ALPHABETS AND DEVICES, being a
selection of '20 Plates of Alphabets, and 17 Plates of original specimens oi Labels, Monograms,
Heraldic Devices, &c. not heretofore figured, in all 37 Plates, printed in colours, imperial Svo.
in cloth boards (pub. at ll. 16*.), 15*.

SHAW'S SPECIMENS OF THE DETAILS OF ELIZABETHAN ARCHITECTURE,

with descriptions by T. MOULE, ESQ., 60 Plates, 4to, boards (pub. at 31. 3s.), ll. lls. M.

the same, large paper, imperial 4to, proof plates on India paper, some coloured (pub. at

6/.<Jj.), 31. 3s.

SHAWS ENCYCLOPXEDIA OF ORNAMENT, select examples from thepurest and best

specimens of all kinds and of all ages, 59 Plates, 4to, boards (pub. at ll. 10*.), ll 5*.
the same, large paper, imperial 4to, all the Plates coloured, boards (pub.atSJ.), 21. 12*. ft*.

SHAW'SSPECIMENS OF ORNAMENTAL METAL WORK, with 50 plates, 4to, boards
(pub. at 21. 2*.), ll. Is.

SHAW'S DECORATIVE ARTS OF THE MIDDLE AGES, exhibiting on 41 Plates, with

numerous Woodcuts, beautiful specimens of the various kinds of Ancient Enamel, Metal
Work, Wood Carvings, Paintings on Stained Glass, Initial Illuminations, Embroidery, Book-
bindincr, and other Ornamental Textures, also fine and elegant Initial letters to the various
descriptions, imperial Svo, boards (puh. at 21. 2s.), ll. 16*.

— ^ the same, large paper, imperial 4to, 41 Plates, some coloured, boards (pub. at il. i*.)
3/. 10*.

- the same, large paper, imperial 4to, with the whole of the plates coloured in the highest
style, forming a very beautiful and interesting volume, boards (pub. at SI. 8*.), 61. 6s.

SHAWS DRESSES AND DECORATIONS OF THE MIDDLE AGES, from the 7th to
the 17th centuries, with an Historical Introduction and Descriptive Text to every Illustration,
consisting of 85 Copper Plates of elaborate Woodcuts, a profusion of beautiful Initial Letters,
and examples of curious and singular ornament enriching nearly every page of this highly
decorated work, 2 vols., imperial Svo, the plates carefully coloured, boards (pub. at ;/. 7s.),
5!. 15... 6«f.

the same, 2 vols large paper, imperial 4to, the plates highly coloured and picked-in with

gold, boards (pub. at IS/.), 14/. 14?.

the same, large paper, imperial 4to, with the plates highly coloured and the whole of the

Initial Letters and Illustrations picked in with gold (only 12 copies got up in this manner)
(pub. at 30/.), 24/.

SHAWS ORNAMENTAL TILE PAVEMENTS, drawn from existing authorities.

Royal 4to, with 47 large coloured plates, half- bound, reduced to 2/. 2*. London, 1851

SHAWS GLAZIER'S BOOK, or Draughts serving for Glaziers, but not impertinent for

Plasterers, Gardeners, and others, consisting of elaborate designs for Casement Windows,

Plasterers' work, garden walks, etc., 117 Plates, mostly taken from a work published in 1615,

by WALTER GIDDE, Svo, boards, pub. at 16s., 10.?. 6d.

SHAW AND BRIDGEN'S DESIGNS FOR FURNITURE, with Candelabra and interior
Decoration, 60 Plates, royal 4to, puh. at 31. 3s., half-bound, uncut, ll. l\s. 6d. 1838

the same, large paper, impl. 4to, the Plates coloured (pub. at 61. 6s.) half-bd., uncut, 3/. 3*

SHAW'S LUTON CHAPEL, its Architecture and Ornaments, illustrated in a series of 2G

i.ished Line Engravings, imperial folio (pub. at 3/. 3*.) half-morocco, uncut, ll. 16*.
SILVESTRE'S UNIVERSAL PALEOGRAPHY, or Fac-similes of the writings of every
ken from the most authentic Missals and other interesting Manuscripts existing in the
'if France, Italy, Germany, and England. Uy M. Silvestre, containing upwards of
1. 1 most beautifully executed fac-similes, on Copper and Stone, most "richly illumi-
nated in the finest style of art, a vols. atlas folio, half-morocco extra, gilt edges, 31/. UK.

the Historical and descriptive Letter-press by Champollion, Figeac, and Cham-

pollion, jun. With additions and corrections by Sir Frederick Madden. 2 vols. royal 8vo,
cloth, ll. 16.f. ; or hf. mor. gilt edges (uniform with the Mio work) U. 8*. 1850

SMITH'S (C. J.) HISTORICAL AND LITERARY CURIOSITIES. Consisting of
Fac-similes ofinteresting Autographs, Scenes of remarkable Historical Events and interesting
Locaiilie I, Illuminated and Missal Ornaments, \ntiquities, &c.,

&c., containing 100 Plates, some illuminated, with occasional Letter-press. In 1 volume 4to,
half morocco, uncut, reduced to 21. 12*. 6ti.

SOLLY ON THE HUMAN BRAIN: its Structure, Physiology, and Diseases ; with a

Comparative View of the Typical Forms of Brain in the Animal Kingdom. With numerous
Wood Engravings. Svo, Cloth (pub. at It. 1».) 7». 6e/.

10 CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOKS,

SMITH'S ANCIENT COSTUME OF GREAT BRITAIN AND IRELAND. From

the 7th to the 16th Century, with Historical Illustrations, folio, with 02 coloured piates illu-
minated with Gold and Sliver, and highly finished (pub. at iW. 10s.), half bound morocco
extra, gilt edges, 31. 13s. 6d.

SPORTSMAN'S REPOSITORY : comprising a series of highly-finished Line Engr.r

representing the Horse and the Dog, in all their varieties, by the celebrated engraver JOH>
SCOTT, from original paintings by Reinagle, Gilpin, Stubbs, Cooper,- and Landseer, accom-
panied by a comprehensive Description by the Author of the "British Field Sports," 4to, with
37 large Copper Plates, and numerous Wuodcuts by Burnett and others (pub. at 21. 12*. 6ci.),
cloth gilt, II. Is.

STORER'S CATHEDRAL ANTIQUITIES OF ENGLAND AND WALES. 4 vols.
8vo, with 256 engravings (pub, at 71. 10*.), half morocco, 21. 12s. 6d.

STOTHARD'S MONUMENTAL EFFIGIES OF GREAT BRITAIN. 147 beautifully
finished Etchings, all of which are more or less tinted, a d some of them highly illuminated in
gold and colours, with Historical Descriptions and Introduction, by KEMPE. Folio (pub. at
191.), half morocco, SI. 8s.

i or on large paper, Plates illuminated (pub. at 281.), 121. 12s.

STRUTT'S SYLVA BRITANNICA ET SCOTICA; or Portraits of Forest Trees, distin-
guished for their Antiquity, Magnitude, or Beauty, comprising 50 very large and highly finished
painters' Etchings, imperial folio (pub. at 9t. 9s.), half morocco extra, gilt edges, U. 10s.

. 1826

STRUTT'S DRESSES AND HABITS OF THE PEOPLE OF ENGLAND, from

the Establishment of the Saxons in Britain to the present ti.ne; with an historical and
Critical Inquiry into every branch of Costume. New and greatly improved Edition, with Cri-
tical and Explanatory Notes, by J. R. PLANCHE', Esq., F.S.A. 2 vols. royal 4to, 15-3 Plates,
cloth, 41. is. The Plates coloured, 11. 7s. The Plates splendidly illuminated in gold, silver,
and opaque colours, in the Missal style, 201. 1842

STRUTTS REGAL AND ECCLESIASTICAL ANTIQUITIES OF ENGLAND.

Containing the most authentic Representations of all the English Monarchs from Edward the
Confessor to Henry the Eighth; together with many of the Great Personages that were emi-
nent under their several Reigns. New and greatly improved Edition, by J. R. PLANCHE',
Esq., F.S.A. Royal 4to, 72 Plates, cloth, 21. 2s. The Plates coloured, 4*. 4s. Splendid!)
illuminated, uniform with the Dresses, 121. 12s. 184:'

STUBBS' ANATOMY OF THE HORSE. 24 fine large Copperplate Engravings, Impe-
ria: folio (pub. at il. 4s.), boards, leather back, 11. Us. 6d.

The original edition of this fine old work, which is indispensable to artists. It has long beer,
considered rare.

TATTERSALL'S SPORTING ARCHITECTURE, comprising the Stud Farm, the Stall
the Stable, the Kennel, Race Studs, &c., with 43 beautiful Steel and Wood illustrations, several
after HANCOCK, cloth gilt (pub. at U. Us. 6t/.), II. Is. 1800

TRENDALL'S DESIGNS FOR ROOFS OF IRON, STONE, AND WOOD, with

Measurements, &c., for the use of Carpenters and Builders (an excellent practical work), 4to.
limp cloth (pub. at 15s.), 7s. 6d. 18£l

TURNER AND GIRTIN'S RIVER SCENERY ; folio, 20 beautiful Engravings on Steel'
after the drawings of J. M. W. TURNER, brilliant impressions, in a portfolio, with morocco
back (pub. at bl. 5s.), reduced to \l. 11s. 6rf.

the same, with thick glazed paper between the plates, half-bound morocco, gilt

edges (pub. at 6i. 6s.), reducad to 2i. 2s.

TURNER'S LIBER FLUV1ORUM, or River Scenery of France, 62 highly-finished Line
Engravings on Steel by WILLMORE, GOODALL, MILLER, COUSENS, and other distinguished
Artists, with descriptive Letter-press by LEITCH RITCHIE, and a Memoir of J. W. M. TURNER,
R.A, by ALARIC A. WATTS, imperial 8vo, giit cleth, II. Us. 6d., or India Proofs, 3/. 3-.

WALKER'S ANALYSIS OF BEAUTY rN WOMAN- Preceded by a critical View of the
general Hypothesis respecting Beauty, by LEONARDO DA VINCI, MENGS, WINCKELMANN,
HUME, HOGARTH, BURKE, KNIGHT, ALISON, and others. New edition, royal 8vo, illustrated
by 22 beautiful Plates, after drawings from life, by H. HOWARD, by GAVCI and LANE (pub. at
21.2,.}, gilt cloth, II. Is.

WALPOLE'S (HORACE) ANECDOTES OF PAINTING IN ENGLAND, with some
Account of the Principal Artists, and Catalogue of Engravers, who have been born or resided
in England, with Notes by DALLAWAV; New Edition, Revised and Enlarged, by RALPH
WORNUM, Esq., complete in 3 vols. Svo, with numerous beautiful portraits and plates, 21. 2s.

WARRINGTON'S HISTORY OF STAINED GLASS, from the earliest period of the Art
to the present time, illustrated by Coloured examples of Entire Windows, in the various styles,
imperial folio, with 25 very large and beautifully coloured Plates (one of them nearly four feel
in length) half boand morocco, gilt edges (pub at SI. 8s.), 51. las. Gd.

WATTS'S PSALMS AND HYMNS, ILLUSTRATED EDITION, complete, with indexes of

"Subjects," " First Lines," and a Table of Scriptures. Svo, printed in a very large and beauii-
ful type, embellished with 24 beautiful Wood Cuts by MARTIN, WJESXALL, and others (pub. ai
II. Is. ), gilt cloth, 7s. 6d.

PUBLISHED OR SOLD BY H. G. BOHX. 11

WESTWOODS PALEOGRAPHIA SACRA PICTORIA; being a series oflllnstrsitions of
•he Ancient Versions ol the Bible, copied from Illuminated Manuscripts, exiv.-uted between
the fourth ami sixteenth centuries, royal tto, 50 Plates beautifully illuminated in goid auc*
colours, hall-bound, uncut (pub. at tl. 10s.), 31. 10*.

WHISTONS JOSEPHUS, ILLUSTRATED EDITION, complete; containing both the
Antiquities ami the Wars of the Jews. 2 vols. 8vo, handsomely printed, embellished with 52
beautiful Wood Engravings, by various Artists (pub. at II. is.), cloth boards, elegantly ^i!t, 14*.

WHITTOCK'S DECORATIVE PAINTER'S AND GLAZIER'S GUIDE, containing thr

most approved methods of imitating every kind of Fancy Wood and Marble, in Oil or :
Colour, Designs for Decorating Apartments, ana the Art of Staining and Painting 00 Glass.,
&c., with Examples from Ancient Windows, with the Supplement, 4to, illustrated with 104
plates, of which 44 are coloured (pub. at 21 Hi.), cloth, 11. 10*.

WHITTOCK'S MINIATURE PAINTER'S MANUAL Foolscap 8vo, 7 coloured plates,
and numerous woodcuts (pub. at 5s.), cloth, 3».

WIGHTWICK'S PALACE OF ARCHITECTURE, a Romance of Art and History. Impe-
rial Svo, with 211 Illustrations, Steel Plates and Woodcuts (pub. at 21. 12s. 6</.), cloth, 11. 1».

1840

WILD'S ARCHITECTURAL GRANDEUR of Belgium, Germany, and France, 24 fine
Plates by LE KEUX, &c. Imperial 4to (pub. at II. 18».), half-morocco, It. 4». 1837

WILD'S ENGLISH CATHEDRALS. Twelve select examples from the Cathedrals of
England, of the Ecclesiastic Architecture of the Middle Ages, beautifully coloured, after
the original drawings, by CHARLES WILD, imperial folio, mounted on tinted cardboard like
drawings, in a handsome portfolio (pub. at. 121. 12*.), 5/. 5s.

WILD'S FOREIGN CATHEDRALS, 12 Plates, coloured and mounted like Drawings, in a
handsome portfolio (pub, at 121. 12*.), imperial folio, 51. 5s.

WILLIAMS' VIEWS IN GREECE, 64 beautiful Line Engravings by MILLER, HORS-
BURGH, and others. 2 vols. imperial Svo (pub. at 61. 63.), haif-bound mor. extra, gilt ed?es,
21. 12*. 6d. 1829

WINDSOR CASTLE AND ITS ENVIRONS, INCLUDING ETON, by LEITCU

REITCHIE, new edition, edited by E.JESSE, ESQ., illustrated with upwards of 50 beautiful
Engravings on Steel and Wood, royal Svo, gilt cloth, I5«.

WOOD'S ARCHITECTURAL ANTIQUITIES AND RUINS OF PALMYRA AND
BAALBEC. 2 vols. in 1, imperial folio, containing 110 fine Copper-plate Engravings, some
very large and folding (pub. at Jl. 7*.), half-morocco, uncut, 31. 13>. 6d. 1327

jgatural l^fetorg, Agriculture, Sa.

ANDREW'S FIGURES OF HEATHS, with Scientific Descriptions, 6 vols, royal Svo,
with 300 beautifully coloured Plates (pub. at lot.), cloth gilt, Jl. lOt. U45

3AUER AND HOOKER'S ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE GENERA OF FERNS,

in which the characters of each Genus are displayed in the most elaborate manner in a series
of magnified Dissections and Figures, highly-finished in Colours, imp. Svo, Plates, 61. 1838—42

EEECHEY— BOTANY OF CAPTAIN BEECHEY'S VOYAGE, comprising an
Account of the Plants collected by Messrs. LAY and COLLIE, and other Oificen »t the
Expedition, during the voyajre to the Pacific and Behring's Straits. By SM './II,I.;>M
JACKSON HOOKER, and G. A. W. ARXOTT, ESQ., illustrated by 100 Plates, oeautifauy
engraved, complete in 10 parts, 4to (pub. at Jt. 10?.), 51. 1831—41

BEECHEY- ZOOLOGY OF CAPTAIN BEECHEYS VOYAGE, compiled from the
Collections and Notes of Captain BF.ECHEY, and the Scientific Gentlemen who accompanied
the Expedition. Tbe Mammalia by Dr. RICHARDSON; Ornithology, by N. A. VIGORS, Esq.;
Fishes, by G. T. LAY, K = q., and E. T. BF.NXKTT, Esq.; Crustacea, by RICHARD OWEN,
Esq.; Reptiles, by JOHN EDWARD GRAY, Esq. Shells, by W. SOWERBY, Esq.; anil Geology,
by the Rev. Dr. BUCK; AND. 4to, illustrated hy 47 Plates, cont.iining many hundred Figures,
beautifully coloured by SOWEKBY (pub. at 51. 5*.), cloth, 31. 13». 6rf. 1830

BOLTON'S NATURAL HISTORY OF BRITISH SONG BIRDS. Illustrated with
Figures the size of Life, of the Birds, both Male and Fringe, in their most N itural Attitudes ;
their Nests and Esfgs, Food, F;uouri!e Plants, Shrubs, Trees, &C. *:<•. N'ew Edition, revised
and very considerably augmented, 2 vols. in 1, medium 4to, containing 80 beautifully coloured
plates (pub. at SI. 8«.), half-bound morocco, gilt backs, gilt edges, 31. 3s. 1845

BENNETT'S FISHES OF CEYLON, «<•«• edition, royal 4to, with £0 finely coloured
plates, extra cloth (pub. at 6{. 6*.), reduced to II. 1<1.«.

C ON'S PINETUM, '• - of all the Coniferous Plants at present known,

with 1>: d comprtalne nenrhr One Hundred New Kinds,

:,deiit of the Korticultuia! Garden, Chiswuk, assisted by

Itobeii .U.S. Svo, cloth, 1C«. Ib58

12 CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOKS,

CATLOW'S DROPS OF WATER; their marvellous Inhabitants displayed by the
Microscope. Coloured plates, 12mo., cloth gilt, 5s.

CATLOW'S CONCHOLOGIST'S NOMENCLATOR; or, Catalogue of recent Species
of Shells, with their \uthorities, Synonymes, and references to works where figured or
described. By AGNES CATLOW and LOVELL REEVE, F.L.S., 8vo, cloth (pub. at II. Is.),
reduced to 10*. 6d.

CURTIS'S FLORA LONDINENSIS; Revised and Improved by GEORGE GRAVES, ex-
tended and continued by Sir W. JACKSON HOOKER; comprising the History of Plants indi-
genous to Great Britain, with Indexes; the Drawings made by SYDENHAM, EDWARDS, and
LINDLEY. 5 vols. royal folio (or 109 parts), containing 647 Plates, exhibiting the full natural
size of each Plant, with magnified Dissections of the Parts of Fructification, &c., all beau,:
fully coloured (pub. at 671. 4». in parts), half-bound morocco, top edges gilt, SOI.

DENNY-MONOGRAPHIA ANCPLURORUM BRITANNI/E, OR BRITISH

SPECIES OF PARASITE INSECTS (published under the patronage of the British Associa-
tion) 8vo, numerous beautifully coloured plates of Lice, containing several hundred magnified
figures, cloth, 11. Us. (id.

DICKSON'S TREATISE ON THE BREEDING, REARING, AND GENERAL

MANAGEMENT OF POULTRY. New Edition, with corrections and large additions by
MRS. LOUDON, post 8vo, numerous illustrations by HARVEY, cloth lettered, 5s.

DON'S GENERAL SYSTEM OF GARDENING AND BOTANY, 4 vols. royal 4to,
numerous Woodcuts (pub. at HI. 8s.), cloth, 11. Hi. 6d.

DON'S HORTUS CANTABRIGIENSIS ; thirteenth Edition, 8vo (pub. at II. 4$.),

cloth, 12».

DIXON'S GEOLOGY AND FOSSILS OF SUSSEX, edited by PROFESSOR OWEN;
with 40 Plates, containing upwards of 1000 Figures, several coloured; royal 4to., (pub.
at 31. St.), clcth, it. lit. 6d.

DONOVAN'S NATURAL HISTORY OF THE INSECTS OF CHINA. Enlarged by
J. O. WESTWOOD, Esq., F.L.S., 4to, with 50 plates, containing upwards of 120 exquisitely
coloured figures (pub. at Ct. 6s,}, cloth gilt, 21. 5*.

" Donovan's works on the Insects of India and China are splendidly illustrated, and
extremely useful." Naturalist.

" The entomological plates of our countryman Donovan are highly coloured, elegant, and
useful, especially those contained in his quarto volumes (Insects of India and China), where a
great number of species are delineated for the first time."— Swainson.

DONOVAN'S WORKS ON BRITISH NATURAL HISTORY. Viz; Insects, 16 vols.—
Birds, 10 vols.— Shells, 5 vols.— Fishes, 5 vols.— Quadrupeds, 3 vols.— together 39 vols. 8vo,
containing 1198 beautifully coloured plates (pub. at 66/. Ss. ), boards, 231. 17s. The same set of
33 vols. bound in 21 (pub. at 7^/. 10s.), half green morocco extra, gilt edges, gilt backs, 30t.
Any of the classes may be had separately.

DOYLE'S CYCLOPEDIA OF PRACTICAL HUSBANDRY, and Rural Affairs in
General, New Edition, Enlarged, thick 8vo, with 70 wood engravings (pub. at 13*.), cloth,'
6s. 6d. 1813

EPISODES OF INSECT LIFE, 3 vols. Crown 8vo, with 108 illustrations, tastefully
drawn and engraved, elegantly bound in fancy cloth (pub. at 21. St.), 11. It.

• • the same, the plates beautifully coloured, bound in extra cloth, gilt back, sides, and

edges (pub. at3/. 3s.), 1!. IGs.

— — — the second series, containing 36 illustrations, distinct and complete in itself, has lately
been reprinted, and may now be had separately (pub. at 16*.), Ss.

— — or the second series, with coloured plates (pub. at 11. It,), lit.

ORURY'S ILLUSTRATIONS OF FOREIGN ENTOMOLOGY; wherein are exhibited
upwards of GOO exotic Insects, of the East and West Indies, China, New Holland, North and
South America, Germany. &c. By J. O. WESTWOOD, Esq., F.L.S. Secretary of the Entomo-
logical Society, &c. 3 vols. 4to, 150 Plates, most beautifully coloured, containing above GOG
figures of Insects (originally pub. at 151. 15s.), half-bound morocco, 61. 16s. (id. 1837

GOULD'S HUMMING BIRDS. A General History of the Trochilidse, or Humming

Birds, with especial referenco to the Collection of J. GOULD, F.R.S., &c. (now exhibiting in

the gardens of the Zoological Society of London), by W. C.L. MARTIN, late one of the Scientific

Officers of the Zoological Society of London, fcap. 8vo. with 16 coloured Plates, cloth gilt, Ss.

the same, with the Plates BEAUTIFULLY COLOURED, heightened with gold, cloth gilt, 10». 6cl.

GREVILLE'S CRYPTOGAM 1C FLORA, comprising the Principal Species found in Great
Britain, inclusive of all the New Species recently discovered in Scotland. 0 vols. royal Svo,
360 beautifully coloured Plates (pub. at 161. 16s.), half-morocco, 81. Ss. 1823—8

This, though a complete Work in itself, forms an almost indispensable Supplement to the
thirty-six volumes of Sowerby's English Botany, which docs not comprehend Cryptogamou*
Plants. It is one of the most scientific and best executed works oa Indigenous Botany ever
produced in this country.

PUBLISHED OR SOLD BY H. G. BOHN.

13

HARDWICKE AND GRAY'S INDIAN ZOOLOGY. Twenty parts, forming two voU
royal folio, 202 coloured plates (pub. at21/.), sewed, 121. 12s., or half-morocco, gilt edges,
HI. 14i.

HARRIS'S AURELIAN: OR ENGLISH MOTHS AND BUTTERFLIES. Their

Natural History, together with the Plants on which they feed; New and greatly improved
Edition, by J. 6. WESTWOOD. Esq., F.L.S., &c., in 1 vol. sm. folio, with 44 plates, containing
above loo "figures of Moths, Butterflies, Caterpillars, &c., and the Plants on which they feed,
exquisitely coloured after the original drawings, half-bound morocco, 4^. 4s. 1840

This extremely beautiful work is the only one which contains our English Moths and Butter-
flies of the full natural fize, in all their changes of Caterpillar, Chrysalis, &c., with the plant*
on which they feed.

HOOKER AND GREVILLE, ICONES FILICUM ; OR FIGURES OF FERNS,

With DESCRIPTIONS, many of which have been altogether unnoticed by Botanists, or have

not been correctly figured. 2 vols. folio, with 240 beautifully coloured Plates (pub. at 251. is.),

half-morocco, gilt edges, 121. 12s. 1829—31

The grandest and most valuable of the many scientific Works produced by Sir William Hooker.

HOOKER'S EXOTIC FLORA, containing Figures and Descriptions of rare or otherwise
interestin? Exotic Plants, especially of such as are deserving of being cultivated in our Gar
dens. 3 vols. imperial 8vo, containing 232 large and beautifully coloured Plates (pub. at 15^.),
Cloth, 61. 6s. 1823—1827

This is the most superb and attractive of all Dr. Hooker's valuable -works.

" The ' Exotic Flora,' by Dr. Hooker, is like that of all the Botanical publications of the in-
defatigible author, excellent; and it assumes an appearance of finish and perfection to which
neither the Botanical Magazine nor Register can externally lay claim." — Loudon.

HOOKER'S JOURNAL OF BOTANY, containing Figures and Descriptions of such
Plants as recommend themselvcs'ny their novelty, rarity, or history, or by the uses to which they
are applied in the Arts in Medicine, and in Domestic Economy; together with occasional
Botanical Notices and Information, and occasional Portraits and Memoirs of eminent Botanists.
4 vols. Svo, numerous Plates, some coloured (pub. at St.), cloth, 11. 1834 — 12

HOOKER'S BOTANICAL MISCELLANY, containing Figures and Descriptions of
Plants which recommend themselves by their novelty, rarity, or history, or by the uses to which
they are applied in the Arts, in Medicine, and in Domestic Economy, together with occasional
Botanical Notices and Information, including many valuable Communications from distin-
guished Scientific Travellers. Complete in 3 thick vols. royal Svo, with 163 plates, many finely
coloured (pub. at 5/. 5*.), gilt cloth, 21. 12s. 6d. 1830—33

HOOKER'S FLORA BOREALI-AMERICANA ; OR THE BOTANY OF BRITISH

NORTH AMERICA. Illustrated by 240 plates, complete in Twelve Parts, royal 4to (pub.

at 121. 12*.), 8^. The Twelve Parts complete, done up i

2 vols. royal 4to, extra cloth, 8/.

1829—40

HU1SH ON BEES; THEIR NATURAL HISTORY AND GENERAL MANAGEMENT.

New and greatly improved Edition, containing also the latest Discoveries and Improvements
in every department of the Apiary, with a description of the most approved HIVES now in use,
thick 12mo, Portrait and numerous Woodcuts (pub. at 10s. 6d.), cloth gilt, 6*. 6d. 1844

JA^DINE'S NATURALIST'S LIBRARY, 40 vols, 1200 coloured Plates, extra red cloth,

boards (pub. at 12/.)> 71.
• - or the volumes separately, according to the following arrangements, in red cloth, top edgei

gilt, *,. 6J.

. BIRDS.
'• ',',

Vol.
1. British Birds, vol. 1
2. Ditto vol. 2
3. Ditto TOl. 3
4. Ditto vol. 4

22. ANIMALS.

23. „
24. .,

Vol.
8. Ruminating Animals, vol. 3
(Goats, Sheep, Oxen)
9. Elephants, &c.
lo. Marsupialia

5. Sun Birds

25.

11. Seals, &c.

6. Humming Birds, vol. 1

26.

12. Whales, &c.

.

7. Ditto vol. 2

27.

13. Monkeys

8. Game Birds

28.

INSECTS.

1. Introduction to Entomo-

9. Pigeons

logy

j!

10. Parrots

29.

2. British Butterflies

i.

11. Birds of Western Africa 30.

3. British Moths, &c.

vol. 1 31.

4. Foreign Butterflies

2.

12. Ditto vol. 2 32.

5. Foreign Moths

3.

13. Fly catchers

33.

6. Beetles

4.

14. Pheasants, Peacocks, &c.

34.

7. Bees

5. A

KJMALS.

1. Introduction

35.

FISHES.

1. Introduction, and Foreign

6.

2. Lions, Tigers

Fishes

7.

3. British Quadrupeds

36.

__

2, British Fishes, vol. 1

8.

4. Dogs, vol. 1

37.

3. Ditto vol. 2

5. Ditto, vol. 2

38.

4. Perch, &c.

0.'
1.

"

6. Horses
7. Ruminating Animals, TO!. 1

39.
40.

»

5. Fishes of Guiana, &c. TO!. 1
6. Ditto vol.3

(Deer, Antelopea, &c.)

14 CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOKS,

JOHNSON'S GARDENER, with numerous woodcuts, containing the Potato, one vol.—
Cucumber and Gooseberry, 1 vol — Grape Vine, 2 vols — Auricula and Asparagus, one vol.—
Pine Apple, two vols.—Strawberry, one vol — Dahlia, one vol._Peach, one vol.— tcgether 10
vols, 12mo. Woodcuts (pub. at 11. Zi.), cloth, 10».

• the same, hound in 3 vols. cloth, letterea, 9*.

JOHNSON'S FARMER'S ENCYCLOP/EDIA and Dictionary of Rural Affairs; era-
bracing all the most re.ent discoveries in Agricultural Chemistry, adapted to the comprehen-
sion of unscientific readers, (by Cuthbert Johnson, Editor of the farmer'* Almanac) illustrated
by wood engravings, thick 8vo. cloth, MEW EDITION, {pub. &t2l. 10s.), it. 13.

LEWIN'S NATURAL HISTORY OF THE BIRDS OF NEW SOUTH WALES-

Third Edition, with an Index of the Scientific Names and Synonymes, by Mr. GOULD and Mr.
EYTON, folio, 27 plates, coloured (pub. at it. 4s.), half-bound morocco, 21. 2t. 183»

LINDLEY'S BRITISH FRUITS; OR FIGURES AND DESCRIPTIONS OF THE MOST
IMPORTANT VARIETIES OF FRUIT CULTIVATED IN GREAT BRITAIN. 3 vols.
royal 8vo, containing 152 most beautifully coloured plates, chiefly by MRS. WITHERS, Aitist
to the Horticultural Society (pub. at 101. 10>.), half bound morocoo extra, gilt edges, 5*. 5».

" This is an exquisitely beautiful work. Every plate is like a highly finished drawing,
similar to those in the Horticultural Transactions."

LINDLEY'S DIGITALIUM MONQGRAPHIA. Folio, 28 plates of the Foxglove (pub.
at 41. 4s.), cloth, it. 111. 6d.

. the same, the plates beautifully coloured (pmb. at 61. 6».}, cloth, 21. 12*. 6d.

LINDLEY'S LADIES' BOTANY; or, Familiar Introduetion to the Natural System of
Botan--. Fifth edition, 2 vols. Svo. with 100 coloured Platts, illustrating the Flower, Fruit,
and Anatomy of every Tril/e of Plants, (pub. at 21. 10».), cloth gilt, It. 5s.

LOUDON'S (MRS.) ENTERTAINING NATURALIST, being Popular Descriptions,
Tales, and Anecdotes of more than Five Hundred Animals, comprehending all the Quadrupeds,
Birds, Fishes, Reptiles, Insects, &c., of which a knowledge is indispensable in polite educa-
tion. With Indexes of Scientific and Popular Names, an Explanation of Terms, and an Ap-
pendix of Fabulous Animals, illustrated by upwards of 500 beautiful woodcuts by BEWICK,
HARVEY, WHIMPER, and others. New Edition, revised, enlarged, and corrected to the
present state of Zoological Knowledge. In one thick vol. post Svo, gilt cloth, 6». 1850

LOUDON'S (J. C.) ARBORETUM ET FRUTICETUM BRITANNICUM, or the

Trees and Shrubs of Britain, Native and Foreign, delineated and described; with their propa-

400 plates of trees, and upwards of 2500 woodcuts of trees and shrubs (pub. at 10/.),' 51. at. 1844

LOUDON'S VILLA GARDENER, comprising the choice of a Suburban Villa Residence ;
the laying-out, planting, and culture of the garden and grounds; and every necessary infor-
mation for the Amateur in collecting, placing, and rearing all the p'ants and trees usually
cultivated in Great Britain; the management of the Villa Farm, Dairy, and Poultry Yard.
Second edition, edited by Mrs. London, 8vo, cloth extra, with upwards of 377 diagrams, &c
finely engraved on wood (pub. at 12*.), 8». Gd.

LOW'S DOMESTIC ANIMALS OF GREAT BRITAIN, exemplified in fifty-six large
and very beautifully coloured plates of the various breeds of the Horse, Ox, Sheep, and Hog,
from drawings by Nicholson, R.S.A., after paintings by SHIELS, U.S.A., 2 vols. in 1, Imp. 4to,
half bound morocco, gilt edges (pub. at 161. 16».), XI. 8s.

MANTELL'S (DR.) NEW GEOLOGICAL WORK. THE MEDALS OF CREATION
or First Lessons in Geology, and in the Study of Organic Remains ; including Geological
Excursions to the Isle of Sheppey, Brighton, Lewes, Tilgate Forest, Charnwood Forest,
Farringdon, Swindon, Calne, Bath, Bristol, Clifton, Matlock, Crich Hill, &c. By GIDP.CN
ALGERNON MANTELL, Ejq^ LL.D., F.R.S ., &c. Two thick vols, foolscap 8vo., with co-
loured Plates, and several hundred beautiful Woodcuts of Fossil Remains, cloth gilt, 15«. 1834

MANTELL'S (DR.) PICTORIAL ATLAS OF FOSSIL REMAINS, consisting of

Coloured Illustrations selected from Parkinson's " Organic Remains of a Former World," nnd
Artis's "Antediluvian Phytology," with descriptions, by Dr. Mantfill, 4to, with 74 colonr-'d
plates, 21 at.

PUBLISHED OE SOLD BY H. G. BOHN. 15

SCHLEIDEN'S PRINCIPLES OF SCIENTIFIC BOTANY; or Botany as an Inductive
Science, trans: \\i-. LA.VKESTSK, 8vo, with nearly 400 Illustrations on wood

and steel, cloth (pub. at li. Is.), lot. 6d. 1849

SELBY'S COMPLETE BRITISH ORNITHOLOGY. A most magnificent work of the

sh Birds, containing exrut and faithful representations in their full natural

size of ail the known species found in Great Britain, 3S3 Figures in 228 beautifully coloured

Plates. 2 vols. elephant folio, elegantly half-bound morocco (pub. at 105^.), gilt back and

gilt t 1834

" The grandest work on Ornithology published in this country, the same for British Birds

that Audubon's is for the Birds of America, Every figure, excepting in a very few instances

of extremely large birds, is of the full natural size, beautifully and accurately drawn, with all

the s;,hit of life.1' — Oniit/wloyist's Ttri Book.

" What a treasure, durinir a rainy forenoon in the country, is such a gloriously illuminated
work as this o: I : is, without doubt, the most splendid of the kind ever published

in, and will stand a comparison, without any eclipse of its lustre, with the most magni-
ficent ornithol ns of the French school. Mr. Seiby has long and deservedly
ranked high as a sci it." — Black-wood's Mayazine.

SELBY'S ILLUSTRATIONS OF BRITISH ORNITHOLOGY. 2 vols. Svo. Second

(pub. at li. Is.), 12«. 1833

S'BTHORPE'S FLORA GR/ECA, The most costly and magnificent Botanical work
ever published. 10 vols, folio, with 1000 beautifully coloured Plates, half-bound, morocco,
publishing by subscription, and the number strictly limited to those subscribed for (pub. at
252M, 63 1.

Separate Prospectuses of this work are now ready for delivery. Only 40 copies of the
original stock exist. No greater number of subscribers' names can therefore be received.

SIBTHORPE'S FLOR/E GR/€C/E PRODROMUS; sive Plantarum omnium Enume-
ratio, quas in Provinciil aut Insulis Gratis invenit JOH. SIBTHORPE : Characteres et
Synonyma omnium cuni Annotationibus J AC. EDY. SMITH. Four parts, in 2 thick vols. Svo,
(pub. at 21. 2s.) Us. Londini, 1816

SMITH'S (COLONEL HAMILTON) HISTORY OF THE HUMAN SPECIES, its

Typical Forms, Primeval Distribution, Filiations and Migrations, with 34 coloured Plates
(each containing two or more subjects), Portrait, and Vignette title-page, thick leap. Svo, full
gilt cloth (pub. at 7s. 6</.), 5*.
This volume ranges with JARDIKE'S NATURALIST'S LIBRARY.

SOWERBY'S MANUAL OF CONCHOLOGY. Containing a complete Introduction to
the Science, il,ustrated by upwards of 650 Figures of Shells, etched on copper-plates, in which
the most characteristic examples are given of all the Genera established up to the present
time, arranged in Lamarckian Order, accompanied by copious Explanations; Observations
respecting the Geographical or Geological distribution of each ; Tabular Views of the Sys-
tems of Lamarck and De Blainvilie ; a Glossary of Technical Terms, &c. New Edition,
considerably enlarged and improved, with numerous Woodcuts in the text, now first added,
Svo, cloth, 18*. ; or with the Plates coloured, cloth, 11. IGs.

SOWERBY'S CONCHOLOGICAL ILLUSTRATIONS; OR, COLOURED FIGURES
OF ALL THE HITHERTO UN FIGURED SHELLS, complete in 200 Parts, Svo, com-
prising several thousand Figures, all beautifully coloured (pub. at li>l.) 71. 10s. 1815

SPRY'S BRITISH COLEOPTERA DELINEATED; containing Figures and Descrip-
tions of all the Geneva of British Beetles, edited by SHUCK ARD, Svo, with 9-1 plates, comprising
688 figures of Beetles, beautifully and most accurately drawn (pub. at 2i. 2s.), cloth, II. Is. 1841)
"The most perfect work yet published in this department of British Entomology."

STEPHENS' BRITISH ENTOMOLOGY. 12 vols. Svo, 100 coloured Plates (pub. at

211.), half bound, SI. St. 1828-16

— Or separately, LEPIDOPTERA, 4 vols. 4J. 4s. COLEOPTERA, 5 vols. 4/. 4s. DERMAPTERA,
ORTHOPTERA, NEUKOPTEKA, &c., 1 yol. ll. Is. H^MENOI-TERA, 2 vols. 2^.2*.

SWAINSON'S EXOTIC CONCHOLOGY: OR, FIGURES AND DESCRIPTIONS OF
RARE, BEAUTIFUL, OR UNDESCRIBED SHELLS. Royal 4to, containing 94 large and
beautifully coloured figuies of Shells, half bound mor., gilt edges (pub. at St. 5s.), 2t. 12s. Cd

SWAINSON'S ZOOLOGICAL ILLUSTRATIONS: OR, ORIGINAL FIGURES'AND
DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW, RARE, OR INTERESTING ANIMALS, selected chiefly
from the Classes of Ornithology, Entomology, and Conchology, 6 vols. royal Svo, containing
318 finely coloured Plates (pub. at 16/. 10s.), half bound morocco, gilt edges, 9/. 9s.

SWEET'S FLORA AUSTRALASICA : OR, A SELECTION OF HANDSOME OR

CURIOUS PLANTS, Natives of New Holland and the South Sea Islands. 15 Nos.. forming
1vol. royal Svo, complete, with 36 beautifully coloured Plates (pub. at 3*. 15s.), clolh, It. 16*.

1827-28

SWEET'S CISTINE/E: OE, NATURAL ORDER OF CISTUS, OR ROCK ROSE. 30
Nos., forming 1 vol. royal Svo, complete, with 112 beautifully coloured Plates (pub. at St. 5s.),
Cloth, 21. 12s. 6d. 1828

•' Oneofthemoit Interesting, and hitherto the scarcest, of Mr. Sweet's beautiful publication*. '

CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOKS,

jftltscdlatuous C£ngltsi) HtUrature,

INCLUDING

HISTORY, BIOGRAPHY, VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, POETRY AND THS
DRAMA, MORALS, AND MISCELLANIES.

BARBAULD'S (MRS.) SELECTIONS from the SPECTATOR, TATLER.. GUARDIAN, and

FREEHOLDER, ™Vli a Preliminary Essay, new edition, complete in 2 vols, post 8yo, elegantly
printed, with Portraits of Addison and Steele, cloth, )uniform with the Standard Library, (pub.
at 10..)! 7*. Jfw«m,lM9

ELAKEY'S HISTORY OF THE PHILOSOPHY OF THE MIND; embracing the
Opinions of all Writers on Mental Science from the earliest period to the present time, 4 vols.
thick Svo, very handsomely printed, cloth lettered, (pub. at 3/.), it. - Longmans, lt>3

BOSWELL'S LIFE OF DR. JOHNSON; BY THE RIGHT HON. J. C. CROKER.

Incorporating his Tour to the Hebrides, and accompanied by the Commentaries of all pie-
ccding Editors: with numerous Additional Notes and Illustrative Anecdotes; to which are
added Two Supplementary Volumes of Anecdotes by HAWKINS, PIOZZI, MURPHY, TYEB

.REYNOLDS, STEVENS, and others. 10 vols. 12mo, illustrated by upwards of 50 Views, Por-
traits, and Sheets of Autographs, finely engraved oil Steel, from Drawings by STANFIELD,
HARDING, &c., cloth, reduced to II. 10*.

This new, improved, and greatly enlarged edition, beautifully printed in the popular form of
Sir "Walter Scott and Byron's Works, is just such an edition as Dr. Johnson himself loved and
recommended. In one of the Ana recorded in the supplementary volumes of the present
edition, he says: "Books that you may carry to the fire, and hold readily in your hand, are
the most useful after all. Such books form the mass of general and easy reading."

BRITISH ESSAYISTS, viz., Spectator, Tatler, Guardian, Rambler, Adventurer, Idler,
and Connoisseur. 3 thick vols. Svo, Portraits (pub. at 2t. 5».), cloth, 11. 7*. Either volume
may be had separate.

BRITISH POETS, CABINET EDITION, containing the complete Works of the prin-
cipal English Poets from MILTON to KIRKE WHITE. 4 vols. post Svo. (size of Standard
Library), printed in a very small but beautiful type. 22 Medallion Portraits (pub. at 2t. 2*.),
cloth, 1C*.

BROUGHAM'S (LORD) POLITICAL PHILOSOPHY, and Essay on the British Con-
stitution, 3 vols. Svo. (pub. at U. 11». 6(7.), cloth, II. Is. 1844-46

- British Constitution (a portion of the preceding work), Svo, cloth, 3*.

BLANC'S (LOUIS) HISTORY OF TEN YEARS, from 1830—1840. 2 thick vols. 8vo,
cloth (pub. at II. (is.), reduced to Is. Gil.

BURKE'S ENCYCLOP/EDIA OF HERALDRY; OR, GENERAL ARMOURY OF

ENGLAND, SCOTLAND, AND IRELAND. 'Comprising a Registry of all Armorial
Bearings, Crests, and Mottoes, from the Earliest Period to the Present Time, including the
late Grants by the College of Arms. With an Introduction to Heraldry, and a Dictionary of
Terms. Third Edition, with a Supplement. One very large vol. imperial Svo, beautifully
printed in small type, in double columns, by WHITTINGHAM, embellished with an elaborate
Frontispiece, richly illuminated in gold and colours; also Woodcuts (pub. at 21. 2s.), cloth
gM, It. 13. 1844

The most elaborate and useful Work of the kind ever published. It contains upwards of
30,000 Armorial Bearings, and incorporates all that have hitherto been given by Guillim, Ed-
mondsun, Collins, Nisbet, Berry, Robson, and others; besides many thousand names which
have never appeared in any previous Work. This volume, in fact, in a small compass, but
•without abridgment, contains more than four ordinary quartos. <•

BURNETT'S HISTORY OF HIS OWN TIMES, AND OF THE REFORMATION,

with Historical and Biographical Notices. 3 vols. super royal Svo. cloth, I/. 11». 6d.

BURNS' WORKS, WITH LIFE BY ALLAN CUNNINGHAM, AND NOTES BY

SIR WALTER SCOTT, CAMPBELL, WORDSWORTH, LOCKHART, &c. lloyal Svo,
fine Portrait and Plates (pub. at 18s.), cloth, uniform with Byron, 10s. 6d.

This is positively the only complete edition of Burns, in a single volume, Svo. It contains
not only every scrap which Burns ever wrote, whether prose or verse, but also a considerable
number of Scotch national airs, collected and illustrated by him (not given elsewhere) and full
aud interesting accounts of the occasions and circumstances of his various writings. The very
complete and interesting Life by Allan Cunningham alone occupies 164 pases, and the Indices
and Glossary are very copious. The whole forms a thick elegantly printed volume, extending
in all to 818 pages. The other editions, including one published in similar shape, with an
abridgment of the Life by Allan Cunningham, comprised in only 47 pages, and the whole volume
in only 504 pages, do not contain above two-thirds of the above.

GARY'S EARLY FRENCH POETS. A Series of Notices and Translations, with an
Introductory Sketch of the History of French Poetry ; Edited by his Son, the Rev. HEKKY
CIRY, Foolscap Svo, cloth, 5s, 184C

PUBLISHED OR SOLD BY H. G. BOHN. 1?

GARY'S LIVES OF ENGLISH POETS, supplementary to DK. JOHNSON'S "Lives.-
Edited by his Son. Foolscap 8vo, cloth, 7s. 1848

CKURTONS RAILROAD BOOK OF ENGLAND; Historical, Topographical, and
Picturesque; descriptive of all the Cities, Towns, Country Seats, and Subjects of local inte-
rest on the various Lines, imperial Svo, cloth, with map and numerous cuts, (pub. at ll. !».),
reduced to 10». 6d. 1851

CLASSIC TALES. Cabinet Edition, comprising the Vicar of Wakefield, Elizabeth^
Paul and Virginia, Gulliver's Travels, Sterne's Sentimental Journey, Sorrows of Werter.
Theodosius and Constantia, Castle of Otranto, and Rasselas, complete in 1 volume, I2mo;
medallion Portraits (pub. at 10*. 6d.), cloth, Js. 6d.

COPLEY'S (FORMERLY MRS. HEWLETT) HISTORY OF SLAVERY AND ITS

ABOLITION. Second Edition, with an Appendix, thick small Svo, fine Portrait ol

Clarkson (pub. at 6s.), cloth, 4*. 6d. 1839

COWPER'S POETICAL WORKS, including his Homer, edited by GARY. Illustrated

edition, royal svo, with 18 beautiful En-ravings on Steel, after Designs by HARVEST, cloth, gilt

edges, 15s.
CRAIK'S ROMANCE OF THE PEERAGE; OR, CURIOSITIES OF FAMILY HIS-

TORY. 4 vols. post Svo, with fine Portraits on Steel of WALTER DEVERF.UX EARL OF ESSEX,

AXXE DUCHESS OF MOVMOUTH AND BUCCLEUCII, MARY TUDOR, and SIR ROBERT DUDLEY,

cloth (pub. at 21. 2s.), 18*.
CRIMINAL TRIALS IN SCOTLAND, narrated by JOHN HILL BUKTON. 2 vols.

pust Svo, (pub. at 18«.), cloth, 9s. 1853

D'ARBLAY'S DIARY AND LETTERS; edited by her NIECE, including the Period
of her Residence at the Court of dueeii Charlotte, 7 vols, small Svo. With Portraits, cloth
extra, Us.

DAVIS'S SKETCHES OF CHINA, During an Inland Journey of Four Months ; with
an Account of the War. 2 vols. post Svo, with a new Map of China (pub. at IGs.), cloth y». 1841

DIBDIN'S (CHARLES) SONGS. Admiralty edition, complete, with a Memoir by
T. DIBDIK. Illusttated with 12 Characteristic Sketches, engraved on Steel by GEORGE
CRUIKSHANK. 12mo, cloth lettered, 5*. 1848

DOMESTIC COOKERY, by a Lady (Mas. RUNDELL). New Edition, with numerous
additional Receipts, by Mrs. BIRCH, 12mo, with 9 Plates (pub. at 0*.), cloth, 3s.

EGYPT AND NUBIA, illustrated from Burckhardt, Lindsay, and other leading Autho-
rities, by J. A. ST. JOHN. 125 fine Wood Engravings. Demy Svo, (pub. at 12s.), cloth, 5*.

ELLIS'S POLYNESIAN RESEARCHES, being a complete Account of the Society and
Friendly Islands, written durii:g a Residence. 4 vols. fcap. Svo, new edition, with a complete
Index, maps and plates, cloth (pub. at ll.), reduced to 14s.

FENN'S PASTON LETTERS, Original Letters of the Paston Family, written during the
Reigns of Henry VI, Edward IV, and Richard III, by various persons of Rank and Conse-
quence, chiefly on Historical Subjects. New Edition, with Notes and Corrections, complete.
2 vols. bound in 1, square 12mo (pub. at id.), cloth gilt, 5*. Quaintly bound in maroon
inorocco, carved boards, in the early style, gilt edges, 15*.

The original edition of this very curious and interesting series of historical Letters is a rare
book, and sells for upwards of ten guineas. The present is not an abridgement, as might be
supposed from its form, but. gives the whole matter by omitting the duplicate version of the
letters written in an ohiolete language, and adopting only the more modern, readable version,
published by Fenn.

'The Paston Letters are an important testimony to the progressive condition of society, and
come in as a precious link in the chain of the moral history of England, which they alone in
this period supply. They stand indeed singly in Europe. llallam.

FIELDING'S WORKS, EDITED BY ROSCOE, COMPLETE IN ONE VOLUME

(Tom Jones, Amelia, Jonathan Wild, Joseph Andrews, Plays, Essays, and Miscellanies)
medium Svo, with 20 capital plates by CRUIKSHANK (pub. at It. 4s.), cloth gilt, 14*.
f i

Of all the works of imagination to which English genius has given origin, the writings of
nry Fielding are perhaps most decidedly and ex. '
The prose Homer of human nature." — Lord tiyr

Henry Fielding are perhaps most decidedly and exclusively her own."— Sir 'A' alter Scott.
; Homer of

FOSTER'S ESSAYS ON DECISION OFt:HARACTER ; on a M an's Writing Memoiw
of Himself; on the epithet Romantic; on the Aversion of Men of Taste to Evangelical Religion,
&c. Fcap. Svo, Eighteenth Edition (pub. at 6*.), cloth, 5s.

" I have read with the greatest admiration the Essays of Mr. Foster. He is one of the mosl
profound and eloquent writers that England has produced." — Sir James Mackintosh.

FOSTER'S ESSAY ON THE EVILS OF POPULAR IGNORANCE. New Edition
elegantly printed, in fcap. Svo, now first uniform with his Essays on Decision of Character
cloth, 5j.

"Mr. Foster always considered this his best work, and the one by which he wished his
literary claims to be estimated."

"A work which, popular and admired, as it confessedly is, has never met with tho thousandth
part of the attention which it deserve*. "— Dr. Pye Smith.

18 CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOBLS,

FROISSARTS CHRONICLES OF ENGLAND, FRANCE, AND SPAIN, &c.

Translated by COLONEL JOHNES, with 120 beautiful Woodcuts, 2 vois, super-royal 8vo,

(pub. at It. I6«.)i cloth lettered, 11. 8s.
FROISSART, ILLUMINATED ILLUSTRATIONS OF, 74 Plates, printed in gold and

colours, 2 vols. super-royal 8vo, half bound, uncut (pub. at 41. 10s.), 31. 10s.
.. . the same, large paper, 2 vo!s. royal 4to, half bound, uncut (pub. at 101. 10s.), 61. 61.

FROISSART'S CHRONICLES, WITH THE 74 ILLUMINATED ILLUSTRATIONS,
INSERTED, 2 vols. super-royal 8vo, elegantly half-bound red morocco, gilt edge.-., emble-
matically tooled (pub. at 6^. 6s.), 41. 1U. 1819

GAZETTEER.— NEW EDINBURGH UNIVERSAL GAZETTEER, AND GEOGRA.
PHICAL DICTIONARY, more complete than any hitherto published. New Edition, revised
and completed to the present time, by JOHN THOMSON (Editor oi the Universal Atlat, &c.),
very thick 8vo (1040 pages) Maps (pub. at 18s.), cloth, 12*.

This comprehensive volume is the latest, and by far the best Universal Gazetteer of its size.
It includes a full account of Afghanistan, New Zealand, &c. &c.

CELL'S (SIR WILLIAM) TOPOGRAPHY OF ROME AND ITS VICINITY. An

improved Edition, complete in one vol. 8vo, with several Plates, cloth, li'». With a very large
Map of Home and its Environs (from a most careful trigonometrical survey), mounted on cloth
and folded in a case so as to form a volume. Together 2 vols. 8vo, cloth, U. Is. 1846

" These volumes are so replete with what is valuable, that were we to employ our entire
jeurnal, we could after all afford but a meagre indication of their interest and worth. It is,
indeed, a lasting memorial oi eminent literary exertion, devoted to a subject of great import-
ance, and one dear, not only to every scholar, but to every reader of intelligence to whom th«
truth of history is an object of consideration."

GLEIG'S ME ^OIRS OF WARREN HASTINGS, first Governor-General of Bengal. 5
vols. 8vo, fine Portrait (pub. at 2,;. as.), cloth, 11. Is. jgll

GRANT'S HISTORY OF PHYSICAL ASTRONOMY, from the earliest ages to the
middle of the 12th century ; comprehending a detailed Account of the Establishment of the
THEORY or GRAVITATION BY NKWTOX, and its Development by his successors; with an
Exposition o! the Progress of Research on all the other subjects of CELESTIAL PHYSICS, thick
8vo, cloth (pub. at 10 ,.) -8*. 185:>

GOLDSMITH'S WORKS, with a Life and Notes, 4 rols. fcap. 8vo, with engraved Titles
and Plates by STOTHARD and CRUIKSHAXK. New and elegant Edition (pub. at U. ), extra
cloth, 12s.
" Can any author — can even Sir Walter Scott, be compared with Goldsmith for the variety

beauty, and power of his compositions? You may take him and 'cut him out in little stars,' so

ts does he present to the imagination."— Athenaeum.

" The volumes of Goldsmith will ever constitute one it the most precious " wells of English
"

many lights does he present to the imaginat

" The volumes of Goldsmith
undefiletl."— Quarterly Review.

GOOD'S (DR. JOHN MASON) BOOK OF NATURE; 3 vols., foolscap STO, cloth,

(pub. at if. 4t.), W8. 6d.

GORDON'S HISTORY OF THE GREEK REVOLUTION, and of the Wars and Cam-
paigns arising from the Struggles of the Greek Patriots in emancipating their country from the
Turkish yoke. By the late THOMAS GORDON, Genera! of a Division of the Greek Army.
Second Edition, 2 vols. 8vo, Maps and Plans (pub. at II. 10*.), cloth, 10s. Qd. 1842

GORTON'S BIOGRAPHICAL DICTIONARY. A new and enlarged Edition, with a
Supplement, completing the Work to the present time, 4 vols. 8vo, cloth lettered, \l. Ms. 6d.

HEERENS (PROFESSOR) HISTORICAL WORKS, translated, from the German viz.
— ASIA, New Edition, complete in 2 vols. _ AFRICA, 1vol.- EUROPE AND ITS COLONIES, 1
vol. — ANCIENT GREECE, and HISTORICAL TREATISES, 1 vol — MANUAL OF ANCIENT HIS-
TORY, 1 vol. — together 6 vols. 8vo (formerly pub. at It.), cloth lettered, uniform, 'il. 5«.

*** yew and Complete Editions, with General Indexes.

"Professor Heeren's Historical Researches stand in the very highest rank among those with
which modern Germany has enriched the Literature of Europe. "—Quarterly Review.

HEEREN'S HISTORICAL RESEARCHES INTO THE POLITICS, INTERCOURSE,

AND TRADES OF THE AM C1ENT NATIONS OF AFRICA; including the Carthaginians,
Ethiopians, and Egyptians. New edition, corrected throughout, with an Index, Life of the
Author, new Appendixes, and other Additions. Complete in 1 vol. 8vo, cloth, 16s.

HEEREN S HISTORICAL RESEARCHES INTO THE POLITICS, INTERCOURSE,

AND TRADES OF THE ANCIENT NATIONS OF ASIA: including the Persians, Phoe-
nicians, Babylonians, Scythians, and Indians. New and iir.proved Edition, complete in 2
vols. 8vo, elegantly printed (pub. originally at 21. 5.«.), cloth, 11. 4s.

" One of the most valuable acquisitions made to our historica. stories since the days of
Gibbon."— Athenaeum.

HEEREN'S ANCIENT GREECE, translated by BANCKOPT; and HISTORICAL
TREATISES; viz.— 1. The Political consequences of the Reformation. II. The Kise, Pro-
gress, and Practical Influence ol Political Theories. III. The Rise and Growth of the Conti-
nental IntetMU b; Great Britain. In '. val Svu, with Index, cloth, 15s.

PUBLISHED OR SOLD BY H. G. BOHN. 19

HEEREN'S MANUAL OF THE HISTORY OF THE POLITICAL SYSTEM OF

EUROPE AND ITS COLONIES, tiom its formation at the close of the Fifteenth Century,
to its re establishment upon the Fall ot Napoleon ; translated from the Fifth German Edition.
New Edition, complete in 1 vol. Svo. cloth, 14j.
" The best History of Modern Europe that has yet appeared, and it is likely long to remain

value, which will diffuse useful knowledge for generations, after all tho
shallow pretenders to that distinction are fortunately forgotten."— Literary Gazette.

HEEREN'S MANUAL OF ANCIENT HISTORY, particularly with regard to the Consti-
unions, the Commerce, and the Colonies of the States of Antiquity. Third Edition, corrected
and improved. Svo (pub. at 15s.), cloth 12».

*»* AY w Edition, with Index. 1847

"We never remember to have seen a Work in which so much useful knowledge was con-
densed into so small a compass. A careful examination convinces us that this book will be
useful for our English higher schools or colleges, and will contribute to direct attention to the
better and more instructive parts of history. The translation is executed with great fidelity.
— Quarterly Journal oj Education.

HEEREN'S MANUAL OF ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY. For the use of Schools and
Private Tuition. Compiled from the Works of A. H. L. HEEREN, 12mo (pub. at 2s. 6d.),
doth, o,. O-rJonl, Talboyi, 1830

HOBBES' COMPLETE WORKS, English and Latin, edited by SIR W. MOLESWOKTH.

Poitrait and plates. 16 vo!s, 8vo, (pub.at 8/. 8?.), cloth, 31. 3s.

The Latin Works form 5 vols, the English Works 11 vols, each with a General Index. As
fewer were printed of .he Latin '.ban of the English, the former are not sold separately,
hut the English 11 vols. may be had for II. 1C».

HUME AND SMOLLET'S HISTORY OF ENGLAND, complete in 1 large vol., with a
Memoir of Hume, impl. Svo, fine portraits of the authors, extra cloth (pub. at it. 5s.), II. It.

JAMES'S WILLIAM THE THIRD, comprisingthe History of his Reign, illustrated in a
series of unpublished letters, addressed to the Duke of Shrewsbury, by JAMES VERNON,
Secretary of State; with Introduction and Notes, by G. P. B. JAMES, Esq., 3 vols. Svo, Por-
traits (pub. at 21. 2i.), cloth, 18*. 1841

MENISCH'S CHESS PRECEPTOR; a new Analysis of the openings of Games; trans-
lated, with Notes, by WALKER, Svo, cloth, lettered (pub. at 15*.), Cj. 6d. 1847

JOHNSON'S (DR.) ENGLISH DICTIONARY, printed verbatim from the Author's last
Folio Edition. With all the Examples in full. To which are prefixed a History of the Lan-
guage, and an English Grammar. 1 lar~e vol. imperial Svo (pub. at 21. 2s.), cloth, 18*.

JOHNSON S (DR.) LIFE AND WORKS, by MUEPHY. New and improved Edition,
complete in 2 thick vols. Svo, Portrait, cloth lettered (pub. at 11. llj. Crf.), 15». 1830

JOHNSONIANA ; a Collection of Miscellaneous Anecdotes and Sayings, gathered from
nearly a hundred different Publications, and not contained in BOSWELL'S Life of Johnson.
Edited by J. W. CKOKER, M.P. thick fcap. Svo, portrait and frontispiece (pub. at 10*.),
cloth, 4*. 6d.

JOHNSTON'S TRAVELS IN SOUTHERN ABYSSINIA, through the Country of Adel,

to the Kingdom of Shoa. 2 vote. Svo, Map and Plates (pub. at II. Ss.) cloth, 10*. Crf. 1844

KOHLRAUSCH'S HISTORY OF GERMANY, from the Earliest Period to the Present

. bvo, oloth (pub. at 14s.), reduced to 3". i </.

CONTEXTS.— Ancient Germany and its Inhabitants, from the most Ancient Times to the
Conquests of the Franks under Clovis, A.D. 4,^6— From the Conquests of Clovis to Charle-
magne 4Sti-7(i8 — The Carlovingians, from Cl ailem L-ne to Henry 1 ., 708-yiy — From Henry I.
to Kudoljhusof Hapsburg, 9.y-l273— The Middle Ages— From Iludolphus 1.. of Haps-
burg, to Charles V., 1273-1 520- Emperors of Different Houses, 1273-1437— The House of
Austria, from Charles V. to the Peace of Westphalia, 152U-1G48— From the Peace of West-
phalia in 1648 to the present time.

KNIGHT'S OLD ENGLANDS WORTHIES: a PORTRAIT GAT.LERY of the most
eminent Statesmen, Lawyers, Warriors, Artists, Men of Letters and Science, &c., of Great
Britain, accompanied by full and original Biographies (written by LORD BROUGHAM, CRAIK,
DE MORGAN, and others), imperial 4to, with 74 fine Portraits on steel, 121arsre coloured Plates
of remarkable buildings, and upwards of 200 historical and decorative Vignettes on wood,
cioth gilt (pub. at 1*. 2i. 6d.), Ijj.

KNOWLES'S IMPROVED WALKER'S PRONOUNCING DICTIONARY, containing
above 50, ooo additional Words; to which is added an Accentuated Vocabulary of Classical and
Scripture Proper Names, new edition, in 1 thick handsome volume, large Svo, with Portrait,
cloth lettered (pub. at if. 4».), 7*. Gd.

LACONICS; OR, THE BEST WORDS OF THE BEST AUTHORS. Seventh
iition. 3 vols. iSmo, with elegant Frontispieces, containing 30 Portraits (pub. at 15*.). cloth

gilt, .
This pleasant collection of pithy and sententious readings, from the best English authors o.

•11 ages, has long enjoyed great and deserved popularity.

LOW'S DOMESTICATED ANIMALS OF GREAT BRITAIN: comprehending the

Natural and Economical Historv of S|.e< ies and Varieties ; with Observations on the princi-
ples and practice of Breeding. Thkk Svo, (pub. at II. 5s.), cloth, 5*.

20 CATALOGUE OF NEW EOOKS,

LAING'S KINGS OF NORWAY; THE HEIMSKRINGLA, or CHRONICLE of the
KINGS OF NORWAY, translated from the Icelandic of SnorroSturleson, with a preliminary
Dissertation and Notes by SAMUEL LAING, Esq.; 3 vols., 8vo.; cloth, (pub. at II. 1C«.), 18s.

LAMB'S (CHARLES) WORKS, complete; containing his Letters, Essays of Elia,

Poems, Plays, &c., with Life of the Author, including the additional Memorials, by SIR T. N.

TALFOURD, in 1 stout volume royal 8vo, handsomely printed, with Portrait and Vignette Title,

(pub. at 1C*.), cloth, 12».
LEAKE S (COL.) TRAVELS IN THE MOREA. 3 vols. 8vo. With a very large Map of

the Morea, and upwards of 30 various Maps, Plans, Plates of ancient Greek Inscriptions, £7.

(pub. at 21. 5s.), cloth, U. St.
LEWIS'S (MONK^ LIFE AND CORRESPONDENCE, with many Pieces in Prose and

Verse, never before published. 2 vols. 8vo, Portrait (pub. at II. 8s.), cloth, li«.
LEIGH HUNT'S STORIES FROM THE ITALIAN POETS, (Dante, ;riosto,

Boiardo, Tasso, Pulci), with Lives of the Writers. 2 vols, post 8vo, (pub. at II. U.), cloth, Its.
*** This elegant work is for the Italian Poets what Lamb's Tales are for Shakespeare.

LODGE'S (EDMUND) ILLUSTRATIONS OF BRITISH HISTORY, BIOGRAPHY,

AND MANNERS, in the Reigns of Henry VIII., Edward VI., Mary, Elizabeth, and James I.
Second Edition, with above 80 Autographs oi the principal Characters of the period. Three
•vols. 8vo. (pub. at U. 16s.), cloth, It. 1838

MACGREGOR*S COMMERCIAL STATISTICS OF ALL NATIONS. A Digest of
the Resources. Legislation. Tariffs, lines, Shipping, Imports, Exporta, Weights and Measures,
&c., &c. of All Nations, including all the British Commercial Treaties, 5 large vols, super-
royal 8vo. cloth, (pub. at ;/. lot.), 21. lit. Gd.

MALCOLM'S MEMOIR OF CENTRAL INDIA. Two vols. 8vo, third edition, with large
Map (pub. at II. St.), cloth, 18*. 1832

MALTE-BRUN AND BALBI'S UNIVERSAL GEOGRAPHY: comprising, 1. The
History of Geographical Discovery; 2. Principles of Physical Geography ; 3. Complete De-
scription, from tl>e most recent sources, of all the Countries of the World. New and enlarged
Edition, revised and corrected throughout, with an Alphabetical Index of 13,500 Names.
Thick 8vo, cloth (pub. at II. 10».), reduced to 15«. 1851

MARTINEAUS EASTERN LIFE, Present and Fast. New edition. In one thick
volume, crown 8vo, cloth (pub. at 10». 6d. ) — 6s.

MARTINEAU'S LIFE IN THE SICK ROOM: a Series of Essays. Third edition,
fcap. 8vo, cloth (pub. at 3s. 6d.)—2s. 6J.

MARTIN'S (MONTGOMERY) BRITISH COLONIAL LIBRARY; forming a popular
and Authentic Description of all the Colonies of the British Empire, and embracing the His-
tory—Physical Geography— Geology— Climate— Animal, Vegetable, and Mineral Kingdoms-
Government — Finance — Military Defence — Commerce— Shipping — Monetary System— Religion
— Population, White and Coloured — Education and the Press — Emigration— Social State, &c.,
of each Settlement. Founded on Official and Public Documents, furnished by Government,
the Hon. East India Company, &c. Illustrated by Original Maps and Plates. 8 volumes
fcap. 8vo. cloth, II. It.

Each volume of the above series Is complete in itself, and sold separately, as follows,
.it 3s. 6d. :_

THE CANADAS, UPPER AND LOWER.

NEW SOUTH WALES, VAN DIEMEN'S LAND, SWAN RIVER, and SOUTH AUSTRALIA.
THE WESL INDIES. Vol. I. — Jamaica, Honduras, Trinidad, Tobago, Granada, the Bahamas

and the Virgin Isles.
THE WEST INDIES. Vol. II. — British Guiana, B.trhadoes, St. Lucia, St. Vincent, Demerara,

Eisequibo, Berbice, Anguilla, Tortola, St. Kitt's, Barbuda, Antiaiua. Montserrat Domiuica

and Nevis.

NOVA SCOTIA, NEW B-RUNSWICK, CAPE BRETON, PRINCE EDWARD'S ISLE. THE BER-
MUDAS, NEWFOUNDLAND, and HUDSON'S BAY.

THE EAST INDIES. Vol. I. containing Bengal, Madras, Bombay, Agra, &c.
THE EAST INDIES. Vol. II.
BRITISH POSSESSIONS IN THE INDIAN AND ATLANTIC OCEANS, viz. Ceylon, Pen :v,-

Malacca, Singapore, Sierra Leone, the Gambia, Cape Coast Castle, Accra, the Falkland

Islands, St. Helena, and Ascension.

MARTIN'S (MONTGOMERY) CHINA, Political, Commercial, and Social. Two vote.

8vo, 6 Maps, Statistical Tables, &c, (pub. at U. 4s.), cloth, 14s.

MAXWELL'S LIFE OF THE DUKE OF WELLINGTON. Three handsome vols. 8vo.
Embellished with numerous highly-finished Line-Engravings by COOPER and other eminei.t
Artists, consisting of Battle-Pieces, Portraits, Military Plans and Maps; besides a great
number of fine Wood Engravings ; (pub. at SI. 7».), elegant in gilt cloth, II. 10s. Large paper,
India proofs (pub. at 5/.), gilt cloth, 21. 12s. 6d.
" Mr. Maxwell's ' Life of the Duke of Wellington, in our opinion, has no rival among similar

publications of the day We pronounce it free from flattery and bombast, succinct

and masterly The type and mechanical execution are admirable; the plans of

battles and sieges numerous, ample, and uselul; the portraits of the Duke and his warrior
Contemporaries many and faithful; the battle pictures animated and brilliant; and the
•vignettes of costumes and manners worthy of the military genius of Horace Vernet himself."
— Times.

MAXWELL'S HISTORY OF THE IRISH REBELLION OF 1798, with Memoirs ot
UM Union, and of Emmett's Insurrection in 18'J3, cloth, 8vo. with Portraits and numerous
Illustrations on steel by GEORGE CRUIKSHANK, new edif'on, gilt cloth, (pub. at l(is.), 2*»

PUBLISHED OR SOLD BY H. G. BOHN. 21

MINIATURE LIBRARY (BOH1PS.)

All foolscap 12mo., printed on the finest paper, and very elegantly boarded in the new style oj

morocco cloth.
BARBAULD AND AIKIN'S EVENINGS AT HOME; comprising a great variety

of amusing Instruction for Young Persons, complete, elegantly printed, frontispieces,

cloth gilt (pub. at 6s.), 3s.; or with gilt edges, 3s. Cd.
BOURRIENNE'S MEMOIRS OF NAPOLEON. One stout, closely but elegantly

printed volume, fcap. I2mo. with tine equestrian portrait of Napoleon, and frontispiece,

cloth giit, (puh. at 5s.), 3s. 6d.; or with gilt edges, 4s.
BUNYAN'S PILGRIM'S PROGRESS. Quite complete, including the Third Part

•with a Life and numerous explanatory Notes by the REV. T. SCOTT. Elegantly printed on

fine wove paper, and embellishedwith 25 fine lull-sized Woodcuts by HARVEY, containing

all in Southey's edition, also a fine frontispiece and vignette, cloth gilt, 3*. 6d. ; or widi

gilt edges, is.
BYRON'S POETICAL WORKS, including several Suppressed Poems not published

in other editions, in 1 thick vol., with a beautiful Frontispiece, cloth gilt, 3s. 6d. ; or with

gilt edges, is.
BYRON'S DON JUAN, complete, elegantly printed, frontispieces, cloth gilt, (pub.

at 5s.), 2s. 6d.; or with gilt edges, 3«.

CHEEVER'S LECTURES ON BUNYAN'S PILGRIM'S PROGRESS, and the
Life and Times of Bunyan, frontispieces, cloth gilt, 2s. Gd.

COLERIDGE'S SELECT POETICAL WORKS, cloth gilt, 2*.; or gilt edges, 2*.6</.

COWPER'S POETICAL WORKS, with a short Life by SOUTHEY, including (for the
first time in a small size), all the COPYRIGHT POEMS, complete in one handsome volume,
fcap. 24mo, (700 pages), very elegantly printed, with two extremely beautiful Frontispieces
after HARVEY, engraved on Steel by GOODAI.L, cloth gilt, 3s. Gd. ; or with gilt edges, 4s.

DRYDEN'S POETICAL WORKS, complete in 1 vol. with a Portrait, Frontispiece
and Vignette Title, cloth gilt, 3s. Gd. ; or with gilt edges, 4s.

ENCYCLOP/EDIA OF MANNERS AND ETIQUETTE; comprising an improved
edition of Chesterfield's Advice to his Son on Men and Manners; and THE YOUNG MAN'S
Ow>- BOOK ; a Manual of Politeness, Intellectual Improvement, and Moral Deportment,
calculated to form the Character on a solid Basis, and to insure Respectability and Success
in Life, one elegantly printed volume, frontispiece, cloth gilt, 2s.; or with gilt edges, 2s. 6d.

HEBER'S (BISHOP) AND MRS. NEMAN'S POETICAL WORKS. Three vols.
in one, cloth gilt, 2s. &d. ; or with gilt edges, 3s.

HERRICK'S POETICAL WORKS, complete in one thick volume, elegantly printed,
fine frontispiece by CATTERMOLE, cloth gilt, 3s.; or with gilt edges, 3s. 6d.

JOE MILLER'S JEST BOOK; being a Collection of the most excellent Bon Mots,
Brilliant Jests, and Striking Anecdotes in the English Language, complete in one thick and
closely but elegantly printed volume, frontispiece, cloth gilt (pub. at 4s.), 3s. ; or with gilt
edges, 3s. Gd.

NEW JOE MILLER. A Selection of Modern Jests, Witticisms, Droll Tales, Sec.
cloth gilt, 2s. Cd. ; or with gilt edges, 3s.

LONGFELLOW'S POETICAL WORKS, viz., Voices of the Night— Evangeline—
Seaside and Fireside— Spanish Students— Poetical Translations, 2 vols. in 1, portrait and
frontispieces, cloth gilt, 2s. Cd. ; or with gilt edges, 3s.

LONGFELLOW'S PROSE WORKS, viz., Outre-iJ er— Hyperion— Kavanagh, 3
vols. in 1, cloth gilt 2s. Gd.; or with gilt edges, 3s.

MILTON'S POETICAL WORKS, with Life and Notes by DR. STEBBING; to which
is prefixed DR. CHANNING'S Essay on Milton. Frontispiece, cloth gilt, (pub. at Us.),
3s. Cd. ; or with gilt edges, 4s.

OSSIAN'S POEMS, translated by MACHFERSON ; with Dissertations concernino;
the Era and Poems of OSSIAN; and DR. BLAIR'S Critical Dissertation. Complete in
1 neatly printed volume, frontispiece, new Edition, cloth gilt (pub. at 4s.), 3s.- or with
gilt edges, 3s. Cd.

POPE'S HOMER'S ILIAD, complete, with Explanatory Notes and Index, and an
Essay on the Life, Writings, and Genius of Homer, elegantly printed, frontispieces, cloth
gilt (pub. at 6s.), 3s.: or with gilt edges, 3s. Cd.

This is the only pocket edition with notes.

SCOTT'S (SIR WALTER) POETICAL WORKS; containing Lay of the Last Min-
strel, Marmion, Lady of the Lake, Don Roderick, Rokeby, Ballads, Lyrics, and Songs;
with Notes, and a Life of the Author, complete in 1 elegantly printed volume, portrait and
frontispiece, cloth gilt (pub. at 5s.), 3s. Cd.; or with gilt edges, 4s.

STURM'S REFLECTIONS ON THE WORKS OF GOD, and of his Providence
throughout all Nature, translated from the German, complete in 1 elegantly printed vo!.,
frontispiece, cloth gilt (pub. at 5$. ), 3s. ; or with gilt edges, 3s. Gd.

THOMSON'S SEASONS, with his Castle of Indolence; 4 beautiful woodcuts,

cloth gilt, 2». ; or with gilt edges, 2s Cd.

VATHEK AND THE AMBER WITCH- Two vols. in one, cloth gilt, 2*. 6d. ; 01
with gilt edges, 3*.

22 CATALOGUE OP NEW BOOKS,

MONSTRELETS CHRONICLES OF ENGLAND AND FRANCE, by COLOKM
JOHNES, with Notes, and upwards ol 100 Woodcuts (uniform with Froissart), 2 vols. super
royal 8vo, cloth lettered (pub. at 11. 10s.), 11. 4s.

NELSON'S LETTERS AND DISPATCHES, by SIB HARBIS NICOLAS, 7 vols, 8vo.

(puh. at 5/. 10s.), cloth, 21. ICs.

NIEBUHR'S LECTURES ON ROMAN HISTORY, translated by Chcpmell and
Eimmler, completp tn 3 thick vols.. 12n;o, cloth, frontisp., pub. at Ks.— 10s. Grf.

RICHARDSON'S CENTRAL AFRICA, the Narrative of a Mission performed in the
ye.irs 1850-1, by order of Her Majesty's Government (in company with DR. BAKTH), 2 vols.
post 8vo, with map, cloth (pub. at 11. Is.), 7s, lh.,3

PERCY'S RELIQUES OF ANCIENT ENGLISH POETRY, consisting of Old Heroic
Ballac's, Songs, and other Pieces »f our Earlier Poets, together with some few of later date,
and a copious Glossary, complete in 1 vol. medium Svo. New and elegant Edition, with beau-
tifully engraved Title and Frontispiece, by STEFHANOFF (pub. at 15*.), cloth giit, Ji. 6d.

POPE'S POETICAL WORKS, complete in 1 tliick volume, foolscap 8vo., frontispiece .
and vignette, cloth gilt, (pub. at 5*.), 3s. M, 1842

RAFFLES' HISTORY OF JAVA, with an Account of Bencoolen, and Details of the
Commerce and Resources of the Indian Archipelago. Edited by LADY RAFFLES. Together
2 vols. 8vo, and a splendid quarto Atlas, containing upwards of 100 Plates by DANiELL.'raai.y
finely coloured (pub. at 31. 10s.), cloth, it. 7s.

ROBINSON CRUSOE. Cabinet Pictorial Edition, including his further Adventures,
with Life of DEFOE, &c , upwards of fio fine Woodcuts, from Designs by HARVEY, poat Svo.
New and improved Edition, with additional cuts, cloth gilt, 4». 6d.
The only small edition which is quite complete.

" Perhaps there exists no work, either of instruction or entertainment, in the English lan-
guage, which has been more generally read or more deservedly admired, than the Life and
Adv'entures of Robii.Bon Crusoe." — Sir Waiter Scott.

ROBIN HOOD ; a Collection of all the Toeras, Songs, and Ballads relating to this cele-
brated Yeoman ; to which is prefixed, his History from inedited Documents, and a Memoir ol
RITSON, by J. M. GUTCH, F.S.A. Two vols. elegantly printed in crown 8vo, with Portrait of
Ritson, and upwards of 120 tasteful wood engravings by FAIKHOLT, extra cloth (pub. at
11. 10s.), reduced to 15*.

ROLLIN'S ANCIENT HISTORY. A New and complete Edition, with engraved
Frontispieces and 7 Maps. 2 vols. bound in 1 stout handsome vol. royal Svo, (pub. at U. it.),
cloth, 12i.

The only complete edition iri a compact form ; it is uniform in size and appearance with
Moxon's Series of Dramatists, &c. The previous editions of Ilollin in a single volume are
greatly abridged, and contain scarcely half the work.

ROSCOES LIFE AND PONTIFICATE OF LEO THE TENTH. New and much

improved Edition, edited by his Son, THOMAS ROSCOE. Complete in 1 stout vol. Svo, closely
but very handsomely printed, illustrated by 3 fine Portraits, and numerous illustrative En-
gravings, as head and tail- pieces, cloth, 11. is. 1845

ROSCOE'S LIFE OF LORENZO DE MEDICI, CALLED " THE MAGNIFICENT."

New and much improved Edition, edited by his Son, THOMAS ROSCOE. Complete in 1 stout
vol. Svo, closely but very handsomely printed, illustrated by numerous Engravings, introduced
as head and tail-pieces, cloth, 12». 18J5

" I have not terms sufficient to express my admiration of Mr. Roscoe's genius and erudition,
or my gratitude for the amusement and information I have received. I recommend his labours
to our country as works of unquestionable genius and uncommon merit. They add the name of
Roscoe to the very first rank of English Classical Historians."— Matthias, Pursuits nf Literature.

" Roscoe is, I think, by far the best of our Historians, both for beauty of style and for deep
reflections; and his translations of poetry aree^ualtc the originals."— Walpole, EarlofOrjord

ROSCOE'S ILLUSTRATIONS, HISTORICAL AND CRITICAL, of the Life of
Lorenzo de Medici, with an Appendix of Original Documents. Svo, Portrait of Lorenzo, and
Plates (pub. at 14». ), boards, 7s., or in 4to, printed to match the original edition. Portrait and
Plates (pub. at ll. Us. 6rf.), boards, JC«.
*»* This volume is supplementary to all editions of the work.

THE ROWS ROL, containing Armorial bearings. This Rol was laburd and finished by
Master John Rows of Warrewyck. With descriptive letter-press and Introdu* t;on by W.
Courthope, Esq. Now first published, I860. Royal 4to, elegantly printed by Whiitimt-ham,
with 32 large plates of Arms, Armour, and Costume, HIGHLY ILLUMINATED IN GOLD AKI>
COLOURS, 4to, half morocco, top edges gilt, 52. 15*. 6''. Pickering, 18 15

*** This curious volume, of which only one hundred copies were printed in 1845, h;is hitherto
remained unpublished, and the first aatUMincem*ni of it for sale was in the present year. Henry
G. Bohn is now, by the kindness of Mr. COURTHOPE, of the Heralds College, enabled to add an
historical Introduction and a complete description of the plates.

SHAKESPEARE'S PLAYS AND POEMS. VALPY'S Cabinet Pictorial Edition, with

Life, Glossarial Notes, and Historical Digests of each Play, &c. 15 vols. fcap. Svo, with 171
Plates engraved on steel after Designs of the most distinguished British Artists; also Fac-
similes of all the known Autographs of Shakespeare (pub. at 31. 15s.), cloth, rich gilt, 21. 5s. I8i4

SHAKSPEARE'S PLAYS AND POEMS. 1 vol. 8vo, with Explanatory Notes, and a
Memoir by Da. JOHNSON, Portrait (pub. at 15«.), cloth, 7». 6d.

PUBLISHED OR SOLD BY H. G. BOHN. 23

SHAXSPEARE'S PLAYS AND POEMS. Pocket Edition, with a Life hy ALEXANDER
CHALMERS, complete in 1 thick vol. 12mo. printed hi a Diamond type, with 10 steel Engravintrs
(pub. at lOi. 6d.), cloth, 5*.

SHAKSPERE'S PLAYS AND POEMS, with Explanatory Notes, and a Sketch of his
Writings, edited by CHARLES KNIGHT. Illustrated by 40 large Designs on wood
by W. HARVEY. Sixth Edition, thick 8vo. cloth, 10*. 6d.

SCHLOSSERS HISTORY OF THE XVIIIth CENTURY, AND OF THE XIX<h

• overthrow of the French Empire; with particular reference to Mental Cultivation ant/.
Progress. Translated from the German by DAVISON, with copious Index. 8 thick vols, 8vo,
(pub. at il. Id.), cloth extra, 11. 8s.

SHIPWRECKS AND DISASTERS AT SEA. Narratives of the most remarkahle
Wrecks, Conflagrations, Mutinies, &c. comprising the "Loss of the Wager," -'Mutiny of the
Bounty," &c. U'ino, Frontispiece and Vignette (pub. at 6».}, cloth, 3*.

SMOLLETT'S WORKS, Edited by ROSCOE. Complete in 1 vol. (Roderick Random,
Humphrey Clinker, Peregrine Pickfe, Launcelot Greaves, Count Fathom, Adventures of an
Atom, Travels, Plays, &c.) Medium 8vo, with 21 capital Plates, by CBUIKSHANK (pub. at
II. 43 ), cloth gilt, 14s.

" Perhaps no hook ever written excited such peals of inextinguishable laughter as Smol
lett's.— Sir Walter Scott.

STERNE'S WORKS. Complete in 1 vol. 8vo, Portrait and Vignette (puh. at 18*.)
cloth, Ks. erf.

ST. PIERRE'S WORKS, including the "Studies of Nature/' "Paul and Virginia," and
the " Indian Cottage," with a Memoir of the Author, and Notes, by the REV. E. CLARKE
complete in 2 thick vols. fcap. 8vo, Portrait and Frontispieces (pub. at ItJs. ), cloth, 7». 1846

SWIFT'S WORKS. Edited hy ROSCOE. Complete in 2 vols, medium 8vo, Portrait,

(pub. at '/. 12*.), cloth gilt, II. 4».
" •Whoever in the three kingdoms has any books at all has Swift."— Lord Chesterfield.

SYRIA AND THE HOLY LAND, their Scenery and their People ; being Incidents of
History and Travel, from BUKCKK AHDT, LIXDSAY, ROBINSON and o:her leading Authorities,
by V*". k. KELLY. With 180 fine Wood Engravings. Demy 8vo, (pub. at I2s.>, cloth, 5s.

TAAFE'S HISTORY OF THE KNIGHTS OF MALTA, &c., 4 vols. in 2, 8vo. cloth
gl.t, (pub. at 21. I Os.}, 10«. 6i/. 185.'

TAYLOR'S (W. B. S.) HISTORY CF THE UNIVERSITY OF DUBLIN. Numerous
Wood Engravings of its Buildings and Academic Costumes (puh. at II.), cloth, 7,t. 6d. 1845

THIERS' HISTORY OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION, the 10 parts in 1 thick vol-
royal 8vo, handsomely printed, cloth lettered (pub. at 11. 5s.), 10s.

TONERS' HISTORY OF THE CONSULATE AND EMPIRE OF NAPOLEON,

the 10 parts in 1 thick vo^, royal 8vo, handsomely printed, cloth lettered (pub. at 11. 5s.)t 10$.

TUCKER'S LIGHT OF NATURE PURSUED Complete in 2 vols. 8vo. (pub. at If. 10*.),
cloth, 15j.

" The ' Light of Nature' is a work which, after much consideration, I think myself autho-
rized to call the most original and profound that has ever appeared on moral philosophy. — Sir
James Mackintosh.

TYTLER'S ELEMENTS OF GENERAL HISTORY. New Edition, thick 12mo, (526
closely printed pages), steel Frontispiece (pub. at 5s.), cloth, 3». tid.

WADE'S BRITISH HISTORY, CHRONOLOGICALLY ARRANGED. Comprehending
aclashified Analysis of Events and Occurrences in Church and State, and of the Constitutional,
PoMtical, Commercial, Intellectual, and Social Progress of the United Kinedom, from the first
Invasion by the Romans to the Accession of Queen Victoria, with very copious Index and
Supplement. New Edition. 1 large remarkably thick vol. roya! 8vo, (1200 pages), cloth, 18*.

WALPpLE. MEMOIRS OF HORACE WAI-POLE & HIS CONTEMPORARIES.

Bv ELIOT A\ ARBURTOX, including Original Letters, chiefly from Strawberry Kill, 2 vols., 8vo.,
with Portraits of Walpole and Miss Berry, (pub. at H. 8».), 9s.

WATERSTON S CYCLOPEDIA OF COMMERCE, MERCANTILE LAW FINANCE
COMMERCIAL GEOGRAPHY AND NAVIGATION. New Edition in the press.

WELSFORD ON THE ORIGIN AND RAMIFICATIONS OF THE ENGLISH

i; an Enquiry into the Primitive Seats, Early Mi-rations, aid Final
Settlements of the principal European Nations, 8vo. cloth lettered, (pub. at Us.), 5».

WELSFORD'S MITHRIDATES MINOR: or an Eseav on LiineiiRer- 8vo. doth let-
tered, (pvb. at iOs. C 'lEt«

24 CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOKS

WEBSTER'S AND WORCESTER'S NEW CRITICAL AND PRONOUNCING

DICTIONARY OF THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE, including Scientific Terms: to whicn
are added WALKER'S Key to the Pronunciation of Classical and Scriptural Proper Names,
muchenlar»ed; and a Pronouncing Vocabulary of Modern Geographical Names. New Edi-
tion, enlarged and entirely revised by WORCESTER. In 1 thick vol. royal 8vo (pub. at 11. 5*. ),
cloth, 12*.

WHITE'S FARRIERY, improved by ROSSER, 8vo, with Phtcs engraved on steel (pub.
at 14*.), cloth, Js.

WHYTE'S HISTORY OF THE BRITISH TURF, FROM THE EARLIEST PERIOD
TO THE PRESENT DAY. 2 vols. 8vc, Plates (pub. at ll. 8*.), cloth, 12*.

WILLIS'S PENCILLINGS BY THE WAY. Anew and beautiful Edition, with addi-
tions, fcap. 8vo, fine Portrait and Plates (pub. at 6s.), extra red Turkey cloth, richly gilt back,
3*. 6d.

WRIGHT'S COURT HAND RESTORED, or the Student assisted in reading old

Charters, Deeds, £c. small ito. 23 plates (pub. at ll. 6s.), cloth, 15s.

gg, florals, 8cctafa»ticttl i^istorg, fcc.

BARRETT'S SYNOPSIS OF CRITICISMS upon those Passages of the OLD TESTA-

MENT in which Commentators have differed from the Authorized Version; together with
an explanation of difficulties in the Hebrew and English Texts. 5 vols, royal 8vo, (pub.
at 31. 10*.), cloth, ll. Is.

BAXTER'S (RICHARD) WORKS, with Sketch of the Life, and Essay on the Genius
of the. Author, 4 vols. imperial 8vo, (pub. at il. 4s.), 21. 12*. 6d.

BINGHAM'S ANTIQUITIES OF THE CHRISTIAN CHURCH. New and improved

Edition, carefully revised, with an enlarged Index. 2 vols. imp!. 8vo, cloth, ll. lls. 6t/. 1850

"Bingham is a writer who does equal honour to the English clergy and to the English nation,

and whose learning is only to be equalled by his moderation and impartiality." — Quarterly Rev.

CALMET'S DICTIONARY OF THE BIBLE, WITH THE BIBLICAL FRAG-

MENTS, by the late CHARLES TAYLOR. 5 vols. 4to, illustrated by 202 Copper-plate Engrav-
ings. Eighth greatly enlarged Edition, beautifully printed on fine wove paper (pub. at
101. 10*.), gilt cloth, 4/. 14s. (k/.

"Mr. Taylor's improved edition of Calinet's Dictionary is indispensably necessary to every
Biblical Student. The additions made under the title of ' Fragments ' are extracted from the
most rare and authentic Voyages and Travels into Judea and other Oriental countries; and
comprehend an assemblage of curious and illustrative descriptions, explanatory of Scripture
incidents, customs, and manners, which could not possibly be explained by any other medium.
The numerous engravings throw great light on Oriental customs." — Home.

CALMET'S DICTIONARY OF THE HOLY BIBLE, abridged, 1 large vol. imp. 8vOi
Woodcuts and Maps (pub. at H. 4s.), cloth, 15*.

GARY'S TESTIMONIES OF THE FATHERS OF THE FIRST FOUR CENTURIES

TO THE CONSTITUTION AND DOCTRINES OF THE CHURCH OF ENGLAND,
as sat forth in the XXXIX Articles, 8vo, (pub. at 12*.), cloth, 7s. 6d. Oxford, Tulboyt.

" This work may be classed with those of Pearson and Bishop Bull; and such a classifica-
tion is no mean honour." — Church of England Quarterly.

CHARNOCK'S DISCOURSES UPON THE EXISTENCE AND ATTRIBUTES OF

GOD. Complete in 1 thick closely printed vol. 8vo, with Portrait (pub. at 14*.), cloth, 6*. 6d.
" Perspicuity and depth, metaphysical sublimity and evangelical simplicity, immense learn-
ing but irrefragable reasoning, conspire to render this performance one of the most inestimable
roductions that ever did honour to the sanctified judgment and genius of a human being." •

CHRISTIAN EVIDENCES. Containing the following esteemed Treatises, with Pre-

%tory Memoirs by the Rev. J. S. MEMF.S, LL.D., viz : — Watson's Apology for Christianity;
Watson's Apology for the Bible; Paley's Evidences of Christianity ; Paley's Horse Paulinze;
Jenyns' Internal Evidence of the Christian Religion; Leslie's Truth of Christianity Demon-
strated; Leslie's Short and Easy Method with the Deists; Leslie's Short and Easy Method
with the Jews; Chandler's Plain Reasons for being a Christian : Lyttleton on the Conversion
of St. Paul; Campbell's Dissertation on Miracles; Sherlock's Trial of the Witnesses, with
Sequel; West on the Resurrection. In 1 vol. royal 8vo (pub. at 14s.), cloth, 10s.

CHRISTIAN TREASURY. Consisting of the following Expositions and Treatises, Edited
by MEMES, viz: — Magee's Discourses and Dissertations on the Scriptural Doctrines of Atone-
ment and Sacrifice; W'itherspoon's Practical Treatise on Regeneration; Boston's Crook in the
Lot; Guild's Moses Unveiled; Guild's Harmony of all the Prophets; Less's Authenticity,
Uncorrupted Preservation, and Credibility of the' New Testament; Stuart's Letters ou Use
Divinity of Christ. In 1 vol. royal 8vo (pub. at 12s.) , cloth, 8*.

PUBLISHED OR SOLD BY H. G. EOHN. 25

CRUDEN'S CONCORDANCE TO THE OLD AND NEW TESTAMENT, revised

and condensed by G. H. HAXNAY, thick ISmo, beautifully printed (pub. at (is.), cloth, 3s. Orf.

" An extremely pretty and very cheap edition. It contains all that is useful in the orUrin.il
work, omittir.gr only prepositions, conjunctions, &c., which can never he made available for
purposes of reference. Indeed it is all that the Scripture student can desire. %> — Guardian.

EVELYN'S RATIONAL ACCOUNT OF THE TRUE RELIGION, now first pub-
lished from the original MS. in the Library at Wootton, edited, with Notes, by the llev. R. M.
EVAXSOX, B.A., '2 vols. post svo. (uniform with his Diary), cloth, (pub. at ll.ls.}, 7«. 6d.

FOX'S BOOK OF MARTYRS; the Acts and Monuments of the Church, edited by
DR. CUMMI.VG, 3 vols. imp. Svo, with upwards of 1000 wood illustrations, imperial Svo, extra
cloth (pub. at 3/. 13i. 6d.), 21. 12». M.

FULLER'S (REV. ANDREW) COMPLETE WORKS; with a Memoir of his Life, by his
Son, 1 large vol. imperial Svo, New Edition, Portrait (pub. at II. 10s.), cloth, 15s.

GRAVES'S (DEAN) LECTURES ON THE PENTATEUCH. Svo, New Edition (pub.

at 13s.), cloth, 9s. 1846

HALLS (THE REV. ROBERT) COMPLETE WORKS, with a Memoir of his Life, by
Dr. OLINTHUS GREGORY, and Observations on his Character as a Preacher, by JOHN FOSTER.,
Author of Essays on Popular Ignorance, &c. ; 6 vols. Svo, handsomely printed, with beautiful
Portrait (pub. at 31. IGs.), cloth, contents lettered, \l. Us. 6d.
The same, printed in a smaller size, 6 vols. fcap. 8vo, I/. !.»., cloth lettered.
" Whoever wishes to see the English language in its perfection must read the writings of that
great Divine, Robert Hall. He combines the beauties of JOHNSON, ADDISON, and BURKE,
•without their imperfections."— Dugald Stewart.

"I cannot do better than refer the academic reader to the immortal works of Robert Hal!.
For moial grandeur, for Christian truth, and for sublimity, we may doubt whether they have

;r match in the sacred oratory of any age or country."— Professor Se-dc/i/'iK-.
"The name of Robert Hall will be placed by posterity among the best writers of the age, as
•well as the most vigorous defenders ot religious truth, and the brightest examples of Christian
charity."— Sir /. MatkaUotk.

HENRY'S (MATTHEW) COMMENTARY ON THE PSALMS. Complete in out-
thick closely printed volume, post bvo. with 2G illustrations on wood, cloth, (uittform with the
Standard Library), is. M. 183-'

HILL'S (REV. ROWLAND) MEMOIRS, by his Friend, the Rev. W. JONES. Edited,
with a Preface, by the Rev. JAMES SHERMAN (ROWLAND HILL'S Successor asMinis;er o!
Surrey Chapel). Second Ediiion, carefully revised, thick post Svo, fine steel Portrait (pub.
at 10*.') .cloth, Si.

HOPKINS'S (BISHOP) WHOLE WORKS, with a Memoir of the Author, and a very
extensive general Index of Texts and Subjects, 2 vols, royal Svo (pub. at 11. 4s.), cloth, 15s.
"Bishop Hopkins's works form of themselves a sound body of divinity. He is clear, vehe-
ment, and persuasive." — Bickersteth.

HORNE ON THE PSALMS, a Commentary on the Book of Psalms, in which their
literal sense aud metaphorical application is pointed out. New and elegant edition, complete
in one volume, Sve, cloth (pub. at Ss. ). 6s. Qd.

HUNTINGDON'S (COUNTESS OF) LIFE AND TIMES- By a Member of the Houses

of Shirley and Hastings. Sixth Thousand, with a copious Index. 2 large vols. Svo, Portraits
of the Countess, Whittield, and Wesley (pub. at 11. 4s.), cloth, 14s.

LEIGHTON'S (ARCHBISHOP) WHOLE WORKS; to which is prefixed a Life of the

Author, by the Rev. N. T. PEARSON. New Edition, •> thick vols. Svo, Portrait (pub. at II. 4«.)
extra cloth, 16s. The only complete Edition.

LEIGHTON'S COMMENTARY ON PETER; with Life by PEARSON, complete iu 1
thick handsomely printed vol. Svo, Portrait (pub. at 12s.), cloth, 9s.

LIVES OF THE ENGLISH SAINTS. By the Rev. J. IT. NEWMAN and others.
11 parts, sewed, 11. Is.

M'CRJE'S LIFE OF JOHN KNOX, with illustrations of the History of the Reformation
in Scotland. New Edition with numerous Additions, and a Memoir, &c. bv ANDREW Cr.i-
Fcap. Svo (pub. at 5s.), cloth, 3j. Gd. lii;

MAGEE'S (ARCHBISHOP) WORKS, comprising Discourses nml Dissertations on the
Scriptural Doctrines of Atonement and Sacrifice; Sermons, and Visitation Charges. \Vith a
Memoir of his Life, by the Rev. A. H. KENNY, D.D. 2 vols. Svo (pub. at 11. 6s.), cloth, 18s.

" Discovers such deep research, yields ro much valuable information, and affords so many
helps to the refutation of error, as to constMete the most valuable treasure of biblical learning
of which a Christian scholar can be possessed."— Christian Observer.

MORE'S (HANNAH) LIFE, by the Rev. HKNR? THOMPSON, post Svo, printed uniformly
with her works, Portrait, and Wood Engravings (pub. at 12s.), extra cloth, 6*. Cadelt, 1S:>S
"Ttiis may be called the official edition of Hannah More's Life. It brings so much new and
interesting matter into the field respecting I'.er, that it will .«reive a hearty welcome from th*
pub, ic. Amnns the rest, the partfculKn vf nwi'! of \j?t pttbUmioni wvl! reward tUe curiosity-
ofliterarr Tt&s!i'r» '•« liitrtry Gturtti

26 CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOKS,

MOEE'S ^HANNAH) WORKS, complete in 11 vols. fcap. 8vo, with portrait and vig-
nette titles, cloth, II. 18?. lirf. 1S-3
MCRE'S (HANNAH) SPIRIT OF PRAYER, fcap. 8vo, Portrait (pub. at 6*.), doth, 4*.

MILNER'S HISTORY OF THE CHURCH OF CHRIST. With Additions by tlie'late

Rev. ISAAC MIL:;ER, D.D., F.R.S. A New Edition, revised, with additional Kotes by the
Rev. T. GRANTHAM, B.D. 4 vcls. 8vo, published at 52'., reduced to II. Is.
MQRE'S (HANNAH) PRACTICAL PIETY; Or the Influence of the Religion of the
Heart on the Conduct of the Life, 32mo, Portrait, cloth, 2s. 6d.

The only complete small edition. It was revised just before her death, and contains much
improvement, which is copyright.

CORE'S (HANNAH) SACRED DRAMAS chiefly intended for Young People, to which
is added " Sensibility," an Epistle, 3imo (pub. at 2s. 6d.), gilt cloth, gilt edges, 2s.

MORE'S (HANNAH) SEARCH AFTER HAPPINESS; with Ballads, Tales, Hymns,

and Epitaphs, 32mo (pub. at 2s. 6d.), gilt cloth, gilt edges, Is. 6d.

MONTGOMERY, MEMOIRS OF JAMES, THE POET, including Selections from
!iis Coirespoiider.ee, Remains in prose arid verse, and Conversations on various subjects.
Edited by JOHN HOLLAND ai d JAMES EVERETT, 7 vols. post 8vo, with a fine portrait and
frontispiece to each volume engraved on steel (in ail 14 plates), cloth (pub. at 3*. 13*. 6d.)»
\l. Is.

NEWTON'S (REV. JOHN) WORKS, with a Life of the Author, by the Rev. RICHAHD
CECIL, and an introduction by the Rev. T. CUNNINGHAM, M.A. imperial Svo, with Portrait
(pub. at 11. bs.), las.

PALEY'S WORKS, in 1 vol. consisting of his Natural Theology, Moral and Political
Philosophy, Evidences of Christianity, Horae,Paulinse, Clergyman's Companion in visiting the
Sick, &c. Svo, handsomely printed in double columns (pub. at 10«. 6d.), cloth, as.

RIDDLE'S ECCLESIASTICAL CHRONOLOGY; or Annals of the Christian Church
from its Foundation to the Present Time ; containing a View of General Church History (in-
cluding Controversies, Sects, and Paities, Ecclesiastical Writers, He.) Svo, cloth (pub. at
15*.), reduced to 7s. 6d.

ROBINSON'S SCRIPTURE CHARACTERS; or, a Practical Improvement of the
Principal Histories of the Old and New Testament, 2 thick vols., Svo, handsomely printed,
with Portrait and Life of the Author, cloth lettered, (pub. at il. Is.), Its. Od.

SCOTT'S (REV. THOMAS) COMMENTARY ON THE BIBLE, with the Author's
last Corrections and Improvements, and 84 beautiful Woodcut Illustrations and Maps. 3 vols.
imperial Svo (pub. at il. is.), cloth, 11. 1C*. 1830

SIMEON'S WORKS, including his Skeletons of Sermons and Horse Homihticje, or
Discourses digested into one continued Series, and forming a Commentary upon every Book
of the Old and New Testament; to which are annexed an improved edition of Claude's Essay
on the Composition of a Sermon, and very comprehensive Indexes, edited by Rev. THOMAS
HARTWELL HORNE, 21 vols. 8vo (pub. at lot. 10*.), cloth, 71. Is.

The following miniature editions of Simeon's popular works are uniformly printed in 32mo, ind

bound in cloth :

THE CHRISTIAN'S ARMOUR, 9rf.
THE EXCELLENCY OF THE LITURGY, 9d.
THE OFFICES OF THE HOLY SPIRIT, 9d.

HUMILIATION OF THE SON OF GOD; TWELVE SERMONS, 9d.
APPEAL TO MEN OF WISDOM AND CANDOUR, 9d.
DISCOURSES ON BEHALF OF THE JEA'S, Is. Gd.

"The works of Simeon, containing 2536 discourses on the principal passages of the Old and
New Testament will be found peculiarly adapted to assist the studies of the younger clergy in
their i reparation for the pulpit; they will likewise serve as a Body of Divinity; and are by
many recommended as a Biblical Commentary, wel' adapted to be read in families." — ' owndes.

SMYTH'S (REV. DR.) EXPOSITION OF VARIOUS PASSAGES OF HOLY

SCRIPTURE, adapted to the Use of Familes, for every Day throughout the Year, 3 vols. Svo
(pub. at II. 11s. Gd.), Cloth, 9». Ihi2

SOUTH EY'S LETTERS, selected and edited by his son-in-law JOHN WOOD WAKTZK,
B.D., 4 thick vols. post bvo, cloth (pub. at 21. 5s.), 18s.

SOUTH'S COR. ROBERT) SERMONS: to which are annexed the chief heads of the
Sermons, a Biographical Memoir, and General Index, 2 vols. royal Svo (pub. at 11 it )
cloth, 15s.

STEBBING'S HISTORY OF THE CHURCH OF CHRIST, from the Diet of Augsburg,
1530, to the present Century, 3 vol». Svo (pub. at 11. 16s.), cloth, 12s. 18^9

SPOTTISWOODES HISTORY OF THE CHURCH OF SCOTLAND Edited by
the RIGHT REV. DR. RUSSELL. 3 vols, Svo, (pub. at i*. ios.), cloth ert^IJ*.

TAYLOR'S (JEREMY) COMPLETE WORKS, with an Essay, Biographical and
Critical ; 3 large vols. imperial STO, Portrait (pub. at 31. 15*.), cloth, 31. it.

PUBLISHED OR SOLD BY H. G. BCflHX. 27

TAYLOR'S (ISAAC OF ONGARj NATURAL HISTORY OF ENTHUSIASM

Tenth Edition, fcap. 8vo, cloth, St

" It is refreshing to us to meet with a work bearing, as this unqnestionably does, the Impress
of bold, powerful, and original thought. Its most strikingly original views, however, never
transgress the bounds of pure Protestant orthodoxy, or violate the spirit of truth and sober-
ne -s ; and yet it discusses topics constituting the very root and basis of those furious polemics
which have shaken repeatedly the whole intellectual and moral world." — Athenaeum.

TAYLOR'S (ISAAC) FANATICISM. Third Edition, carefully revised. Fcap. 8vo
do:

" It is th •. reader's fault if he does not rise from the perusal of such a volume as the present
a wiser and a better man.— Eclectic Review.

TAYLOR'S (ISA AC) SATURDAY EVENING, Seventh Edition. Fcap. 8vo, cloth, 5s.
" ' Saturday Evening,' and ' Natural History of Enthusiasm,' are two noble productions."—
<d't Magazine.

TAYLOR'S (ISAAC) ELEMENTS OF THOUGHT, or concise Explanations, alpha-
bia.a'ly arranged, of the principal Terms employed in the usual Branches of Intellectual
;>hy. Ninth Edition. 12mo, cloth, 4s.

.'IMPSON'S KEY TO THE BIBLE, containing a Summary of Biblical Knowledge,
and a Dictionary of all the principal Words in the Old and New Testament, illustrated by three
ma;',--, a:.d i:-4 beautiful woodcuts, 8vo, cloth lettered, (pub. at 14s.), 7«. 1853

TOMLI.NE'S (BISHOP) ELEMENTS OF CHRISTIAN THEOLOGY, Fourteenth
Edition, with additional Note* and Summary, bySiEBBiNG. 2 vols. 8vo, cloth, lettered (pub
at I/. Is.), Ws.Gd.

TOMLINE'S (BISHOP) INTRODUCTION TO THE STUDY OF THE BIBLE,

OR ELEMENTS OF CHRISTIAN THEOLOGY. Containing Proofs of the Authenticity
ami Inspiration of the Ho!y Scriptures; a Summary of the History of the Jews; an Account o'f
the Jewish Sects; and a brief Statement of the Contents of the several Books of the Old and
New Testaments. Nineteenth Edition, elegantly printed on fine paper, 12mo (pub. at Si. 6d. ),
cloth, 3*. 6d.

" Well adapted as a manual for students in divinity, and may be read with advantage by the
most experienced divine." — Marsh's Lectures.

WHEELER'S (REV. N.) SERMONS; preached in the Parish Churches of Old and New
Shoreham, (in the vicinity of Brighton), Sussex, large type, 8vo, cloth, (pub. at 10s. 6d.), 5s.

WILBERFORCE'S PRACTICAL VIEW OF CHRISTIANITY, With a comprehensive
Memoir of the Author, by the Rev. T. PKICE, 18iuo, printed in a large handsome type (pub. at
6*.) i g^t cloth, 2«. 6d. 1845

fgit ^Languages antr Hftcratuw.

INCLUDING

CLASSIC? AND TRANSLATIONS, CLASSICAL CRITICISM, DICTIONARIES
GRAMMARS, COLLEGE AND SCHOOL BOOKS, ATLASES, &c.

ATLASES— A NEW GENERAL ATLAS, engraved by SIDNEY HALL, demy folio,
53 large Maps, with the Divisions and Boundaries carefully coloured, and a complete General
Index. New Edition, corrected to the present time, half morocco, 21. 12s. 6d.

WILKINSON'S CLASSICAL AND SCRIPTURAL ATLAS, with Historical and
Chr mc'io-rical TaH.es, imperial 4to. New and improved Edition, 53 maps, coloured (pub. at
21. 4J.J, half bound morocco, It. 11*. 6rf. . 18J2

WILKINSON'S GENERAL ATLAS. New and improved Edition, with all the Railroads
inserte-l. Population according to the last Census, Parliamentary Returns, &c.,-iniperial 4to.
46 Maps, coloured (pub. at 11. 161.), half bound morocco, \l. 5*. 1812

AINSWORTH'S LATIN DICTIONARY, by Dr. JAMIESON, an enlarged Edition, con-
taining all the words of the Quarto Dictionary. Thick 8vo, neatly bound ( pub. at 1 4*. ) 9».

184"

BIBLIA HEB1AICA, EX EDITIONS VANDER HOOGHT. Recognovit J. D. AI.LK-

MAXD. Very thick 8vo, handsomely printed (pub. at 11. as.), cloth, 10s. 6d. Land. Duncan, 1850

BOURNE'S (VINCENT) POETICAL WORKS, Latin and English, ISmo (pub. at

3s. 6d.), Cl tli, 2*. 6d. 1838

-- the same, large paper, an elegant volume, 12mo (pub. at 5»,), cloth, 3?. 6cf. 1838

CICE1OS LIFE, FAMILIAR LETTERS, AND LETTERS TO ATTICUS,

by MIDDLETON, MELMOTH, and HEBKROEN, complete in one thick vol. royal 8vo, portrait,

(pub. at 11. 4».), cloth, 12*. 18i3

CO.1PUS POETARUM LATINORUM. Edidit G. S. WALKEB. Complete iu 1 very

thick vol. royal 8vo (pub. at 21. 2.*.), cloth, 18,«.
This comprehensive volume contains a library of the poetical Latin classics, correctly

printed from the best texts, viz; —

Catullus, Virgil, Lucan, Snlpicia, Calpurnius Siculus

Tiliullus, Ovid, Persius, Statius, Ausonius,

Propertius, Horace, Juvenal, Silius Italicus, Claudian.

Pluedrus, Martial, Valerius Fiaccus,

28 CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOKS,

DAMMII LEXICON GR/ECUM, HOMERICUM ET PINDARICUM.

rojal 4to, New Edition, printed on fine paper (pub. at 51. 5s.), cloth, II. Is. 1842

"An excellent work, the merits of which have been universally acknowledged by literary

characters."— Dr. Dibdln.
DEMOSTHENES, translated by LRLAND, the two vols. Svo, complete in 1 vol. 12mo-

handsomely printed in double columns, in pearl type, portrait (pub. at 5s.), doth, 3i.
DONNEGAN'S GREEK AND ENGLISH LEXICON, enlarged; with examples, literally

translated, selected from the classical authors. Fourth Edition, considerably enlarged, care-

fully revised, and materially improved throughout; thick 8vo (1752 pages) (pub. at 21. Zs.),

cloth, 15s.

GRAGLIA'S ITALIAN-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-ITALIAN DICTIONARY, with a
compendious Italian Grammar and Supplementary Dictionary of Naval Terms, ISmo, roan
(pub. at 8*.), 4». 6d.

HERMANN'S MANUAL OF THE POLITICAL ANTIQUITIES OF GREECE,

Historically considered, translated from the German, 8vo (pub. at 15*.), cloth, 10s. Od.

Orford. Taiboyi, 1830

"Hermann's Manual of Greek Antiquities is most important."— Thirlwatt't Hist, of Greece,
vol. 1, p. 443.

HERODOTUS, CAREY'S (REV. H.) GREEK AND ENGLISH LEXICON TO

HERODOTUS, adapted to the Text of Gaisford and Baehr, and all other Editions, Svo, cloth
(pub. at 12*.), 8».

LEMPRIERE'S CLASSICAL DICTJONARY. Miniature Edition, containing a fall
Account of all the Proper names mentioned in Ancient Authors, and much useful information
respecting the uses and habits of the Greeks and Romans. New and complete Edition,
elegaiiHy printed in pearl type, in 1 very thick vol. ISmo (pub. at Is. 6d.), cloth, 4*. 6d.

LIVII HISTORIA, EX RECENSIONE DRAKENBORCHII ET KREYSSIG;

Et Annotationes CREVIERII, STROTHII, RUPERTI, etaliorum; Animadversiones NIEBUHRII,
WACHSMUTHII, et suas addidit TRAVERS Twiss, J. C. B. Coll. Univ. Oxon. Socius et Tutor-
Cum Indice amplissimo, 4 vols. Svo (pub. at 1 1. 18s.), cloth, H. 1*. Oxford, 1841

This is the best and most useful edition of Livy ever published in octavo, and it is preferred
in all our universities and classical schools.

LIVY. Edited by PRENDEVILLE. Livii Historiae libri qutnque priores, with English
Notes, by PRENDEVILLE. New Edition, 12mo, neatly bound in roan, i».

-- the same, Books I to III, separately, cloth, 3s. 6d.

-- the same, Books IV and V, cloth, 3s. 6d.

NEWMAN'S PRACTICAL SYSTEM OF RHETORIC; or, the Principles and Rules of
Style, with Examples. Sixth Edition, 12mo (pub, at 5*. 6d.), cloth 3». Grf.

OXFORD CHRONOLOGICAL TABLES OF UNIVERSAL HISTORY, from the
earliest Period to the present Time : in which all the great Events, Civil, Religious, Scientific,
and Literary, of the various Nations of the World are placed, at one view, under the eye of the
Reader in a Series of parallel columns, so as to exhibit the state of the whole Civilized World
at any epoch, and at the same time form a continuous chain of History, with Genealogical
Tables of all the principal Dynasties. Complete in 3 Sections; viz;— 1. Ancient History,
TI. Middle Ages. III. Modern History. With a most complete Index to the entire work,
folio (pub. at II. 16s.), half- bound morocco, II. Is.

The above is also sold separately, as follows; —
THE MIDDLE AGES AND MODERN HISTORY, 2 parts in 1, folio (pub. at 11. 2t. 6d.),

MODERN0 HISTORY, folio (pub. at 12*. ), sewed, 8s.

PLUTARCH'S LIVES, by the LANGHORNES. Complete in 2 vols. Svo. (pub. at II. Is )
cloth, 10*. ad.

RAMSHORN'S DICTIONARY OF LATIN SYNONYMES, for the Use of Schools and
Private Students. Translated and edited by DR. LIEBE&. Post Svo. (pub. at 7s.), cloth, 4s. Grf.

1841
SCHOMANN'S HISTORY OF THE ASSEMBLIES OF THE ATHENIANS,

translated from the Latin, with a complete Index, Svo. {pub. at 10s. Gd.), cloth, 5s. Camb. 1838
A book of the same school and character as the works of HEEREN, BOECKH, SCHLEGEI, &c

GfRE>EK,A,NP ENGLIS" LEXICON TO SOPHOCLES, translated by
o, (pub. at 12s.)., cloth, Cs. 6d. Oxford, Talboys, 1841

STUART'S HEBREW CHRESTOMATHY, designed as an Introduction to a Course

lebrew Study. Ihird Edition, Svo, (pub. at 14s.), cloth, 9s. Oxford, Talboys, 1834

This work, which was designed by its learned author to facilitate the study of Hebrew, has
fcad a very extensive sale in America. It forms a desirable adjunct to all Hebrew Grammars
<nd is sufficient to complete the system >f instruction in that language.

TAYLOR'S (ISAAC, OF ONGAR) HOME EDUCATION ; a new and enlarged edition,

revised fy the Author, fcap. Svo, cloth, 5s.

TRpLLQPE'S (REV. WMj ANALECTA THEOLOGICA, rive SYNOPSIS CRITI

CtmU.M ; a Critical, Philological, and Exegetical CotnmentttT? oa the New Testament •
adapted to the Greek Te*U, compiled and digested from the most a^nved sources, British and

, nd digested from the most a^nved sources, Br

•foreign; and so arranged as to exhibit at one view the comparative weight of different opinio
on disputed texts, 2 very thick vols., Svo, sloth lettered, (pub. at 11. 12s.), 12s.

PUBLISHED OR SOLD BY H. G. BOHN. 29

TACITUS, (the Latin Text), complete, from the Text of BROTIER, with his Explanatory
Notes in Enelish, edited, for the use of Schools and Colleges, by A. J. VALPY, M.A. 3 vois.
post 8vo, (pub. at II. 4*.), cloth, 10s. 6d.

TERENTIUS, CUM NOTIS VARIORUM, CURA ZEUNII, cura GILES; acced. Index

copiosisslmus. Complete in 1 thick vol. Svo, (pub. at 1C*.), cloth, S*. 1837

VIRGIL. EDWARDS'S SCHOOL EDITION. Virgilii ^Eneis, cura EDWARDS, et Questi-
ones Virgilianas, or Notes and Questions, adapted to the middle Forms in Schools. 2 vols in 1,
12rao, bound in cloth (pub. at 6.«. 6d.), 3s.

*»* Either the Text or auestions may be had separately (pub. at 3*. 6d.), 2i. Gd.

WILSON'S (JAMES PROFESSOR OF FRENCH IN ST. GREGORY'S COLLEGE)

FRENCH-ENGLISH AND ENGLISH-FRENCH DICTIONARY, containing lull Expla-
nations, Definitions, Synonyms, Idioms, Proverbs, Terms of Art and Science, and Rules of
Pronunciation in each Language. Compiled from the Dictionaries of the Academy, BOWYER,
CHA.MBAUD, GARNER, LAVEAUX, DBS CARKJERES and FAIN, JOHNSOX and WALKER.
1 large closely printed vol. imperial 8vo, (pub. at 21. 2s.), cloth, 18*.

XENOPHONTIS OPERA, GR. ET LAT. SCHNElDERI ET ZEUNII, Accedit Inder

(PoRSONand ELMSLKY'S Edition), 10 vols. 12mo, handsomely printed in a large type, done
up in 5 vols. (pub. at il. 10*.), cloth, IS?. 1841

" the same, large paper, 10 vols. crown 8ro, done up in 5 vols. cloth, 11. 5s.

XENOPHON'S WHOLE WORKS, translated by £PKLMAN and others. The only com-
plete Edition, 1 thick vol. Svo, portrait, (pub. at 15*.), cloth, 10*.

jgobels, Morfcs of Jptctton, %iq$t

CRUIKSHANK "AT HOME;" a New Family Album of Endless Entertainment, con-
sisting of a Series of Tales and Sketches by the most popular Authors, with numerous clever and
humorous Illustrations on Wood, by CRUIKSHANK and SEYMOUR. Also, CRUIKSHANK'S
ODD VOLUME, OR BOOK OF VARIETY. Illustrated by Two Odd • Fellows-SEYMOUR.
and CRUIKSHANK. Together 4 vols. in 2, fcap. 8vo, (pub. at 21. 18*.), cloth, gilt, 10*. Gd. 1845

HOWITT'S (WILLIAM) GERMAN EXPERIENCES. Addressed to the English, both
Goers Abroad and Stayers at Home. 1 vol. fcap. 8vo, (pub. at 6*.), cloth, 3*. 6d. 1844

MARRYAT'S(CAPT.) POOR JACK. Illustrated by 46 large and exquisitely beautiful
Engravings on Wood, after the masterly Designs of CLARKSON STANFIBI.D, R.A. 1 hand-
some vol. royal Svo, (pub. at 14*.), gilt cloth, 9*.

MARRYAT'S PIRATE AND THE THREE CUTTERS. 8vo, wiiu 20 most splendid
lime Engravings, after STANFIELD, engraved on Steel by CHAMPS H&ATH (originally pub.
&li. •$«.), Silt cloth, 10*. Gd.

MARRYAT'S (CAPT.) PRIVATEER'S MAN OC ONE HUNDrteS YEARS AGO.

new edition, illustrated with 8 highly finished line Engravings on steel, in the manner of
Stothard, fcap. Svo. gilt cloth, as.

MARRYAT'S (CAPT-) MAS^ERMAN READY, or the Wreck of the Pacific (written
for Young People). New edition, complete in I vol. fcap. Svo. with 92 beautiful engravings
oa wood, cloth extra, gilt, tis. 18J(i

MARRYAT'S MISSION, OR SCENES IN AFRICA. (Written fer Young People).
New edition, fcap. 8vo, with 8 Illustrations on wood by GILBERT & DALZIEL, cloth, ex. gilt, 5».

MARRYAT'S SETTLERS IN CANADA. (Written for Young People). New edition,
fcap. Svo., with 10 Illustrasions on wood by GILBERT and DALZIEL, cloth, extra gilt, 5s.

MAYHEW'S IMAGE OF HIS FATHER; or, One Boy is More Trouble than a Dozen
Girls; a Tale, with 12 capital Engravings by PHIZ. New Edition, in 1 vol. post Svo. cloth gilt,
(pub. at 7*.), reduced to 3*. Gd.

MILLER'S GODFREY MALVERN, OR THE LIFE OF AN AUTHOR. By the

Author of " Gideon Giles," " Royston Gower," " Day in the Woods," &c. &c. 2 vols. in 1,
8vo, with 2i clever Illustrations by PHIZ (pub. at 13».), cloth, 6*. <Jd. 184;

" This work has a tone and an individuality which distinguishes it from all others, and cannot
be read without pleasure. Mr. Miller has the forms and colours of rustic life more completely
under his control than any of his predecessors."— Athenaeum.

MITFORD'S (MISS) OUR VILLAGE; comrrfete in 2 vols. post 8vo, a Series of Rural
Tales and Sketches. New Edition, beautiful Woodcuts, gilt cloth, 10*.

SKETCHES FROM FLEMISH LIFE. By HKNDBIK CONSCIENCE. Square 1 2mo, ISf
Wood Engravings (pub. at 6* ), cloth, 4*. Od.

30 CATALOGUE OF NEW BOOKS,

an* 33

ALPH ABET OF QUADRUPEDS Illustrated by "Figures selected from the works of the
Old Masters, square r>mo, with 24 spirited Engravings after BERGHEM, REMBRANDT, CUYP,
PAUL POTTER, &c. and with initial letters by MR. SHAW, cloth, gilt edges (pub. at is. 6d.), 3s

the same, the Plates coloured, gilt cloth, gilt edges (pub. at 7s. 6rf.), 5».

CRABB'S (REV. G) NEW PANTHEON, or Mythology of all Nations ; especially for
the Use of Schools and Young Persons; with Questions for Examination on the Plan of
PINNOCK. ISmo, with 30 pleasing Lithographs (pub. at 3s.), cloth, 2s.

DRAPER'S JUVENILE NATURALIST, or Country Walks in Spring, Summer, Autumn,
and Winter. Square 12mo, with 80 beautifully executed Woodcuts (pub. at 7*. 6t/.), cloth, gut
edges, 3«. Gd.

EVANS'S TALES OF CHIVALRY; or, Evenings with the Chroniclers; square 16mo.
16 woodcuts, cloth lettered, (pub. at 4s. 6d.), 3s. Cd.

EVANS'S TRUE TALES OF THE OLDEN TIME, selected from FROISSAKT. Third
Edition, handsomeJy printed, 1C fine woodcuts, square 16mo, gilt cloth, (pub. at 4s. 6d.), 3s. 6(1

GAMMER GRETHEL'S FAIRY TALES AND POPULAR STORIES, translated from
the German jof GRIMM (containing 42 Fairy Tales), post 8vo, numerous Woodcuts by GEORGE
CRUIKSHANK (pub. at 7«. 6d.), cloth gilt, 5*. 1840

GOOD-NATURED BEAR. A Story for Children of all Ages, by R. H. HOENE. Square
8vo, Plates (pub. at 5». ), cloth, 3s., or with the Plates coloured, 4s. 1850

GRHVIM'S TALES FROM EASTERN LANDS. Square 12mo, Plates (pub. at 5«.),
cloth, 3«. 6-J., or Plates coloured, 4s. 6c/. 48*7

HOWITTS (MARY) CHILD'S PICTURE AND VERSE BOOK, commonly called
" Otto Speckter's Fable Book ;" translated into English Verse, with French and German Verses
opposite, forming a Triglott, square li'mo, with 100 large Wood Engravings (pub. at lo«. 6d.),
extra Turkey cloth, gilt edges, 5s.- 1845

This is one of the most elegant juvenile books ever produced, and has the novelty of being in
three languages.

ILLUSTRATED DITTIES OF THE OLDEN TIME; a Series of 29 exqtiisitely grace-
ful Designs, illustrative of popular Nursery Rhymes, small 4to, elegantly bound in cloth, 5s.

LAMB'S TALES FROM SHAKSPEARE,. designed principally for the use of Young Per-
sons (written by Miss and CHARLES LAMB), Sixth Edition, embellished with 20 large and beau-
tiful Woodcut Engravings, from Designs by HAJIVEV, fcap. 8vo., (pub. at 7». Gd,), cloth gilt
3s. 6d.

L. E. L. TRAITS AND TRIALS OF EARLY LIFE. A Series of Tales addressed to
Young People. By L. E. L. (Miss LAXDON). Fourth Edition, fcap. 8vo, with a .beautiful
Portrait engraved on Steel (pub. at 5s.), gilt cloth, 3s. 1645

LOUDON'S (MRS.) ENTERTAINING NATURALIST*; beinz popular Descriptions,
Tales and Anecdotes of more than 500 Animals, comprehending all the Quadrupeds, Birds.
Fishes, Reptiles, Insects, &c., of which a knowledge is indispensable in Polite Education!
Illustrated by upwards of 500 beautiful Woodcuts, by BEWICK, HARVEY, WHIMPER and
others, post 8vo, gilt cloth, 6».

MARTIN AND WESTALL'S PICTORIAL HISTORY OF THE BIBLE; the letter-
press by the REV. HOBART GAUNTER, 8vo. 144 extreme! v beautiful Wood Enfrravino-s bv the
first Artists (including reduced copies of MARTIN'S celebrated Pictures, Belshazzar's Feast
The Deluge, Fall of Nineveh, &«.), cloth gilt, gilt edges, reduced to 12t.
A most elegant present to young people.

MARRYAT'S MASTERMAN READY, PRIVATEER'S MAN, MISSION, and SETTLORS-.
see previous page.

MERRY TALES FOR LITTLE FOLK ; illustrated with upwards of Two Hundred and
Fitty Wood Engravings ; new and improved edition, elegantly printed, extra clolh gilt, 3s. 6u'.
*** Th is highly popular volume contains 4C different Stories of the olden tlm^.

PERCY TALES OF THE KINGS OF ENGLAND ; Stories of Camps and Battle-fields.

Wars, and Victories (modernized from HOI.INSHED, FROISSAKT, ard the other Chroniclers)!
2 vols. in 1, square 12mo. (Parley size. ) Fourth Edition, considerably improved, completed
to the present time, embellished with 16 exceedingly beautiful Wood Engravings (pub at fls )
Cloth gilt, gilt edi;es, 5s.
This beautiful volume has enjoyed a large share of success, and deservedly.

ROBIN HOOD AND HIS MERRY FORESTERS. By STEPHEN PKBCY. Square 12mo,
8 Illustrations by GILBERT (pub. at 5s.), cloth, 3s. Gd., or with coloured PJates, 5s. 1850

SHERWOOD'S (MRS.) ROBERT AND FREDERICK; a Tale lor Youth, fcap. 8vo,
Trith 20 highly finished wood EiigravinKS, clotk, gilt edges, (pub. at St. 6rf.)» reduced to it. 64.

PUBLISHED OS SOLD BY H. G. BOHN. 3l

REYNARD THE FOX, THE MOST DELECTABLE HISTORY OF. Square 12mo,
:.s by EvERD^GEN.extra gilt cloth, (pub. at6s.),4s.; or, with the plates co-
loured, extra cloth, gilt edges, (pub. at as.), Cs.

SPENSER'S FAERIE QUEEN (TALES FROM), Square IGmo, plates, extra cloth,
(pub. at So* 6d.), 2s. 6d.j or, coloured plates, extra cloth, gilt edges, (pub.at 4s. Gd.), 3s. 6d.

STRICKLAND'S (MISS JANE) EDWARD EVELYN. A Tale of the Rebellion of 1715 ;
to whuh is added, "The Peasant's Tale," by JEFFERYS TAYLOR, fcap. 8vo, 2 flue Plates
(pub. at is.}, cloth gilt, 2s. 6d. 18*9

TALES OF THE GENII; or the delightful Lessons of Horam, the Son of Asmar, by
SIR CHAKI.ES MORKEI.L. New Edition, coilaed and edited by Philojuvenis, post bvo. with
uumeious woodcuts and b steel enyravin<;s in the manner of Stothard, cloth extra just ready, 5s.

TOM KIN'S BEAUTIES OF ENGLISH POETRY, selected for the use of Youth, and
inculcate the Practice of Virtue. Twentieth Edition, with considerable additions,
royal lomo, very elegantly printed, with a beautiful I-'rouispiece after HARVEY, elegant, gilt
edges, 3*. Cd.

SKETCHES FROM FLEMISH LIFE, by HEKDKICIC COXSCIKXCE, square 12mo,
ea (pub. u.t Os.),3«. od.

ic anfc Jftustcal

I HE MUSICAL LIBRARY. A Selection of the best Vocal and Instrumental Music,
both English and Foreign. Edited by W. AYRTOST, Esq., of the Opera House. 8 vols. folio,
comprehending more than 400 pieces of Music, beautilully printed with metallic types (pub
at 4t. 43.), sewed, li. Us. 6d.
The Vocal and Instrumental may be had separately, each in 4 vols. I6».

MUSICAL CABINET AND HARMONIST. A Collection of Classical and Popular
Vocal and Instrumental Music; comprising Selections trom the best productions of all the
Great Masters ; English, Scotch, and Irish Melodies ; wiih many of tUe National Airs of other
Countries, embracing Overtures, Marches, Rondos, Quadrilles, Waltzes, and Gallopades ;
also Madrigals, Duets, and Glees; the whole adapted either for the Voice, the Piano-forte, the
Harp or the Organ; with Pieces occasionally for the Flute and Guitar, under the superinten-
dence of an eminent Professor. 4 vols. small folio, comprehending more than 300 pieces of
Music, beautifully printed with metallic types (pub. at 21. 2s.), sewed, 16*.

The contents of the work are quite different from the Musical Library, and the intrinsic merit
of the selection is equal.

MUSICAL GEM; a Collection of 300 Modern Songs, Duets, Glees, &c. by the most
celebrated Composers of the present (*/iy, adapted for the Voice, Flute, or Violin (edited
by JOHN PARKY). 3 vols. in 1, 8vo, with a beautifully engraved Title, and a very richly illu-
minated Frontispiece (pub. at 11. Is.), cloth gilt, 10*. 6d. 1841
The above capital collection contains a great number of the best copyright pieces, including
some of the most popular songs of liraham, Bishop, &c. It forms a most attractive volume.

inne, Sburgerg, ^natomB,

3ATEMAN AND WILLAN'S DELINEATIONS OF CUTANEOUS DISEASES,

4to. containing 72 Plates, beautifully and very accurately eoloured under the superintendence
of an eminent Professional Gentleman (DR. CARSWELL ), (pub. at 12t. 12».), half bound mor.
Si. is. 1840

"Dr. B.i te man' s valuable work has done more to extend ihe knowledge of cutaneous diseases
than any other that has ever appeared." — Dr. A. T. Thompson.

3EHR'S HAND-BOOK OF ANATOMY, l»y BIRXETT (Demonstrator at Guy's Hospital),
thick 12mo, closely printed, cloth lettered (pub. at 10j. 6d.), 3s. 6d. IS-IO

SOSTOCK'S (DR.) SYSTEM OF PHYSIOLOGY, comprising a Complete View of
the present state of the Science. Fourth Edition, revised and corrected throughout, Sv
pages), (pub. at ll.), cloth, »r. isaa

BURN'S PRINCIPLES OF MIDWIFERY. Tenth and best Edition, thick 8yo, cloth

lettered, (pub. at 1G«.), 5t.

32 CATALOGUE OF NEW EGOKS.

CELSUS DE MEDICINA- Edited by E. MILLIGAN, M.D. cum Indice copioousimo cr.

edit. Targoe. Thick Svo, Frontispiece, (pub. at 16s.), cloth, 9«.
Tins is the very best edition of Celsus. It contains critical and medical notes, applicable to

the practice of this country ; a parallel Table of ancient an-,' modern M edical terms, synonymes,

weights, measures, &c. and. indeed, everything which can be useful to the Medical Student;

together with a singularly extensive Index.
ELLIOTSON'S (DR.) HUMAN PHYSIOLOGY, illustrated with numerous woodcuts,

fifth edition, thick bvo. cloth, (pub. at 21. 2s.), 10*. 6d.

LAWRENCE'S LECTURES ON COMPARATIVE ANATOMY, PHYSIOLOGY,

ZOOLOGY, AND THE NATURAL HISTO11Y OP MAN. New Edition, post Svo, \ulii a

Frontispiece of Portraits, engraved on Steel, and 12 Plates, cloth, 5*.
LAWRENCE (W.) ON THE DISEASES OF THE EYE. Third Edition, revised and

enlarged. Svo, (820 closely printed pages), (pub. at ll. 4s.), cloth, 10s. (>d.
LEY'S (DR.) ESSAY ON THE CROUP. 8vo, 5 Plates (pub. at 15s.), doth, 8*.6<Z. 18bt
NEW LONDON SURGICAL POCKET BOOK. Thick royal 18mo. (pub. at 12*.), half

bound, 5s. 1S11

PARIS' (DR.) TREATISE ON DIET AND THE DIGESTIVE FUNCTIONS,

Fifth Edition (pub. at 12s.), cloth, 5*.

PLUMBE'S PRACTICAL TREATISE ON THE DISEASES OF THE SKIN,

Fourth Edition, Plates, thick Svo (pub. at 11. if ), cloth, 6*. 6d.

SINCLAIR'S (SIR JOHN) CODE OF HEALTH AND LONGEVITY. Sixth Edition
complete in 1 thick vol. Svo, Portrait (pub. at 11.), cloth, 7*. 1844

SOUTH'S DESCRIPTION OF THE BONES; together with their several Connexions
with each other, and with the Muscles, specially adapted for Students in Anatomy, numerous
Woodcuts, third edition, 12rao, cloth lettered (pub. at 7*.), 3*. Cd. 1S37

STEPHENSON'S MEDICAL ZOOLOGY AND MINERALOGY; including also aa
Account of the Animal and Mineral Poisons. 45 coloured Plates, royal Svo, (pub. at 21. 2s.),
cloth, 11 1». 1838

WOODVILLE'S MEDICAL BOTANY. Third Edition, enlarged by SIR W. JACKSON
HOOKER. 5 vols. 4to, with 310 Plates, engraved by SOWERHY, most carefully coloured (pub.
at 101. 10s.), half-bound morocco, at. 5s. The Fifth, or Supplementary Volume, entirely by SlB.
W. J. HOOKER, to complete the old Editions. 4to, 36 coloured Plates (pub. at 21. 12t. 6d.),
boards, 11. 111. lid. 1S3J

.Platfjcmattcs.

BRADLEY'S GEOMETRY, PERSPECTIVE, AND PROJECTION, for the use of

Artists. 8 Plates and numerous Woodcuts (pub. at 7s.), cloth, 5j. ISld

EUCLID'S SIX ELEMENTARY BOOKS, by DR. LARDKKR, with an Explanatory
Commentary, Geometrical Exercises, and a Tre4tise on Solid Geometry. Svo, Ninth Edition,
cloth, Gs.

JAMIESON'S MECHANICS FOR PRACTICAL MEN; including Treatises on the

Composition and Resolution of Forces; the Centre oi Gravity; and the Mechanical Powers;

illustrated by Examples and Designs. Fourth Edition, greatly improved, Svo, (pub. at 15s.),

cloth, 7s. lid. ijjiJ

" A great mechanical treasure."— Dr. BirkbecL:

BOOKS PRINTED UNIFORM WITH THE STANDARD LIBRARY.
CHILLINGWORTH'S RELIGION OF PROTESTANTS. 500pp. 5s. 6d.

GARY'S TRANSLATION OF DANTE. (Upwards of 600 pages\ extra blue cloth
wiih a richly gilt ba;k, 7*. 6d 18l£

LAMARTINE'S THREE MONTHS IN POWER; a History of his Political Crtfeer.
Post Svo, sewed, 2s.

MACLISE'S COMPARATIVE OSTEOLOGY; demonstrating the Archetype Skeleton
of Vertehrated Animals. Folio, 54 plates, cloth, it. 5s.

STANDARD LIBRARY CYCLOPEDIA OF POLITICAL, CONSTITUTIONAL,

btatistical, and I-orensic Knowledge. .each.

The Compiler, Mn. GEUKGE LONG, is one of the most competent Scholars of the day.
MICHELETS HISTORY OF THE FRENCH REVOLUTION, translated bv C. COCKS,

2 vols. in 1, 4s.

STARLING'S (MISS) NOBLE DEEDS OF WOMAN, or Examples of Female Couraee
'1 Editioa> tnlarSea aiid Droved, with two very beautiful ft&

-D soss ST. MARTIN'S I.AXZ,

N'S ILLUSTRATED LI

YAT'S PRIVATEER'S-MAN ONE HUND

gt
1 66. NAVAL AND MILITARY HEROES OF GREAT B;

:;h C:

, G7. MARRYATS SETTLERS IN CANANDA. rith C:

t:

IAND-BOOK "OF MODERN G.

">L

€9- AN, ANiSH LEGENDS AND FAIRY TA'

•'"
..ii s:s.

BOHN'S CLASSICAL LIBRARY,

> -norys OF Tii ,' i LATIX CLASSICS.

•
.-i /i- 7o'. Gd.

I.HERODOTUS. , ,:XIIY CAUY, M.A.

2. & 3 THUCYD10ES. '

4. PLATO. Vol. I. By C'.uir. 'I'^ias,

5 LIVY'S HISTORY OF ROME to 8.

6. PLATO. LT1'^ l^'l'11'

7. LIVY'S HiSTORY OF ROME. Vol.11. !'•

8. SOPHOCLES.

9. /E.SCHYLUS, li
9 * -- A

10 ARISTOTLE'S RHETORIC AND POETIC. VT

II. LIVY'S HISTORY OF ROME.

12 Sc, 14. EURIPIDES

13. VIRGIL. •

15. HORACE

16. ARISTOTLE'S ETHICS

17. CICERO'S OFFICES.

18- PLATO. -istcs,

• ';-;ity]u«, and "'

'S HISTORY OF ROME- Vol. IV. (v
20- C/ESAR AND HIRTIUS '

21. HOSIER'S ILIA"

22. HOMER'S ODYSSEY, HVM.N "--ICE.

23. PLATO- Vol. IV. I', , The

24. 25, & 32. OVID- !>; H. T. ,

26- LUCRETIUS. ''

27- 30. 31, &. 3l. CICERO'S ORATIONS- By C. 1). Yoi Vo!s. ^

23- PINDAR- .".••c/u^.

29- PLATO

33 & 36- THE COMEDIES OF PLAUTUS- Vy H. T. Rn,

35. JUVENAL, PERSIUS, &.G. v\ith the Metrical

37. THE GREEK ANTHOLOGY- -'^Hy kv G- I'r-G>:s, A.M., \viiliMctri-

38. DEMOSTHENES. 'Die Olyulhiuc, Philippic, and other Tubiic Orations, with

. C. ilA.NX K . ti</.)

1 e

'6ut46o'GuuQuu(

BOHN'fc.

CLASSICAL LIBE

39. SALLUST, FLORUS, and VELLEIUS PATERCULUS, witli copious Notes, Bio- &

graphical Notices, and Index, by the Rev. J. S. WATSO.N, M.A.

40. LUCAN'S PHARSALIA, with copious Notes, by II. T. RILKY, IV A.

41 THEOCRITUS, BION, MOSCHUS and TYRT^tUS, by the llcv. J. BA

With the Metrical Versions of CHAPMAN.

42. CICEROS ACADEMICS, DE FINIBUS and TUSCULAN QUESTIONS, by

C. D. VONGK, B A. With Sketch of the Greek Philosophy.

43. ARISTOTLE'S POUTICS AND ECONOMICS, by E. WALFORD, M.A., with

Analyses, Life, Introduction, and Index.

44. JIOGENES LAERTIUS. LIVES AND OPINIONS OF THE ANCIENT PHi- £

LOSOPHERS, with Notes by C. 1). YONGK, B.A.

45. TERENCE and PH/&DRUS, by II. T. RILKY. To which is added SMART'S

Metrical Version of PJui'drus. /

f*J 47. ARISTOTLE'S ORGANON, or, Logical Treatises, and the Introduction €

.if Porphvry, wit!' -itrouuction and luu,-<., by the llev. (,.

1' OWKN, M.A. i! Vols., :ij. &J. per Vol.

48 & 49. ARISTOPHANES, with Notes and Extracts from the best Metrical Vers;
by W. J. llicKiE, in 2 Vols. Frontispiece.

50. CICERO ON THE NATURE OF THE GODS, DIVINATION, FATE, LAWS,
REPUBLIC, &,c, translated by C. ]). \

61. APULEIUS. [Tlie Golden Ass, Death ;-nd Itefence or Discourse *.

on Maizic]. To \Thicli is added a Metrical Version of Cupid and Psyche; an,'
Mrs. Tithe's Psyche. Frontispiece.

52. JUSTIN, CORNELIUS NZPOS «'i»l EUTROPIUS, with Notes and a G<.-
Index, by the llev. J. S. V. •

2 63 & 68. TACITUS. Vol. I. The Annals. Vol. II. The History, (Jermania, >.:

cola,

Wiiii Index.

64. PLATO. Vol \' !

on \

Timu'ns Loerus on the Soul of tlie World and Nature; the :

trine? by Alcinous a'nd Ai^

on I -ted by G. BUKGKS With

traes.

65, 66, 57. ATflEN/tUS. The Deipi

Ikted ''-. C. It. YI

i>y various Am -ueral Index. Com;:!

59. CATULLUS, TIBULLUS, and 1he VIGIL OF VENU"

tiou. To which are added Me: v Dy LAMB, G HA IN or.ii, and others.

60. PROPERTIU", ''i-'s. literally trans-

lated, and iiccompanied b;

added the by W. K. K.Y.:

61. 74, &. 82 THE GEOGRAPHY OF STRA3O- translated, with copious Notes, by
W. I''A!.CO.NKII, M.A., and H. C. HAMILTO.N, Esq. In 3 vols., aixl i

62. XENOPHON'S ANABASIS, i

and MEMORABILIA, or

C3

'Menu
Commentary by W. r. Aixsv-

CYROVJEIHA and Mi.. tlie Rev. II. DALE, and the Re?.

J.S.WATSON.

BOHN'S CLASSICAL LIBRARY.

11. PLINY'S NATURAL HISTORY, v, :

;., n., in., i .

THEMES ON THE CROWN, AND EMBASSY, by C. RA.NN KENNEDY.

~.^RY AND ORATORS, ' : S. WATSON, M.A.

:i of Cirero.

70. GREEK ROMANCES. He i
71 &. 76. QUiNTILIAN'S INSTITUTES OF ORATORY. By the Rev. .1. S. WATSOX,

ames.

73. HESiOO, C V-LIMACHUS. AND THEOGNIS, iu Prose, by BANKS, with the
Versions of ELTON, TYTI.K.R, ;uui FRKRE.

75. DICTIONARY OF LATIN QUOTATIONS with the Quantities marke

-. Mnxims, Mottoes, Law Terms and I'lirascs;
. IONS.

77. DEMOSTHENES AGAINST LEPTINES, MIDIAS, ANDROTION ANCv
iT'-'S. By CHARLES MANN KKNNKUY. '

79. XENOPHON'S MINOR WORKS; translated by the Rev. J. S. WATSON.

80. ARISTOTLE'S METAPHYSICS, nalvsis Ex*-

Rev. JOHN H. M^TAHON. M.A "

81. MAnTiAL'3 EPiGfi, aed; with Imiiatiuns in Verse. It 6<f.

BONUS ANTSQUARIAN LIBRARY.

'•rm with the STANUARU LIBRARY, price 5*.,

1. BEDE'S ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY, & THE ANGLO-SAXON CHRONICLE

TiRTHERN ANTIQUITIES. % HIMIOP I'KRCY. With Abstract

'!:ted by J. A. BI.ACKUKU..

ZSBURY'S CHRONICLE OF THE KINGS OF ENGLAND.
.D ENGLISH CHRONICLES: rh., Asscr's Lift- ,.' Alrn-.i ; the Chronidri

Minmioutli,

Y ENGLISH METRICAL ROMANCES. Revised by J. URCI-.AKD

I iece.

6- c • OF THE C. wi/es. -Geoffrey deVinsnuf.

7- E'' -LS IN PALESTINE. V :, of Tudela

lime.- Ifit/i Mop.
e> 1C -NO'S POPULAR ANTIQUITIES OF GREAT BRITAIN. Bv

9 & 11. ROGER OF WENDOVER'S FLOWERS OF HISTORY (formerly ascrihH

13. KEIGHTLEY'S FAIRY MYTHOLOGY. Knlar-ed. Fi; -UUIKSIMNK.

OMAS BROWNE'S WORKS. Edited by SIMON WjLKlw!

17. 13,*& 31 MATTHEW PARIS'S CHRONICLE, containins th« TI.v

MOVEBEN-S ANNALS OF ENGLISH HISTORY, from

':., 1J.A. In '-
21. HENRY OF (lUNTINGDON'S HISTORY OF THE ENGLISH, from the Roman

!. ; with I'm; Act* of King Stephen, &c.

T??-'^'- ^/fr^'^-Tt^'^t^^^'^

BOHN'S ANTIQUARIAN LIBRARY.

22. PAULI'S LIFE OF ALFRED THE GREAT- 1 ALFRED'S

ANGLO-SAXON VERSION OF OKOSIU?

24 & 25. MATTHEW OF WESTMINSTERS FLOWERS OF HISTC
.

A.D.

26. LEPSiUS'S LETTERS FROM EGYPT, ETHIOPIA, f.!"l the PENINSU'

SINAI. Kr
IluKriMi. "

27, 28, 30 & 36. ORDERICUS VITALIS. His E

by V.
29. INGULPH'S CHRONICLE OF THE ABBEY OF CROYLA

In.!-- B.A..

32. LAMB'S SPECIMENS OF ENGLISH DRAMATIC POETS

bull i ;

33. MARCO POLO'S TRAVE^

34. FLORENCE OF WORCESTER'S CHRONICLE, with the "

35. HAND-BOOK OF PROVERB5

> OF THE TOMBS

HIN..

37. CHRONICLES

38. A POLYGLOT OF FOREIGN PROVERBS; ?

DuUh,

BOHN'S HISTORICAL LIBRARY,

1, 2 & 3. JESSE'S MEMOIRS .OF THE COURT OF ENGLAND DURING THE

4. JESSE'S MEMOIRS OF THE PRETENDERS AND THEIR ADHERENTS.

.New >

6, 6, 7 &. 8. PEPY'S DIARY AND CORRESPONDENT

Illus;
9, 10, 11 & 12. EVELYN'S DIARY AND CORRESPONDENCE, wifli the I

cal '

LORD NUGENT'S MEMORIALS OF HAMFDEN, 12 portraits.

BOHN'S LIBRARY OF FRENCH MEMOIRS.

Unif riiiAKT, price 3s. fid. per Volume.

1&2. MEMOIRS OF PHILIP DECOMMINES,

ami i
To \vl.

2,4, 5,&6. MEMOIRS OF THE DUKE OF SULLY, Prime Minister to Henry the

•auction by SIE WALT::K SCOTT.
la i v Index. Portr-il.

> ' >/r$ iv£&5 ~>v; f v" v-

BOHNS BRITISH CLASSICS.

' the STANDARD LIBRARY, price <ume. £^'

\O 1, 3, 6, 8, 11, 14 & 20. GIBBON'S ROMAN EMPIRE; Complete and Unabridged, C&

will. .f Jv-r

.!cr, and other foreign scholars. Edited by Co

•rate Index.

>"{5 2, 4. 0. 16 24 & 25. ADDISON'S WORKS, with the Notes of BISHOP HURD, and £<

larcr- 'kited and edited by Henry G. Bohn. JFi<A Portrait and jj-:>

Engraving* on steel. Q-.

£% 7. DEFOE'S WORKS, Edited by SIR WAI.TIR SCOTT. Vol 1. roMtamina; the Life, e^-x

3 ':rucies of" Captain Singleton, and tlie Life of Colonel Jack. Oo

2'J

><5 9 DEFOE'S WORKS, Vol. 2. Containing Memoirs of a Cavalier, Adventures of C<<

Cronke, &c.

>3 10. PRIOR'S LIFE OF BURKE, (forming the 1st Volume of P.URKK'S WORKS), new Cfr

y the Author. 1'nrtrait.

\ 12. BURKE'S WORKS, Vol 1, containing his Vindication of Natural Society, Es^ay on f

*'•» mtiful, and various Political Miscellanies. <=-";/

5 13. DEFOE'S WORKS, Edited by SIR WALTER SCOTT. Vol.3. Containing the Life of ^

; the History of the Devil. •£/

^ 15. BURKE'S WORKS. Vol. 2, containing Essay on the French Revolution, PnHtical ^-^

•rs and Speeches. 5$-'.

K3 17. DEFOE'S WORKS, Vol. 4. Roxana, or the Fortunate Mistress; and Life and o>^

P'l3 Adventures of Mother Ross. C/..

v^ 18. BURKE'S WORKS, Vol. 3. Appeal from the New to the Old Whigs, &c., &c.

>so 19. BURKE'S WORKS, Vol. 4, containing his Report on the Affairs of India, and gx)

•.'3 ..'tings. €£•:

x2 21. DEFOE'S WORKS, Vol. 5^ containing' the History of the Great Plaijue of London, Si?'_

16G5; tiie Fire of London, 1CCC (by an anonymous writer); the Storm; and tha ^-';
True Born Englishman.

|1® 22 & 23. BURKE'S WORKS (in Siz Volumes). Vols. 5 & 8.

& 26; DEFOE'S WORKS, edited by Sw WALTER SCOTT. Vol.6. Containing Life and ©.';•
Adventures of Duncan Campbell; Voyage Round the World; and Tracts
to the Hanoverian Accession.

^ 27&2S. BURKE'S SPEECHES on the IMPEACHMENT of WARREN HASTINGS 5 g?>

with-; Index. 2 vols. (Also forming vols. 53.'-

7 and 8 of Jiurke'a Works, which they complete.)

BOHN'S ECCLESIASTICAL LIBRARY.

Uniform with the STAN»ARD LIBRARY, price 5t. yer Volume.

%* 1. EUSEBIUS' ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY, Translated from the Greek, with
' 2. SOCRATES' ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY, in continuation of EUSEBIUS, with

* 3. THEODORET AND EVAGRIUS. Ecclesiastical Histories, from A.T> 332 to
'• A.U. 427, and from A.U. 431 to A.D. 5-14. Translated from the Greek, with General

32 4 THE WORKS OF PHILO JUD/€US, translated from the Greek by C. D.

\OHGK, B.A. Vol. 1.

'rf 5. PHILO JUD/€US, Vol. 2. .

;-?? 6. SOZOMENS ECCLESIASTICAL HISTORY from A.TI. 824-440: and the Eccle-

i from the Greek, with a Memoir ol
the Author, by'E. WAi.roim, M.A.
' & 8. PHILO JUDAOS, Vols. 3 k 4, with general Index.

mwwv

BOHN'S SHILLING SEiiES,

Those marked * , being Double Volumes, <a~s .

1. £%"ERSON'S REPRESENTATIVE MEN.

2. iRVING'S LIFE OF MAHOMET*

3. THE GENUINE AUTOBIOGRAPHY OF BENJAMIN •

4. WILLIS'S PEOPLE I HAVE MET.*

5- IRVING'S SUCCESSORS OF MAHOMET.*

6. • LIFE OF GOLDSMITH.*

7 SKETCH-BOOK.*

Oi TALES OF A TRAVELLER.*

9. TOUR ON THE PRAIRIES.

10 8t 11. CONQUESTS OF GRANADA AND SPA: ,

12 £13. LIFE OF COLUMBUS. 2 Vols*

14. COMPANIONS OF COLUMBUS.*

15 £. 16. TAYLOR'S EL DORADO; or, Pictur. :.% 2 Vols

17. IRVING'S ADVENTURES OF CAPTAIN BONNEVILLE.

18. —

19. —

20. —

21. —

. LAMARTINE'S GENEVIEVE; or,

i.?..*

? MAYO'S BERBER; or, The Moun
» 27. WILLIS'S LIFE HERE AND TH

— KNICKERBOCKER.*
-TALES OF THE ALHAMBRA.*
-CONQUEST OF FLORIDA.*
- ABBOTSFORD AND NEWSTEAD.
-SALMAGUNDI.*
-BRACEBRIDGE HALL.*
ASTORIA (Portrait of the Author) 2Vols.ini 2s

The History of a Seivant Giii. Translated by

The Mountaineer of the Atlas. A Tale of Morocco.

27. WILLIS'S LIFE HERE AND THERE; or Sketches of Society and Adventure.*

28, GUIZOT'S LIFE OF MONK, with App endix and Portrait.*

3 29. THE CAPE AND THE KAFFIRS Hvc Years' Residence, with

is. By 11. \VAKD. p of the Seat of War.

ketches of Sceuer

TO. WILLIS'S HURRY-GRAPHS; or St

11. HAWTHORNE'S HOUSE OF THE
1 "> i r»Mnr»M AMn ITC: FMuionwQ- «-

SEVEN GABLES. ARo
./: 32. LONDON AND ITS ENVIRONS; wi mid Pescript .

. 2.?.

>.. LAMARTINE'S STONEMASON OF SAINT POINT.*
.-» 34. GUIZOT'S MONK'S CONTEMPORARIES. A Series of Biographic Studies on

ion. Portrait of Edward Lord Clarendon.
:• HAWTHORNE'S TWICE-TOLD TALES.
''••'^4 3(3. — TUe same, Second Series.

37.

— ov^/-.r* uc. i i

~| 39. EMERSON'S ORATION!
:-. UNCLE TOM'S CABIN

by the il::v. J. SHKKJIA*

SNOW IW1AGE, and other Tales.
SCARLET LETTER,
ORATIONS AND LECTURES.

CABIN; or, Life among the Lowly, with lutroduct ory Remarks

1. THE WHITE SLAVE. A new Picture of American Slave Life.
"' 42. DAYS OF BATTLE; or, Qua! re Bras and n WOMAN,

is in June, 1 815 (author of Koine in the K
43. CERVfNUS' INTRODUCTION TO THE HISTORY OF THE NINETEENTH

'

44. CARPENTER'S (DR W B.) .PHYSIOLOGY OF TEMPERANCE AND TOTAL

- Alcoholic Liquors on the Human System (or on fine ,
• .v. Qd.)

k^^&'^M^

_

AYHE1!

63
64
65

iippTAfvlERON Tiili-s in the manner
a. fiiu Portrait.

il LIBRARY,

BOHHȣ

VXD A RD LIBRARY, price 5*. j«r f'ol«m«.

TENNEWANN'S MANUAL of the HISTORY of PHILOSOPHY, revised aud con-
HERODOTUS, *Ith synchronisticnl Table of

Cy> ^A-rii ^leutB.

-iftwcON W ^ NOTES TO HERODOTUS,
[•^r ^JcE-OMN^RENCE, a popular MV

=; CRITIQUE OF PURE REASON, translnt- ->"N. g,

YSIS AND SUMMARY OF THUCYDIDES, by T. WUKBUEE. Kew Edition, g£

rf Obsolete and g^

f & 8, WRJGHTS PROVINCIAL DICTIONARY _ ^ 1(J g)

...3 VVaiGHT, Esq. (1

VNDETmBLIOG^PHER'S MANUAL OF ENGLISH g;

ara |

I